FCC ID: 2AHPN-BE2849 Automotive Infotainment Unit with Bluetooth/WLAN

 

Whether its providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your vehicles heritage, knowing what steps to take following an accident or scheduling your next appointment, we know youll find the app an important extension of your Chrysler brand vehicle. Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go directly to the App Store or Google Play Store and enter the search keyword Chrysler (U.S. residents only). U. S. Canada DOWNLOAD A FREE ELECTRONIC COPY OF THE MOST UP-TO-DATE OWNERS MANUAL, UCONNECT AND WARRANTY BOOKLETS mopar.com/om owners.mopar.ca 2019 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Chrysler is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC or FCA Canada Inc., used under license. App Store is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google. 2 0 _ R U _ O M _ E N _ U S _ N S e c o n d E d i t i o n 2 0 2 0 P A C I F I C A A N D V O Y A G E R 2 0 2 0 O W N E R S M A N U A L Pacifica and Voyager This Owners Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a The drivers primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, resulting in an accident and personal description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured. With respect to any vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore. If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet by calling 1-800-247-9753 (U.S.) or 1-800-387-1143 (Canada) or by contacting your dealer. This Owners Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owners Manual, Navigation/Uconnect manuals and Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the website on the back cover. U.S. residents can purchase replacement kits by visiting www.techauthority.com and Canadian residents can purchase replacement kits by calling 1-800-387-1143. WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle. injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take their attention off the road. Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones, computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices, by the driver while the vehicle is moving is dangerous and could lead to a serious accident. Texting while driving is also dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you find yourself unable to devote your full attention to vehicle operation, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. Some states or provinces prohibit the use of cellular telephones or texting while driving. It is always the drivers responsibility to comply with all local laws. This Owners Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new Chrysler brand vehicle and to provide a convenient reference source for common questions. local Chrysler brand dealer. Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information, visit www.mopar.com (U.S.), www.mopar.ca (Canada) or your Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, dont drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a friend or use public transportation. DRIVING AND ALCOHOL Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking. Never drink and then drive. WARNING!

This Owners Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a The drivers primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, resulting in an accident and personal description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured. With respect to any vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore. If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet by calling 1-800-247-9753 (U.S.) or 1-800-387-1143 (Canada) or by contacting your dealer. This Owners Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owners Manual, Navigation/Uconnect manuals and Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the website on the back cover. U.S. residents can purchase replacement kits by visiting www.techauthority.com and Canadian residents can purchase replacement kits by calling 1-800-387-1143. WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle. injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take their attention off the road. Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones, computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices, by the driver while the vehicle is moving is dangerous and could lead to a serious accident. Texting while driving is also dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you find yourself unable to devote your full attention to vehicle operation, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. Some states or provinces prohibit the use of cellular telephones or texting while driving. It is always the drivers responsibility to comply with all local laws. This Owners Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new Chrysler brand vehicle and to provide a convenient reference source for common questions. local Chrysler brand dealer. Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information, visit www.mopar.com (U.S.), www.mopar.ca (Canada) or your Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, dont drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a friend or use public transportation. DRIVING AND ALCOHOL Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking. Never drink and then drive. WARNING!

20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 1 TABLE OF CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 INTRODUCTION .............................................................................................................................9 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE ...................................................................................11 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ...................................................... 126 SAFETY ......................................................................................................................................... 152 STARTING AND OPERATING ............................................................................................... 216 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY ....................................................................................................296 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE ..................................................................................... 340 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................................................ 383 MULTIMEDIA ............................................................................................................................... 391 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE .....................................................................................................493 INDEX .............................................................................................................................................497 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 2 2 INTRODUCTION HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL.................................. 9 Essential Information .................................... 9 Symbols .......................................................... 9 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS ...............................10 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS.........10 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE VEHICLE USER GUIDE IF EQUIPPED ...............11 KEYS ......................................................................12 Key Fob......................................................... 12 IGNITION SWITCH .................................................16 Keyless Enter-N-Go Ignition..................... 16 REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED .........................................................18 How To Use Remote Start ........................... 18 Remote Start Cancel Message If Equipped ................................................... 19 To Enter Remote Start Mode ...................... 19 To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The Vehicle ..................................... 19 To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle................................................... 20 Remote Start Comfort Systems If Equipped ................................................... 20 General Information .................................... 20 SENTRY KEY ..........................................................20 Key Programming ....................................... 21 Replacement Keys....................................... 21 General Information .................................... 21 VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM IF EQUIPPED..... 22 To Arm The System ..................................... 22 To Disarm The System ................................ 22 Rearming Of The System............................. 23 DOORS................................................................... 23 Manual Lock ................................................ 23 Central Lock/Unlock If Equipped............ 24 Unlock Doors Automatically On Exit If Equipped ................................................... 25 Keyless Enter-N-Go Passive Entry........... 25 Manual Sliding Side Door............................ 28 Power Sliding Side Door If Equipped ...... 28 Hands-Free Sliding Doors If Equipped.... 29 Child Locks................................................... 30 SEATS ................................................................... 31 Manual Adjustment (Front Seats) If Equipped ................................................... 31 Manual Adjustment (Rear Seats) ............... 33 Power Adjustment (Front Seats) If Equipped ................................................... 45 Power Adjustment (Rear Seats) If Equipped .................................................. 46 Driver Memory Seat If Equipped............. 48 Heated Seats ............................................... 50 Ventilated Seats If Equipped................... 51 Adjustable Armrest (Front Seats) If Equipped ................................................... 52 Plastic Grocery Bag Retainer Hooks........... 52 HEAD RESTRAINTS ..............................................52 Head Restraints Front Seats................... 53 Head Restraints Second Row Quad Seats ............................................................ 54 Head Restraints Second Row Bench...... 54 Head Restraints Third Row ..................... 55 STEERING WHEEL ...............................................56 Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column .............. 56 Heated Steering Wheel If Equipped ....... 56 MIRRORS...............................................................57 Inside Day/Night Mirror If Equipped....... 57 Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped .................................................. 57 Outside Mirrors ........................................... 57 Driver's Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped .................................... 57 Conversation Mirror..................................... 58 Power Mirrors If Equipped ...................... 58 Outside Mirrors Folding Feature................. 58 Heated Mirrors If Equipped..................... 58 Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse (Available With Memory Seat Only) If Equipped .............. 59 Power Folding Mirrors If Equipped ......... 59 Illuminated Vanity Mirrors If Equipped .................................................. 60 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 3 EXTERIOR LIGHTS.................................................60 Multifunction Lever...................................... 60 Headlight Switch .......................................... 60 Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) If Equipped ................................................... 61 High/Low Beam Switch ............................... 61 Automatic High Beam If Equipped ......... 61 Flash-To-Pass ............................................... 61 Automatic Headlights If Equipped .......... 62 Headlights On With Wipers If Equipped ................................................... 62 Headlight Delay If Equipped .................... 62 Lights-On Reminder ..................................... 62 Front Fog Lights If Equipped .................. 62 Turn Signals ................................................. 63 Lane Change Assist If Equipped ............. 63 Battery Protection ....................................... 63 INTERIOR LIGHTS ................................................63 Courtesy/Interior Lighting .......................... 63 WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHERS ..............65 Windshield Wiper Operation ....................... 65 Rain Sensing Wipers If Equipped............ 66 Rear Wiper And Washer .............................. 67 CLIMATE CONTROLS ...........................................68 Manual Climate Controls Overview ............ 68 Automatic Climate Control Overview .......... 80 Climate Control Functions........................... 91 Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) If Equipped .................................................. 92 Operating Tips ............................................. 92 WINDOWS ............................................................. 94 Power Windows............................................ 94 PANORAMIC SUNROOF IF EQUIPPED ........... 96 Opening Sunroof.......................................... 96 Closing Sunroof............................................ 97 Wind Buffeting ............................................. 97 Power Sunshade If Equipped.................. 97 Pinch Protect Feature.................................. 98 Sunroof Maintenance.................................. 98 Ignition Off Operation .................................. 98 HOOD ..................................................................... 98 Opening ........................................................ 98 Closing.......................................................... 99 LIFTGATE ............................................................... 99 Opening ........................................................ 99 Closing........................................................100 Power Liftgate If Equipped ....................100 Hands-Free Liftgate If Equipped ...........101 Cargo Area Features..................................103 GARAGE DOOR OPENER IF EQUIPPED ......109 Before You Begin Programming HomeLink ................................................109 Canadian/Gate Operator Programming..............................................111 Using HomeLink......................................112 Security.......................................................112 Troubleshooting Tips .................................112 General Information ..................................113 3 INTERNAL EQUIPMENT ..................................... 114 Storage....................................................... 114 Sun Screens If Equipped....................... 118 Power Outlets ............................................ 119 Power Inverter If Equipped ...................120 Cigar Lighter If Equipped ...................... 121 Smoker's Package Kit If Equipped .......121 Overhead Sunglass Storage .....................121 STOW N PLACE ROOF RACK IF EQUIPPED ...................................................... 122 Deploying The Crossbars ..........................122 Stowing The Crossbars.............................. 123 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL INSTRUMENT CLUSTER..................................... 126 Instrument Cluster Descriptions............... 127 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY ................... 128 Instrument Cluster Display Location And Controls...............................................129 Oil Life Reset..............................................130 Fuel And Oil Refresh Mode ....................... 131 KeySense Cluster Messages If Equipped................................................. 132 Instrument Cluster Display Menu Items ..........................................................133 Battery Saver On/Battery Saver Mode Message Electrical Load Reduction Actions If Equipped ............................... 138 Instrument Cluster Display Programmable Features Screen Setup.... 139 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 4 4 TRIP COMPUTER ............................................... 140 WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES ............... 140 Red Warning Lights....................................141 Yellow Warning Lights ...............................144 Yellow Indicator Lights...............................147 Green Indicator Lights ...............................147 Blue Indicator Lights..................................149 White Indicator Lights................................149 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM OBD II .... 150 Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) Cybersecurity..............................................150 EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS ........................................................ 151 SAFETY SAFETY FEATURES ............................................ 152 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .................152 Electronic Brake Control (EBC) System ...153 AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS ........................ 159 Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) If Equipped .................................................159 Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With Mitigation If Equipped............................164 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)...........................................167 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS ..................171 Occupant Restraint Systems Features ....171 Important Safety Precautions...................171 Seat Belt Systems .....................................172 Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS)............................................182 Child Restraints .........................................196 Transporting Pets .....................................213 SAFETY TIPS ......................................................213 Transporting Passengers ..........................213 Exhaust Gas ...............................................213 Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle .....................................214 Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle ........................215 STARTING AND OPERATING STARTING THE ENGINE .....................................216 Normal Starting .........................................216 Cold Weather Operation

(Below 22F Or 30C) .........................220 After Starting Warming Up The Engine.........................................................220 If Engine Fails To Start .............................220 To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE START/STOP Button ....................221 ENGINE BLOCK HEATER IF EQUIPPED .......221 ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS ...... 222 PARK BRAKE...................................................... 222 Electric Park Brake (EPB) .........................222 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION ........................... 225 Ignition Park Interlock ............................... 226 Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System........................................................ 226 Nine-Speed Automatic Transmission ......226 Gear Ranges ..............................................227 ACTIVE NOISE CANCELLATION ........................ 230 POWER STEERING............................................. 231 STOP/START SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED ........... 231 Auto Stop/Start.......................................... 231 Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not Autostop ..............................................232 To Start The Engine While In Auto Stop/Start .................................................. 233 To Manually Turn Off The Stop/Start System........................................................ 233 To Manually Turn On The Stop/Start System........................................................ 234 System Malfunction................................... 234 SPEED CONTROL IF EQUIPPED.................... 234 To Activate.................................................. 235 To Set A Desired Speed ............................ 235 To Vary The Speed Setting ........................ 235 To Accelerate For Passing.........................236 To Resume Speed .................................... 236 To Deactivate ............................................ 236 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 5 ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) IF EQUIPPED ...................................................... 236 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation....................................................238 Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) ..............................................238 To Activate/Deactivate ..............................238 To Set A Desired ACC Speed .....................239 To Cancel....................................................239 To Turn Off..................................................239 To Resume .................................................239 To Vary The Speed Setting ........................240 Setting The Following Distance In ACC.....241 Overtake Aid...............................................243 ACC Operation At Stop...............................243 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu ........243 Display Warnings And Maintenance.........244 Precautions While Driving With ACC.........245 General Information ..................................247 Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode...........................................................248 PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST IF EQUIPPED ...................................................... 250 ParkSense Sensors ...................................251 ParkSense Visual Alert ..............................251 ParkSense Display.....................................251 Enabling And Disabling ParkSense ..........254 Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist System........................................................254 Cleaning The ParkSense System..............254 ParkSense System Usage Precautions ....254 PARKSENSE FRONT AND REAR PARK ASSIST IF EQUIPPED .....................................256 ParkSense Sensors ...................................257 ParkSense Visual Alert ..............................257 ParkSense Display.....................................257 Enabling And Disabling ParkSense ..........262 Service The ParkSense Park Assist System.... 262 Cleaning The ParkSense System..............262 ParkSense System Usage Precautions ....263 PARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED .......................................................264 Enabling And Disabling The ParkSense Active Park Assist System .........................264 Parallel Parking Space Assistance Operation/Display......................................265 Perpendicular Parking Space Assistance Operation/Display......................................270 LANESENSE IF EQUIPPED ............................275 LaneSense Operation................................275 Turning LaneSense On Or Off ...................275 LaneSense Warning Message ..................276 Changing LaneSense Status.....................277 PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA .............278 SURROUND VIEW CAMERA SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED ......................................................279 REFUELING THE VEHICLE..................................282 VEHICLE LOADING ............................................283 Certification Label .....................................283 5 TRAILER TOWING .............................................. 284 Common Towing Definitions .....................284 Trailer Hitch Classification ........................ 286 Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings) ........................................286 Vehicle Loading Chart ............................... 287 Trailer And Tongue Weight ....................... 289 Towing Requirements .............................. 289 Towing Tips ...............................................292 RECREATIONAL TOWING

(BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.) ......................... 293 Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle........................................................ 293 Recreational Towing All Models............293 DRIVING TIPS ..................................................... 294 Driving On Slippery Surfaces ....................294 Driving Through Water ............................. 294 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS ....................... 296 ASSIST AND SOS MIRROR IF EQUIPPED....................................................... 296 General Information ..................................300 BULB REPLACEMENT ........................................ 300 Replacement Bulbs ..................................300 Replacing Exterior Bulbs ...........................302 FUSES.................................................................. 306 General Information ..................................306 Fuse Location ............................................ 307 Underhood Fuses ......................................307 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 6 6 JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING IF EQUIPPED ...................................................... 314 Jack And Spare Tire Location....................314 Equipment Removal .................................314 Preparations For Jacking ..........................315 Jacking Instructions...................................316 Road Tire Installation ................................319 Portable Air Compressor If Equipped .................................................321 Tire Service Kit For Inflating Tire If Equipped .................................................322 Return Inflatable Spare Tire......................324 TIRE SERVICE KIT IF EQUIPPED ................... 324 JUMP STARTING................................................. 331 Preparations For Jump Start .....................331 Jump Starting Procedure...........................332 REFUELING IN EMERGENCY ............................ 333 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS.......................... 333 MANUAL PARK RELEASE ................................ 334 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE ............................ 335 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE........................ 336 ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM (EARS) ................................................. 339 EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)....................... 339 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE SCHEDULED SERVICING ..................................340 Maintenance Plan .....................................341 Heavy Duty Use Of The Vehicle.................343 ENGINE COMPARTMENT...................................344 3.6L Engine ................................................344 Checking Oil Level .....................................345 Adding Washer Fluid .................................345 Maintenance-Free Battery .......................346 Pressure Washing......................................346 DEALER SERVICE ..............................................346 Engine Oil ..................................................347 Engine Oil Filter..........................................348 Engine Air Cleaner Filter ...........................348 Accessory Drive Belt Inspection ...............348 Air Conditioner Maintenance ....................349 Body Lubrication ........................................351 Windshield Wiper Blades ..........................351 Exhaust System ........................................355 Cooling System ..........................................356 Brake System ............................................359 Automatic Transmission ...........................360 RAISING THE VEHICLE ...................................... 361 TIRES .................................................................. 361 Tire Safety Information ............................. 361 Tires General Information ....................369 Tire Types ...................................................373 Spare Tires If Equipped ........................ 374 Wheel And Wheel Trim Care ....................376 Tire Chains (Traction Devices) ................. 377 Tire Rotation Recommendations..............377 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES .................. 378 Treadwear .................................................. 378 Traction Grades ......................................... 378 Temperature Grades .................................379 STORING THE VEHICLE ..................................... 379 BODYWORK........................................................ 380 Protection From Atmospheric Agents.......380 Body And Underbody Maintenance.......... 380 Preserving The Bodywork..........................380 INTERIORS ......................................................... 381 Seats And Fabric Parts.............................. 381 Plastic And Coated Parts...........................382 Leather Parts .............................................382 Glass Surfaces .......................................... 382 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 7 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS IDENTIFICATION DATA ...................................... 383 Vehicle Identification Number ..................383 BRAKE SYSTEM ................................................. 383 WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS................................................ 383 Torque Specifications................................383 FUEL REQUIREMENTS ...................................... 384 3.6L Engine ...............................................384 Reformulated Gasoline ............................384 Materials Added To Fuel ...........................385 Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends......................385 Do Not Use E-85 In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles ......................................................385 CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications .............................................386 MMT In Gasoline........................................386 Fuel System Cautions................................386 Carbon Monoxide Warnings......................386 FLUID CAPACITIES ............................................387 FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS ................................388 Engine.........................................................388 Chassis ......................................................390 MULTIMEDIA UCONNECT SYSTEMS .......................................391 CYBERSECURITY ...............................................391 UCONNECT SETTINGS........................................392 Customer Programmable Features Uconnect 4 Settings .................................392 Customer Programmable Features Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Settings ................410 SAFETY AND GENERAL INFORMATION...........432 Safety Guidelines.......................................432 UCONNECT 4 WITH 7-INCH DISPLAY ..............433 Introduction................................................433 Radio Mode................................................434 Media Mode ...............................................441 Phone Mode...............................................449 7 STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS IF EQUIPPED ...................................................... 461 Radio Operation......................................... 461 Media Mode...............................................461 AUX/USB/MP3 CONTROL ............................... 461 UCONNECT THEATER IF EQUIPPED ............. 462 Uconnect Theater Overview...................... 462 Getting Started .......................................... 463 Accessing The System From The Uconnect System........................................................ 463 Uconnect Theater Controls ....................... 463 Accessing The System From The Uconnect Theater Rear Screens ............................... 464 Pairing The Remote ................................... 464 Unpairing The Remote .............................. 465 Media Sources........................................... 465 Uconnect Theater Remote Control........... 466 Uconnect Theater Home Screen And Controls ...................................................... 467 General Information ..................................468 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 8 8 Play A DVD/Blu-ray Or USB Media File From Uconnect System ......................468 Disc Menu ..................................................470 Blu-ray Controls Disc Specific Functions....................................................470 Uconnect Theater Apps .............................470 Using The Rear Video USB Port ................472 Play Video Games ......................................472 Headphones Operation .............................473 Display Settings .........................................474 Listening To Audio With The Screen Closed.........................................................475 Rear Climate Controls ...............................475 Accessibility If Equipped ........................477 Wireless Streaming If Equipped............477 BD And DVD Region Codes .......................479 Product Agreement....................................480 General Information ..................................483 FCC/IC Regulatory Notices........................483 RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES................................................485 Regulatory And Safety Information...........485 UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS .........................................................486 Introducing Uconnect ................................486 Get Started.................................................487 Basic Voice Commands.............................487 Radio ..........................................................488 Media..........................................................488 Phone .........................................................488 Voice Text Reply.........................................489 Climate .......................................................489 Navigation (4C NAV) ..................................490 Siri Eyes Free If Equipped .................490 Using Do Not Disturb ................................490 Android Auto If Equipped ...................490 Apple CarPlay If Equipped .................491 General Information ..................................492 Additional Information...............................492 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE .......................................... 493 Prepare For The Appointment .................. 493 Prepare A List.............................................493 Be Reasonable With Requests ................. 493 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE ............................... 493 FCA US LLC Customer Center ...................494 FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center ........... 494 In Mexico Contact ......................................494 Puerto Rico And US Virgin Islands............494 Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) .....................494 Service Contract .......................................494 WARRANTY INFORMATION.............................. 495 MOPAR PARTS................................................... 495 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS ........................ 495 In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C. ......................................495 In Canada...................................................495 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS ........................ 496 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 9 Dear Customer, Congratulations on selecting your new vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision work-

manship, distinctive styling, and high quality. This Owner's Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle. It is supple-

mented by Warranty Information, and customer-oriented documents. Within this infor-

mation, you will find a description of the services that FCA US LLC offers to its customers, the vehicle's warranty coverage, and the details of the terms and conditions for maintaining its validity. Please take the time to read all of these publications carefully before driving your vehicle for the first time. Following the instructions, recommendations, tips, and important warnings in this manual will help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle. INTRODUCTION This Owner's Manual describes all versions of this vehicle. Options and equipment dedicated to specific markets or versions are not expressly indicated in the text. Therefore, you should only consider the information which is related to the trim level, engine, and version that you have purchased. Any content introduced throughout the Owner's Information, that may or may not be applicable to your vehicle, will be identified with the wording If Equipped. All data contained in this publication are intended to help you use your vehicle in the best possible way. FCA US LLC aims at a constant improvement of the vehicles produced. For this reason, it reserves the right to make changes to the model described for technical and/or commercial reasons. For further information, contact an authorized dealer. When it comes to service, remember that autho-

rized dealers know your vehicle best, have factory-trained technicians and genuine MOPAR parts, and care about your satisfaction. 9 1 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Essential Information Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section contains the information you desire. Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and illustrations may differ from your vehicle's equipment. The detailed Index at the back of this Owner's Manual contains a complete listing of all subjects. Symbols Some vehicle components have colored labels whose symbols indicate precautions to be observed when using this component. Refer to Warning Lights and Messages in Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel for further infor-

mation on the symbols used in your vehicle. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 10 10 INTRODUCTION WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS This Owners Manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures that could result in a collision, bodily injury and/or death. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you do not read this entire Owners Manual, you may miss important information. Observe all Warn-

ings and Cautions. VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS WARNING!

Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or death. WARNING!

WARNING!

To prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH when using Track-Use parts and equipment:

To prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:

ALWAYS remove any Track-Use equip-

NEVER use any Track-Use equipment on ment before driving on public roads. public roads. FCA US LLC does not autho-

rize the use of Track-Use equipment on public roads. The intended use of Track-Use parts is for race vehicles on race tracks. To help ensure the safety of the race driver, engi-

neers should supervise the installation of Track-Use parts. FCA US LLC does not authorize the installation or use of any part noted as Track-Use on any new vehicle prior to its first retail sale. ALWAYS properly use your three-point seat belts when driving on public roads. In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up. You can strike the inte-

rior of your vehicle or other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the vehicle. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 11 VEHICLE USER GUIDE IF EQUIPPED Access your Owners Information right through your Uconnect 4C or 4C NAV touchscreen system (if equipped). To access the Vehicle User Guide on your Uconnect Touchscreen: Press the Uconnect Apps button. From there, press the Vehicle User Guide icon on your touchscreen. No Uconnect registration is required. Uconnect 4C NAV With 8.4inch Display Vehicle User Guide Touchscreen Icon NOTE:

Vehicle User Guide features are not available while the vehicle is moving. If you try to access GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 11 2 while the vehicle is in motion, the system will display: Feature not available while the vehicle is in motion. radio Features/Benefits Pre-installed on your Uconnect touchscreen Pre-Installed Features Your User Guide Updated in real-time Touchscreen convenience Enhanced search and browsing capability Robust NAV application (if equipped) Add selected topics to a fast-access Favor-

Maintenance schedules and information ites category Comprehensive icon and symbol glossary Icon and symbol glossary Available when and where you need it Warranty information Customizable interface Crucial driver information and assistance:

Multilingual Once you launch your Vehicle User Guide, you will be able to explore your warranty information and radio manual when and where you need them. Your Uconnect system displays the Vehicle User Guide on your touchscreen radio to assist in better understanding your vehicle. Theres no app to download, no phone to connect and no external device needed for play-

back. Plus, its updated throughout the year, in real-time, so it never goes out of date. Operating Instructions Warranty Information Fluid Level Standards Maintenance Schedules Emergency Procedures 911 Contact and More TIP:

When viewing a topic, tap the star icon to add it to your Favorites, for easy access in the future. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 12 12 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE KEYS Key Fob Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. The ignition system consists of a key fob with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) and a START/STOP push button ignition system. The RKE system uses a receiver module in the vehicle that wire-

lessly links with the key fob. NOTE:

The key fob may not be found if it is located next to a mobile phone, laptop or other electronic device; these devices may block the key fobs wireless signal. This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors and liftgate, activate the Panic Alarm, optional power liftgate, left power sliding door, and right power sliding door from distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m) using a key fob. When any button on the key fob is pushed, or when any signal is being transferred between the key fob and the vehicle, an LED light on the key fob will flash as an indicator. The key fob does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system. NOTE:

The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle should the battery in the vehicle or the key fob become depleted. The emergency key is also for locking/unlocking the glove compart-

ment. You can keep the emergency key with you when valet parking. NOTE:

In case the ignition switch does not change with the push of a button, the key fob may have a low or fully depleted battery. A low key fob battery can be verified by referring to the instrument cluster, which will display directions to follow. A low key fob battery condition may be indi-

cated by a message in the instrument cluster display, or by the LED light on the key fob. If the LED key fob light no longer illuminates from key fob button pushes, then the key fob battery requires replacement. The key fob LED light brightness is designed for indoor light viewing, so the LED light may not be visible in direct sunlight. In a situation where the battery is low or fully depleted, a back up method can be used to operate the ignition switch. Put the nose side of the key fob (side opposite of the Emergency Key) against the START/STOP ignition button and push to operate the ignition switch. Key Fob 1 LED Light 2 Lock 3 Remote Start 4 Right Power Sliding Side Door 5 PANIC Alarm 6 Emergency Key 7 Left Power Sliding Side Door 8 Liftgate 9 Unlock 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 13 To Unlock The Doors NOTE:

Uconnect Settings lets you program the system to unlock either the driver's side doors on the first push (default) or unlock all doors on the first push of the unlock button on the key fob. To change the default setting, refer to Uconnect Settings in Multimedia for further information. 1st Push Of Key Fob Unlocks Push and release the unlock button on the key fob once to unlock the driver front door and sliding door or twice within five seconds to unlock all doors and liftgate. The hazard lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal. The illuminated entry system will be activated. 2nd Push Of Key Fob Unlocks Push and release the unlock button on the key fob twice within five seconds to unlock all doors and liftgate. The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal. The illuminated entry system will be activated. This feature lets you program the system to unlock either the driver's side doors or all doors on the first push of the unlock button on the key fob. To change the current setting, refer to Uconnect Settings in Multimedia for further information. NOTE:

Your vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry;

refer to Keyless Enter-N-Go Passive Entry in this chapter for further information. Emergency Key Feature The key fob also contains an emergency key. The emergency key is stored in the bottom of the key fob. Mechanical Latch To Release Emergency Key The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle should the battery in the vehicle or the key become depleted. The emergency key is also for locking/unlocking the glove compart-

ment. You can keep the emergency key with you when valet parking. 2 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 13 To remove the emergency key, press the mechanical button on the side of the key fob with your thumb and pull the emergency key out with your other hand while pushing the mechan-

ical button. To Lock The Doors And Liftgate Push and release the lock button on the key fob to lock all doors and liftgate. The hazard lights will flash once and the horn will chirp once to acknowledge the signal. Settings in radio can change to lights only, chirp only, or both. Refer to Keyless Enter-N-Go Passive Entry in this chapter for further information. Key Fob With Remote Control And Integrated Vehicle Key If one or more doors are open or the liftgate is open, the doors can be locked. This is signaled by a quick flash of the turn signals. Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go Passive Entry If one or more doors are open, or the liftgate is open, the doors can be locked. The doors will unlock again only if the key is inside the passenger compartment. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 14 14 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Key Fob Battery Replacement The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032 battery. NOTE:

Batteries contain harmful chemicals. Dispose old batteries by placing them in correct containers according to the law or by taking them to a dealership, where they will be handled appropriately. Perchlorate Material special handling may apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/

hazardouswaste/perchlorate for further information. Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back housing or the printed circuit board. 2. 1. Remove the emergency key by pushing the mechanical release button on the side of the key fob with your thumb and then pull the key out with your other hand. Emergency Key Removal Insert a coin, a flat blade screw driver, or the tip of your emergency key into the now exposed slot and carefully pry on both sides to disengage the snaps. Gently remove the back cover from the fob, being careful not to damage any of the snaps. Separating The Key Fob Case 3. Remove the battery by sliding the battery rearward in its pocket until the battery lifts up. Remove the depleted battery from the battery pocket and dispose appropriately. 4. Fit a new CR2032 battery ensuring that the positive (+) side is facing upwards. Push the battery into the pocket until it is firmly seated in place and secured under both tabs. 5. Align the back cover into its original position and snap it back in place by pushing it against the fob until it is seated all around. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 15 Programming Additional Key Fobs Programming the key fob may be performed by an authorized dealer. programming a blank key fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank key fob is one that has never been programmed. NOTE:

Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be repurposed and reprogrammed to another vehicle. Request For Additional Remote Controls NOTE:

Only key fobs that are programmed to the vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle. Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle. CAUTION!

Always remove the key fobs from the vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended. For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go Ignition, always remember to place the ignition in the OFF position. Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an authorized dealer. This procedure consists of NOTE:

When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an authorized dealer. KeySense Features If Equipped This feature provides the vehicle owner with the ability to customize vehicle settings that can be applied to determine the driving experience for other drivers of the vehicle. The vehicle settings are protected by a unique 4-digit PIN, which the vehicle owner creates when accessing the specific settings for the first time. KeySense also has additional features that are always enabled when the specific key is in use that cannot be set by the vehicle owner. While this specific key fob is in use, the vehicle will respond accordingly to the customized vehicle settings and mandatory features. This includes enhanced driving assistance features, increased driver alerts, and the locking of certain optional features. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 15 2 KeySense Key Fob KeySense Unique Splash Screen At start-up the KeySense splash screen should inform the driver that the vehicle will be func-

tioning in KeySense mode when the KeySense key is in use. Start Up Display Features Unique splash screen graphic Telltale illuminated After unique splash screen, and after stored messages are cycled, then start-up KeySense messages (Range & Max Speed) are displayed 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 16 16 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE The following features are always enabled when this key is in use:

Entertainment audio muted if 1st row occu-

pied seat belts are not fastened Consistent seat belt unfastened chime Maximum radio volume limited to 15 out of 39 Daytime Running Lights Headlights On With Wipers Rain Sensing Wipers Automatic High Beams Refer to Uconnect Settings in Multimedia for further information. General Information The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interfer-

ence, and 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Le prsent appareil est conforme aux CNR d`Innovation, Science and Economic Develop-

ment applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorise aux deux conditions suivantes:

1. 2. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouil-

lage, et l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radiolectrique subi, mme si le brouillage est susceptible d'en comprom-

ettre le fonctionnement. La operacin de este equipo est sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones:

1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia perjudicial y 2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cual-

quier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operacin no deseada. NOTE:

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compli-

ance could void the users authority to operate the equipment. IGNITION SWITCH Keyless Enter-N-Go Ignition If applicable, refer to the Hybrid Supplement for additional information. This feature allows the driver to start the vehicle with the push of a button, as long as the key fob is in the passenger compartment, and the drivers foot is on the brake pedal. The Keyless Push Button Ignition has four operating positions; three of which are labeled and will illuminate when in position. The three positions are OFF, ACC, and ON/RUN. The fourth position is START; during START, RUN will illuminate. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 17 All the electrical devices are available ON/RUN Driving position START Start the vehicle The engine only runs in the ON/RUN ignition position or from a remote start request. In case the ignition switch does not change with the push of a button, the key fob may have a low or depleted battery. In this situation, a back up method can be used to operate the ignition switch. Put the nose side (side opposite of the emergency key) of the key fob against the START/STOP ignition button and push to operate the ignition switch. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 17 NOTE:

The key fob may not be able to be detected by the vehicle keyless-go system if it is located next to a mobile phone, laptop or other electronic device; these devices may block the key fobs wireless signal and prevent the keyless-go system from starting the vehicle. 2 WARNING!

When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle. Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-

tended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.

(Continued) Backup Starting Method Engine START/STOP Button 1 OFF 2 ACC 3 ON/RUN The ignition can be placed in the following posi-

tions:

OFF The engine is stopped Some electrical devices are available ACC The engine is stopped Some electrical devices are available 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 18 18 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! (Continued) Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to children, and do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the RUN mode. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may cause serious injury or death. CAUTION!

An unlocked car is an invitation. Always remove the key fobs from the vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended. NOTE:

NOTE:

For further information, refer to "Starting The Engine" in "Starting And Operating."

REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED If applicable, refer to the Hybrid Supplement for additional information. This system uses the key fob to start the engine conveniently from outside the vehicle while still maintaining security. The system has a range of 328 ft (100 m). The Remote Starting System also activates the Climate Control, vented seats (if equipped) in temperatures above 80F (26.7C), and the optional heated seats, and optional heated steering wheel in temperatures below 40F

(4.4C). The vehicle must be equipped with an auto-

matic transmission to be equipped with Remote Start. Obstructions between the vehicle and key fob may reduce this range. How To Use Remote Start If applicable, refer to the Hybrid Supplement for additional information. Push Remote Start button on the key fob twice within five seconds. Pushing the Remote Start button a third time shuts the engine off. To drive the vehicle, push the unlock button, and place the ignition in the ON/RUN posi-

tion. With remote start, the engine will only run for 15 minutes (timeout) unless the ignition key is placed in the ON/RUN position. The vehicle must be started with the key after two consecutive timeouts. All of the following conditions must be met before the engine will remote start:

Gear selector in PARK Doors closed Hood closed Liftgate closed Hazard switch off 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 19 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 19 Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not Remote Start Cancel Message If Equipped NOTE:

pushed) Battery at an acceptable charge level Key fob PANIC button not pushed System not disabled from previous remote start event Vehicle alarm system indicator flashing Ignition in STOP/OFF position Fuel level meets minimum requirement WARNING!

Do not start or run an engine in a closed Reset garage or confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious injury or death when inhaled. Keep key fobs away from children. Opera-

tion of the Remote Start System, windows, door locks or other controls could cause serious injury or death. The following messages will display in the instrument cluster if the vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote start prematurely:

Remote Start Cancelled Door Open If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low, the vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds. The park lamps will turn on and remain on 2 Remote Start Cancelled Hood Open during Remote Start mode. Remote Start Cancelled Fuel Low Remote Start Cancelled Liftgate Open Remote Start Cancelled Too Cold Remote Start Cancelled Time Expired Remote Start Disabled Start Vehicle To The message will stay active until the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position. To Enter Remote Start Mode If applicable, refer to the Hybrid Supplement for additional information. Push and release the Remote Start button on the key fob twice within five seconds. The vehicle doors will lock, the turn signals will flash twice, and the horn will chirp twice. Then the engine will start, and the vehicle will remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15 minute cycle. For security, power window operation is disabled when the vehicle is in the Remote Start mode. The engine can be started two consecutive times (two 15 minute cycles) with the key fob. However, the ignition must be placed in the ON/RUN position before you can repeat the start sequence for a third cycle. To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The Vehicle If applicable, refer to the Hybrid Supplement for additional information. Push and release the Remote Start button one time or allow the remote start cycle to complete the entire 15 minute cycle. NOTE:

To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system will disable for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote Start request. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 20 20 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle Before the end of 15 minute cycle, push and release the unlock button on the key fob to unlock the doors, or unlock the vehicle using Keyless Enter-N-Go Passive Entry via the door handles, and disarm the vehicle security alarm

(if equipped). Then, prior to the end of the 15 minute cycle, push and release the START/

STOP ignition button. NOTE:

For vehicles equipped with the Keyless Enter-N-Go Passive Entry feature, the message Remote Start Active Push Start Button will display in the instrument cluster display until you push the START/STOP ignition button. Remote Start Comfort Systems If Equipped When Remote Start is activated, the Climate Control, vented seats (if equipped) are also acti-

vated in temperatures above 80F (26.7C), and the optional heated seats, and optional heated steering wheel in temperatures below 40F (4.4C). These features will stay on through the duration of Remote Start, or until the ignition switch is placed in the ON/RUN position. General Information The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interfer-

ence, and 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Le prsent appareil est conforme aux CNR d`Innovation, Science and Economic Develop-

ment applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorise aux deux conditions suivantes:

1. 2. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouil-

lage, et l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radiolectrique subi, mme si le brouillage est susceptible d'en comprom-

ettre le fonctionnement. La operacin de este equipo est sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones:

1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia perjudicial y 2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cual-

quier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operacin no deseada. NOTE:

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compli-

ance could void the users authority to operate the equipment. SENTRY KEY The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked. The system uses a key fob, keyless push button ignition and a Radio Frequency (RF) receiver to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation. There-

fore, only key fobs that are programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle. The system cannot reprogram a key fob obtained from another vehicle. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 21 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 21 All of the key fobs provided with your new vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electronics. When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an authorized dealer. Key Programming General Information After placing the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position, the vehicle security light will turn on for three seconds for a bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb check, it indicates that there is a problem with the electronics. In addition, if the light begins to flash after the bulb check, it indicates that someone attempted to start the engine with an invalid key fob. In the event that a valid key fob is used to start the engine but there is an issue with the vehicle electronics, the engine will start and shut off after two seconds. If the vehicle security light turns on during normal vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10 seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics. Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible by an authorized dealer. CAUTION!

The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compatible with some aftermarket remote starting systems. Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of security protection. Key fob programming is performed at an autho-

rized dealer. Replacement Keys NOTE:

Only key fobs that are programmed to the vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle. Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle. CAUTION!

Always remove the key fobs from the vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended. NOTE:

Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an authorized dealer. This procedure consists of programming a blank key fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank key fob is one that has never been programmed. 2 The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interfer-

ence, and 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 22 22 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Le prsent appareil est conforme aux CNR d`Innovation, Science and Economic Develop-

ment applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorise aux deux conditions suivantes:

1. 2. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouil-

lage, et l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radiolectrique subi, mme si le brouillage est susceptible d'en comprom-

ettre le fonctionnement. La operacin de este equipo est sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones:

1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia perjudicial y 2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cual-

quier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operacin no deseada. NOTE:

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compli-

ance could void the users authority to operate the equipment. VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM IF EQUIPPED The vehicle security alarm monitors the vehicle doors for unauthorized entry and the ignition switch for unauthorized operation. When the alarm is activated, the interior switches for door locks, power sliding doors and power liftgate are disabled. The vehicle security alarm provides both audible and visible signals. If something triggers the alarm, the vehicle secu-

rity alarm will provide the following audible and visible signals: the horn will pulse, the park lamps and/or turn signals will flash, and the vehicle security light in the instrument cluster will flash. To Arm The System Follow these steps to arm the vehicle security alarm:

1. Make sure the vehicles ignition is placed in the OFF position. Refer to "Starting The Engine" in "Starting And Operating" for further information. For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go Passive Entry, make sure the vehicle ignition system is OFF. 2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the vehicle:

Push lock on the interior power door lock switch with the driver and/or passenger door open. Push the lock button on the exterior Passive Entry Door Handle with a valid key fob available in the same exterior zone. Refer to "Keyless Enter-N-Go Passive Entry" in Doors in this chapter for further information. Push the lock button on the key fob. 3. If any doors are open, close them. To Disarm The System The vehicle security alarm can be disarmed using any of the following methods:

Push the unlock button on the key fob. Grasp the Passive Entry Unlock Door Handle

(if equipped). Refer to "Keyless Enter-N-Go Passive Entry" in Doors in this chapter for further information. Hands Free Liftgate Passive Entry activation

(if equipped). 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 23 Cycle the vehicle ignition system out of the OFF position. For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go Passive Entry, push the keyless ignition START/STOP ignition button (requires at least one valid key fob in the vehicle). NOTE:

The driver's door key cylinder and the liftgate button on the key fob cannot arm or disarm the vehicle security alarm. The vehicle security alarm remains armed during power liftgate entry. Pushing the lift-

gate button will not disarm the vehicle secu-

rity alarm. If someone enters the vehicle through the liftgate and opens any door, the alarm will sound. When the vehicle security alarm is armed, the interior power door lock switches will not unlock the doors. The vehicle security alarm is designed to protect your vehicle. However, you can create condi-

tions where the system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previously described arming sequences has occurred, the vehicle security alarm will arm regardless of whether you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs, disarm the vehicle security alarm. If the vehicle security alarm is armed and the battery becomes disconnected, the vehicle security alarm will remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the exterior lights will flash, and the horn will sound. If this occurs, disarm the vehicle security alarm. Rearming Of The System If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to disarm it, the vehicle security alarm will turn the horn off after 29 seconds, 5 seconds between cycles, up to 8 cycles if the trigger remains active and then the vehicle security alarm will rearm itself. DOORS Manual Lock To lock each door, rotate the door lock knob on each door trim panel forward. To unlock the front doors, pull the inside door handle to the first detent or rotate the door lock button until GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 23 the ribbing is visible. To unlock the rear doors, rotate the door lock button until the red indi-

cator is visible. 2 Manual Front Door Lock Location 1 Manual Door Lock 2 Door Handle Manual Door Lock Knob 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 24 24 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! (Continued) Never use the PARK position as a substi-

tute for the parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage. When exiting the vehicle, always make sure the keyless ignition node is in the OFF mode, remove the key fob from the vehicle and lock the vehicle. Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-

tended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear selector. Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to chil-

dren, and do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. Central Lock/Unlock If Equipped A power door lock switch is on each front door trim panel. Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors. Driver Power Door Lock Switches 1 Power Unlock Switch 2 Power Lock Switch If you push the power door lock switch while the ignition is in the ACC or ON/RUN position, and any front door is open, the power locks will not operate. This prevents you from accidentally locking your keys in the vehicle. Placing the ignition in the OFF position or closing the door will allow the locks to operate. A chime will sound if the ignition is in the ACC or ON/RUN position and a door is open, as a reminder to place the ignition in the OFF position and remove the key fob. Manual Rear Door Lock Location 1 Door Handle 2 Manual Door Lock If the door lock button is locked (no ribbing is visible) when you shut the door, the door will lock. Therefore, make sure the key fob is not inside the vehicle before closing the door. NOTE:

The manual door locks will not lock or unlock the liftgate. WARNING!

For personal security and safety in the event of a collision, lock the vehicle doors before you drive as well as when you park and leave the vehicle.

(Continued) 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 25 Unlock Doors Automatically On Exit If Equipped The Unlock Doors Automatically On Exit feature unlocks all of the vehicle doors when any door is opened. This will occur only after the gear selector has been placed into the PARK posi-

tion, after the vehicle has been driven (the gear selector has been placed out of PARK and all doors closed). The Unlock Doors Automatically On Exit feature will not operate if there is any manual operation of the door locks (lock or unlock). For further information, refer to Uconnect Settings in Multimedia. Keyless Enter-N-Go Passive Entry The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the vehicles Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system and a feature of Keyless Enter-N-Go. This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicles door(s) without having to push the key fob lock or unlock buttons. NOTE:

Passive Entry may be programmed on/off. Refer to Uconnect Settings in Multimedia for further information. If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has been raining/snowing on the Passive Entry door handle, the unlock sensitivity can be affected, resulting in a slower response time. If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry and no door is opened within 60 seconds, the vehicle will re-lock and will arm the security alarm (if equipped). The sliding side doors can be unlocked from the outside using the hands free or Passive Entry system. The key fob may not be able to be detected by the vehicle passive entry system if it is located next to a mobile phone, laptop, or other electronic device; these devices may block the key fobs wireless signal and prevent the passive entry handle from locking/unlocking the vehicle. If set by the customer in the Uconnect Settings, unlocking with Passive Entry will initiate illuminated approach (low beams, license plate lamp, position lamps) for the time 0, 30 (default), 60 or 90 seconds. Passive Entry also initiates two flashes of the turn lamps. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 25 To Unlock From The Driver's Side:

With a valid key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the drivers door handle, grab the drivers front door handle to unlock the drivers side doors (driver/

sliding door) automatically. The interior door panel lock knob will rotate when the door is unlocked. 2 Grab The Door Handle To Unlock NOTE:

If Unlock All Doors 1st Press is programmed, all doors and liftgate will unlock when you grab hold of the drivers front door handle. To select between Unlock Driver Door 1st Press and Unlock All Doors 1st Press, refer to Uconnect Settings in Multimedia for further information. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 26 26 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE To Unlock From The Passenger Side:

With a valid key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the passenger door handle, grab the front passenger door handle to unlock all four doors and the liftgate automatically. The interior door panel lock knob will rotate when the door is unlocked. NOTE:

All doors will unlock when the front passenger door handle is grabbed regardless of the drivers door unlock preference setting (Unlock Driver Door 1st Press or Unlock All Doors 1st Press). Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Key Fob In Vehicle (FOBIK-Safe) To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a key fob inside your vehicle, the Passive Entry system is equipped with an automatic door unlock feature. FOBIK-Safe only executes in vehicles with Passive Entry. There are three situations that trigger a FOBIK-Safe search in any Passive Entry vehicle:

A lock request is made by a valid key fob while a door is open. A lock request is made by the Passive Entry door handle while a door is open. A lock request is made by the door panel switch while the door is open. When any of these situations occur, after all open doors are shut, the FOBIK-Safe search will be executed. If it finds a key fob inside the car, and it does not find any key fob outside the car, then the car will unlock and alert the customer. NOTE:

The vehicle will only unlock the doors when a valid key fob is detected inside the vehicle, and no valid key fob is detected outside the vehicle. The vehicle will not unlock the doors when any of the following conditions are met:

The doors are manually locked using the door lock knobs. There is a valid key fob outside the vehicle and within 5 ft (1.5 m) of either Passive Entry door handle. Three attempts are made to lock the doors using the door panel switch and then close the doors. NOTE:

On the third attempt ALL doors will lock and the key fob can be locked in the vehicle. To Enter The Liftgate With a valid key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the lift-

gate, cycle the handle to open the liftgate and pull the liftgate open with one fluid motion. NOTE:

If Unlock Driver Door 1st Press is programmed, only the liftgate will unlock when the liftgate release handle is pulled. If Unlock All Doors 1st Press is programmed, all doors and the liftgate will unlock when the liftgate release handle is pulled. To select between Unlock Driver Door 1st Press and Unlock All Doors 1st Press, refer to Uconnect Settings in Multimedia for further information. To Lock The Vehicles Doors With one of the vehicles key fobs within 5 ft

(1.5 m) of the driver or passenger front door handle, push the door handle lock button to lock all four doors and the liftgate. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 27 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 27 1. 2. unlock the doors, using either Passive Entry door handle. This is done to allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by pulling the door handle, without the vehicle reacting and unlocking. Le prsent appareil est conforme aux CNR d`Innovation, Science and Economic Develop-

ment applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorise aux deux conditions suivantes:

The Passive Entry system will not operate if the key fob battery is depleted. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouil-

lage, et 2 The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the key fob lock button, or the lock button located on the vehicles interior door panel. General Information The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interfer-

ence, and 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radiolectrique subi, mme si le brouillage est susceptible d'en comprom-

ettre le fonctionnement. La operacin de este equipo est sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones:

1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia perjudicial y 2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cual-

quier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operacin no deseada. NOTE:

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compli-

ance could void the users authority to operate the equipment. Push The Door Handle Button To Lock Do NOT grab the door handle, when pushing the door handle button. This could unlock the door(s). Do NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking NOTE:

After pushing the door handle button, you must wait two seconds before you can lock or 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 28 28 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Manual Sliding Side Door The sliding door may be opened from the inside or the outside. Pull outward on the exterior handle to open the sliding door. The sliding door inside handle functions by rocking forward and back. Rocking the handle backwards opens the door and rocking forward releases the hold open latch in order to close the door. important when your vehicle is parked on an incline as the door will slide faster in the downhill direction. Push the button on the key fob twice within five seconds to open, close, or reverse a power sliding door. The key fob and the overhead console button will operate the door when the door is locked. All other ways require the sliding door to be unlocked. If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, pressing the button on the outside handle or Hands-Free feature (if equipped) will unlock and open the sliding door, with a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft

(1.5 m) of the door handle. There is a hold-open latch that is activated when the sliding door is fully opened. This latch will keep your sliding door open on any incline. To close the sliding door after the hold-open latch is activated, you must rock the inside handle forward or pull outward on the exterior handle. Always make sure that the sliding door is fully latched anytime the vehicle is in motion. NOTE:

The left side sliding door cannot be opened while the fuel door is open. Power Sliding Side Door If Equipped The power sliding door may be power opened or closed in several ways:

Key fob Side Door Handle And Lock Functions 1 Door Handle 2 Door Lock To keep your door operating properly, observe the following guidelines:

Always open the door smoothly. Avoid high impacts against the door stop when opening the door. This is very Inside or outside handles Buttons located:

In the overhead console Just inside the sliding door On the outside handle Overhead Console Power Switches 1 Liftgate 2 Right Sliding Door 3 Sliding Door Power Off 4 Left Sliding Door 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 29 There are power sliding side door switches located on the B-Pillar trim panel, just in front of the power sliding door for the rear seat passengers. To operate the sliding door manually with the handles or to avoid unintentional operation of the power sliding doors from the rear seats, push the power sliding door power off button, located in the overhead console, to remove power to the handles and buttons just inside the sliding doors. The power off LED, in the over-

head console, will be lit when the handles are manual. When the LED is lit, pushing the power sliding door power off button will return the handles to power operation. NOTE:

If anything obstructs the power sliding side door while it is closing or opening, the door will automatically reverse to the closed or open position and an audible tone will sound, provided it meets sufficient resistance. The turn signals will flash with sliding door move-

ments. If the power sliding door stops in the middle due to obstacles, it will power open on the next command. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 29 WARNING! (Continued) Before driving off, check the instrument cluster for a sliding door or door open message or warning indicator. Failure to do this could result in unintentionally leaving the sliding door open while driving. 2 Hands-Free Sliding Doors If Equipped Driver Side Power Sliding Side Door Switch Passenger Side Power Sliding Side Door Switch WARNING!

Personal injury or cargo damage may occur if caught in the path of the sliding door. Make sure the door path is clear before closing the door.

(Continued) Hands-Free Sliding Doors To open the Hands-Free Sliding Doors, use a straight in and out kicking motion under the vehicle in the general location below the door handle(s). Do not move your foot sideways or in a sweeping motion or the sensors may not detect the motion. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 30 30 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE When a valid kicking motion is completed, the sliding door will chime, the hazard lights will flash and the sliding door will open almost instantaneously. This assumes all options are enabled in the radio settings. NOTE:

To open the Hands-Free Sliding Doors requires a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the door handle. If a valid Passive Entry key fob is not within 5 ft (1.5 m), the door will not respond to any kicks. The Hands-Free Sliding Door will only operate when the transmission is in PARK. With every movement of the Hands-Free sliding doors, an audible tone will sound and the turn signals will flash. Refer to Uconnect Settings in Multimedia for further informa-

tion on turning these alerts on or off. If anything obstructs the power sliding side door while it is closing or opening, the door will automatically reverse to the closed or open position and an audible tone will sound, provided it meets sufficient resistance. The turn signals will flash with sliding door move-

ments. If the power sliding doors encounters multiple obstructions within the same cycle, the system will automatically stop. The Hands-Free Sliding Doors feature may be turned off through Uconnect Settings. Refer to Uconnect Settings in Multimedia for further information. The Hands-Free Sliding Doors feature should be turned off during jacking, tire changing, and vehicle service. Child Locks To provide a safer environment for small chil-

dren riding in the rear seats, the sliding doors are equipped with a Child Protection Door Lock system. To Engage The Child Protection Door Lock 1. Open the sliding side door. 2. On the rear of the sliding door, slide the Child Protection Door Lock control inward

(toward the vehicle) to engage the Child Protection Door Lock. Child Protection Door Locks 3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 on the opposite sliding door. NOTE:

After engaging (or disengaging) the Child Protection Door Lock, always test the inside door handle with the sliding door closed to make certain the Child Protection Door Lock is in the desired position. The inside door handle will not open the sliding door when the Child Protection Door Lock is engaged. The power sliding door will operate from the switch located just inside the sliding door, regardless of the Child Protection Door Lock lever position. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 31 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 31 Manual Adjustment (Front Seats) If Equipped WARNING!

Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be adjusted properly and you could be injured. Adjust the seat only while the vehicle is parked. 2 Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and be seriously or even fatally injured. Use the recliner only when the vehicle is parked. To avoid unintentional operation of the power NOTE:

sliding door from the rear seats, push the Sliding Door Power Off button, located in the overhead console. When the overhead console power OFF LED is lit, the sliding door may not be power opened or closed by pushing the buttons just inside the sliding doors or pulling on the handles. WARNING!

Avoid trapping anyone in the vehicle in a collision. Remember that the sliding doors cannot be opened from the inside door handle when the Child Protection Door Locks are engaged. To Disengage The Child Protection Door Lock 1. Open the sliding side door. 2. Slide the Child Protection Door Lock control outward (away from the vehicle) to disen-

gage the Child Protection Door Lock. 3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 on the opposite sliding door. After disengaging (or engaging) the Child Protection Door Lock, always test the inside door handle with the sliding door closed to make certain the Child Protection Door Lock is in the desired position. The inside door handle will open the sliding door when the Child Protection Door Lock is disengaged. SEATS Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the vehicle. WARNING!

It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seri-

ously injured or killed. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 32 32 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Manual Front Adjuster Both front seats are adjustable forward or rear-

ward. The manual seat adjustment handle is located under the seat cushion at the front edge of each seat. Manual Seat Adjustment 1 Forward/Rearward Adjustment Handle 2 Height Adjustment 3 Recline Lever While sitting in the seat, pull up on the handle and slide the seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once you have reached the desired posi-

tion. Then, using body pressure, move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have latched. WARNING!

Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous. Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of control which could cause a collision and serious injury or death. Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt. Seat Height Adjustment The drivers seat height can be raised or lowered by using a lever, located on the outboard side of the seat. Pump the lever upward to raise the seat height or pump the lever downward to lower the seat height. Manual Reclining Seats If Equipped For models equipped with manual seats, the recline lever is located on the outboard side of the seat. Manual Recline Lever To recline, lean forward slightly, lift the lever and push back to the desired position and release the lever. Lean forward and lift the lever to return the seatback to its normal position. Using body pressure, lean forward and rearward on the seat to be sure the seatback has latched. WARNING!

Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat belt, which could result in serious injury or death. Manual Adjustment (Rear Seats) Manual Recline Quad Seats 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 33 WARNING!

Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be adjusted properly and you could be injured. Adjust the seat only while the vehicle is parked. Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and be seriously or even fatally injured. Use the recliner only when the vehicle is parked. Recline Lever To recline, lean forward slightly, lift the lever, and push back to the desired position and release the lever. Lean forward and lift the lever to return the seatback to its normal position. Using body pressure, lean forward and rearward on the seat to be sure the seatback has latched. WARNING!

Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat belt, which could result in serious injury or death. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 33 Second Row Bench Seat If Equipped The second row bench seat can accommodate two passengers, while providing easy access to the third row seats without any folding of the second row seats. To recline the seatback, lean forward slightly, lift the recline lever located on the outboard side of the seat cushion, and push back to the desired position and release the lever. Lean forward and lift the lever to return the seatback to its normal position. Using body pressure, lean forward and rearward on the seat to be sure the seatback has latched. 2 Recline Lever The bench seat does not stow in the floor, but is removable for added cargo space. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 34 34 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Removing The Bench Seat 1. Adjust the driver and passenger seats forward to allow room for the bench seat removal. 2. Raise the armrest completely, then lift the recline lever located on the outboard side of the seat to fold the seatback flat against the seat cushion. Folded Position 3. Pull the release strap located behind the seat, in the center near the floor to release the latches. Release Strap Location 4. Once the latches are released, tilt the entire seat toward the front of the vehicle. The seat can now be removed through either sliding side door, or through the liftgate. NOTE:

Due to the weight of the bench seat, it is recommended that two people are utilized for its removal. When storing the removed bench seat, it is important to keep the seatback in the folded position. Reinstalling The Bench Seat 1. To reinstall the bench seat, align the seats front attachments into the detent positions on the floor. 2. Tilt seat rearward to lock the seatback into its original position. NOTE:

Push downward to ensure the rear latches are in the locked position. 3. Lift the recline handle and return the seat-

back to the seating position. WARNING!

Tilt Bench Seat Forward If not properly latched, the seat could become loose. Personal injuries could result. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 35 Second Row Removable 8th Seat If Equipped While the 8th seat does not stow in the floor, it is foldable and removable for added cargo space. The release strap is located on the front of the seat, near the floor. To remove the seat, pull the release strap to release the rear latches. The seat assembly can now be removed from the vehicle by moving it in a rearward direction from the detent positions in the floor. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 35 To reinstall the seat, align the seat into the detent positions on the floor. Tilt seat rearward to lock the seatback into its original position. 2 Second Row 8th Seat Fold Flat Strap Release Strap NOTE:

Seat can be removed easier with one outboard seat stowed in the load floor. In Floor Detent Guides WARNING!

If not properly latched, the seat could become loose. Personal injuries could result. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 36 36 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Fold-Flat Quad Seats If applicable, refer to the Hybrid Supplement for additional information. To fold the seat, lift the recliner lever to the full upward position and push the seatback forward until it rests on the seat cushion. NOTE:

The seatback may lock into the fold-flat position. Use the recline lever to unlock the seatback. When returning the seat to the original posi-

tion, the headrest must be folded back to the original position. Fold-Flat Seat Recline Lever Fold Headrest To Upward Position Easy Entry If applicable, refer to the Hybrid Supplement for additional information. Easy Tilt Seat With Or Without Child Seat Installed The second row seats can be tilted forward for easy entry into the third row with or without a child seat installed. 1. Located in the seatback of the second row seat is a handle that provides easier access to the third row by tilting the seat forward. Easy Tilt Seat Handle 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 37 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 37 2. Pull the strap on the back of the seat and the seat will tilt forward. 2 Easy Entry With The Seat Folded Flat The seats can be folded and tilted for more accessibility for passengers to enter and exit the third row. 1. Without a child seat installed, you can fold the seat by pulling the recliner handle on the bottom part of the seat. Before pulling the recliner lever, make sure the arm rests are folded up. Pull Strap 3. To put it back into position, pull back on the folded seat and make sure that it locks into position. Then, pull the seatback toward the back and fold down the arm rests. Recliner Lever Seat Folded Forward With Child Seat Installed 2. To put the seat back into original position, just pull back on the seatback and lock the seat into position. WARNING!

Do not use this feature with a child in seat. Serious injury or death may occur. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 38 38 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Exit For Third Row Passengers For passengers seated in the third row, there is a pull strap located on the outboard side of the seat near the bottom of the seatback. Third row passengers can pull on the strap and push the seat forward for folding the seatback down and tilting the seat to the floor. Manually Folding Third Row Seats If Equipped 3. Pull release strap marked 2 and tumble the seat rearward into the storage bin. 1. Lower the center head restraint down to the seatback by pushing the button on the guide and pushing the head restraint down. 2. Pull release strap marked 1 to release the anchors. Pull Strap For Third Row Passengers NOTE:

This process is for when there is no child seat installed. Use the easy entry lever if a child seat is installed. Release Strap 1 Strap 2 Stowed Third Row Seat 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 39 To Unfold Third Row Seats 1. Pull up on the assist strap to lift the seat out of the storage bin and push the seat forward until the anchors latch. 2. Pulling strap 2 releases the seatback to return to its full upright position. Assist Straps position. 3. Raise the head restraint to its upright Strap 2 WARNING!

In a collision, you or others in your vehicle could be injured if seats are not properly latched to their floor attachments. Always be sure the seats are fully latched. Sitting in a seat with the head restraint in its lowered position could result in serious injury or death in a collision. Always make sure the head restraints are in their upright positions when the seat is to be occupied. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 39 Stow 'n Go Seating On vehicles equipped with Stow 'n Go seating, the second and third row seats can be folded into the floor for convenient storage. Auto Advance n Return If Equipped 2 On vehicles equipped with the Auto Advance n Return feature, the front seat will move forward automatically to a location that will allow the second row Stow n Go seat movement, without interference by the front seat. After the second row seat is stowed, the front seat will move back to the previous location once the Auto Advance n Return button is pushed again. The Auto Advance n Return feature is available to both the front driver and passenger power seats (if equipped). WARNING!

During power seat operation, personal injury or cargo damage may occur. Ensure the front seat is not occupied and the seat travel path is clear when operating the power seat. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 40 40 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE A one-touch Auto Advance n Return button is located on the B-Pillar trim panel, just in front of the power sliding door. If the power sliding door is closing when the button is pushed, the front seat will not move and a message will be displayed in the instru-

ment cluster display. The Auto Advance n Return feature will not function if the front doors are open. 1. Push and release the Auto Advance n Return button. 2. Perform the second row Stow n Go seat movement. Refer to Second Row Stow n Go in this section for further information. 3. Push and release the Auto Advance n Return button a second time. The front seat cushion and seatback will return to the orig-

inal starting location. To abort seat operation while seat is in motion, push the Auto Advance n Return button, or push the front power seat button to stop the seat movement. Pushing the Auto Advance n Return button again will return the front seat to the original starting location. The Auto Advance n Return system includes obstacle detection. When the system detects an obstacle, the seat will stop, reverse direc-

tion, and return to the previous location. A message will be displayed in the instrument cluster indicating that an obstacle has been detected. If the front seat is already in a location that will allow space for Stow n Go of the second row seat, the front seat will not move and a message will be displayed in the instrument cluster. If calibration of the front seat is lost, the seat will automatically re-calibrate when the Auto Advance n Return button is pushed. This may result in the seat cushion moving forward and downward, before moving to the location that will allow space for the second row Stow n Go seat movement. Auto Advance n Return Button Using the Auto Advance n Return Feature NOTE:

The button is only functional when the power sliding door is open and the vehicle is in PARK. If the door is not open or the vehicle is not in PARK when the button is pushed, the front seat will not move and a message will be displayed in the instrument cluster display. NOTE:

20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 41 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 41 3. Pull the floor panel and position it toward the front seats while folding the top half down and rest it against the front seats. 2 Second Row Stow 'n Go NOTE:

For Manual Seats: To stow the seat in the floor, move the front seat all the way forward using the manual seat adjustment bar. Move the seat-

back all the way forward using the recliner handle located on the outboard side of the cushion. Move the seat height to at least mid position using the height adjuster handle in the outboard side of the cushion. For Power Seats: Push the Auto Advance n Return button located on the B-Pillar trim (if equipped.) Refer to "Auto Advance n Return - If Equipped" in this section for instructions. 1. To access the storage area, remove the floor mat (if equipped) and place the lock rod in the locked position. Push the lock rod inward for the locked position. Pull outward on the lock rod for the unlocked position. For information on storage bin function with the seats rearward refer to Second Row Floor Storage Bins in Internal Equipment in this chapter for further information. 2. Pull the latch located near the second row seat to open the floor panel. Push Panel Forward 4. Remove the plastic storage bin from the storage area, and store in a safe location. Floor Latch Lock Rod 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 42 42 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE by grabbing the strap on the lower part of the seatback, and guide the seat into the storage area. 5. Fold the armrest upward and stow the seat 7. Close the floor by pulling the floor panel 9. Readjust the front seat as needed, and backwards by the bottom corner edge of the panel. replace the floor mat (if equipped). Pull Strap 8. Push down on floor panel to lock into place. down. Extend Floor Panel Do not use a storage bin latch as a tie 6. Push down on the seatback to lock the seat into the storage area. WARNING!

In a collision, serious injury could result if the seat storage bin covers are not properly latched:

Do not drive the vehicle with the storage bin covers open. Keep the storage bin covers closed and latched while the vehicle is in motion. CAUTION!

The storage bin cover must be latched and flat to avoid damage from contact with the front seat tracks, which have minimal clear-

ance to the cover. Do not sit on the second row seat when it is in the stowed position with the seatback upright otherwise damage to the seat may occur. Push To Lock Push To Lock 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 43 To Unstow Second Row Seats NOTE:

For Manual Seats: To unstow the seat from the floor, move the front seat all the way forward using the manual seat adjustment bar. For Power Seats: Push the Auto Advance n Return button located on the B-Pillar trim (if equipped). Refer to "Auto Advance n Return - If Equipped" in this section for instructions. 1. To access the storage area, remove the floor mat (if equipped) and place the lock rod in the locked position. Push the lock rod inward for the locked position. Pull outward on the lock rod for the unlocked position. 2. Pull the latch located near the second row seat to open the floor panel. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 43 3. Pull the floor panel and position it toward the front seats while folding the top half down and rest it against the front seats. 2 Push Panel Forward Floor Latch Lock Rod 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 44 44 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 4. Pull the strap located on the seat and pull the seat out of the storage area. Push the seat rearward making sure that it locks into the floor. Fold the seatback into the upright position and pull the headrest up. NOTE:

The seatback may be locked, if it is, it will be necessary to use the recliner handle to unlock the back before folding into the upright position. 6. To position the floor panel back into its orig-

8. Readjust the front seat as needed, and inal state, grab the bottom corner and extend it outward. replace the floor mat (if equipped). WARNING!

In a collision, you or others in your vehicle could be injured if seats are not properly latched to their floor attachments. Always be sure the seats are fully latched. Sitting in a seat with the head restraint in its lowered position could result in serious injury or death in a collision. Always make sure the head restraints are in their upright positions when the seat is to be occupied. Extend Panel 7. Lay the floor panel flat and push down until it clicks into position. Pull Strap 5. Replace the plastic storage bin into the storage area. Push Down To Lock 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 45 Power Adjustment (Front Seats) If Equipped Some models may be equipped with eight-way power seats for the driver and front passenger. The power seat switches are located on the outboard side of the seat. The switches control the movement of the seat cushion and the seatback. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 45 Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward The seat can be adjusted both forward and rear-

ward. Push the seat switch forward or rearward, and the seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the desired position has been reached. 2 Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull upward or push downward on the rear of seat switch, the seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the desired position has been reached. Tilting The Seat Up Or Down The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted in two directions. Pull upward or push down-

ward on the front of the seat switch, the front of the seat cushion will move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the desired position has been reached. WARNING!

Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous. Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of control which could cause a collision and serious injury or death. Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt. Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat belt, which could result in serious injury or death. Do not place any article under a power seat or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat's path. Driver Power Seat Switches CAUTION!

1 Seat Switch 2 Seatback Switch 3 Lumbar Switch 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 46 46 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Reclining The Seatback The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward or rearward. Push the seatback switch forward or rearward, the seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the desired position is reached. WARNING!

Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous. Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of control which could cause a collision and serious injury or death. Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt. Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat belt, which could result in serious injury or death. CAUTION!

WARNING! (Continued) Do not place any article under a power seat or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat's path. Power Lumbar If Equipped Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats may be equipped with power lumbar. The power lumbar switch is located on the outboard side of the power seat. Push the switch forward or rearward to increase or decrease the lumbar support. Push the switch upward or downward to raise or lower the lumbar support. Power Adjustment (Rear Seats) If Equipped WARNING!

Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous. Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of control which could cause a collision and serious injury or death.

(Continued) Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt. Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat belt, which could result in serious injury or death. Do not place the seat belt webbing behind the third row stow clip when using the seat belt to restrain an occupant. The seat belt will not be positioned properly on the occu-

pant and they could be more seriously injured in an accident as a result. CAUTION!

Do not place any article under a power seat or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat's path. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 47 Third Row Power Recline If Equipped The power recline feature, located on the trim panel next to the seat, adjusts the seatback angle forward/rearward for occupant comfort. Reclining The Seatback The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward or rearward. Push and hold the forward or rearward button, the seat will move in the direction of the button push. Release the button when the desired position is reached. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 47 The switch is only functional when the liftgate is open and the vehicle is in PARK. The rear switch bank allows multiple power folding and unfolding positions for the third row seats. Left and right third row seats can be folded indi-

vidually or together. The third row power folding seat adjusts to the following positions using the switch bank located on the left rear trim panel:

2 Third Row Power Stow n Go Seat If Equipped A one-touch power folding seat switch is located in the right rear trim panel as part of a switch bank. NOTE:

The third row outboard seat belts may interfere with the power folding of the seat. Place the seat belt webbing behind the stow clip before stowing or opening the seat. When the seat is in the desired position, remove the webbing from the stow clip so that it is ready for use. Never leave the seat belt in the stow clip when it is used to restrain an occupant. NOTE:

The outer head restraints will lower automat-

ically as necessary when the power seat begins to move. The center head restraint raises and lowers manually but will not lower automatically. The head restraint can also be lowered manually using the pull strap located at the back of the seat. Refer to "Head Restraints -

Third Row" in "Head Restraints" in this chapter for further information. Third Row Power Seat Switch Rear Panel Power Switch Bank 1 Open To Normal 2 Stow 3 Fold Forward/Rearward 4 Right/Left Seats/Both Seats 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 48 48 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE To move the selected seat(s) to the normal

(seated) position, push and release the Normal button. The seat will automatically stop when the Normal position is reached. To move the selected seat(s) to the stow posi-

tion, push and release the Stow button. The seat will automatically stop when the Stow posi-

tion is reached. To move the selected seat(s) back in the forward or reverse direction, push and hold the Fold Forward/Back button. Release the button when the desired position is reached. NOTE:

1. Disconnect the center shoulder belt from the mini-buckle before attempting to fold/

stow the power third row seats. 2. Before pushing the Normal or Stow button, place the outboard seat belt webbing behind the stow clips, located on the rear trim panel. When the seat reaches the desired position, remove the webbing from the clip so it is ready for use to restrain an occupant. Seat Belt Stowage Clip 3. To abort seat operation while seat is in motion, push a different seat position selector switch to stop the seat. Once the seat stops moving, then the desired posi-

tion can be selected. 4. The third row power seat system includes obstacle detection. When the system detects an obstacle, the motors will stop and reverse direction. Should this occur, remove the obstacle before pushing the button again. Driver Memory Seat If Equipped The Memory Buttons (1) and (2) on the driver's door panel can be programmed to recall the driver's seat, outside mirrors (if equipped), power steering wheel position (if equipped), and radio station preset settings. Your key fobs can also be programmed to recall the same posi-

tions when the unlock button is pushed. Driver Memory Switch 1 Memory Profile Button 1 2 Set Button 3 Memory Profile Button 2 Your vehicle may have been delivered with two key fobs, one key fob can be linked to each of the memory positions. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 49 Programming The Memory Feature To create a new memory profile, perform the following:

1. Place the vehicles ignition in the ON/RUN position (do not start the engine). 2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired preferences (i.e., drivers seat, outside mirrors and radio station presets). 3. Push and release the set (S) button on the memory switch. Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry Key Fob To Memory Your key fob can be programmed to recall one of two pre-programmed memory profiles by pushing the unlock button on the key fob. NOTE:

Before programming your key fob you must select the Personal Settings Linked to Key Fob feature through the Uconnect Settings. Refer to Uconnect Settings in Multimedia for further information. 4. Within five seconds, push and release To program your key fob, perform the following:

either of the memory buttons (1) or (2). The instrument cluster display will show which memory position has been set. tion. 1. Place the vehicles ignition in the OFF posi-

NOTE:

Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle in PARK. To set a memory profile to your key fob, refer to Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry Key Fob To Memory in this section for further information. 2. Select a desired memory profile 1 or 2. NOTE:

If a memory profile has not already been set, refer to "Programming The Memory Feature" in this section for instructions on how to set a memory profile. 3. Once the profile has been recalled, push and release the set (S) button on the memory switch. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 49 4. Push and release button (1) or (2) accord-

ingly. Memory Profile Set (1 or 2) will display in the instrument cluster. 5. Push and release the lock button on the key fob within 10 seconds. 2 NOTE:

Your key fob can be unlinked to your memory settings by pushing the set (S) button, and then, within 10 seconds, pushing the unlock button on the key fob. Memory Position Recall NOTE:

The vehicle speed must be less than or equal to 5 mph (8 km/h) to recall memory positions. If a recall is attempted when the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), a message will be displayed in the instrument cluster display. To recall the memory settings for driver one, push memory button (1) on the driver's door or the unlock button on the key fob linked to memory position 1. To recall the memory setting for driver two, push memory button (2) on the driver's door or the unlock button on the key fob linked to memory position 2. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 50 50 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE A recall can be cancelled by pushing any of the memory buttons on the driver's door during a recall (S, 1, or 2). When a recall is cancelled, the driver's seat stops moving. A delay of one second will occur before another recall can be selected. NOTE:

Pushing the mirror adjust switch will cancel the memory mirror recall. Easy Entry/Exit Seat (Available With Memory Seat Only) This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle. The distance the driver seat moves depends on where you have the driver seat positioned when you place the vehicles ignition in the OFF posi-

tion. When the ignition is placed in the OFF posi-

tion, the driver seat will move about 2.4 inches (60 mm) rearward if the driver seat position is greater than or equal to 2.7 inches (67.7 mm) forward of the rear stop. The seat will return to its previously set position when the ignition is cycled out of the OFF position. When the ignition is placed in the OFF posi-

tion, the driver seat will move to a position 0.3 inches (7.7 mm) forward of the rear stop if the driver seat position is between 0.9 2.7 inches (22.7 67.7 mm) forward of the rear stop. The seat will return to its previously set position when the ignition is cycled out of the OFF position. The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled when the driver seat position is less than 0.9 inches (22.7 mm) forward of the rear stop. At this position, there is no benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit or Easy Entry. Each stored memory setting will have an associ-

ated Easy Entry and Easy Exit Position. NOTE:

The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature can be enabled or disabled through the programmable features in the instrument cluster display. For further information, refer to Instrument Cluster Display in Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel. Heated Seats Front Heated Seats If Equipped The front heated seats control buttons are located within the climate or controls screen of the touchscreen. You can choose from HI, LO or off heat settings. The indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in use. Two indicator lights will illu-

minate for HI, one for LO and none for off. Press the heated seat button once to turn the HI setting on. Press the heated seat button time to turn the LO setting on. a second Press the heated seat button a third time to turn the heating elements off. The level of heat selected will stay on until the operator changes it. NOTE:

Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt within two to five minutes. The engine must be running for the heated seats to operate. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 51 Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start On models that are equipped with remote start, the heated seats can be programmed to come on during a remote start. This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect system. Refer to Uconnect Settings in Multimedia for further information. Rear Heated Seats If Equipped On some models, the second row seats are equipped with heaters. There are two heated seat switches that allow the second row passengers to operate the seats independently. The heated seat switches are located on the sliding side door handle trim panels. WARNING!

Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medica-

tion, alcohol use, exhaustion or other phys-

ical condition must exercise care when using the seat heater. It may cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used for long periods of time. Do not place anything on the seat or seat-

back that insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a seat that has been overheated could cause serious burns due to the increased surface temperature of the seat. Second Row Heated Seat Switch You can choose from HI, LO or off heat settings. Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for HI, one for LO and none for off. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 51 Push the switch once to select HI-level heating. Push the switch a second time to select LO-level heating. Push the switch a third time to shut the heating elements off. NOTE:

Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt within two to five minutes. 2 When the HI-level setting is selected, the heater will provide a boosted heat level during the initial stages of operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the normal HI-level. The level of heat selected will stay on until the operator changes it. Ventilated Seats If Equipped Located in the first row seat cushions are small fans that draw the air from the passenger compartment and move air through fine perfo-

rations in the seat cover to help keep the driver and front passenger cooler in higher ambient temperatures. The fans operate at two speeds, HI and LO. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 52 52 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE The front ventilated seats control buttons are located within the climate or controls screen of the touchscreen. Press the ventilated seat button once to choose HI. Press the ventilated seat button a second time to choose LO. Press the ventilated seat button a third time to turn the ventilated seat off. NOTE:

The engine must be running for the ventilated seats to operate. Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start On models that are equipped with remote start, the ventilated seats can be programed to come on during a remote start. This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect system. Refer to Uconnect Settings in Multimedia for further information. HEAD RESTRAINTS Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury by restricting head movement in the event of a rear impact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear. WARNING!

All occupants, including the driver, should not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicles seat until the head restraints are placed in their proper positions in order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a crash. Head restraints should never be adjusted while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted or removed could cause serious injury or death in the event of a collision. Adjustable Armrest (Front Seats) If Equipped Your vehicle may be equipped with adjustable armrests on the front seats. The armrest can be adjusted by moving it up or down. To adjust the armrest below the normal height, push and hold the button and lower to the desired position. Push the button a second time to lock the armrest into place. Adjustable Armrest Plastic Grocery Bag Retainer Hooks Retainer hooks which will hold plastic grocery bag handles are built into the seatbacks of the first and third row rear seats. The floor supports the partial weight of the bagged goods. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 53 Head Restraints Front Seats The front driver and passenger seats are equipped with four-way head restraints. To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjustment button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push downward. The front head restraints are also adjustable forward and rearward. To tilt forward, pull the top of the head restraint toward the front of the vehicle to the desired position. To adjust the head restraint rearward, continue pulling forward on the top of the head restraint to the furthest forward position and the head restraint will return to the upright position. NOTE:

To remove the head restraint, raise it as far as it can go. Then, push the release button and the adjustment button at the base of each post while pulling the head restraint up. Seatback angle may need to be adjusted to fully remove the head restraint. To reinstall the head restraint, put the head restraint posts into the holes and push downward. Then, adjust the head restraint to the appropriate height. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 53 2 Forward Adjustment WARNING!

A loose head restraint thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could cause serious injury or death to occupants of the vehicle. Always securely stow removed head restraints in a location outside the occu-

pant compartment. ALL the head restraints MUST be rein-

stalled in the vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow the re-installation instructions above prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a seat. Front Head Restraint 1 Release Button 2 Adjustment Button Normal Position 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 54 54 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Head Restraints Second Row Quad Seats The second row outboard head restraints, as well as the removable 8th passenger seat (if equipped) have adjustable head restraints. To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjustment button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push downward. NOTE:

If equipped with Stow n Go seating, the head restraints are non-adjustable. Do not pull on non-adjustable head restraints when folding. Head Restraints Second Row Bench The second row bench seat is equipped with adjustable head restraints. To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjustment button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push downward. WARNING!

A loose head restraint thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could cause serious injury or death to occupants of the vehicle. Always securely stow removed head restraints in a location outside the occu-

pant compartment. ALL the head restraints MUST be rein-

stalled in the vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow the re-installation instructions above prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a seat. NOTE:

For child restraint tethering, refer to Occupant Restraint Systems in Safety for further infor-

mation. Bench Seat Head Restraint 1 Release Button 2 Adjustment Button To remove the head restraint, raise it as far as it can go. Then, push the release button and the adjustment button at the base of each post while pulling the head restraint up. Seatback angle may need to be adjusted to fully remove the head restraint. To reinstall the head restraint, put the head restraint posts into the holes and push downward. Then, adjust the head restraint to the appropriate height. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 55 Head Restraints Third Row The outboard head restraints can be manually folded forward for improved rearward visibility. Pull the release strap to fold them forward. NOTE:

To remove the center head restraint, raise it as far as it can go. Then, push the release button and the adjustment button at the base of each post while pulling the head restraint up. To rein-

stall the head restraint, put the head restraint posts into the holes and push downward. Then, using the adjustment button, adjust the head restraint to the appropriate height. Release Straps NOTE:

The head restraints must be raised manually when occupying the third row. Do not fold if there are passengers seated in the third row seats. The head restraint in the center position can be raised and lowered for tether routing or height adjustment. Refer to Occupant Restraint Systems in Safety for further information. Adjustment Button WARNING!

ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow the re-installation instructions above prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a seat. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 55 Power Folding Third Row Head Restraints If Equipped For improved visibility, the third row outboard head restraints can be folded using the Uconnect System. Press the Controls button located on the bottom of the Uconnect display. 2 Press the Head Restraint Fold button power fold the third row head restraints. to NOTE:

The head restraints can be folded downward using the Head Restraint button or using the manual release strap. The head restraints must be raised manually when occupying the third row. Do not fold if there are passengers seated in the third row seats. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 56 56 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE STEERING WHEEL Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping lever is located left of the steering wheel at the end of the steering column. Tilt/Telescoping Lever To unlock the steering column, push the lever downward (toward the floor). To tilt the steering column, move the steering wheel upward or downward as desired. To lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull the steering wheel outward or push it inward as desired. To lock the steering column in position, push the lever upward until fully engaged. WARNING!

Do not adjust the steering column while driving. Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death. Heated Steering Wheel If Equipped The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps warm your hands in cold weather. The heated steering wheel has only one temperature setting. Once the heated steering wheel has been turned on, it will operate for an average of 80 minutes or more before automatically shutting off. This time may vary depending on the tempera-

ture of the environment. The heated steering wheel can shut off early or may not turn on when the steering wheel is already warm. The heated steering wheel control button is located within the Uconnect system. You can gain access to the control button through the climate screen or the controls screen. Press the heated steering wheel button once to turn the heating element on. Press the heated steering wheel button a second time to turn the heating element off. NOTE:

The engine must be running for the heated steering wheel to operate. Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start On models that are equipped with remote start, the heated steering wheel can be programmed to come on during a remote start through the Uconnect system. Refer to Uconnect Settings in Multimedia for further information. WARNING!

Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medica-

tion, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other phys-

ical conditions must exercise care when using the steering wheel heater. It may cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used for long periods. Do not place anything on the steering wheel that insulates against heat, such as a blanket or steering wheel covers of any type and material. This may cause the steering wheel heater to overheat. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 57 MIRRORS Inside Day/Night Mirror If Equipped A single ball joint mirror is used to allow the driver to adjust up, down and left, right. Mirror should be adjusted to center on the view through the rear window. Headlight glare can be reduced by moving the small control under the mirror to the night posi-

tion (toward the rear of the vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted while set in the day position

(toward the windshield). base of the mirror. A light to the left of the button will illuminate to indicate when the dimming feature is activated. The sensor to the right of the button does not illuminate. NOTE:

This feature is disabled when the vehicle is in REVERSE. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 57 Outside Mirrors To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s) to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror. 2 WARNING!

Vehicles and other objects seen in an outside convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are. Relying too much on side convex mirrors could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other object. Use your inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in a side convex mirror. Automatic Dimming Mirror CAUTION!

To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror. Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean. Driver's Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped The drivers outside mirror will automatically adjust for glare from vehicles behind you. This feature is controlled by the inside automatic dimming mirror and will automatically adjust for headlight glare when the inside mirror adjusts. Manual Rearview Mirror Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from vehicles behind you. You can turn the feature on or off by pushing the button at the 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 58 58 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Conversation Mirror Power Mirrors If Equipped Located in the overhead console there is a conversation mirror to view all the passengers in the vehicle. Push the panel to release the drop down mirror. Raise the mirror and push to latch it back in the stowed position. The power mirror controls are located on the driver-side door trim panel. Using the mirror control switch, push on any of the four arrows for the direction that you want the mirror to move. Left and Right side power mirror preselected positions can be controlled by the optional Driver Memory Seat Feature. Refer to Driver Memory Seat in Seats in this chapter for further information. Outside Mirrors Folding Feature All outside mirrors are hinged and may be moved either forward or rearward to resist damage. The hinges have three detent posi-

tions:

Full forward position Full rearward position Normal position Conversation Mirror Power Mirror Controls 1 Mirror Select 2 Mirror Control Switch The power mirror controls consist of mirror select buttons and a four-way mirror control switch. To adjust a mirror, push either the L (left) or R (right) to select the mirror that you want to adjust. NOTE:

A light in the selected button will illuminate indi-

cating the mirror is activated and can be adjusted. Heated Mirrors If Equipped These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This feature will be activated whenever you turn on the rear window defroster (if equipped). Refer to Climate Controls in this chapter for further information. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 59 Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse (Available With Memory Seat Only) If Equipped Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse provides automatic outside mirror positioning which will aid the drivers view of the ground rearward of the front doors. The driver's outside mirror will move slightly downward from the present position when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE. The driver's outside mirror will then return to the original position when the vehicle is shifted out of the REVERSE position. Each stored memory setting will have an associated Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse position. NOTE:

The Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse feature is not enabled when delivered from the factory. The Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse feature can be enabled or disabled through the radio touch-

screen. Refer to Uconnect Settings in Multi-

media for further information. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 59 Resetting The Power Folding Outside Mirrors You may need to reset the power folding mirrors if the following occurs:

The mirrors are accidentally blocked while folding tion The mirrors are accidentally manually folded/unfolded The mirrors come out of the unfolded posi-

2 The mirrors shake and vibrate at normal driving speeds To reset the power folding mirrors: fold and unfold them by pushing the button (this may require multiple button pushes). This resets them to their normal position. Power Folding Mirrors If Equipped The switch for the power folding mirrors is located between the power mirror switches L (left) and R (right). Push the switch once and the mirrors will fold in, pushing the switch a second time will return the mirrors to the normal driving position. Power Folding Mirror Switch NOTE:

If the vehicle speed is greater than 10 mph

(16 km/h), the folding feature will be disabled. If the mirrors are in the folded position, and vehicle speed is equal or greater than 10 mph

(16 km/h), they will automatically unfold. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 60 60 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Illuminated Vanity Mirrors If Equipped An illuminated vanity mirror is located on the sun visor. To use the mirror, rotate the sun visor down and swing the mirror cover upward. The lights turn on automatically. Closing the mirror cover turns off the lights. EXTERIOR LIGHTS Multifunction Lever The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the steering column. The multifunction lever controls the turn signals, headlight high/

low beams, and flash-to-pass functions. Headlight Switch The headlight switch is located on the left side of the instrument panel. The switch controls the operation of the headlights, parking lights, instrument panel lights, interior lights and the fog lights. Illuminated Mirror Multifunction Lever Headlight Switch From the O (off) position, rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent for parking light and instrument panel light operation. Rotate the headlight switch to the second detent for headlight, parking light and instru-

ment panel operation. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 61 Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) If Equipped The headlights or LED light bars on your vehicle will illuminate when the engine is started. This provides a constant lights on condition until the ignition is placed in the OFF position. If the parking brake is applied, the Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) will turn off. Also, if a turn signal is activated, the DRL lamp on the same side of the vehicle will turn off for the duration of the turn signal activation. Once the turn signal is no longer active, the DRL lamp will illuminate. High/Low Beam Switch When the headlights are turned on, pushing the multifunction lever toward the instrument panel will switch from low beams to high beams. Pulling back to the neutral position returns the headlights to the low beam operation. Automatic High Beam If Equipped The Automatic High Beam system provides increased forward lighting at night by automating high beam control through the use of a digital camera mounted on the windshield. This camera detects vehicle specific light and automatically switches from high beams to low beams until the approaching vehicle is out of view. NOTE:

Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and taillights of vehicles in the field of view will cause headlights to remain on longer (closer to the vehicle). Also, dirt, film and other obstruc-

tions on the windshield or camera lens will cause the system to function improperly. To Activate 1. Select Automatic High Beams ON through the Uconnect system. Refer to

"Uconnect Settings in Multimedia for further information. 2. Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the AUTO position. 3. Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch the headlights to the high beam position. Refer to Multifunction Lever in this section for further information. NOTE:

This system will not activate until the vehicle is at, or above 16 mph (25 km/h). GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 61 To Deactivate Perform either of the following steps to deacti-

vate the Automatic High Beam system. 1. Select Automatic High Beams OFF through the Uconnect System. Refer to Uconnect Settings in Multimedia for further information. 2 2. Pull the multifunction lever toward you to switch the headlights from the high beam to the low beam position. 3. Rotate the headlight switch counterclock-

wise from the AUTO to the on position. NOTE:

Once active, the Automatic High Beam system will stop functioning below 12 mph (20 km/h). Flash-To-Pass You can signal another vehicle with your head-

lights by lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This will cause the high beam head-

lights to turn on, and remain on, until the lever is released. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 62 Refer to Uconnect Settings in Multimedia for further information. Lights-On Reminder 62 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Automatic Headlights If Equipped This system automatically turns your headlights on or off based on ambient light levels. To turn the system on, turn the headlight switch to the extreme clockwise position aligning the indi-

cator with the AUTO on the headlight switch. When the system is on, the Headlight Time Delay feature is also on. This means your head-

lights will stay on for up to 90 seconds after the ignition is placed in the OFF position. To turn the Automatic System off, turn the headlight switch counterclockwise to the O (off) position. NOTE:

The engine must be running before the head-

lights will come on in the Automatic mode. Headlights On With Wipers If Equipped When your headlights are in the AUTO mode and the engine is running, the headlights will automatically turn on when the wiper system is also turned on. Headlights on when windshield wipers are on may be found on vehicles equipped with an automatic headlight system. NOTE:

The Headlights with Wipers feature can be turned on or off through the Uconnect system. Headlight Delay If Equipped This feature provides the safety of headlight illu-

mination for up to 90 seconds after exiting your vehicle. To activate the delay feature, place the ignition in the OFF position while the headlights are still on. The 90 second delay interval begins when headlight switch is turned off. If the headlights or parking lights are turned back on or the igni-

tion is placed in the ON position, the delay will be cancelled. When exiting the vehicle the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 30, 60, or 90 seconds or not remain on. To change the timer setting, select the proper setting through the Uconnect System. Refer to Uconnect Settings in Multimedia for further information. If the headlights are turned off before the igni-

tion, they will turn off in the normal manner. NOTE:

The headlights must be turned off within 45 seconds of placing the ignition in the OFF posi-

tion to activate this feature. If the headlights or the parking lights are left on after the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position, a chime will sound when the driver's door is opened. Front Fog Lights If Equipped To activate the front fog lights, turn on the parking lights or the low beam headlights and push in the headlight switch control knob. Pushing the headlight switch control knob in a second time will turn the front fog lights off. Fog Light Switch Turn Signals Battery Protection This feature provides battery protection to avoid wearing down the battery if the headlights or parking lights are left on for extended periods of time when the ignition is in the OFF position. After eight minutes of the ignition being in the OFF position and the headlight switch in any position other than OFF or AUTO, the lights will turn off automatically until the next cycle of the ignition or headlight switch. The battery protection feature will be disabled if the ignition is placed in any position other than OFF during the eight minute delay. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 63 Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights. NOTE:

If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defec-

tive outside light bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is defective. Turn Signal Warning If the vehicle electronics sense that the vehicle has traveled for about 1 mile (1.6 km) with the turn signals on, a chime will sound and a message will display in the cluster to alert the driver. Lane Change Assist If Equipped Tap the multifunction lever up or down once, without moving beyond the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash three times then automatically turn off. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 63 INTERIOR LIGHTS Courtesy/Interior Lighting The courtesy light switches are used to turn the courtesy lights on/off. 2 Courtesy Light Switches To operate the courtesy lights, push either the driver or passenger light switch. NOTE:

Before exiting the vehicle, make sure that the interior lights are turned off. This will prevent the battery from discharging once the doors are closed. If a light is left on, it will automatically be turned off approximately 10 minutes after the ignition is in the STOP/OFF position. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 64 64 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Rear Courtesy/Reading Lights If Equipped Located above the rear passengers are cour-

tesy/reading lights. The lights turn on when a front door, a sliding door or the liftgate is opened. If your vehicle is equipped with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) the lights will also turn on when the unlock button on the key fob is pushed. The courtesy lights also function as reading lights. Push the lens to turn these lights on while inside the vehicle. Push the lens a second time to turn each light off. Ambient Light Control If Equipped Rotate the ambient dimmer control upward or downward to increase or decrease the bright-

ness of the ambient light located in the door handle lights, under instrument panel lights, door map pocket lights, and cubby bin lights. With the parking lights or headlights on, rotate the instrument panel dimmer control upward or downward to increase or decrease the bright-

ness of the instrument panel. At the top detent of the instrument panel dimmer, all the interior lights will also illuminate. At the bottom most setting (extreme bottom) interior lights are turned off (dome off), and the cluster, radio and instrument lighting go to their lowest dimmable setting. Reading Lights Ambient Light/Door Handle Light Dimmer Interior Lighting Off Rotate the dimmer control on the right to the off position (extreme bottom). The interior lights will remain off when the doors or liftgate are open. Instrument Panel Dimmer Control The instrument panel dimmer control is part of the headlight switch, and is located on the drivers side of the instrument panel. Instrument Panel Dimmer Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness Feature) Rotate the instrument panel dimmer control upward to the first detent. This feature brightens all text displays such as the odom-

eter, instrument cluster display, and radio when the position lights or headlights are on. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 65 WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHERS Windshield Wiper Operation The wipers and washers are operated by a switch within the wiper lever. Rotate the switch at the end of the lever upward, to the first detent past the intermittent settings for low-speed wiper operation. Rotate the switch at the end of the lever upward to the second detent past the intermittent settings for high-speed wiper oper-

ation. To turn the windshield wipers off, rotate the switch within the lever all the way down to OFF. Washer And Wiper Controls NOTE:

Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents the windshield wiper blades from GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 65 Windshield Washers To use the washer, pull the lever rearward toward you and hold while spray is desired. If the lever is pulled while on the intermittent setting, the wipers will turn on and operate for several wipe cycles after the lever is released, and then resume the intermittent interval previ-

ously selected. If the lever is pulled while the wipers are in the off position, the wipers will operate several wipe cycles, then turn off. 2 Mist Feature Use the Mist feature when weather conditions make occasional usage of the wipers neces-

sary. Push the lever upward to the MIST position and release for a single wiping cycle. NOTE:

The mist feature does not activate the washer pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the windshield. The wash function must be used in order to spray the windshield with washer fluid. returning to the off position. If the windshield wiper switch is turned off and the blades cannot return to the off position, damage to the wiper motor may occur. WARNING!

Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could lead to a collision. You might not see other vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of the windshield during freezing weather, warm the windshield with the defroster before and during windshield washer use. Intermittent Wiper System Use the intermittent wiper when weather condi-

tions make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause between cycles desirable. Rotate the switch at the end of the wiper lever to the first detent position, and then turn the switch at the end of the lever to select the desired delay interval. There are four delay settings, which allow you to regulate the wipe interval from a minimum of one cycle every second to a maximum of approximately 36 seconds between cycles. The delay intervals will double in duration when the vehicle speed is 10 mph

(16 km/h) or less. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 66 66 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Rain Sensing Wipers If Equipped NOTE:

This feature senses rain or snowfall on the wind-

shield and automatically activates the wipers for the driver. This feature is especially useful for road splash or overspray from the wind-

shield washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate the end of the windshield wiper lever to one of the four intermittent wiper sensitivity settings to activate this feature. The sensitivity of the system is adjustable from the windshield wiper lever. Wiper sensitivity position 3 has been calibrated for best overall wiping sensitivity. If the operator desires more wiping sensitivity, they may select sensitivity position 4. If the operator desires less wiping sensitivity, they may select sensitivity positions 2 or 1. Place the windshield wiper lever in the OFF position when not using the system. The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the wiper switch is in the low or high position. The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly when ice or dried saltwater is present on the windshield. Use of Rain-X or products containing wax or silicone may reduce rain sensor perfor-

mance. The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on and off through the Uconnect System. Refer to Uconnect Settings in Multimedia for further information. The Rain Sensing system has protective features for the wiper blades and arms. It will not operate under the following conditions:

Low Temperature Wipe Inhibit The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the ignition is first placed in the ON position, when the vehicle is stationary and the outside temperature is below 32F (0C), unless the wiper control on the windshield wiper lever is moved, the vehicle speed becomes greater than 3 mph (5 km/h) or the outside temperature rises above freezing. Neutral Wipe Inhibit The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the ignition is ON, when the transmission gear selector is in the NEUTRAL position and the vehicle speed is less than 3 mph (5 km/h), unless the wiper control on the windshield wiper lever is moved, the vehicle speed is greater than 3 mph (5 km/h) or the gear selector is moved out of the NEUTRAL position. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 67 Remote Start Mode Inhibit On vehicles Rear Wiper And Washer equipped with Remote Starting system, Rain Sensing wipers are not operational when the vehicle is in the remote start mode. Once the operator is in the vehicle and has placed the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position, rain sensing wiper operation can resume, if it has been selected, and no other inhibit condi-

tions (mentioned previously) exist. Rear Window Wiper Operation Rotate the windshield wiper lever center ring upwards to operate one of two modes for the rear window wiper:

First detent intermittent mode. Second detent continuous mode. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 67 Rear Window Washer Operation Pushing the windshield wiper lever forward acti-

vates the rear window washer. If the lever is pushed while on the intermittent setting, the wipers will turn on and operate for several wipe cycles after the lever is released, and then resume the intermittent interval previously selected. If the lever is pushed while the wipers are in the off position, the wipers will operate several wipe cycles, then turn off. 2 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 68 68 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE CLIMATE CONTROLS Manual Climate Controls Overview Uconnect 4 With 7inch Display Manual Climate Controls 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 69 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 69 2 Uconnect 4/4C NAV With 8.4inch Display Manual Climate Controls 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 70 70 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Manual Climate Control Descriptions Icon Description MAX A/C Button Press and release to change the current setting, the indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is on. Performing this function again will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch into manual mode and the MAX A/C indicator will turn off. NOTE:

The MAX A/C setting is only available on the touchscreen. A/C Button Press and release to change the current setting, the indicator illuminates when A/C is on. Recirculation Button Press and release this button to change the system between recirculation mode and outside air mode. Recirculation can be used when outside conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are present. Recirculation can be used in all modes except for Defrost. Recirculation may be unavailable (button on the touchscreen greyed out) if conditions exist that could create fogging on the inside of the windshield. The A/C (air conditioning) can be deselected manually without disturbing the mode control selection. Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur. Extended use of this mode is not recommended. Front Defrost Button Press and release to change the current airflow setting to Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates when this feature is on. Air comes from the windshield and side window demist outlets. When the defrost button is selected, the blower level may increase. Use Defrost mode with maximum temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting and defogging. Performing this function will cause the Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) to switch into manual mode. If the front Defrost mode is turned off the climate system will return the previous setting. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 71 Icon Description GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 71 Rear Defrost Button Push and release the Rear Defrost Control button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An indicator will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after 10 minutes. 2 Rear Climate Control Button Press and release this button to access the rear climate controls. The indicator will illuminate when the rear climate controls are on. Driver and Passenger Temperature UP and DOWN Buttons Provides the driver and passenger with independent temperature control. Push the red button on the faceplate or touchscreen or press and slide the temperature bar towards the red arrow button on the touchscreen for warmer temperature settings. Push the blue button on the faceplate or touchscreen or press and slide the temperature bar towards the blue arrow button on the touchscreen for cooler temperature settings. SYNC Button Press the SYNC button on the touchscreen to toggle the Sync feature on/off. The SYNC indicator is illuminated when this feature is enabled. SYNC is used to synchronize the front and rear passenger temperature settings with the driver temperature setting. Changing the front or rear passenger temperature setting while in SYNC will automatically exit this feature. Pressing SYNC on the touchscreen while in the Front Climate screen synchronizes the driver and passenger temperatures only. In order to SYNC rear temperature to driver temperature, the touchscreen must be on the Rear Climate screen. NOTE:

The SYNC setting is only available on the touchscreen. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 72 72 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Icon Faceplate Blower Knob Touchscreen Blower Buttons Description Blower Control Blower Control is used to regulate the amount of air forced through the climate system. There are seven blower speeds available. The speeds can be selected using either the blower control knob on the faceplate or the buttons on the touchscreen. Faceplate: The blower speed increases as you turn the blower control knob clockwise from the lowest blower setting. The blower speed decreases as you turn the blower control knob counterclockwise. Touchscreen: Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting and the large blower icon to increase the blower setting. Blower speed can also be selected by pressing the blower bar area between the icons. Faceplate Modes Control Knob Modes Control Faceplate: Push the button in the center of the knob to change the airflow distribution mode. Panel Mode Touchscreen: Select Mode by pressing one of the Mode Buttons on the touchscreen. The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets, defrost outlets and demist outlets. The Mode settings are as follows:

Panel Mode Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction. There is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these outlets. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 73 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 73 Icon Bi-Level Mode Description Bi-Level Mode Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets. NOTE:

Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets. 2 Floor Mode Floor Mode Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets. Mix Mode Mix Mode Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demister outlets. This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield. Climate Control OFF Button Press and release this button to turn the Climate Control ON/OFF. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 74 74 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Controlling The Rear Climate Controls From The Front MTC Display/Touchscreen The Three-Zone Manual Temperature Control

(MTC) system allows for adjustment of the rear climate controls from the front MTC display/

touchscreen. Uconnect 4 Front MTC Panel Rear Control Display To change the rear system settings:

Press the "Rear Climate" button on the touch-

screen to change control to rear control mode; rear display appears. Control func-

tions now operate rear system. To return to the Front screen on the Uconnect system, press the "Front Climate" button on the touchscreen. Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Front MTC Panel Rear Control Display 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 75 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 75 Icon Description Rear Lock Button Press and release to lock out the rear manual temperature controls from adjusting the rear temperature and blower settings. Front Climate Button Press and release this button to change the display on the Uconnect system back to the Front Climate Controls. 2 Rear Passenger Temperature Up and Down Buttons Provides the rear passengers with independent temperature control. Push the up arrow button on the touchscreen to increase the temperature. Push the down arrow button on the touchscreen to decrease the temperature. When the SYNC feature is active, the passengers temperature moves up and down with the drivers temperature. SYNC Button Press the SYNC button on the touchscreen to toggle the SYNC feature on/off. The SYNC indicator is illuminated when this feature is enabled. SYNC is used to synchronize the front and rear passenger temperature settings with the driver temperature setting. Changing the front or rear passenger temperature setting while in SYNC exits this feature. NOTE:

The SYNC setting is only available on the touchscreen. Blower Control Blower Control is used to regulate the amount of air forced through the climate system. There are seven blower speeds available. Adjusting the blower causes automatic mode to switch to manual operation. The speeds can be selected using the buttons on the touchscreen. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 76 76 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Icon Panel Mode Bi-Level Mode Rear Passenger Climate Control OFF Button Press and release this button to turn the Rear Climate Controls off. Description Panel Mode Press this button on the touchscreen to change the air distribution mode to Panel Mode. In Panel Mode, air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction. There is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these outlets. Bi-Level Mode Press this button on the touchscreen to change the air distribution mode to Bi-Level Mode. In Bi-Level Mode, air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets. NOTE:

Bi-Level Mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets. Floor Mode Floor Mode Press this button on the touchscreen to change the air distribution mode to Floor Mode. In Floor Mode, air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 77 Rear Manual Temperature Control (MTC) The rear Manual Temperature Control (MTC) system has floor air outlets at the rear right side of the Third Row seats and overhead outlets at each outboard rear seating position. The system provides heated air through the floor outlets or cool, dehumidified air through the headliner outlets. The rear system temperature control buttons are located on the headliner on the passenger side of the vehicle. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 77 2 Rear Manual Climate Controls Icon Description Rear Mode Control Push this button on the Rear Climate Controls to change the air distribution mode for the rear passengers to one of the following:

Panel Mode Panel Mode Air comes from the outlets in the headliner. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air. Moving the air vanes of the outlets to one side will shut off the airflow. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 78 78 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Icon Bi-Level Mode Bi-Level Mode Air comes from both the headliner outlets and the floor outlets. Description NOTE:

In many temperature positions, the Bi-Level mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the headliner outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets. Floor Mode Floor Mode Air comes from the floor outlets. Rear Temperature Control Rear Passenger Temperature Up Button rear temperature settings are displayed in control head. Rear Passenger Temperature Down Button To change the temperature in the rear of the vehicle, push temperature control up button to raise the temperature. The To change the temperature in the rear of the vehicle, push temperature control down button to lower the temperature. The rear temperature settings are displayed in control head. Icon Description Rear Blower Controls The rear blower control can be manually set to off, or any fixed blower speed by pushing the blower control buttons. This allows the rear seat occupants to control the volume of air circulated in the rear of the vehicle. The larger of the two icons increases blower speed, whereas the smaller of the two icons decreases the blower speed. 2 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 79 Rear Climate Control/Blower Off To manually set the rear blower controls to off, press the Rear Climate Control/Blower Off button. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 79 CAUTION!

Interior air enters the Rear Automatic Temperature Control System through an intake grille, located in the floor under the passengers seats. Do not block or place objects directly in front of the inlet grille or heater outlets. The electrical system could overload causing damage to the blower motor. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 80 80 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Automatic Climate Control Overview Uconnect 4 With 7inch Display Automatic Temperature Controls 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 81 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 81 2 Uconnect 4C/4C With 8.4inch Display NAV Automatic Climate Controls 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 82 82 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Automatic Climate Control Descriptions Icon Description MAX A/C Button Press and release to change the current setting, the indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is on. Performing this function again will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch into manual mode and the MAX A/C indicator will turn off. NOTE:

The MAX A/C setting is only available on the touchscreen. A/C Button Press and release to change the current setting, the indicator illuminates when A/C is on. Recirculation Button Press and release this button to change the system between recirculation mode and outside air. Recirculation can be used when outside conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are present. Recirculation can be used in all modes. Recirculation may be unavailable (button on the touchscreen greyed out) if conditions exist that could create fogging on the inside of the windshield. The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing the mode control selection. Continuous use of Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur. Extended use of this mode if not recommended. AUTO Button Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by adjusting airflow distribution and amount. Performing this function will cause the system to switch between manual mode and automatic modes. Refer to Automatic Operation within this section for more information. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 83 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 83 Icon Description Front Defrost Button Press and release to change the current airflow setting to Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates when this feature is on. Air comes from the windshield and side window demist outlets. When the defrost button is selected, the blower level may increase. Use Defrost mode with maximum temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting and defogging. Performing this function will cause the Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) to switch into manual mode. If the Front Defrost mode is turned off the climate system will return to the previous setting. 2 Rear Defrost Button Push and release the Rear Defrost Control button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An indicator will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after 10 minutes. Rear Climate Rear Climate Control Button Press and release this button to access the rear climate controls. The indicator will illuminate when the rear climate controls are on. Driver And Passenger Temperature UP And DOWN Buttons Provides the driver and passenger with independent temperature control. Push the red button on the faceplate or touchscreen or press and slide the temperature bar towards the red arrow button on the touchscreen for warmer temperature settings. Push the blue button on the faceplate or touchscreen or press and slide the temperature bar towards the blue arrow button on the touchscreen for cooler temperature settings. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 84 84 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Icon Description SYNC Button Press the Sync button on the touchscreen to toggle the Sync feature On/Off. The Sync indicator is illuminated when this feature is enabled. SYNC is used to synchronize the front and rear passenger temperature settings. Changing the front or rear passenger temperature setting while in SYNC will automatically exit this feature. NOTE:

The SYNC setting is only available on the touchscreen. Faceplate Knob Touchscreen Buttons Blower Control Blower Control is used to regulate the amount of air forced through the climate system. There are seven blower speeds available. The speeds can be selected using either the blower control knob on the faceplate or the buttons on the touchscreen. Faceplate: The blower speed increases as you turn the blower control knob clockwise from the lowest blower setting. The blower speed decreases as you turn the blower control knob counterclockwise. Touchscreen: Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting and the large blower icon to increase the blower setting. Blower speed can also be selected by pressing the blower bar area between the icons. Modes Control Panel Mode Modes Control The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets, defrost outlets and demist outlets. The Mode settings are as follows:

Faceplate: Push the button in the center of the knob to change the airflow distribution mode. Touchscreen: Select Mode by pressing one of the Mode Buttons on the touchscreen. Panel Mode Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction. There is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these outlets. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 85 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 85 Icon Bi-Level Mode Description Bi-Level Mode Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets. NOTE:

Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets. 2 Floor Mode Floor Mode Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets. Mix Mode Mix Mode Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demister outlets. This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield. Climate Control OFF Button Press and release this button to turn the Climate Control ON/OFF. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 86 86 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Controlling The Rear Climate Controls From The Front ATC PanelIf Equipped The Three-Zone Automatic Temperature Control

(ATC) system allows for adjustment of the rear climate controls from the front ATC panel. To change the rear system settings:

Press the "Rear Climate" button on the touch-

screen to change control to rear control mode, the rear display appears. Control func-

tions now operate rear system. To return to the Front screen on the Uconnect system, press the "Front Climate" or Done button on the touchscreen. Uconnect 4 Front ATC Panel Rear Control Display Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Front ATC Panel Rear Control Display Icon Description Rear Auto Button Automatically controls the rear interior cabin temperature by adjusting airflow distribution and amount. Performing this function causes the system to switch between manual mode and automatic modes. Refer to Automatic Operation within this section for more information. Rear Lock Button Press and release to lock out the rear manual temperature controls from adjusting the rear temperature and blower settings. Front Climate Button Press and release this button to change the display on the Uconnect system back to the Front Climate Controls. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 87 Icon Description Rear Passenger Temperature Up And Down Buttons Provides the front occupants with the ability to control the rear temperature. Push the up arrow button on the touchscreen to increase the temperature. Push the down arrow button on the touchscreen to decrease the temperature. When the SYNC feature is active, the passengers temperature will move up and down with the drivers temperature. 2 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 87 SYNC Button Press the SYNC button on the touchscreen to toggle the SYNC feature on/off. The SYNC indicator is illuminated when this feature is enabled. SYNC is used to synchronize the front and rear passenger temperature settings with the driver temperature setting. Changing the front or rear passenger temperature/mode/blower settings while in SYNC will automatically exit this feature. NOTE:

The SYNC setting is only available on the touchscreen. Blower Control Blower Control is used to regulate the amount of air forced through the climate system. There are seven blower speeds available. Adjusting the blower causes automatic mode to switch to manual operation. The speeds can be selected using the buttons on the touchscreen. Rear Passenger Climate Control OFF Button Press and release this button to turn the Rear Climate Controls off. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 88 88 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Icon Panel Mode Description Panel Mode Press this button on the touchscreen to change the air distribution mode to Panel Mode. In Panel Mode, air comes from the outlets in the headliner. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air. Moving the air vanes of the outlets to one side will shut off the airflow. Bi-Level Mode Bi-Level Mode Press this button on the touchscreen to change the air distribution mode to Bi-Level Mode. In Bi-Level Mode, air comes from both the headliner outlets and the floor outlets. NOTE:

Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets. Floor Mode Floor Mode Press this button on the touchscreen to change the air distribution mode to Floor Mode. In Floor Mode, air comes from the floor outlets. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 89 Rear Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) If Equipped The rear Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) system has floor air outlets underneath the passengers seats, and overhead outlets at each outboard rear seating position. The system provides heated air through the floor outlets or cool, dehumidified air through the headliner outlets. Rear second row occupants can only adjust the rear ATC control when the Rear Temperature Lock button is turned off. The rear ATC system is located in the headliner, on the passenger side of the vehicle. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 89 2. ATC is selected by pushing the AUTO button. Once the desired temperature is displayed, the ATC System will automatically achieve and maintain that comfort level. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is not necessary to change the settings. You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to function automatically. 2 Rear Automatic Climate Controls NOTE:

1. Adjust the rear blower, rear temperature and the rear modes to suit your comfort needs. It is not necessary to move the temperature settings. The system automatically adjusts the temperature, mode and fan speed to provide comfort as quickly as possible. Icon Description Rear Mode Control Push this button on the Rear Climate Hard Controls to change the air distribution mode for the rear passengers to one of the following:

Panel Mode Panel Mode Air comes from the outlets in the headliner. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air. Moving the air vanes of the outlets to one side will shut off the airflow. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 90 90 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Icon Bi-Level Mode Bi-Level Mode Air comes from both the headliner outlets and the floor outlets. Description NOTE:

In many temperature positions, the Bi-Level mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the headliner outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets. Floor Mode Floor Mode Air comes from the floor outlets. Rear Temperature Control Rear Passenger Temperature Up Button To change the temperature in the rear of the vehicle, push temperature control up button to raise the temperature. The rear temperature settings are displayed in control head. Rear Passenger Temperature Down Button To change the temperature in the rear of the vehicle, push temperature control down button to lower the temperature. The rear temperature settings are displayed in control head. Rear Blower Control The rear blower control can be manually set to off, or any fixed blower speed by pushing the blower control buttons. This allows the rear seat occupants to control the volume of air circulated in the rear of the vehicle. The larger of the two icons increases blower speed, whereas the smaller of the two icons decreases the blower speed.

 

 

20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 91 Icon Description AUTO Button Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by adjusting airflow distribution and amount. Performing this function will cause the system to switch between manual mode and automatic modes. Refer to Automatic Operation within this section for more information. 2 Rear Climate Control/Blower Off To manually set the rear blower controls to off, press the Rear Climate Control/Blower Off button. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 91 Climate Control Functions Air Conditioning (A/C) The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator to manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning system. When in A/C mode with the ATC set to a cool temperature, dehumidified air flows through the air outlets. If Economy mode is desired, push the A/C button to turn off the A/C mode in the Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) display and deactivate the A/C system. NOTE:

If the system is in Mix or Defrost Mode, the A/C can be turned off, but the A/C system shall remain active to prevent fogging of the windows. If not operating in AUTO mode, the system will not automatically sense the presence of fog, mist or ice on the windshield. Defrost Mode must be manually selected to clear the windshield and side glass. If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass, select Defrost Mode and adjust blower speed if needed. Recirculation For Automatic Temperature Control When outside air contains smoke, odors, or high humidity, or if rapid cooling is desired, you may wish to recirculate interior air by pressing the Recirculation control button. The recircula-

tion indicator will illuminate when this button is selected. Press the button a second time to turn off the Recirculation mode and allow outside air into the vehicle. NOTE:

In cold weather, use of recirculation mode may lead to excessive window fogging. The recirculation feature may be unavailable (button on the touch-

screen greyed out) if conditions exist that could create fogging on the inside of the windshield. On systems with Manual Climate Controls, the Recir-

culation mode is not allowed in Defrost Mode to improve window clearing operation. Recirculation will be disabled automatically if this mode is selected. Attempting to use Recirculation while in this mode will cause the LED in the control button to blink and then turn off. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 92 92 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) If Equipped Automatic Operation 1. Push the AUTO button on the faceplate, or the AUTO button on the touchscreen on the Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) Panel. 2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like the system to maintain by adjusting the driver and passenger temperature control buttons. Once the desired temperature is displayed, the system will achieve and auto-

matically maintain that comfort level. 3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is not necessary to change the settings. You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to function automatically. NOTE:

It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically adjusts the temperature, mode, and blower speed to provide comfort as quickly as possible. The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric units by selecting the U.S./Metric customer-programmable feature. Refer to the Uconnect Settings in Multimedia for further information. To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic mode during cold start-ups, the blower fan will remain on low until the engine warms up. The blower will increase in speed and transition into Auto mode. Manual Operation Override This system offers a full complement of manual override features. The AUTO symbol in the front Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) display will be turned off when the system is being used in the manual mode. Operating Tips NOTE:

Refer to the chart at the end of this section for suggested control settings for various weather conditions. Summer Operation The engine cooling system must be protected with a high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect against engine overheating. OAT coolant

(conforming to MS.90032) is recommended. Refer to Fluids And Lubricants in Technical Specifications for proper coolant selection. Winter Operation To ensure the best possible heater and defroster performance, make sure the engine cooling system is functioning properly and the proper amount, type, and concentration of coolant is used. Refer to Fluids And Lubri-

cants in Technical Specifications for proper coolant selection. Use of the air Recirculation mode during Winter months is not recom-

mended, because it may cause window fogging. Vacation/Storage Before you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes, in fresh air with the blower setting on high. This will ensure adequate system lubri-

cation to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 93 Window Fogging Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild, rainy, and/or humid weather. To clear the windows, select Defrost or Mix mode and increase the front blower speed. Do not use the Recirculation mode without A/C (air condi-

tioning) for long periods, as fogging may occur. CAUTION!

Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the heating elements:

Use care when washing the inside of the rear window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water. Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window. Keep all objects a safe distance from the window. Outside Air Intake Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In Winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice, slush, and snow. A/C Air Filter The Climate Control system filters out dust and pollen from the air. Refer to an authorized dealer for filter replacement instructions. WEATHER CONTROL SETTINGS Hot Weather And Set the mode control Vehicle Interior Is Very Hot

, to on, and blower on high. Roll down the windows for a minute to flush out the hot air. Adjust the controls as needed to achieve comfort. Operating Tips Chart Cold Weather GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 93 WEATHER Warm Weather Cool Sunny Cool & Humid Conditions CONTROL SETTINGS on and set Turn the mode control to the position. 2 Operate in position. Set the mode control to on and turn to keep windows clear. Set the mode control to the position. If windshield fogging starts to occur, move the control to the position. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 94 94 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE WINDOWS Power Windows You can control either the front or rear windows using controls located on the driver's door trim panel. The driver may lock out the rear power windows by pushing the bar control just below the power window controls. The controls will operate only when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN or ACC position and during power accessory delay. Drivers Power Window Controls 1 Power Window Lockout Switch (If Equipped) 2 Rear Passenger Window Controls 3 Front Driver And Passenger Window Controls Auto Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection If Equipped The front driver and front passenger controls may be equipped with an Auto Up feature. Lift the window control fully upward to the second detent, release, and the window will go up auto-

matically. To stop the window from going all the way up during the Auto Up operation, push down on the control briefly. To close the window part way, lift the window control to the first detent and release when you want the window to stop. NOTE:

If the window runs into any obstacle during auto-closure, it will reverse direction and then go back down. Remove the obstacle and use the window control again to close the window. Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger the auto reverse function unexpect-

edly during auto-closure. If this happens, pull the control lightly to the first detent and hold to close window manually. Front Passenger Power Door Controls 1 Window Open/Close 2 Power Door Locks NOTE:

Power Window controls will also remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch has been placed in the OFF position, depending upon the accessory delay setting. Opening a front door will cancel this feature. There is a single control on the front passengers door trim panel which operates the passenger door window and a set of controls that lock and unlock all doors. The controls will operate only when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN or ACC position and during power accessory delay. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 95 WARNING!

There is no anti-pinch protection when the window is almost closed. To avoid personal injury be sure to clear your arms, hands, fingers and all objects from the window path before closing. Auto Up Reset If Equipped To reactivate the Auto Up feature, perform the following steps after vehicle power is restored:

1. Pull the window control up to close the window completely and continue to hold the control up for an additional two seconds after the window is closed. 2. Push the window control down firmly to the second detent to open the window completely and continue to hold the control down for an additional two seconds after the window is fully open. Sliding Side Door Power Window Control If Equipped Second row passengers may open and close the sliding door window by a single control on the door handle assembly. The controls will operate only when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN or ACC position and during power accessory delay. NOTE:

The controls will not operate if the driver has activated the Power Window Lockout. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 95 NOTE:

The sliding door windows do not fully open, stopping several inches above the window sill. Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the percep-

tion of pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down, or the sunroof

(if equipped) in certain open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the rear windows are open and buffeting occurs, open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting. 2 Sliding Door Power Window Control 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 96 96 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE PANORAMIC SUNROOF IF EQUIPPED The Panoramic Sunroof switch is located to the left between the sun visors on the overhead console. The Power Shade switch is located to the right between the sun visors on the overhead console. Panoramic Sunroof And Power Shade Switches 1 Sunroof Switch 2 Power Shade Switch WARNING!

Opening Sunroof Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to children. Do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the power sunroof while operating the power sunroof switch. Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death. In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could also be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are also properly secured. Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof. Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any object, to project through the sunroof opening. Injury may result. Express Mode Push the open switch and release it within one second. The sunroof will open automatically from any position and stop at the full open posi-

tion. This is called Express Open. During Express Open operation, any other actuation of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof. NOTE:

If the sunshade is in the closed position when the open switch is pushed, the sunshade will automatically cycle to the halfway open position prior to the sunroof opening. Manual Mode Push and hold the open switch and the sunroof will open to the full open position. Any release of the switch will stop the movement. The sunroof will remain in a partially opened condition until the sunroof open switch is pushed again. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 97 Venting Sunroof Express Push and release the "Vent" button within one second and the sunroof will open to the vent position. This is called Express Vent, and it will occur regardless of sunroof position. NOTE:

If the sunshade is in the closed position when the vent switch is pushed, the sunshade will automati-

cally cycle to the halfway open position prior to the sunroof opening to the Vent position. Closing Sunroof Express Mode Push the close switch and release it within one second and the sunroof will close automatically from any position. The sunroof will close fully and stop automatically. This is called Express Close. During Express Close operation, any other actuation of the switch will stop the sunroof. Manual Mode To close the sunroof, push and hold the close switch. Any release of the switch will stop the movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially closed condition until the sunroof switch is pushed again. Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the percep-

tion of pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down, or the sunroof

(if equipped) in certain open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window. Power Sunshade If Equipped The sunshade has two programmed open posi-

tions: half-open and full-open. When opening the sunshade from the closed position, the sunshade will always stop at the half-open posi-

tion regardless of express or manual open oper-

ation. The switch must be actuated again to continue to the full-open position. Opening Power Shade Express Mode Push the sunshade open switch and release it within one second and the sunshade will open to the half-open position and stop automatically. Push and release the sunshade open switch again from the half-open position and the sunshade will 2 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 97 open to the full-open position and stop automati-

cally. This is called Express Open. During Express open operation, any movement of the sunshade switch will stop the shade. Opening Power Shade Manual Mode Push and hold the sunshade open switch and the shade will open to the half-open position and stop automatically. Push and hold the sunshade open switch again and the shade will open automatically to the full-open position. Any release of the switch will stop the movement and the sunshade will remain in a partially opened condition until the switch is pushed again. Closing Power Shade Express Mode Push the sunshade close switch and release it within one second and the shade will close auto-

matically from any position. If the sunroof is completely closed the shade will close fully and stop automatically. This is called Express Close. During Express Close operation, any other actua-

tion of the switch will stop the shade. NOTE:

If the sunroof is open, the shade will close to the half-open position. Pushing the shade close button again will automatically close both the sunroof and shade completely. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 98 98 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Closing Power Shade Manual Mode To close the shade, push and hold the sunshade close switch. Any release of the switch will stop the movement and the shade will remain in a partially closed condition until the switch is pushed again. Pinch Protect Feature This feature will detect an obstruction in the closing of the sunroof during the Express Close operation. If an obstruction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruction if this occurs. NOTE:

If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result in Pinch Protect reversals, Pinch Protect will disable and the sunroof must be closed in Manual Mode. Sunroof Maintenance Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the glass panel. Ignition Off Operation The power sunroof switch will remain active for up to approximately 10 minutes after the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position. Opening either front door will cancel this feature. NOTE:

Ignition off time is programmable through the Uconnect System. Refer to Uconnect Settings in Multimedia for further information. HOOD Opening If applicable, refer to the Hybrid Supplement for additional information. The hood release lever (to open the primary latch) and safety latch (to open the secondary latch) must be released to open the hood. 1. Pull the hood release lever located under the drivers side of the instrument panel. Hood Release Lever 2. Move to the outside of the front of the vehicle. 3. Push the safety latch release lever toward the passenger side of the vehicle. The safety latch is located behind the center front edge of the hood. Safety Latch Release Lever Location 4. Remove the support rod from the locking tab and insert it into the seat located on the underside of the hood. NOTE:

Before lifting the hood, check that the wiper arms are not in motion and not in the lifted position. While lifting the hood, use both hands. Vehicle must be at a stop and the transmis-

sion must be in PARK. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 99 Closing If applicable, refer to the Hybrid Supplement for additional information. 1. Hold up the hood with one hand and with the other hand remove the support rod from its seat and reinsert it into the locking tab. To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to close it. Lower hood to approximately 12 inches (30 cm) and drop the hood to close. Make sure hood is fully closed for both latches. Never drive vehicle unless hood is fully closed, with both latches engaged. CAUTION!

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 99 unlock and release the liftgate, with a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the liftgate. 2 2. Lower the hood to approximately 12 inches

(30 cm) from the engine compartment and drop it. Make sure that the hood is completely closed. LIFTGATE Opening WARNING!

Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision. Failure to follow this warning could result in serious injury or death. To Unlock/Enter The Liftgate The liftgate may be released in several ways:

Overhead console liftgate button Key fob Outside handle Push the liftgate button on the key fob twice within five seconds to release the liftgate. The key fob and the overhead console button will release the liftgate when the liftgate is locked. The outside handle requires the liftgate to be unlocked. If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, pulling the outside handle will Unlock Liftgate Using Passive Entry NOTE:

If 1st Press of key fob Unlocks All Doors is programmed in Uconnect Settings, all doors will unlock with a Passive Entry handle activation. If 1st Press of key fob Unlocks Driver Door is programmed in Uconnect Settings, the liftgate will only unlock with handle activation. Refer to Uconnect Settings in Multimedia for further information. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 100 100 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Closing Power Liftgate If Equipped To Close The Liftgate Grasp the liftgate closing handle and initiate lowering the liftgate. Release the handle when the liftgate takes over the closing effort. To Lock The Vehicle With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft

(1.5 m) of the liftgate, pushing the Passive Entry lock button located to the right of the outside handle will lock the vehicle. The power liftgate may be opened or closed in several ways:

Overhead console liftgate button Key fob Outside handle (opens liftgate only) Button just inside the liftgate on the upper left trim (when liftgate is open) Hands-Free Liftgate (if equipped) opens lift-

WARNING!

gate only Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep the liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle. If you are required to drive with the liftgate open, make sure that all windows are closed, and the climate control blower switch is set at high speed. Do not use the recirculation mode. Using the above ways:

When the liftgate is fully closed, the liftgate will open close reverse When the liftgate is fully open, the liftgate will When the liftgate is moving, the liftgate will Push the Power Liftgate button on the overhead console to open or close the liftgate. Push the liftgate button on the key fob twice within five seconds to open or close the liftgate. Overhead Console Power Switches 1 Liftgate 2 Right Sliding Door 3 Sliding Door Power Off 4 Left Sliding Door The key fob and the overhead console button will operate the liftgate when the liftgate is locked. The outside handle requires the liftgate to be unlocked. If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, depressing the touch pad on the outside handle or Hands-Free Liftgate foot acti-

vation (if equipped) will unlock and open the lift-

gate, with a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the liftgate handle. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 101 NOTE:

To open the liftgate, the Hands-Free Liftgate foot activation (if equipped) requires a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the door handle. If 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks All Doors is programmed in Uconnect Settings, all doors will unlock with a Passive Entry hands-free activation. If 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks Driver Door is programmed in Uconnect Settings, the liftgate will only unlock with hands-free activation. Tones are sounded and the turn signals are flashed with liftgate movements. These alerts can be turned on or off in Uconnect Settings. Refer to Uconnect Settings in Multimedia for further information. To Close The Liftgate The liftgate can also be closed using the Rear Interior Power Liftgate button (if equipped), located in the upper left trim in the liftgate opening. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 101 Hands-Free Liftgate If Equipped 2 Hands-Free Liftgate Activation Zone To open the liftgate using hands-free activation, use a straight in and out kicking motion under the vehicle activation zone in the general loca-

tion below the liftgate door handle. Do not move your foot sideways or in a sweeping motion or the sensors may not detect the motion. Rear Interior Power Liftgate Switch Lock The Vehicle With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft

(1.5 m) of the liftgate, pushing the Passive Entry lock button located to the right of the outside handle will lock the vehicle. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 102 102 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Vehicles Equipped With A Trailer Tow Package NOTE:

If your vehicle is equipped with the Trailer Tow Package, the hands-free activation zone(s) for the Power Liftgate will be located on the left and right side of the receiver. Use a straight kicking motion under either activation zone to open the Hands-Free Liftgate. Hands-Free Liftgate Trailer Tow Activation Zones When a valid kicking motion is completed, the liftgate will chime, the hazard lights will flash and the liftgate will open after approximately one second. This assumes all options are enabled in the radio. NOTE:

To open the Hands-Free Liftgate requires a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the door handle. If a valid Passive Entry key fob is not within 5 ft (1.5 m), the liftgate will not respond to any kicks. CAUTION!

The Hands-Free Liftgate feature may be turned on or off in Uconnect Settings. Refer to Uconnect Settings in Multimedia for further information. The Hands-Free Liftgate feature should be turned off during Jacking, Tire Changing, and Vehicle Service. system will automatically stop. If this occurs, the liftgate must be operated manually. The power liftgate will release, but not power open, in temperatures below 12F

(24C). Be sure to remove any buildup of snow or ice from the liftgate before opening the liftgate. If the liftgate is left open for an extended period of time, the liftgate may need to be closed manually to reset power liftgate func-

tionality. NOTE:

The Hands-Free Liftgate will only operate when the transmission is in PARK. If anything obstructs the Hands-Free Liftgate while it is opening or closing, the liftgate will automatically reverse to the closed position, provided it meets sufficient resistance. There are pinch sensors attached to the side of the liftgate opening. Light pressure anywhere along these strips will cause the liftgate to return to the open position. If the power liftgate encounters multiple obstructions within the same cycle, the WARNING!

Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep the liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle. If you are required to drive with the liftgate open, make sure that all windows are closed, and the climate control blower switch is set at high speed. Do not use the recirculation mode. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 103 Gas props support the liftgate in the open posi-

tion. However, because the gas pressure drops with temperature, it may be necessary to assist the props when opening the liftgate in cold weather. NOTE:

Allow the power system to open the liftgate. Manually pushing or pulling the liftgate may activate the liftgate obstacle detection feature and stop the power operation or reverse its direction. WARNING!

During power operation, personal injury or cargo damage may occur. Ensure the liftgate travel path is clear. Make sure the liftgate is closed and latched before driving away. Cargo Area Features Cargo Area Storage When the third row seats are not in the stowed position, there is a large area for cargo storage. Rear Cargo Area NOTE:

With all rear seats stowed or removed, 4 x 8 ft

(1.2 x 2.4 m) sheets of building material will fit on the vehicle floor with the liftgate closed. The front seats must be moved slightly forward of the rearmost position. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 103 Stow n Vac Integrated Vacuum If Equipped Your vehicle may be equipped with an inte-

grated vacuum system. This vacuum is for in-vehicle use only and should only be used on dry materials and on in-vehicle surfaces. It is located in the rear trim panel behind the sliding door on the drivers side of the vehicle. IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS Read all instructions before using. When using your vacuum, basic precautions should be followed, including the following:

2 WARNING!

Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-

tended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.

(Continued) 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 104 104 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to chil-

dren, and do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in either ACC mode or engine running (ON) unless you are using the vacuum system. Be aware a child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle when the vacuum system is in use. ALWAYS push ignition button to place igni-

tion in the OFF mode when finished using the vacuum system. WARNING!

To reduce the risk of fire, serious injury or death:

Do not use vacuum while vehicle is in motion or while driving. Do not vacuum wet surfaces or any liquids. Do not use to vacuum up anything outside of the vehicle.

(Continued) Do not vacuum any flammable liquids, such as gasoline, or use around explosive vapors. Vapors from flammable liquids may form an explosive mixture with air and can be ignited by heat, sparks, or flames. Vapors may travel to a source of ignition and explode. Do not vacuum anything that is burning or smoking, such as cigarettes, matches, or hot ashes/embers. Do not allow to be used as a toy. Close attention is necessary when used by or near children. Do not leave the vacuum running while unattended. Use only as described in this manual. Use only attachments provided with your vehicle. Do not put any object into openings. Do not use with any opening blocked; keep free of dust, lint, hair, and anything that may reduce air flow.

(Continued) Do not vacuum toxic material such as chlo-

rine bleach, ammonia, drain cleaner, etc. Do not vacuum hard or sharp objects such as glass, nails, screws, coins, etc. Keep hair, loose clothing, fingers, and all parts of body away from openings and moving parts. Only use with filter in place. Periodically check that the filter is in place and in good condition. WARNING!

This equipment incorporates parts such as switches, motors, or the like that tend to produce arcs or sparks that can cause an explosion. When using your vacuum near gasoline-dispensing equipment or service stations, park vehicle at least 20 ft (6 m) away from the exterior enclosure of any dispensing pump. The vacuum is mounted more than 18 inches (45 cm) above ground level in your vehicle. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 105 1. Before Using Vacuum:

Accessory (ACC) Mode Operation - For up to 10 minutes of operation Always apply the parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK, and push ignition button to place ignition in Accessory (ACC) mode. The engine will not be running in this mode. Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to children. NOTE:

The vacuum system will run for 10 minutes off battery power and then the vacuum will shut down. A low battery indication light (LOW PWR) located below the vacuum nozzle storage loca-

tion will come on one minute before the vacuum shuts down. Engine Running (ON) Operation - For more than 10 minutes of operation Position vehicle outdoors and fully open all side windows. Always apply the parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK, and leave engine running. WARNING!

Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases can cause serious injury or death. Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning:

Do not inhale exhaust gases. Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or confined area. Always position vehicle outdoors and fully open all side windows before using vacuum system with the engine running. Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal conditions repaired promptly. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 105 3. Install desired attachment if needed. 2 Front Storage Compartments 1 Vacuum Nozzle Storage Location 2 Attachment Compartment NOTE:

To access crevice or upholstery attachments, open the front Attachment Compartment. 2. Unclip the vacuum nozzle and pull to extend Crevice Tool Able to reach into tight vacuum hose from the storage location. NOTE:

The hose can reach every corner of the vehicle floor. spaces including the seat latches located in the floor. Upholstery Tool Use to agitate dirt and debris from carpets and seats. This tool can also be used to pick up pet hair. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 106 106 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Hose Extension Use to add another 12 ft (3.6 m) of usable length to the vacuum hose. Hose extension is located in the upper access panel behind the third row seat on the drivers side. 4. Push the vacuum on/off button located under the vacuum nozzle storage location. Use vacuum as needed. NOTE:

When the vacuum is ON, the LED indi-

cator on the on/off button will illuminate. When the vacuum is OFF, the LED indi-

cator will also be off. After nine minutes of operation in ACC mode (engine not running), the Low Power Indicator Light (LOW PWR) will illu-

minate. WARNING! (Continued) Do not vacuum any flammable liquids, such as gasoline, or use around explosive vapors. Vapors from flammable liquids may form an explosive mixture with air and can be ignited by heat, sparks, or flames. Vapors may travel to a source of ignition and explode. Do not vacuum anything that is burning or smoking, such as cigarettes, matches, or hot ashes/embers. Do not allow to be used as a toy. Close attention is necessary when used by or near children. Do not leave the vacuum running while unattended. Use only as described in this manual. Use only attachments provided with your vehicle. Do not put any object into openings. Do not use with any opening blocked; keep free of dust, lint, hair, and anything that may reduce air flow.

(Continued) Power Buttons 1 Low Power Indicator Light 2 On/Off Button WARNING!

For in vehicle use ONLY. To reduce the risk of fire, serious injury or death:

Do not use vacuum while vehicle is in motion or while driving. Do not vacuum wet surfaces or any liquids. Do not use to vacuum up anything outside of the vehicle.

(Continued) 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 107 WARNING! (Continued) Do not vacuum toxic material such as chlo-

rine bleach, ammonia, drain cleaner, etc. Do not vacuum hard or sharp objects such as glass, nails, screws, coins, etc. Keep hair, loose clothing, fingers, and all parts of body away from openings and moving parts. Only use with filter in place. Periodically check that the filter is in place and in good condition. WARNING!

This equipment incorporates parts such as switches, motors, or the like that tend to produce arcs or sparks that can cause an explosion. When using your vacuum near gasoline-dispensing equipment or service stations, park vehicle at least 20 ft (6 m) away from the exterior enclosure of any dispensing pump. The vacuum is mounted more than 18 inches (45 cm) above ground level in your vehicle. 5. When finished, push power button to turn vacuum off and store vacuum hose and any attachments. 6. Before exiting the vehicle:

If the ignition is in the ACC position, push the START/STOP ignition button to place ignition in the OFF position, remove key fob from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle. If the engine is running, raise all of the windows, push the START/STOP ignition button to place ignition in the OFF posi-

tion, remove key fob from the vehicle, close all of the doors and the liftgate and lock the vehicle. 2 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 107 Vacuum Troubleshooting DO NOT use with any opening blocked. If an object becomes lodged in the hose, attempt to fully extend the hose in a straight line while the vacuum motor is running. If this does not dislodge the object, turn the vacuum OFF and remove the hose from the vehicle following the removal instructions below. If the filter is clogged, follow the emptying debris bin procedure and lightly tap the filter on the collection bin to remove any collected debris from the filter. Both the bin and the filter can be rinsed with water if needed. To avoid mold and stale odors, allow both to dry completely before reinstalling in your vehicle. If the filter has tears, holes or other damage and needs to be replaced, please contact an authorized dealer. If there are any other issues with your vacuum, contact an authorized dealer. Your vacuum has no user serviceable parts. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 108 108 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Debris Bin The debris bin is located behind the lower access panel behind the third row seat on the drivers side. To Empty 1. Push power button to turn vacuum OFF. 2. Open the lower access panel by pulling the finger grip towards you and then pull down-

ward. 3. Twist the release knob counterclockwise and pull the bin towards you. Hose Access Port The hose access port is located behind the upper access panel behind the third row seat on the drivers side. To Remove Vacuum Hose For Cleaning Debris Bin Release Knob 4. Remove the filter and dump the debris in a trash can. Lightly tap the filter on the collec-

tion bin to remove loose debris from the filter. If the filter is clogged from extended use, have the filter replaced by an autho-

rized dealer. Vacuum System Access Panels 1 Upper Access Panel 2 Lower Access Panel 1 Upper Access Panel 2 Lower Access Panel Vacuum System Access Panels 5. Reverse the procedure to reinstall. NOTE:

The debris bin must be fully installed and locked for the vacuum to function properly. 1. Unclip the hose from the hose access port located in the rear of the vehicle by pushing the yellow vacuum hose release lever with right thumb and lifting the hose with index finger. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 109 2. Return to vacuum nozzle storage location located behind the sliding door. 3. Grab the vacuum nozzle and gently pull the hose out through vacuum nozzle storage location. 4. Shake the hose to remove any objects stuck in the hose. Take care not to perforate the hose while attempting to dislodge any objects. 5. Reverse the procedure to reinstall and clip the hose into place. GARAGE DOOR OPENER IF EQUIPPED HomeLink replaces up to three hand-held transmitters that operate devices such as garage door openers, motorized gates, lighting or home security systems. The HomeLink unit is powered by your vehicles 12 Volt battery. The HomeLink buttons, located on the drivers sunvisor, designate the three different Home-

Link channels. The HomeLink indicator is located above the center button. HomeLink Buttons/Overhead Console NOTE:

HomeLink is disabled when the Vehicle Secu-

rity Alarm is active. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 109 Before You Begin Programming HomeLink Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage before you begin programming. For more efficient programming and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal it is recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of the device that is being programmed to the HomeLink system. To erase the channels, place the ignition in the ON/RUN position, and push and hold the two outside HomeLink buttons (I and III) for up to 20 seconds or until the orange indicator flashes. 2 NOTE:

Erasing all channels should only be performed when programming HomeLink for the first time. Do not erase channels when programming additional buttons. If you have any problems, or require assistance, please call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at HomeLink.com for information or assistance. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 110 110 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Programming A Rolling Code Garage door openers that were manufactured after 1995 can be identified by the LEARN or TRAIN button located where the hanging antenna is attached to the garage door opener. NOTE:

It is NOT the button that is normally used to open and close the door. The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer. Training The Garage Door Opener 1 Door Opener 2 Training Button To program these kinds of garage door openers, proceed as follows:

1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position. 2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the Home-

Link button you wish to program while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view. 3. Push and hold the HomeLink button you want to program while you push and hold the hand-held transmitter button. 4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indicator light. The HomeLink indi-

cator will flash slowly and then rapidly after HomeLink has received the frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release both buttons after the indicator light changes from slow to rapid. 5. On the garage door opener (in the garage), locate the LEARN or TRAINING button. This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the garage door opener/device motor. Firmly push and release the LEARN or TRAINING button. On some garage door openers/devices there may be a light that blinks when the garage door opener/device is in the LEARN/TRAIN mode. NOTE:

You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next step after the LEARN button has been pushed. 6. Return to the vehicle and push the programmed HomeLink button twice

(holding the button for two seconds each time). If the garage door opener/device acti-

vates, programming is complete. NOTE:

If the garage door opener/device does not acti-

vate, push the button a third time (for two seconds) to complete the training. To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons, repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT erase the channels. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 111 Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button

(Rolling Code) To reprogram a channel that has been previ-

ously trained, follow these steps:

1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position. 2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not release the button. 3. Press and hold the HomeLink button you want to program while you press and hold the hand-held transmitter button. 4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indicator light. The HomeLink indi-

cator will flash slowly and then rapidly after HomeLink has received the frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release both buttons after the indicator light changes from slow to rapid. 3. Without releasing the button proceed with Programming A Rolling Code step 2 and follow all remaining steps. 5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink button and observe the indicator light. Programming A Non-Rolling Code For programming garage door openers manu-

factured before 1995. 1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position. 2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink button you wish to program while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view. If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is complete and the garage door/device should activate when the HomeLink button is pressed. To program the two remaining Home-

Link buttons, repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT erase the channels. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 111 Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button

(Non-Rolling Code) To reprogram a channel that has been previ-

ously trained, follow these steps:

1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position. 2 2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink button until the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not release the button. 3. Without releasing the button, proceed with Programming A Non-Rolling Code step 2 and follow all remaining steps. Canadian/Gate Operator Programming For programming transmitters in Canada/

United States that require the transmitter signals to time-out after several seconds of transmission. Canadian radio frequency laws require trans-

mitter signals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of transmission which may not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to time-out in the same manner. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 112 112 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling process to prevent possible overheating of the garage door or gate motor. NOTE:

1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position. 2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink button you wish to program while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view. 3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink button, while you press and release

(cycle) your hand-held transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink has success-

fully accepted the frequency signal. The indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when fully trained. 4. Watch for the HomeLink indicator to change flash rates. When it changes, it is programmed. It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage door may open and close while you are program-

ming. If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is complete and the garage door/device should activate when the HomeLink button is pressed. To program the two remaining HomeLink buttons, repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT erase the channels. If you unplugged the garage door opener/

device for programming, plug it back in at this time. Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button

(Canadian/Gate Operator) To reprogram a channel that has been previ-

ously trained, follow these steps:

2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink button until the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not release the button. 5. Press and hold the programmed Home-

Link button and observe the indicator light. 3. Without releasing the button, proceed with Canadian/Gate Operator Programming step 2 and follow all remaining steps. Using HomeLink To operate, push and release the programmed HomeLink button. Activation will now occur for the programmed device (i.e. garage door opener, gate operator, security system, entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.). The hand-held transmitter of the device may also be used at any time. Security It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn in your vehicle. To do this, push and hold the two outside buttons for 20 seconds until the orange indi-

cator flashes. Note that all channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be erased. The HomeLink Universal Transceiver is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active. If you are having trouble programming HomeLink, here are some of the most common solutions:

Replace the battery in the garage door opener hand-held transmitter. Push the LEARN button on the garage door opener to complete the training for a Rolling Code. 1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position. Troubleshooting Tips 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 113 Did you unplug the device for programming General Information and remember to plug it back in?

If you have any problems, or require assistance, please call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at HomeLink.com for information or assistance. WARNING!

Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage while programming the trans-

ceiver. Exhaust gas can cause serious injury or death. Your motorized door or gate will open and close while you are programming the universal transceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people, pets or other objects are in the path of the door or gate. Only use this transceiver with a garage door opener that has a stop and reverse feature as required by Federal safety standards. This includes most garage door opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not use a garage door opener without these safety features. The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interfer-

ence, and 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Le prsent appareil est conforme aux CNR d`Innovation, Science and Economic Develop-

ment applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorise aux deux conditions suivantes:

1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouil-

lage, et GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 113 2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radiolectrique subi, mme si le brouillage est susceptible d'en comprom-

ettre le fonctionnement. La operacin de este equipo est sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones:

2 1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia perjudicial y 2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cual-

quier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operacin no deseada. NOTE:

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compli-

ance could void the users authority to operate the equipment. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 114 114 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE INTERNAL EQUIPMENT Storage Glove Compartment The glove compartment is located on the passenger side of the instrument panel. To open the glove compartment, pull the release handle. Front Door Storage Both interior front door panels have multiple pockets for storage. Instrument Panel Drawer There is a storage drawer located in the lower center of the instrument panel. It can be released by pushing the access button above it. The drawer is actuator assisted once the access button is pushed. Pull drawer outward to the fully open position. Front Door Storage WARNING!

If containers of hot liquid are placed in the bottle holder, they can spill when the door is closed, burning the occupants. Be careful when closing the doors to avoid injury. Release Handle Drawer Access Button Drawer Released 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 115 Front Seatback Storage If Equipped The front seatbacks have a storage pocket on some models. Umbrella Holder An umbrella holder has been conveniently molded into the front door entry scuff moldings. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 115 2 Drawer Fully Open CAUTION!

The storage drawer must be closed while driving. If left open during a collision, additional damage may occur to property or the drawer mechanism. Front Seatback Storage Umbrella Holder 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 116 116 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Second Row Floor Storage Bins There are removable storage bins located in the areas below the load floor, located in front of the second row seats. 1. To access the storage bins with front seats in the rearward position, place the lock rod in the unlocked position so the load floor can fold upwards towards the seatback. 2. Pull the latch located near the second row seat to open the floor panel. In Floor Storage Bin Lock Rod NOTE:

Push the lock rod inward for the locked position. Pull outward on the lock rod for the unlocked position. Floor Latch WARNING!

In a collision, serious injury could result if the seat storage bin covers are not properly latched. Do not drive the vehicle with the storage bin covers open. Keep the storage bin covers closed and latched while the vehicle is in motion. Do not operate the storage bin covers while the vehicle is in motion. Do not use a storage bin latch as a tie down. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 117 CAUTION!

WARNING! (Continued) The storage bin cover must lay flat and be latched to avoid damage from contact with the front seat tracks, which have minimal clearance to the cover. If the storage bin cover is left in the open position, front seat adjustment may damage the cover. Do not drive the vehicle with the storage bin covers open. Keep the storage bin covers closed and latched while the vehicle is in motion. Do not operate the storage bin covers while the vehicle is in motion. Do not use a storage bin latch as a tie Storage Bin Safety Warning Carefully follow these warnings to help prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle:

down. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 117 Seat Storage Bin Cover Emergency Release Lever As a security measure, the Seat Storage Bin Cover has an Emergency Release Lever built into the latching mechanism. 2 WARNING!

Always close the storage bin covers when your vehicle is unattended. Do not allow children to have access to the second row seat storage bins. Once in the storage bin, young children may not be able to escape. If trapped in the storage bin, chil-

dren can die from suffocation or heat stroke. In a collision, serious injury could result if the seat storage bin covers are not properly latched.

(Continued) CAUTION!

The storage bin cover must lay flat and be latched to avoid damage from contact with the front seat tracks, which have minimal clearance to the cover. If the storage bin cover is left in the open position, front seat adjustment may damage the cover. Storage Bin Cover Emergency Release Lever NOTE:

In the event of an individual being locked inside the storage bin, the storage bin cover can be opened from inside of the bin by pushing on the glow-in-the-dark lever attached to the storage bin cover latching mechanism. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 118 118 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Coat Hooks If Equipped Coat hooks are located along the headliner for the second and third row seating positions. The coat hook load limit is 10 lbs (4.5 kg). Exceeding the recommended load limit can cause the coat hooks to break or disengage from the vehicle. Sun Screens If Equipped Sun screens are available for second and third row seating windows. The screens store in the sill trim panels, and the tops of the windows are equipped with hooks that the sun screens attach to when pulled out. Once the screen is completely to the top of the window, extend the top bar of the sun screen over the two hooks attached to the top of the window. Coat Hook Sun Screen Retracted Gently pull up on the tab to raise the sun screen. Continue pulling the sun screen until the tab is near the top of the window. Sun Screen Extended To lower the sun screen, gently lift the tab upward to disengage the hooks, and feed the screen back into the base sill. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 119 Power Outlets Your vehicle is equipped with 12 Volt (15 Amp) power outlets, and 5 Volt (2.5 Amp) USB power outlets, that can be used to power cellular phones, small electronics and other low powered electrical accessories. The power outlets can be labeled with either a key or a battery symbol to indicate how the outlet is powered. Power outlets labeled with a key are powered when the ignition is in the ON or ACC position, while the outlets labeled with a battery are connected directly to the battery and powered at all times. NOTE:

All accessories connected to the battery powered outlets should be removed or turned off when the vehicle is not in use to protect the battery against discharge. CAUTION!

Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only. Do not insert any other object in the power outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse. Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage not covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty. The front power outlet is located at the bottom of the instrument panel. The rear power outlet is located in the right rear cargo area. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 119 2 12 Volt Front Power Outlet Rear Power Outlet In addition to the front power outlets, there is also a power outlet located in the rear cargo area. Power Outlet Fuse Locations 1 F95A-F95B USB IP 10A 2 F85 Cigar Lighter 20A 3 F60 RR Cargo Power Outlet 20A 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 120 120 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE WARNING!

CAUTION! (Continued) To avoid serious injury or death:

Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet. Do not touch with wet hands. Close the lid when not in use and while driving the vehicle. If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric shock and failure. CAUTION!

Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power from the vehicle's battery, even when not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long enough, the vehicle's battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from starting.

(Continued) Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers, vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the battery even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and with greater caution. After the use of high power draw accesso-

ries, or long periods of the vehicle not being started (with accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the generator to recharge the vehicle's battery. Power Inverter If Equipped There is a 115 Volt, 150 Watt Power Inverter outlet located on the right side of the vehicle, before the third row of seats to convert DC current to AC current. The Power Inverter can power cellular phones, electronics and other low power devices requiring up to 150 Watts. Certain high-end video game consoles will exceed this power limit, as will most power tools. Power Inverter The Power Inverter turns on when the device is plugged in, and the ignition is in ON/RUN posi-

tion. It turns off when the device is unplugged or the ignition is no longer in ON/RUN position. The Power Inverter is designed with built-in over-

load protection. If the power rating of 150 Watts is exceeded, the Power Inverter shuts down. Once the electrical device has been removed from the Power Inverter, it resets. To avoid overloading the circuit, check the power ratings on electrical devices prior to using the Power Inverter. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 121 WARNING!

CAUTION!

To avoid serious injury or death:

Do not insert any objects into the receptacles. Do not touch with wet hands. Close the lid when not in use. If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric shock and failure. Cigar Lighter If Equipped NOTE:

Cigar lighters can be purchased at an autho-

rized dealer through Mopar parts. The cigar lighter is located at the bottom of the instrument panel. Push lighter inward to heat. After a few seconds, the lighter automatically returns to its initial position and is ready to be used. Do not connect devices with power higher than 180 Watts (15 Amps) to the socket. Do not damage the socket by using unsuitable adaptors. If the 180 Watt (15 Amp) power rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the system will need to be replaced. Smoker's Package Kit If Equipped With the optional authorized dealer-installed Smoker's Package Kit, a removable ash receiver is inserted into one of the two cupholders in the center floor console. To install the ash receiver, align the receiver so the thumb grip on the lid is facing rearward. Push the ash receiver into either of the cup wells to secure. Pull upward on the ash receiver to remove for cleaning and/or storage. The left rear trim panel cupholder is designed to accommodate a second ash receiver, if desired. WARNING!

Overhead Sunglass Storage When the cigar lighter is in use it becomes very hot. To avoid serious injury, handle the cigar lighter with care. Always check that the cigar lighter has turned off. At the front of the overhead console, a compart-

ment is provided for the storage of one pair of sunglasses. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 121 From the closed position, push the intention to open the compartment. 2 Overhead Sunglass Door Latch The door will slowly rotate to the full open position. Full Open Position 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 122 122 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE STOW N PLACE ROOF RACK IF EQUIPPED The crossbars and side rails are designed to carry weight on vehicles equipped with a luggage rack. The load must not exceed 150 lbs

(68 kg), and should be uniformly distributed over the luggage rack crossbars. The crossbars on your vehicle are delivered stowed within the roof rack side rails. Crossbars should always be used whenever cargo is placed on the roof rack. Check the straps frequently to be sure that the load remains securely attached. The Stow N Place roof rack does not increase the total load carrying capacity of the vehicle. Be sure the total load of cargo inside the vehicle plus that on the external rack does not exceed the maximum vehicle load capacity. Deploying The Crossbars 1. To deploy the crossbars, completely loosen the thumb screws at both ends of the crossbar and lift the crossbar from its stowed position in the side rail. Repeat with crossbar on the opposite side. Removing Crossbars CAUTION!

Use care when removing and handling the crossbars to prevent damage to the vehicle. Roof Rack 1 Side Rail 2 Crossbar Thumb Screw NOTE:

The thumb screws cannot be fully removed. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 123 2. Bend the crossbar supports at each end, taking care to keep hand clear of pivoting joint. Slide the thumb screw down. 4. Once the crossbar is in place, tighten both Stowing The Crossbars thumb screws completely. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 123 1. Starting with one crossbar, completely loosen the thumb screws at both ends. Lift the crossbar away from the matching letter to remove it from the deployed position. Repeat with the other crossbar. 2 CAUTION!

Use care when removing and handling the crossbars to prevent damage to the vehicle. Installing Crossbars 2. Starting with the one crossbar, bend up the pivot supports at each end. Bending Pivot 3. Position the crossbars across the roof making sure the letters on the crossbars align with the matching letters on the side rail. 5. Deploy and tighten the second crossbar to complete the deployment of the crossbars. NOTE:

The crossbars are not identical and have fixed deployment positions. Rear crossbar can be deployed in two different positions. Positioning Crossbars Crossbar Pivot 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 124 124 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 3. Then, position the crossbar along the 5. Once the drivers side crossbar is in place, NOTE:

tighten the thumb screws completely. correct side rail. Make sure the letters on the crossbar align with the matching letters on the side rail. Stowing Crossbars 6. Repeat the procedure to stow the second crossbar on the opposite side. 4. The crossbar will nest fully within the side rail. Tightening Crossbar Crossbar To Side Rail Stowed Crossbars To help control wind noise, stow the cross-

bars in the side rails when they are not in use. If any metallic object is placed over the satel-

lite radio antenna (if equipped), you may experience interruption of satellite radio reception. WARNING!

Cargo must be securely tied down before driving your vehicle. Improperly secured loads can fly off the vehicle, particularly at high speeds, resulting in personal injury or property damage. Follow the roof rack cautions when carrying cargo on your roof rack. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 125 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 125 CAUTION!

CAUTION! (Continued) CAUTION! (Continued) To prevent damage to the roof of your Load should always be secured to cross vehicle, DO NOT carry any loads on the roof rack without the crossbars deployed. The load should be secured and placed on top of the crossbars, not directly on the roof. If it is necessary to place the load on the roof, place a blanket or other protective layer between the load and the roof surface. bars first, with tie down loops used as addi-

tional securing points if needed. Tie loops are intended as supplementary tie down points only. Do not use ratcheting mecha-

nisms with the tie loops. Check the straps and thumb wheels frequently to be sure that the load remains securely attached. Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners carefully when carrying large or heavy loads on the roof rack. Wind forces, due to natural causes or nearby truck traffic, can add sudden upward lift to a load. This is especially true on large flat loads and may result in damage to the cargo or your vehicle. 2 To avoid damage to the roof rack and Long loads that extend over the windshield, vehicle, do not exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity of 150 lb (68 kg). Always distribute heavy loads as evenly as possible and secure the load appropriately. such as wood panels or surfboards, or loads with large frontal area should be secured to both the front and rear of the vehicle.

(Continued)

(Continued) 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 126 126 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Base Instrument Cluster 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 127 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 127 3 Instrument Cluster Descriptions 2. Instrument Cluster Display 3. Speedometer When the appropriate conditions exist, Indicates vehicle speed. 1. Tachometer Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute (RPM x 1000). Premium Instrument Cluster this display shows the instrument cluster display messages. Refer to Instrument Cluster Display located in this chapter for further information. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 128 128 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 4. Fuel Gauge The gauge shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position. The fuel pump symbol points to the side of the vehicle where the fuel door is located. 5. Temperature Gauge The temperature gauge shows engine coolant temperature. Any reading within the normal range indicates that the engine cooling system is operating satis-

factorily. The gauge can indicate a higher tempera-

ture when driving in hot weather or up mountain grades. It should not be allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range. INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY Your vehicle is equipped with an instrument cluster display, which offers useful information to the driver. With the ignition in the STOP/OFF position (and the key removed, for vehicles with mechanical key), opening/closing of a door will activate the display for viewing, and display the total miles or kilometers in the odometer. Your instrument cluster display is designed to display important information about your vehicles systems and features. Using a driver interactive display located on the instrument panel, your instrument cluster display can show you how systems are working and give you warnings when they are not. The steering wheel mounted controls allow you to scroll through and enter the main menus and submenus. You can access the specific information you want and make selections and adjustments. WARNING!

Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reaches H pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the gauge drops back into the normal range and is no longer red. If the gauge remains on the H, turn the engine off immediately and call an authorized dealer for service. WARNING!

A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or others could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer for service if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to look under the hood yourself, refer to Cooling System Pressure Cap in Servicing And Maintenance for further imformation. NOTE:

The hard telltales will illuminate for a bulb check when the ignition is first cycled. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 129 Instrument Cluster Display Location And Controls The vehicles instrument cluster is equipped with an instrument cluster display (base or premium cluster), which offers useful informa-

tion to the driver. Down Arrow Button Right Arrow Button Push and release the down arrow button to scroll downward through the Main Menu items. Push and release the right arrow button to access the information screens or submenu screens of a main menu item. Push and release the left arrow button to access the information screens or submenu screens of a main menu item. Back / Left Arrow Button GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 129 The instrument cluster display (base/premium cluster) features a driver-interactive display that is located in the center of the instrument cluster, and may include the following menu/

submenu items:

Speedometer 3 Vehicle Info Driver Assist If Equipped Fuel Economy Trip (Trip A / Trip B) Stop / Start If Equipped Audio Messages Screen Setup Instrument Cluster Display OK Button The instrument cluster display controls allows the driver to select information by pushing the directional buttons mounted on the steering wheel:

Up Arrow Button Push the OK button to access/select the information screens or submenu screens of a Main Menu item. Push and hold the OK button for two seconds to reset displayed/

selected features that can be reset. Push and release the up arrow button to scroll upward through the Main Menu items. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 130 Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system. The Oil Change Required message will display for approxi-

mately five seconds after a single chime has sounded, to indicate it is time to change the engine oil. The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate, dependent upon your personal driving style. Unless reset, this message will continue to display each time the ignition is cycled to the ON/RUN position. To reset the oil change indicator after performing the scheduled maintenance, refer to the following procedure. NOTE:

This procedure should only be performed after scheduled maintenance is completed. Reset-

ting oil life other than when associated with a scheduled maintenance may result in damage due to not properly maintaining the engine oil. 130 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Oil Life Reset Oil Life Reset Secondary Method For Oil Life Reset Procedure 1. Without pressing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE START/STOP button and place the ignition in the ON/RUN position (do not start the vehicle.) 1. Without pushing the brake pedal, place the ignition in the ON/RUN position (do not start the engine). 2. Fully press the accelerator pedal, slowly, 2. Push the OK button to enter the instrument three times within 10 seconds. cluster display menu screen. 3. Push and release the down arrow button to ignition in the OFF/LOCK position. 3. Without pushing the brake pedal, place the access the Vehicle Info menu screen. 4. Push the left arrow button or right arrow button to access the Oil Life submenu. 5. Hold the OK button to reset the Oil Life to 100%. 6. Push the up arrow button to exit the instru-

ment cluster display menu screen. NOTE:

If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 131 Fuel And Oil Refresh Mode Since it is possible to operate this vehicle for extended periods of time without running the gas engine, the fuel within the vehicles fuel tank can become stale or the engine oils lubri-

cating properties can be reduced. To prevent engine and/or fuel system damage due to stale fuel, as well as, maintaining internal engine lubrication, this vehicle is equipped with a Fuel and Oil Refresh Mode. The vehicle will automatically enter into the Fuel and Oil Refresh Mode to minimize potential for stale fuel, and to ensure lubrication of internal engine components. When operating in this mode, the gas engine will run to provide vehicle propulsion (electric only operation is inhibited). A message will be displayed in the instrument cluster whenever Fuel and Oil Refresh Mode is active. The vehicle will automatically exit the Fuel and Oil Refresh Mode when conditions have been satisfied. If the vehicle enters Fuel and Oil Refresh Mode, due to fuel which has been in the fuel tank for a long period of time (becoming stale fuel), the engine will run whenever the vehicle is operational (no electric only opera-

tion) until the low fuel level warning is activated. It is also possible to exit the Fuel and Oil Refresh Mode sooner by adding a minimum of 4 gallons of new fuel to the vehicles fuel tank. NOTE:

If the vehicle enters Fuel and Oil Refresh Mode to maintain engine lubrication, adding fuel will not exit the mode sooner. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 131 If the vehicle enters Fuel and Oil Refresh Mode to maintain engine lubrication properties, the engine may run for a period of up to 20 minutes when fully warm whenever the vehicle is opera-

tional (no electric only operation). If the vehicle is shut down before conditions to exit the refresh mode have been satisfied, the engine may run for additional time on subsequent trips. 3 NOTE:

Frequent short trips at low ambient tempera-

ture conditions are more likely to trigger the lubrication based mode. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 132 132 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL KeySense Cluster Messages If Equipped When the KeySense key is in use there will be:

Continuous, dedicated telltale Unique Display Splash Screen With KeySense in use there will be multiple associated messages shown in the following table:

Setting Instrument Cluster Display Message None With vehicle ignition ON KeySense in use. Max vehicle speed set to xx MPH/or km/h Max Vehicle Speed Max speed reached. KeySense in use supported by a chime Start Up Fuel Alert message Early Low Fuel Alert Message ParkSense Blind Spot Forward Collision Warning Approaching max speed xx MPH/km/h supported by a chime Range to empty xxx miles or km Fuel Low Feature cannot be disabled. KeySense in use Feature cannot be disabled. KeySense in use Feature cannot be disabled. KeySense in use 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 133 Instrument Cluster Display Menu Items The instrument cluster display can be used to view the main menu items for several features. Use the up and down arrow buttons to scroll through the driver interactive display menu options until the desired menu is reached. NOTE:

The instrument cluster display menu items display in the center of the instrument cluster. Menu items may vary depending on your vehicle features. Refer to Instrument Cluster Display in this chapter for further information. Speedometer Push and release the up or down arrow button until Speedometer is highlighted in the instru-

ment cluster display. Push and release the OK button to toggle between MPH and km/h. Vehicle Info Push and release the up or down arrow button until Vehicle Info is highlighted in the instru-

ment cluster display. Push the left or right arrow button to scroll through the following informa-

tion submenus:

Tire Pressure If tire pressure is OK for all tires, a vehicle ICON is displayed with tire pressure values in each corner of the ICON. If one or more tires have low pressure, Inflate Tire To XX is displayed with the vehicle ICON, and the tire pressure values in each corner of the ICON with the pressure value of the low tire displayed in a different color than the other tire pressure value. If the Tire Pressure system requires service, Service Tire Pressure System is displayed. Tire PSI is an information only function and cannot be reset. Refer to Tire Pressure Moni-

toring System (TPMS) under Safety for further information. Coolant Temp Displays the actual coolant temperature. Transmission Temp Displays the actual transmission temperature. Oil Temp Displays the actual oil temperature. Oil Pressure Displays the actual oil pressure. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 133 3 Battery Voltage Displays the actual battery voltage. Engine Hours If Equipped Displays the number of hours of engine operation. Oil Life Displays the remaining engine oil life as a percentage. To reset the Oil Life, you must hold the OK button. The Hold OK to Reset instruction will be displayed at all times, but the following conditions will need to be met in order to reset Oil Life:

The ignition must be in the ON/RUN position If the conditions are met, holding the OK button will reset the gauge and the numeric display will return to 100%. If the conditions are not met, a popup message will display for five seconds, describing the required conditions, and then the Oil Life screen will reappear. Driver Assist Push and release the up or down arrow button until the Driver Assist display icon is highlighted in the instrument cluster display. Refer to Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) If Equipped in Starting And Operating for further information. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 134 134 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Fuel Economy Push and release the up or down arrow button until the Fuel Economy Menu item is highlighted in the instrument cluster display. The Fuel Economy Menu will display the following:

Two submenu pages that can be toggled between using the left and right arrow buttons; one with Current Value displayed and one without the Current Value displayed:

Average Fuel Economy (MPG, L/100 km, or km/L) or km/L) Range To Empty (miles or km) Current Fuel Economy (MPG, L/100 km, The Max and Min values will correspond to the particular engine requirements Hold OK to reset average fuel economy infor-

mation. Trip Info Push and release the up or down arrow button until the Trip Menu item is highlighted in the instrument cluster display. Push the left or right arrow button to scroll through the Trip A and Trip B submenus. The Trip information will display the following:

Distance Average Fuel Economy Elapsed Time Hold the OK button to reset feature information. Stop / Start If Equipped Push and release the up or down arrow button until the Stop/Start menu title is displayed in the instrument cluster display. Audio Push and release the up or down arrow button until the Audio Menu displays in the instrument cluster display. Messages Push and release the up or down arrow button until Messages is highlighted in the instrument cluster display. This feature shows the number of stored warning messages. Pushing the right arrow button will allow you to see what the stored messages are. NOTE:

The popup messages indicate the status of the system and/or the conditions that need to be met. Messages remain in the stored stack until condition is cleared. Screen Setup Push and release the up or down arrow button until the Screen Setup Menu displays in the instrument cluster display. Push and release the OK button to enter the submenus. The Screen Setup feature allows you to change what information is displayed in the instrument cluster as well as the location that information is displayed. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 135 2 Upper Center 1 Lower Left Premium Instrument Cluster Display Screen Setup Options:

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 135 3 None Compass (Default) Outside Temp. Time Range Average (MPG, L/100km, or km/L) Current (MPG, L/100km, or km/L) Trip A Distance Trip B Distance None Compass Outside Temp. Time Range Average (MPG, L/100km, or km/L) Current (MPG, L/100km, or km/L) Trip A Distance Trip B Distance Audio Digital Speed Menu Title (Default) 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 136 136 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 3 Lower Right Premium Instrument Cluster Display Screen Setup Options:

4 Odometer (Premium Instrument Cluster) Show Default Hide (Odometer will still appear when door is open) 5 Defaults 6 Speed Warning 1 Upper Left Base Instrument Cluster Display Screen Setup Options:

None Compass Outside Temp. (Default) Time Range Average (MPG, L/100km, or km/L) Current (MPG, L/100km, or km/L) Trip A Distance Trip B Distance Restore Cancel On Off None Compass (Default) Outside Temp. Time Range Average (MPG, L/100km, or km/L) 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 137 2 Upper Right 3 Center 4 Defaults Base Instrument Cluster Display Screen Setup Options:

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 137 3 None Compass Outside Temp (Default) Time Range Average (MPG, L/100km, or km/L) None Compass Outside Temp. Time Range Average (MPG, L/100km, or km/L) Trip A Distance Trip B Distance Audio Menu Title Menu Title (Default) Digital Speed Restore Cancel 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 138 138 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Speed Warning If Equipped Push and release the up or down arrow button until Speed Warning is highlighted in the instrument cluster display. Push and release the OK button to enter speed warning. Use the up or down arrow button to turn the speed warning ON or OFF, then push and release the OK button to confirm the selection. If the ON status is selected, use the up or down arrow button to set the desired speed, then push the OK button to set the speed for the speed warning. A speed warning telltale will illuminate in the instrument cluster, with a number matching the set speed, with a pop up message to inform the driver that the speed warning has been set to the desired speed. Each time the set speed is exceeded, a single chime will sound and a pop up warning message will display. If the set speed is exceeded more than 2 mph (3 km/h), a contin-

uous chime will sound for up to 10 seconds, or until the speed is no longer exceeded. The telltale in the instrument cluster will also change from white to yellow, and a pop up warning message will pop up on the instrument cluster display. NOTE:

Speed Warning is unavailable while KeySense is in use. Battery Saver On/Battery Saver Mode Message Electrical Load Reduction Actions If Equipped This vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent Battery Sensor (IBS) to perform additional moni-

toring of the electrical system and status of the vehicle battery. In cases when the IBS detects charging system failure, or the 12 volt vehicle battery conditions are deteriorating, electrical load reduction actions will take place to extend the driving time and distance of the vehicle. This is done by reducing power to or turning off non-essential 12 volt electrical loads. Load reduction will be functional when the vehicle propulsion system is active. The vehicle may not be running depending on the HV battery SOC or temperature. It will display a message if there is a risk of battery depletion to the point where the vehicle may stall due to lack of electrical supply, or will not restart after the current drive cycle. When 12 volt load reduction is activated, the message Battery Saver On or Battery Saver Mode will appear in the instrument cluster display. These messages indicate the vehicle battery has a low state of charge and continues to lose electrical charge at a rate that the charging system cannot sustain. NOTE:

The charging system is independent from load reduction. The charging system performs a diagnostic on the charging system continuously. If the Battery Charge Warning Light is on it may indicate a problem with the charging system. Refer to Battery Charge Warning Light in this chapter for further information. The electrical loads that may be switched off (if equipped), and vehicle functions which can be effected by load reduction:

Heated Seat/Vented Seats/Heated Wheel Heated/Cooled Cup Holders If Equipped Rear Defroster And Heated Mirrors HVAC System 115 Volts AC Power Inverter System Audio and Telematics System 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 139 Loss of the battery charge may indicate one or more of the following conditions:

The charging system cannot deliver enough electrical power to the vehicle system because the electrical loads are larger than the capability of charging system. The charging system is still functioning properly. Turning on all possible vehicle electrical loads (e.g. HVAC to max settings, exterior and interior lights, overloaded power outlets

+12 Volts, 150W, USB ports) during certain driving conditions (city driving, towing, frequent stopping). Installing options like additional lights, upfitter electrical accessories, audio systems, alarms and similar devices. by long parking periods). The vehicle was parked for an extended period of time (weeks, months). The battery was recently replaced and was not charged completely. The battery was discharged by an electrical load left on when the vehicle was parked. The battery was used for an extended period with the engine not running to supply radio, lights, chargers, +12 Volt portable appli-

ances like vacuum cleaners, game consoles and similar devices. What to do when an electrical load reduction action message is present (Battery Saver On or Battery Saver Mode) During a trip:

Reduce power to unnecessary loads if possible:

exterior) Check what may be plugged in to power outlets +12 Volts, 150W, USB ports Check HVAC settings (blower, tempera-

ture) Check the audio settings (volume) GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 139 After a trip:

Check if any aftermarket equipment was installed (additional lights, upfitter electrical accessories, audio systems, alarms) and review specifications if any (load and Ignition Off Draw currents). Evaluate the latest driving cycles (distance, driving time and parking time). 3 The vehicle should have service performed if the message is still present during consecu-

tive trips and the evaluation of the vehicle and driving pattern did not help to identify the cause. Instrument Cluster Display Programmable Features Screen Setup Push the up or down arrow button to scroll through the Menu Items until the Screen Setup displays in the instrument cluster display. Push the OK button to enter Screen Setup. The Screen Setup feature allows you to change what information is displayed in the instrument cluster display as well as the location that infor-

mation is displayed. Unusual driving cycles (short trips separated Turn off redundant lights (interior or 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 140 140 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Configurable Screen Setup Menu Titles Compass Trip A Distance Outside Temp Trip B Distance Time Audio Info Range to Empty Menu Title Average MPG Current MPG Odometer Speedometer

(Digital Speed) select between MPH/km Defaults (Restore/

Cancel) TRIP COMPUTER The Trip Computer is located in the instrument cluster display. Push and release the up or down arrow button until Trip Info is high-

lighted in the instrument cluster display. Navi-

gate between Trip A or Trip B by using the right and left arrows. For each trip the following information will be displayed:

Trip A Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the last reset. Shows the Average MPG for Trip A since the last reset. Shows the elapsed time traveled for Trip A since the last reset. Elapsed time will incre-

ment when the ignition switch is in the ON or START position. Trip B Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last reset. Shows the Average MPG for Trip B since the last reset. Shows the elapsed time traveled for Trip B since the last reset. Elapsed time will incre-

ment when the ignition switch is in the ON or START position. To Reset A Trip Function Push and hold the OK button to reset the currently displayed trip. WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES The warning/indicator lights will illuminate in the instrument panel together with a dedicated message and/or acoustic signal when appli-

cable. These indications are indicative and precautionary and as such must not be consid-

ered as exhaustive and/or alternative to the information contained in the Owners Manual, which you are advised to read carefully in all cases. Always refer to the information in this chapter in the event of a failure indication. All active telltales will display first if applicable. The system check menu may appear different based upon equipment options and current vehicle status. Some telltales are optional and may not appear. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 141 Red Warning Lights Air Bag Warning Light This warning light will illuminate to indicate a fault with the air bag, and will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN posi-

tion. This light will illuminate with a single chime when a fault with the air bag has been detected, it will stay on until the fault is cleared. If the light is either not on during startup, stays on, or turns on while driving, have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible. Brake Warning Light This warning light monitors various brake functions, including brake fluid level and parking brake application. If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied, that the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with the anti-lock brake system reservoir. If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system. In this case, the light will remain on until the condition has been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop. The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has dropped below a specified level. The light will remain on until the cause is corrected. NOTE:

The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level conditions. The vehicle should have service performed, and the brake fluid level checked. If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 141 3 WARNING!

Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed. It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately. Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required. Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for approximately two seconds. The light should then turn off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light inspected by an authorized dealer. The light also will turn on when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 142 142 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NOTE:

This light shows only that the parking brake is applied. It does not show the degree of brake application. Door Open Warning Light If Equipped This warning light will illuminate when a door is ajar/open and not fully closed. This indicator will reflect which doors are open. NOTE:

If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single chime. Electric Power Steering Fault Warning Light This warning light will turn on when there's a fault with the Electric Power Steering (EPS) system. Refer to Power Steering in Starting And Operating for further information. WARNING!

Continued operation with reduced assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be obtained as soon as possible Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light This warning light will illuminate to indicate a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a problem is detected while the vehicle is running, the light will either stay on or flash depending on the nature of the problem. Cycle the ignition when the vehicle is safely and completely stopped and the transmission is placed in the PARK (P) position. The light should turn off. If the light remains on with the vehicle running, your vehicle will usually be drivable;

however, see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible. NOTE:

This light may turn on if the accelerator and brake pedals are pressed at the same time. If the light continues to flash when the vehicle is running, immediate service is required and you may experience reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle, or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing. The light will come on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position and remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the light does not come on during starting, have the system checked by an authorized dealer. Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light This warning light warns of an over-

heated engine condition. If the engine coolant temperature is too high, this indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound. If the temperature reaches the upper limit, a continuous chime will sound for four minutes or until the engine is able to cool; whichever comes first. If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL (N) and idle the vehicle. If the temperature reading does not return to normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for service. Refer to If Your Engine Overheats in In Case Of Emergency for further information. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 143 Battery Charge Warning Light Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light This warning light will illuminate when the battery is not charging properly. If it stays on while the engine is running, there may be a malfunction with the charging system. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. This indicates a possible problem with the elec-

trical system or a related component. Hood Open Warning Light This warning light will illuminate when the hood is left open and not fully closed. NOTE:

If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single chime. Liftgate Open Warning Light This warning light will illuminate when the liftgate is open. NOTE:

If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single chime. This warning light indicates when the driver or passenger seat belt is unbuckled. When the ignition is first placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position and if the drivers seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound and the light will turn on. When driving, if the driver or front passenger seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will flash or remain on continuously and a chime will sound. Refer to Occupant Restraint Systems in Safety for further information. Transmission Temperature Warning Light If Equipped This warning light will illuminate to warn of a high transmission fluid temperature. This may occur with strenuous usage such as trailer towing. If this light turns on, stop the vehicle and run the engine at idle or slightly faster, with the transmission in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N), until the light turns off. Once the light turns off, you may continue to drive normally. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 143 WARNING!

If you continue operating the vehicle when the Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illuminated you could cause the fluid to boil over, come in contact with hot engine or exhaust components and cause a fire. 3 CAUTION!

Continuous driving with the Transmission Temperature Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause severe transmission damage or transmission failure. Vehicle Security Warning Light If Equipped This warning light will flash at a fast rate for approximately 15 seconds when the vehicle security alarm is arming, and then will flash slowly until the vehicle is disarmed. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 144 144 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Oil Temperature Warning Light Yellow Warning Lights Electronic Park Brake Warning Light This warning light will illuminate to indicate the engine oil temperature is high. If the light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. Wait for oil temperature to return to normal levels. Oil Pressure Warning Light This warning light will illuminate to indicate low engine oil pressure. If the light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle, shut off the engine as soon as possible, and contact an authorized dealer. A chime will sound when this light turns on. Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. This light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine. The engine oil level must be checked under the hood. Stop Safely Vehicle Will Shut Off Soon This warning will be displayed when the vehicle has determined an opera-

tional issue that will cause the vehicle's propulsion system to turn off will occur shortly. If the light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle in a safe location as soon as possible. Have the vehicle transported to an authorized dealer for service Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Fault Warning Light If Equipped This warning light will illuminate to indicate a fault in the ACC system. Contact a local authorized dealer for service. This warning light will illuminate to indi-

cate the Electronic Park Brake is not functioning properly and service is required. Contact an authorized dealer. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Warning Light If Equipped For further information, refer to Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) in Starting And Operating. This warning light indicates the Elec-

tronic Stability Control (ESC) is off. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Warning Light This warning light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position and may stay on for as long as four seconds. If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, then the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and service is required as soon as possible. However, the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally, assuming the Brake Warning Light is not also on. If the ABS light does not turn on when the igni-

tion is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position, have the brake system inspected by an authorized dealer. Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN, the ESC system will be on, even if it was turned off previously. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active Warning Light If Equipped This warning light will indicate when the Electronic Stability Control system is Active. The ESC Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position, and when ESC is acti-

vated. It should go out with the engine running. If the ESC Indicator Light comes on continu-

ously with the engine running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this warning light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 145 miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see an authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diag-

nosed and corrected. The ESC OFF Indicator Light and the ESC Indicator Light come on momentarily each time the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position. The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive. This light will come on when the vehicle is in an ESC event. Service LaneSense Warning Light If Equipped This warning light will illuminate when the LaneSense system is not oper-

ating and requires service. Please see an authorized dealer. LaneSense Warning Light If Equipped The LaneSense Warning Light will be solid yellow when the vehicle is approaching a lane marker. The warning light will flash when the GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 145 vehicle is crossing the lane marker. Refer to LaneSense If Equipped in Starting And Operating for further information. Low Fuel Warning Light When the fuel level reaches approxi-

mately 1.85 gal (7 L) this warning light will turn on, and remain on until fuel is added. A single warning chime will sound with Low Fuel Warning. Low Washer Fluid Warning Light If Equipped This warning light will illuminate when the windshield washer fluid is low. the bulb does not come on when turning the ignition switch from OFF to ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly. Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap, poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate the light after engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through several typical driving styles. In most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing. When the engine is running, the MIL may flash to alert serious conditions that could lead to immediate loss of power or severe catalytic converter damage. The vehicle should be serviced by an authorized dealer as soon as possible if this occurs. 3 Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Warning Light (MIL) The Engine Check/Malfunction Indi-

cator Light (MIL) is a part of an Onboard Diagnostic System called OBD II that monitors engine and auto-

matic transmission control systems. This warning light will illuminate when the ignition is in the ON/RUN position before engine start. If WARNING!

A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you drive slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result in death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or others. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 146 146 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL CAUTION!

Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the vehicle control system. It also could affect fuel economy and driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur. Immediate service is required. Service Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Light If Equipped This warning light will illuminate to indicate a fault in the Forward Colli-

sion Warning System. Contact an authorized dealer for service. Refer to Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With Mitigation in Safety for further information. Service Stop/Start System Warning Light If Equipped This warning light will illuminate when the Stop/Start system is not functioning properly and service is required. Contact an authorized dealer for service. Refer to Stop/Start System in Starting and Operating for further instructions. Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning Light The warning light switches on and a message is displayed to indicate that the tire pressure is lower than the recommended value and/or that slow pressure loss is occurring. In these cases, optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may not be guaranteed. Should one or more tires be in the condition mentioned above, the display will show the indi-

cations corresponding to each tire. CAUTION!

Do not continue driving with one or more flat tires as handling may be compromised. Stop the vehicle, avoiding sharp braking and steering. If a tire puncture occurs, repair immediately using the dedicated tire repair kit and contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires. As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pres-

sure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pres-

sure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicles handling and stopping ability. Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the drivers responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pres-

sure telltale. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 147 Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approxi-

mately one minute and then remain continu-

ously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly. The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended that you take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to have your sensor function checked. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 147 CAUTION!

Yellow Indicator Lights Forward Collision Warning Off Indicator Light If Equipped This indicator light illuminates to indi-

cate that Forward Collision Warning is off. Green Indicator Lights 3 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With Target Vehicle Detected Light If Equipped This indicator light will illuminate when the Adaptive Cruise Control speed is SET and the target vehicle is detected. Refer to "Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) If Equipped" in "Starting And Operating" for further information. Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With No Target Detected Light If Equipped This indicator light will illuminate when the Adaptive Cruise Control speed is SET and there is no target vehicle detected. Refer to "Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) If Equipped" in "Starting And Operating" for further information. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 148 LaneSense Indicator Light If Equipped Turn Signal Indicator Lights 148 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Cruise Control Set Indicator Light If Equipped This indicator light will illuminate when the cruise control is set to the desired speed. Refer to Speed Control in Starting And Operating for further information. Front Fog Indicator Light If Equipped This indicator light will illuminate when the front fog lights are on. KeySense Indicator Light If Equipped The KeySense indicator is illuminated when a KeySense key is detected upon startup of the vehicle. The indicator will remain lit for the entire key cycle as a reminder that the KeySense key is in use. While the KeySense key is in use, the vehicle will respond to settings associated with the KeySense profile. Refer to Keys in Getting to Know Your Vehicle for further information. The LaneSense indicator light illumi-

nates solid green when both lane markings have been detected and the system is armed and ready to provide visual and torque warnings if an unin-

tentional lane departure occurs. Refer to LaneSense If Equipped in Starting And Operating for further information. Stop/Start Active Indicator Light If Equipped This indicator light will illuminate when the Stop/Start function is in Autostop mode. Refer to Stop/

Start System in Starting and Oper-

ating for further instructions. Park/Headlight On Indicator Light This indicator light will illuminate when the park lights or headlights are turned on. When the left or right turn signal is activated, the turn signal indicator will flash independently and the corre-

sponding exterior turn signal lamps will flash. Turn signals can be activated when the multifunction lever is moved down (left) or up (right). NOTE:

A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal on. Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either indicator flashes at a rapid rate. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 149 Blue Indicator Lights White Indicator Lights High Beam Indicator Light This indicator light will illuminate to indicate that the high beam head-

lights are on. With the low beams acti-

vated, push the multifunction lever forward (toward the front of the vehicle) to turn on the high beams. Pull the multifunction lever rearward (toward the rear of the vehicle) to turn off the high beams. If the high beams are off, pull the lever toward you for a temporary high beam on, flash to pass scenario. Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready Light If Equipped This indicator light will illuminate when the vehicle equipped with Adap-

tive Cruise Control (ACC) has been turned on but not set. Refer to Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) If Equipped in Starting And Operating for further information. This indicator light will illuminate when the cruise control is ready, but not set. Refer to Speed Control in Starting And Operating for further information. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 149 LaneSense Indicator Light If Equipped When the LaneSense system is ON, but not armed, the LaneSense indi-

cator light illuminates solid white. This occurs when only left, right, or neither lane line has been detected. If a single lane line is detected, the system is ready to provide only visual warnings if an unintentional lane depar-

ture occurs on the detected lane line. Refer to LaneSense If Equipped" in Starting And Operating for further information. 3 The Set Speed Display indicator light indicates the set speed for the Speed Control and Adaptive Cruise Control

(ACC) settings. Cruise Control Ready Indicator Set Speed Display 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 150 150 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM OBD II Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated Onboard Diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors the performance of the emis-

sions, engine, and automatic transmission control systems. When these systems are oper-

ating properly, your vehicle will provide excel-

lent performance and fuel economy, as well as emissions well within current government regu-

lations. If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light

(MIL). It will also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist your service technician in making repairs. Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing, see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible. CAUTION!

Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause further damage to the emission control system. It could also affect fuel economy and driveability. The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests can be performed.

(Continued) running, severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur. Immediate service is required. Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) Cybersecurity Your vehicle is required to have an Onboard Diagnostic system (OBD II) and a connection port to allow access to information related to the performance of your emissions controls. Authorized service technicians may need to access this information to assist with the diag-

nosis and service of your vehicle and emissions system. WARNING!

ONLY an authorized service technician should connect equipment to the OBD II connection port in order to read the VIN, diagnose, or service your vehicle.

(Continued) CAUTION! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) If the MIL is flashing while the vehicle is If unauthorized equipment is connected to the OBD II connection port, such as a driver-behavior tracking device, it may:

Be possible that vehicle systems, including safety related systems, could be impaired or a loss of vehicle control could occur that may result in an acci-

dent involving serious injury or death. Access, or allow others to access, infor-

mation stored in your vehicle systems, including personal information. For further information, refer to Cybersecurity in Multimedia. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 151 EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass an inspection of your vehicle's emis-

sions control system. Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration. For states that require an Inspection and Maintenance (I/M), this check verifies the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is functioning and is not on when the engine is running, and that the OBD II system is ready for testing. Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently serviced, recently had a depleted battery or a battery replacement. If the OBD II system should be determined not ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test. Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which you can use prior to going to the test station. To check if your vehicle's OBD II system is ready, you must do the following:

1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do not crank or start the engine. NOTE:

If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start this test over. 2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, you will see the Malfunc-

tion Indicator Light (MIL) symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check. 3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will happen:

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 151 The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine. This means that your vehicle's OBD II system is not ready and you should not proceed to the I/M station. The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illuminated until you place the ignition in the off position or start the engine. This means that your vehicle's OBD II system is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station. 3 If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see an authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement, you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to update. A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate that the system is now ready. Regardless of whether your vehicle's OBD II system is ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine running. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 152 152 SAFETY FEATURES Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides increased vehicle stability and brake perfor-

mance under most braking conditions. The system automatically prevents wheel lock, and enhances vehicle control during braking. The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure that the ABS is working properly each time the vehicle is started and driven. During this self-check, you may hear a slight clicking sound as well as some related motor noises. ABS is activated during braking when the system detects one or more wheels begin to lock. Road conditions such as ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose debris, or panic stops may increase the likelihood of ABS activa-

tion(s). SAFETY You also may experience the following when ABS activates:

The ABS motor noise (it may continue to run for a short time after the stop) The clicking sound of solenoid valves Brake pedal pulsations A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end of the stop NOTE:

These are all normal characteristics of ABS. WARNING!

The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equipment that may be susceptible to inter-

ference caused by improperly installed or high output radio transmitting equipment. This interference can cause possible loss of anti-lock braking capability. Installation of such equipment should be performed by qualified professionals.

(Continued) WARNING! (Continued) Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish their effectiveness and may lead to a collision. Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or stop. The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded. The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, following another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning. The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner that could jeopardize the users safety or the safety of others. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 153 ABS is designed to function with the Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) tires. Modifica-

tion may result in degraded ABS performance. Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light The yellow Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light will turn on when the ignition is turned to the ON/RUN mode and may stay on for as long as four seconds. If the Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light remains on or comes on while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is required. However, the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light is on. If the Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light is on, the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of anti-lock brakes. If the Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light does not come on when the ignition is turned to the ON/RUN mode, have the light repaired as soon as possible. Electronic Brake Control (EBC) System Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced Elec-

tronic Brake Control (EBC) system. This system includes Electronic Brake Force Distribution

(EBD), Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), Brake Assist System (BAS), Hill Start Assist (HSA), Traction Control System (TCS), Electronic Stability Control (ESC), and Electronic Roll Miti-

gation (ERM). These systems work together to enhance both vehicle stability and control in various driving conditions. Your vehicle may also be equipped with Ready Alert Braking (RAB), Rain Brake Support (RBS), Trailer Sway Control (TSC), and Dynamic Steering Torque (DST). Brake Assist System (BAS) The Brake Assist System (BAS) is designed to optimize the vehicles braking capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The system detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake applica-

tion and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the benefit of the system, you must apply continuous braking pressure during the stop-

ping sequence, (do not pump the brakes). Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is deactivated. SAFETY 153 WARNING!

The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. BAS cannot prevent collisions, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which could jeopardize the user's safety or the safety of others. 4 Brake System Warning Light The red Brake System Warning Light will turn on when the ignition is turned to the ON/RUN mode and may stay on for as long as four seconds. If the Brake System Warning Light remains on or comes on while driving, it indicates that the brake system is not functioning properly and that immediate service is required. If the Brake System Warning Light does not come on when the ignition is turned to the ON/RUN mode, have the light repaired as soon as possible. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 154 154 SAFETY Dynamic Steering Torque (DST) Dynamic Steering Torque (DST) is a feature of the ESC and Electric Power Steering (EPS) modules that provides torque at the steering wheel for certain driving conditions in which the ESC module is detecting vehicle instability. The torque that the steering wheel receives is only meant to help the driver realize optimal steering behavior in order to reach/maintain vehicle stability. The only notification the driver receives that the feature is active, is the torque applied to the steering wheel. NOTE:

The DST feature is only meant to help the driver realize the correct course of action through small torques on the steering wheel, which means the effectiveness of the DST feature is highly dependent on the drivers sensitivity and overall reaction to the applied torque. It is very important to realize that this feature will not steer the vehicle, meaning the driver is still responsible for steering the vehicle. Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) The Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) function manages the distribution of the braking torque between the front and rear axles by limiting braking pressure to the rear axle. This is done to prevent overslip of the rear wheels to avoid vehicle instability, and to prevent the rear axle from entering the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) before the front axle. Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) anticipates the potential for wheel lift by monitoring the drivers steering wheel input and the speed of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicles speed are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it then applies the appropriate brake and may also reduce engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will occur. ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift occur-

ring during severe or evasive driving maneu-

vers; it cannot prevent wheel lift due to other factors, such as road conditions, leaving the roadway, striking objects or other vehicles. WARNING!

Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road conditions and driving conditions, influence the chance that wheel lift or rollover may occur. ERM cannot prevent all wheel lift or roll overs, especially those that involve leaving the roadway or striking objects or other vehicles. The capabilities of an ERM-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user's safety or the safety of others. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Electronic Stability Control (ESC) enhances directional control and stability of the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC corrects for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel(s) to assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition. Engine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the desired path. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 155 WARNING!

WARNING! (Continued) SAFETY 155 Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly maintain your vehicle, may change the handling characteristics of your vehicle, and may negatively affect the performance of the ESC system. Changes to the steering system, suspension, braking system, tire type and size or wheel size may adversely affect ESC performance. Improperly inflated and unevenly worn tires may also degrade ESC performance. Any vehicle modification or poor vehicle maintenance that reduces the effectiveness of the ESC system can increase the risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death. 4 ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match the intended path, ESC applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition. Oversteer when the vehicle is turning more than appropriate for the steering wheel posi-

tion. Understeer when the vehicle is turning less than appropriate for the steering wheel posi-

tion. The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light located in the instrument cluster will start to flash as soon as the ESC system becomes active. The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indi-

cator Light also flashes when the TCS is active. If the ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent accidents resulting from loss of vehicle control due to inappropriate driver input for the conditions. Only a safe, atten-

tive, and skillful driver can prevent acci-

dents. The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reck-

less or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the users safety or the safety of others.

(Continued) 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 156 156 SAFETY ESC Operating Modes NOTE:

Depending upon model and mode of operation, the ESC system may have multiple operating modes. ESC On This is the normal operating mode for the ESC. Whenever the vehicle is started, the ESC system will be in this mode. This mode should be used for most driving conditions. Alternate ESC modes should only be used for specific reasons as noted in the following paragraphs. Partial Off The Partial Off mode is intended for times when a more spirited driving experience is desired. This mode may modify TCS and ESC thresholds for activation, which allows for more wheel spin than normally allowed. This mode may be useful if the vehicle becomes stuck. To enter the Partial Off mode, momentarily push the ESC OFF button and the ESC OFF Indicator Light will illuminate. To turn the ESC on again, momentarily push the ESC OFF button and the ESC OFF Indicator Light will turn off. NOTE:

When driving with snow chains, or when starting off in deep snow, sand, or gravel, it may be desirable to allow more wheel spin. This can be accomplished by momentarily pushing the ESC OFF button to enter partial mode Partial Off mode. Once the situation requiring Partial Off mode is overcome, turn ESC back on by momentarily pushing the ESC OFF button. This may be done while the vehicle is in motion. WARNING!

When in Partial Off mode, the TCS func-

tionality of ESC, (except for the limited slip feature described in the TCS section), has been disabled and the ESC Off Indicator Light will be illuminated. When in Partial Off mode, the engine power reduction feature of TCS is disabled, and the enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC system is reduced. Trailer Sway control (TSC) is disabled when the ESC system is in the Partial Off mode. ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And ESC OFF Indicator Light The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indi-

cator Light in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition is turned to the ON mode. It should go out with the engine running. If the ESC Activa-

tion/Malfunction Indicator Light comes on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see an authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected. The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light (located in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active. The ESC Acti-

vation/Malfunction Indicator Light also flashes when TCS is active. If the ESC Activation/

Malfunction Indicator Light begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 157 NOTE:

The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light and the ESC OFF Indicator Light come on momentarily each time the ignition is turned ON. Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system will be on even if it was turned off previously. The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESC activation. The ESC OFF Indicator Light indi-

cates the customer has elected to have the Electronic Stability Control

(ESC) in a reduced mode. Hill Start Assist (HSA) Hill Start Assist (HSA) is designed to mitigate roll back from a complete stop while on an incline. If the driver releases the brake while stopped on an incline, HSA will continue to hold the brake pressure for a short period. If the driver does not apply the throttle before this time expires, the system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill as normal. The following conditions must be met in order for HSA to activate:

The feature must be enabled. The vehicle must be stopped. The park brake must be off. The driver door must be closed. The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade. The gear selection must match vehicle uphill direction (i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle backing uphill is in REVERSE (R) gear). SAFETY 157 HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all forward gears. The system will not activate if the trans-

mission is in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N). For vehi-

cles equipped with a manual transmission, if the clutch is pressed, HSA will remain active. 4 WARNING!

There may be situations where the Hill Start Assist (HSA) will not activate and slight rolling may occur, such as on minor hills or with a loaded vehicle, or while pulling a trailer. HSA is not a substitute for active driving involvement. It is always the drivers responsibility to be attentive to distance to other vehicles, people, and objects, and most importantly brake operation to ensure safe operation of the vehicle under all road conditions. Your complete attention is always required while driving to maintain safe control of your vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collision or serious personal injury. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 158 158 SAFETY Towing With HSA HSA will also provide assistance to mitigate roll back while towing a trailer. WARNING!

If you use a trailer brake controller with your trailer, the trailer brakes may be activated and deactivated with the brake switch. If so, there may not be enough brake pres-

sure to hold both the vehicle and the trailer on a hill when the brake pedal is released. In order to avoid rolling down an incline while resuming acceleration, manually activate the trailer brake or apply more vehicle brake pressure prior to releasing the brake pedal. HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully when exiting your vehicle. Also, be certain to place the trans-

mission in PARK. Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collision or serious personal injury. Disabling And Enabling HSA This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change the current setting, proceed as follows:

If disabling HSA using Uconnect Settings, refer to Uconnect Settings in Multimedia for further information. Rain Brake Support (RBS) Rain Brake Support (RBS) may improve braking performance in wet conditions. It will periodi-

cally apply a small amount of brake pressure to remove any water buildup on the front brake rotors. It functions when the windshield wipers are in LO or HI speed. When RBS is active, there is no notification to the driver and no driver interaction is required. Ready Alert Braking (RAB) Ready Alert Braking (RAB) may reduce the time required to reach full braking during emergency braking situations. It anticipates when an emer-

gency braking situation may occur by moni-

toring how fast the throttle is released by the driver. The Electronic Brake Control (EBC) system will prepare the brake system for a panic stop. Traction Control System (TCS) The Traction Control System (TCS) monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, the TCS may apply brake pressure to the spinning wheel(s) and/or reduce vehicle power to provide enhanced acceleration and stability. A feature of the TCS, Brake Limited Differential (BLD), functions similar to a limited slip differential and controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other, the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel. This will allow more vehicle torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning. BLD may remain enabled even if TCS and the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) are in a reduced mode. Trailer Sway Control (TSC) Trailer Sway Control (TSC) uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an excessively swaying trailer and will take the appropriate actions to attempt to stop the sway. TSC will become active automatically once an excessively swaying trailer is recognized. Note that TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying. Always use caution when towing a trailer and follow the trailer tongue weight recommendations. Refer to Trailer Towing in Starting And Operating 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 159 for further information. When TSC is func-

tioning, the ESC Activation/Malfunction Indi-

cator Light will flash, the engine power may be reduced and you may feel the brakes being applied to individual wheels to attempt to stop the trailer from swaying. TSC is disabled when the ESC system is in the Partial Off mode. WARNING!

If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle down, stop at the nearest safe location, and adjust the trailer load to eliminate trailer sway. AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) If Equipped The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system uses two radar-based sensors, located inside the rear bumper fascia, to detect highway licens-

able vehicles (automobiles, trucks, motorcy-

cles, etc.) that enter the blind spot zones from the rear/front/side of the vehicle. SAFETY 159 NOTE:

The BSM system DOES NOT alert the driver about rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the detection zones. The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT change if your vehicle is towing a trailer. Therefore, visually verify the adjacent lane is clear for both your vehicle and trailer before making a lane change. If the trailer or other object (i.e., bicycle, sports equipment) extends beyond the side of your vehicle, this may result in false detections. The BSM warning light may even remain illuminated the entire time the vehicle is in a forward gear. The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system may experience drop outs (blinking on and off) of the side mirror Warning Indicator lamps when a motorcycle or any small object remains at the side of the vehicle for extended periods of time (more than a couple of seconds). 4 Rear Detection Zones When the vehicle is started, the BSM warning light will momentarily illuminate in both outside rear view mirrors to let the driver know that the system is operational. The BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in any forward gear or REVERSE (R) and enters stand-by mode when the vehicle is in PARK (P). The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane width on both sides of the vehicle 12 ft

(3.7 m). The zone length starts at the outside rear view mirror and extends approximately 10 ft (3 m) beyond the rear bumper of the vehicle. The BSM system monitors the detec-

tion zones on both sides of the vehicle when the vehicle speed reaches approximately 6 mph

(10 km/h) or higher and will alert the driver of vehicles in these areas. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 160 160 SAFETY The area on the rear fascia where the radar sensors are located must remain free of snow, ice, and dirt/road contamination so that the BSM system can function properly. Do not block the area of the rear fascia where the radar sensors are located with foreign objects

(bumper stickers, bicycle racks, etc.). If the blockage message is still present after cycling the ignition and driving in traffic, check again for a blockage. The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the detection zones by illuminating the BSM warning light located in the outside mirrors in addition to sounding an audible (chime) alert and reducing the radio volume. Refer to Modes Of Operation in this section for further information. Entering From The Side Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either side of the vehicle. Side Monitoring Sensor Location If the system detects degraded performance due to contamination or foreign objects, a message will warn you of a blocked sensor and the warning indicators in side view mirrors will be on. The warning indicators will remain illumi-

nated until blockage clearing conditions are met. First clear the fascia area around the sensors of the blockage. After removing the blockage, cycle the ignition from on to off and then back on again to reset the system. Warning Light Location The BSM system monitors the detection zone from three different entry points (side, rear, front) while driving to see if an alert is neces-

sary. The BSM system will issue an alert during these types of zone entries. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 161 Entering From The Rear Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on either side and enter the rear detection zone with a relative speed of less than 30 mph

(48 km/h). Overtaking Traffic If you pass another vehicle slowly with a relative speed less than 15 mph (24 km/h) and the vehicle remains in the blind spot for approxi-

mately 1.5 seconds, the warning light will be illuminated. If the difference in speed between the two vehicles is greater than 15 mph

(24 km/h), the warning light will not illuminate. Rear Monitoring Overtaking/Approaching SAFETY 161 Overtaking/Passing 4 The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on stationary objects such as guardrails, posts, walls, foliage, berms, snow banks, car washes etc. However, occasionally the system may alert on such objects. This is normal opera-

tion and your vehicle does not require service. Stationary Objects 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 162 162 SAFETY The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in adjacent lanes. Rear Cross Path (RCP) The Rear Cross Path (RCP) feature is intended to aid the driver when backing out of parking spaces where their vision of oncoming vehicles may be blocked. Proceed slowly and cautiously out of the parking space until the rear end of the vehicle is exposed. The RCP system will then have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an oncoming vehicle is detected, alert the driver. Opposing Traffic WARNING!

The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to help detect objects in the blind spot zones. The BSM system is not designed to detect pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals. Even if your vehicle is equipped with the BSM system, always check your vehicles mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and use your turn signal before changing lanes. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death. RCP Detection Zones RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of the vehicle, for objects that are moving toward the side of the vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately 3 mph (5 km/h), to objects moving a maximum of approximately 20 mph (32 km/h), such as in parking lot situa-

tions. NOTE:

In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can be obscured by vehicles parked on either side. If the sensors are blocked by other structures or vehicles, the system will not be able to alert the driver. Additionally, if the host vehicle is obscured by a flat object on one side the system can false alert on vehicles approaching from the opposite direction. When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE (R), the driver is alerted using both the visual and audible alarms, including reducing the radio volume. WARNING!

Rear Cross Path Detection (RCP) is not a back up aid system. It is intended to be used to help a driver detect an oncoming vehicle in a parking lot situation. Drivers must be careful when backing up, even when using RCP. Always check carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before backing up. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 163 Modes Of Operation Three selectable modes of operation are avail-

able in the Uconnect System. Refer to Uconnect Settings in Multimedia for further information. Blind Spot Alert Lights Only Default Setting When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side view mirror based on a detected object. However, when the system is operating in Rear Cross Path (RCP) mode, the system will respond with both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, the radio is muted. Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/

Chime mode, the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side view mirror based on a detected object. If the turn signal is then activated, and it corresponds to an alert present on that side of the vehicle, an audible chime will also be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and detected object are present on the same side at the same time, both the visual and audible alerts will be issued. In addition to the audible alert the radio (if on) will also be muted. NOTE:

Whenever an audible alert is requested by the BSM system, the radio is also muted. When the system is in RCP, the system shall respond with both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, the radio is also muted. Turn/hazard signal status is ignored;

the RCP state always requests the chime. Blind Spot Alert Off When the BSM system is turned off there will be no visual or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP systems. NOTE:

The BSM system will store the current oper-

ating mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the vehicle is started the previously stored mode will be recalled and used. The BSM system can work in conjunction with the Keysense function of the vehicle (if equipped). Refer to KeySense Cluster Messages" in Getting To Know Your Instru-

ment Panel for further information. 1. 2. SAFETY 163 General Information The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interfer-

4 ence, and 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Le prsent appareil est conforme aux CNR d`Innovation, Science and Economic Develop-

ment applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorise aux deux conditions suivantes:

l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouil-

lage, et l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radiolectrique subi, mme si le brouillage est susceptible d'en comprom-

ettre le fonctionnement. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 164 164 SAFETY La operacin de este equipo est sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones:

1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia perjudicial y 2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cual-

quier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operacin no deseada. NOTE:

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compli-

ance could void the users authority to operate the equipment. Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With Mitigation If Equipped The Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system with Mitigation provides the driver with audible warnings, visual warnings (within the instru-

ment cluster display), and may apply a brake jerk to warn the driver when it detects a poten-

tial frontal collision. The warnings and limited braking are intended to provide the driver with enough time to react, avoid or mitigate the potential collision. NOTE:

FCW monitors the information from the forward looking sensors as well as the Electronic Brake Controller (EBC), to calculate the probability of a forward collision. When the system determines that a forward collision is probable, the driver will be provided with audible and visual warn-

ings and may provide a brake jerk warning. If the driver does not take action based upon these progressive warnings, then the system will provide a limited level of active braking to help slow the vehicle and mitigate the potential forward collision. If the driver reacts to the warn-

ings by braking and the system determines that the driver intends to avoid the collision by braking but has not applied sufficient brake force, the system will compensate and provide additional brake force as required. If a FCW with Mitigation event begins at a speed below 26 mph (42 km/h), the system may provide the maximum braking possible to miti-

gate the potential forward collision. If the Forward Collision Warning with Mitigation event stops the vehicle completely, the system will hold the vehicle at standstill for two seconds and then release the brakes. FCW Message When the system determines a collision with the vehicle in front of you is no longer probable, the warning message will be deactivated. NOTE:

The minimum speed for FCW activation is 1 mph (2 km/h). The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects other than vehicles such as guard rails or sign posts based on the course prediction. This is expected and is a part of normal FCW activation and functionality. It is unsafe to test the FCW system. To prevent such misuse of the system, after four Active Braking events within a key cycle, the Active Braking portion of FCW will be deacti-

vated until the next key cycle. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 165 The FCW system is intended for on-road use only. If the vehicle is taken off-road, the FCW system should be deactivated to prevent unnecessary warnings to the surroundings. NOTE:

WARNING!

Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not intended to avoid a collision on its own, nor can FCW detect every type of potential collision. The driver has the responsibility to avoid a collision by controlling the vehicle via braking and steering. Failure to follow this warning could lead to serious injury or death. Turning FCW On Or Off The Forward Collision menu setting is located in the Uconnect settings. NOTE:

The default status of FCW is on, this allows the system to warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you. Changing the FCW status to off deactivates the system, so no warning or active braking will be available in case of a possible collision. The FCW system state is kept in memory from one key cycle to the next. If the system is turned off, it will remain off when the vehicle is restarted. FCW can work in conjunction with the KeySense function of the vehicle (if equipped). Refer to KeySense Cluster Messages" in Getting To Know Your Instru-

ment Panel for further information. FCW Braking Status And Sensitivity The FCW Sensitivity and Active Braking status are programmable through the Uconnect System. Refer to Uconnect Settings in Multimedia for further information. The default sensitivity of FCW is the Medium setting and the system status is Warning &

Braking. This allows the system to warn the driver of a possible collision with the vehicle in front using audible/visual warnings and it applies autonomous braking. Changing the FCW status to Far setting allows the system to warn the driver of a possible collision with the vehicle in front using audible/visual warning when the latter is at a farther distance SAFETY 165 than "Medium" setting. This provides the most reaction time to avoid a possible collision. Changing the FCW status to the Near setting, allows the system to warn the driver of a possible collision with the vehicle in front when the distance between the vehicle in the front is much closer. This setting provides less reaction time than the Far and Medium settings, which allows for a more dynamic driving experi-

ence. 4 NOTE:

Changing the FCW status to Only Warning prevents the system from providing limited active braking, or additional brake support if the driver is not braking adequately in the event of a potential frontal collision, but maintains the audible and visual warnings. Changing the FCW status to Off prevents the system from providing autonomous braking, or additional brake support if the driver is not braking adequately in the event of a potential frontal collision. The system will retain the last setting selected by the driver after ignition shut down. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 166 166 SAFETY FCW may not react to irrelevant objects such as overhead objects, ground reflections, objects not in the path of the vehicle, stationary objects that are far away, oncoming traffic, or leading vehicles with the same or higher rate of speed. FCW will be disabled like ACC, with the unavailable screens. FCW Limited Warning If the instrument cluster displays ACC/FCW Limited Functionality or ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front Windshield momen-

tarily, there may be a condition that limits FCW functionality. Although the vehicle is still driv-

able under normal conditions, the active braking may not be fully available. Once the condition that limited the system performance is no longer present, the system will return to its full performance state. If the problem persists, see an authorized dealer. Service FCW Warning If the system turns off, and the instrument cluster displays:

ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required This indicates there is an internal system fault. Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions, have the system checked by an authorized dealer. General Information The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interfer-

ence, and 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Le prsent appareil est conforme aux CNR d`Innovation, Science and Economic Develop-

ment applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorise aux deux conditions suivantes:

1. 2. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouil-

lage, et l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radiolectrique subi, mme si le brouillage est susceptible d'en comprom-

ettre le fonctionnement. La operacin de este equipo est sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones:

1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia perjudicial y 2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cual-

quier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operacin no deseada. NOTE:

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compli-

ance could void the users authority to operate the equipment. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 167 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recommended cold placard pressure. NOTE:

The TPMS Warning Light will illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the four active road tires. In addition, the instrument cluster will display a graphic showing the pres-

sure values of each tire with the low tire pres-

sure values in a different color, or the Uconnect radio will display a TPMS message, when this occurs you must increase the tire pressure to the recommended cold placard pressure in order for the TPMS Warning Light to turn off. The tire pressure will vary with temperature by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12F

(6.5C). This means that when the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pres-

sure molded into the tire sidewall. Refer to Tires in Servicing and Maintenance for infor-

mation on how to properly inflate the vehicles tires. The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven. This is normal and there should be no adjustment for this increased pressure. The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pres-

sure if the tire pressure falls below the low-pres-

sure warning limit for any reason, including low temperature effects and natural pressure loss through the tire. The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended cold placard pres-

sure. Once the low tire pressure warning (TPMS Warning Light) illuminates, you must increase the tire pressure to the recommended cold placard pressure in order for the TPMS Warning Light to turn off. The system will automatically update and the TPMS Warning Light will turn off once the system receives the updated tire pressures. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information. SAFETY 167 For example, your vehicle may have a recom-

mended cold (parked for more than three hours) placard pressure of 33 psi (227 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68F (20C) and the measured tire pressure is 28 psi (193 kPa), a temperature drop to 20F (-7C) will decrease the tire pressure to approximately 24 psi (165 kPa). This tire pressure is low enough to turn ON the TPMS Warning Light. Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 28 psi (193 kPa), but the TPMS Warning Light will still be on. In this situation, the TPMS Warning Light will turn off only after the tires are inflated to the vehicles recommended cold placard pressure value. NOTE:

When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi

(28 kPa) above the recommended cold placard pressure in order to turn the TPMS Warning Light off. 4 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 168 168 SAFETY CAUTION!

NOTE:

The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style. The TPM sensor is not designed for use on aftermarket wheels and may contribute to a poor overall system performance or sensor damage. Customers are encouraged to use OEM wheels to assure proper TPM feature operation. Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended that you take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to have your sensor function checked. After inspecting or adjusting the tire pres-

sure always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could damage the TPMS sensor. The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire failure or condition. The TPMS should not be used as a tire pres-

sure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure. Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicles handling and stopping ability. The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the drivers responsi-

bility to maintain correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure gauge, even if underinflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS Warning Light. Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure, and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in the tire. Light Premium System The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure readings to the receiver module. NOTE:

It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to maintain the proper pressure. The TPMS consists of the following compo-

nents:

Receiver module Four Tire Pressure Monitoring sensors Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System messages, which display in the instrument cluster Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 169 Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings The TPMS Warning Light will illumi-

nate in the instrument cluster and a chime will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the four active road tires. In addition, the instrument cluster will display an "Inflate to XX" message and a graphic showing the pressure values of each tire with the low tire pressure values in a different color. Tire Pressure Monitoring System Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible and inflate the tires with low pressure

(those in a different color in the instrument cluster graphic) to the vehicles recommended cold placard pressure value as shown in the

"Inflate to XX" message. Once the system receives the updated tire pressures, the system will automatically update, the pressure values in the graphic display in the instrument cluster will return to their original color, and the TPMS Warning Light will turn off. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph

(24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information. Service TPMS Warning When a system fault is detected, the Tire Pres-

sure Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. The system fault will also sound a chime. In addition, the instrument cluster will display a "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM"

message for a minimum of five seconds and then display dashes (--) in place of the pressure value to indicate which sensor is not being received. If the ignition is cycled, this sequence will repeat, providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault no longer exists, the TPMS Warning Light will no longer flash, and the SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message will no longer display, and a pressure value will display in place of the dashes. A system fault can occur due to any of the following:

SAFETY 169 Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPMS sensors Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that affects radio wave signals Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings Using tire chains on the vehicle Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors Vehicles With Compact Spare If Equipped 1. The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the compact spare tire. 2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning limit, upon the next ignition cycle, the TPMS Warning Light will remain on and a chime will sound. In addi-

tion, the graphic in the instrument cluster will still display a different color pressure value. 4 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 170 170 SAFETY 3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h), the TPMS Warning Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. In addition, the instrument cluster will display a SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message for five seconds and then display dashes (--) in place of the pressure value. 4. For each subsequent ignition cycle, a chime will sound, the TPMS Warning Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid, and the instrument cluster will display a SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message for five seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value. 5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare, the TPMS will update automatically. In addition, the TPMS Warning Light will turn off and the graphic in the instrument cluster will display a new pressure value instead of dashes (--), as long as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information. TPMS Deactivation If Equipped The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) can be deactivated if replacing all four wheel and tire assemblies (road tires) with wheel and tire assemblies that do not have TPMS Sensors, such as when installing winter wheel and tire assemblies on your vehicle. To deactivate the TPMS, first, replace all four wheel and tire assemblies (road tires) with tires not equipped with Tire Pressure Monitoring

(TPM) sensors. Then, drive the vehicle for 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h). The TPMS will chime, the TPMS Warning Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on. The instrument cluster will display the SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message and then display dashes (--) in place of the pressure values. Beginning with the next ignition cycle, the TPMS will no longer chime or display the SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message in the instrument cluster but dashes (--) will remain in place of the pressure values. To reactivate the TPMS, replace all four wheel and tire assemblies (road tires) with tires equipped with TPM sensors. Then, drive the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph

(24 km/h). The TPMS will chime, the TPMS Warning Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then turn off. The instrument cluster will display the SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message and then display pressure values in place of the dashes. On the next ignition cycle the "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message will no longer be displayed as long as no system fault exists. General Information The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interfer-

ence, and 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 171 Le prsent appareil est conforme aux CNR d`Innovation, Science and Economic Develop-

ment applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorise aux deux conditions suivantes:

OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle are the restraint systems:

Occupant Restraint Systems Features 1. 2. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouil-

lage, et Seat Belt Systems l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radiolectrique subi, mme si le brouillage est susceptible d'en comprom-

ettre le fonctionnement. Bags Child Restraints Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Some of the safety features described in this section may be standard equipment on some models, or may be optional equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask an authorized dealer. Please pay close attention to the information in this section. It tells you how to use your restraint system properly, to keep you and your passen-

gers as safe as possible. La operacin de este equipo est sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones:

1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no 2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cual-

quier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operacin no deseada. NOTE:

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compli-

ance could void the users authority to operate the equipment. cause interferencia perjudicial y Important Safety Precautions SAFETY 171 Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying air bag:

1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride buckled up in the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat. 2. A child who is not big enough to wear the vehicle seat belt properly (Refer to Child Restraints in this section for further infor-

mation) must be secured in the appropriate child restraint or belt-positioning booster seat in a rear seating position. 4 3. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facing child restraint) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the seat as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint (Refer to Child Restraints in this section for further information). 4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arm. 5. You should read the instructions provided with your child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 172 172 SAFETY 6. All occupants should always wear their lap and shoulder belts properly. 7. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved back as far as practical to allow the front air bags room to inflate. 8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your vehicle has side air bags, and deploy-

ment occurs, the side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space between occupants and the door and occupants could be injured. 9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be modified to accommodate a disabled person, refer to the Customer Assistance section for customer service contact infor-

mation. WARNING!

Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-facing child restraint.

(Continued) WARNING! (Continued) Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle. Seat Belt Systems Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver and could cause a collision that includes you. This can happen far away from home or on your own street. Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times. Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System

(BeltAlert) Driver and Passenger BeltAlert (if equipped) BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver and outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) to buckle their seat belts. The BeltAlert feature is active whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN position. Initial Indication If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first in the START or ON/RUN position, a chime will signal for a few seconds. If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first in the START or ON/RUN position the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until both outboard front seat belts are buckled. The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when an outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 173 BeltAlert Warning Sequence The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when the vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle speed range and the driver or outboard front seat passenger is unbuckled (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert)

(the outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied). The BeltAlert warning sequence starts by blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime. Once the BeltAlert warning sequence has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will remain on until the seat belts are buckled. The BeltAlert warning sequence may repeat based on vehicle speed until the driver and occupied outboard front seat passenger seat belts are buckled. The driver should instruct all occupants to buckle their seat belts. Change of Status If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) unbuckles their seat belt while the vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert warning sequence will begin until the seat belts are buckled again. The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or other items are placed on the outboard front passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is recom-

mended that pets be restrained in the rear seat

(if equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts, and cargo is properly stowed. BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by an authorized dealer. FCA US LLC does not recom-

mend deactivating BeltAlert. NOTE:

If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until the driver and outboard front seat passenger seat belts are buckled. Lap/Shoulder Belts All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with lap/shoulder belts. The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during very sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the shoulder part of the seat belt SAFETY 173 to move freely with you under normal condi-

tions. However, in a collision the seat belt will lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle. WARNING!

Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some collisions, the air bags wont deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even though you have air bags. 4 In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up. You can strike the inte-

rior of your vehicle or other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly. It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.

(Continued) 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 174 174 SAFETY Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly. Occupants, including the driver, should always wear their seat belts whether or not an air bag is also provided at their seating position to minimize the risk of severe injury or death in the event of a crash. Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too. Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt. People belted together can crash into one another in a collision, hurting one another badly. Never use a lap/

shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one person, no matter what their size. WARNING! (Continued) WARNING!

WARNING! (Continued) A lap belt worn too high can increase the A seat belt that is worn under your arm is risk of injury in a collision. The seat belt forces wont be at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat belt as low as possible and keep it snug. A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly. In a collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the seat belt is flat against your body, without twists. If you cant straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take it to an authorized dealer immediately and have it fixed. A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride too high on your body, possibly causing internal injuries. Always buckle your seat belt into the buckle nearest you. A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far forward, increasing the possi-

bility of injury. Wear your seat belt snugly.

(Continued) dangerous. Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck injury. A seat belt worn under the arm can cause internal inju-

ries. Ribs arent as strong as shoulder bones. Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the force in a collision. A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you from injury during a collision. You are more likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together. A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a collision and leave you with no protection. Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immedi-

ately. Do not disassemble or modify the seat belt system. Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 175 SAFETY 175 Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions 3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click. 1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and adjust the seat. 2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat (for vehicles equipped with a rear seat). Grasp the latch plate and pull out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go around your lap. Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle 4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low across your hips, below your abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces the risk of sliding under the seat belt in a collision. Positioning The Lap Belt 4 5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor will with-

draw any slack in the shoulder belt. 6. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the buckle. The seat belt will automati-

cally retract to its stowed position. If neces-

sary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow the seat belt to retract fully. Pulling Out The Latch Plate 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 176 176 SAFETY Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/shoulder belt. 1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor point. 2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate, grasp and twist the seat belt webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that begins immediately above the latch plate. 3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing. The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the latch plate. 4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer twisted. Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage In the front and second row outboard seats the shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or down-

ward to position the seat belt away from your neck. Push or squeeze the anchorage button to release the anchorage, and move it up or down to the position that serves you best. verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull downward on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked into position. WARNING!

Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor will with-

draw any slack in the shoulder belt. Misadjustment of the seat belt could reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash. Always make all seat belt height adjust-

ments when the vehicle is stationary. Adjustable Anchorage As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower posi-

tion, and if you are taller than average, you will prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a higher posi-

tion. After you release the anchorage button, try to move it up or down to make sure that it is locked in position. NOTE:

The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature allows the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward position without pushing or squeezing the release button. To 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 177 Second Row Center (If Equipped) And Third Row Center Seat Belt Operating Instructions The second row center (if equipped) and third row center seat belts feature a seat belt with a mini-latch plate and buckle, which allows the seat belt to detach from the lower anchor when the seat is folded. The mini-latch plate and regular latch plate can then be stored out of the way in the headliner for added convenience to open up utilization of the storage areas behind the front seats when the seat is not occupied. 1. Remove the mini-latch plate and regular latch plate from its stowed position in the headliner slightly behind the second or third row seat. 2. Grasp the mini-latch plate and pull the seat 4. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, belt over the seat. insert the mini-latch plate into the mini-buckle until you hear a click. SAFETY 177 Mini-Latch Plate 3. Route the shoulder belt to the inside of the left head restraint. Connect Mini-Latch To Mini-Buckle 4 Mini-Latch Stowage Routing The Rear Seat Belt Latch Plate 1 Seat Belt Latch Plate 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 178 178 SAFETY 5. Sit back in seat. Slide the regular latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go around your lap. Rear Center Seat Belt Buckled 1 Seat Belt Latch Plate 2 Seat Belt Buckle 6. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click. Mini-Latch And Mini-Buckle Connected 7. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low across your hips, below your abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, pull on the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces the risk of sliding under the seat belt in a collision. 8. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor will withdraw any slack in the seat belt. 9. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the buckle. 10. To disengage the mini-latch plate from the mini-buckle for storage, insert the regular latch plate into the center red slot on the mini-buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract to its stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow the seat belt to retract fully. Insert the mini-latch plate and regular latch plate into its stowed position. Detaching Mini-Buckle With Seat Belt Tongue WARNING!

If the mini-latch plate and mini-buckle are not properly connected when the seat belt is used by an occupant, the seat belt will not be able to provide proper restraint and will increase the risk of injury in a collision.

(Continued) 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 179 WARNING! (Continued) WARNING!

Seat Belts And Pregnant Women SAFETY 179 When reattaching the mini-latch plate and mini-buckle, ensure the seat belt webbing is not twisted. If the webbing is twisted, follow the preceding procedure to detach the mini-latch plate and mini-buckle, untwist the webbing, and reattach the mini-latch plate and mini-buckle. Seat Belt Extender If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even when the webbing is fully extended and the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage

(if equipped) is in its lowest position, an autho-

rized dealer can provide you with a Seat Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender should be used only if the existing seat belt is not long enough. When the Seat Belt Extender is not required for a different occupant, it must be removed. ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physi-

cally required in order to properly fit the original seat belt system. DO NOT USE the Seat Belt Extender if, when worn, the distance between the front edge of the Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of the occupants body is LESS than 6 inches. Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed can increase the risk of serious injury or death in a collision. Only use the Seat Belt Extender when the lap belt is not long enough and only use in the recom-

mended seating positions. Remove and store the Seat Belt Extender when not needed. 4 Seat Belts And Pregnant Women Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including pregnant women: the risk of injury in the event of an accident is reduced for the mother and the unborn child if they are wearing a seat belt. Position the lap belt snug and low below the abdomen and across the strong bones of the hips. Place the shoulder belt across the chest and away from the neck. Never place the shoulder belt behind the back or under the arm. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 180 180 SAFETY Seat Belt Pretensioner The front outboard seat belt system is equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision. These devices may improve the performance of the seat belt by removing slack from the seat belt early in a collision. Preten-

sioners work for all size occupants, including those in child restraints. NOTE:

These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be worn snugly and positioned properly. The pretensioners are triggered by the Occu-

pant Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the pretensioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately. Energy Management Feature The front outboard seat belt system is equipped with an Energy Management feature that may help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a collision. The seat belt system has a retractor assembly that is designed to release webbing in a controlled manner. Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors

(ALR) If applicable, refer to the Hybrid Supplement for additional information. The seat belts in the passenger seating posi-

tions are equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) which is used to secure a child restraint system. For additional informa-

tion, refer to Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt under the Child Restraints section of this manual. The figure below illustrates the locking feature for each seating position. 7 Passenger Stow n Go Seating Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations ALR Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor 7 Passenger Bench Seat Automatic Locking Retractor 8 Passenger Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)

(ALR) Locations Locations ALR Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor ALR Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 181 If the passenger seating position is equipped with an ALR and is being used for normal usage, only pull the seat belt webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap around the occupants mid-section so as to not activate the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking sound as the seat belt retracts. Allow the webbing to retract completely in this case and then care-

fully pull out only the amount of webbing neces-

sary to comfortably wrap around the occupants mid-section. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a "click."

In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-locked. The seat belt will still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child restraint is installed in a seating position that has a seat belt with this feature. Children 12 years old and under should always be prop-

erly restrained in the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat. WARNING!

Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-facing child restraint. Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle. How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode belt. 2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull down-

ward until the entire seat belt is extracted. 3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode. SAFETY 181 How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode. WARNING!

The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the switchable Automatic Locking Retractor

(ALR) feature or any other seat belt function is not working properly when checked according to the procedures in the Service Manual. 4 Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could increase the risk of injury in colli-

sions. restrain occupants who are wearing the seat belt or children who are using booster seats. The locked mode is only used to install rear-facing or forward-facing child restraints that have a harness for restraining the child. 1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 182 182 SAFETY Seat Belt Park Stitch If Equipped The rear outboard seat belts may be equipped with a park stitch to raise the latch plate for easier access to occupants. If the park stitch interferes with the tight installation of a child restraint, slide the latch plate over the stitching to shorten the lap portion of the belt and install the car seat normally. When the car seat is removed from the vehicle, slide the latch plate above the park stitch to enable occupants to latch the seatbelt securely. Third Row Stow Clip - If Equipped Your vehicle may be equipped with a stow clip on the lower trim behind the third row. This clip is used to hold the seat belt out of the path of the power folding third row seat. Only place the seat belt webbing in this clip while folding and opening the seat. Do not leave the webbing behind the clip when using the belt to restrain an occupant. Seat Belt Park Stitch Location Third Row Stow Clip WARNING!

Do not place the seat belt webbing behind the third row stow clip when using the seat belt to restrain an occupant. The seat belt will not be positioned properly on the occupant and they could be more seriously injured in an accident as a result. Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Some of the safety features described in this section may be standard equipment on some models, or may be optional equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask an authorized dealer. The air bag system must be ready to protect you in a collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller

(ORC) monitors the internal circuits and inter-

connecting wiring associated with the electrical Air Bag System Components. Your vehicle may be equipped with the following Air Bag System Components:

Air Bag System Components Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) Air Bag Warning Light Steering Wheel and Column Instrument Panel Knee Impact Bolsters Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags Seat Belt Buckle Switch Supplemental Side Air Bags 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 183 Supplemental Knee Air Bags Front and Side Impact Sensors Seat Belt Pretensioners Seat Track Position Sensors Occupant Classification System Air Bag Warning Light The Occupant Restraint Controller

(ORC) monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the air bag system whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN position. If the ignition switch is in the OFF position or in the ACC position, the air bag system is not on and the air bags will not inflate. The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may deploy the air bag system even if the battery loses power or it becomes discon-

nected prior to deployment. The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds for a self-check when the ignition switch is first in the ON/RUN position. After the self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it turns on the Air Bag Warning Light, either momentarily or continuously. A single chime will sound to alert you if the light comes on again after initial startup. The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illu-

minate the instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is detected that could affect the air bag system. The diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction. While the air bag system is designed to be maintenance free, if any of the following occurs, have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately. The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is first in the ON/RUN position. the four to eight-second interval. The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermit-

tently or remains on while driving. NOTE:

If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In SAFETY 183 this condition the air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protection. Have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately. WARNING!

Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument panel could mean you wont have the air bag system to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately. 4 If a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light is detected, which could affect the Supplemental Restraint System

(SRS), the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will illuminate on the instrument panel. The Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will stay on until the fault is cleared. In addition, a single chime will sound to alert you that the Redun-

dant Air Bag Warning Light has come on and a The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after Redundant Air Bag Warning Light 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 184 184 SAFETY fault has been detected. If the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving have an authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately. For additional information regarding the Redun-

dant Air Bag Warning Light refer to Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel section of this manual. Front Air Bags This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder belts for both the driver and front passenger. The front air bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems. The driver front air bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The passenger front air bag is mounted in the instrument panel, above the glove compart-

ment. The words SRS AIRBAG or AIRBAG are embossed on the air bag covers. WARNING! (Continued) Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-facing child restraint. Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle. Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag Features The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage driver and front passenger air bags. This system provides output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), which may receive information from the front impact sensors (if equipped) or other system components. The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an impact that requires air bag deploy-

ment. A low energy output is used in less severe Front Air Bag/Knee Bolster Locations 1 Driver And Passenger Front Air Bags 2 Passenger Knee Impact Bolster/Supplemen-

tal Passenger Knee Air Bag 3 Driver Knee Impact Bolster/Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag WARNING!

Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument panel during front air bag deployment could cause serious injury, including death. Air bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel.

(Continued) 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 185 collisions. A higher energy output is used for more severe collisions. This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/

or front passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether the driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags. This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon seat position. This vehicle is equipped with a right front passenger Occupant Classification System

(OCS) that is designed to provide Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag output appropriate to the occupants seated weight input, as deter-

mined by the OCS. WARNING!

No objects should be placed over or near the air bag on the instrument panel or steering wheel because any such objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a colli-

sion severe enough to cause the air bag to inflate.

(Continued) WARNING! (Continued) Do not put anything on or around the air bag covers or attempt to open them manu-

ally. You may damage the air bags and you could be injured because the air bags may no longer be functional. The protective covers for the air bag cushions are designed to open only when the air bags are inflating. Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some collisions, air bags wont deploy at all. Always wear your seat belts even though you have air bags. Front Air Bag Operation Front Air Bags are designed to provide addi-

tional protection by supplementing the seat belts. Front air bags are not expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, or rollover colli-

sions. The front air bags will not deploy in all frontal collisions, including some that may produce substantial vehicle damage for example, some pole collisions, truck under-

rides, and angle offset collisions. SAFETY 185 On the other hand, depending on the type and location of impact, front air bags may deploy in crashes with little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a severe initial deceleration. Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should have deployed. Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all collisions, and also are needed to help keep you in position, away from an inflating air bag. When the ORC detects a collision requiring the front air bags, it signals the inflator units. A large quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the front air bags. The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper passenger side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to their full size. The front air bags fully inflate in less time than it takes to blink your eyes. The front air bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger. 4 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 186 186 SAFETY Occupant Classification System (OCS) Front Passenger Seat The Occupant Classification System (OCS) is part of a Federally regulated safety system for this vehicle. It is designed to provide Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag output appropriate to the occupants seated weight, as determined by the OCS. The Occupant Classification System (OCS) consists of the following:

Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) Occupant Classification Module (OCM) and Sensor located in the front passenger seat OCM communicates this information to the ORC. The ORC may reduce the inflation rate of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag deploy-

ment based on occupant classification. In order for the OCS to operate as designed, it is important for the front passenger to be seated properly and properly wearing the seat belt. The OCS will NOT prevent deployment of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag. The OCS may reduce the inflation rate of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag if the OCS estimates that:

The front passenger seat is unoccupied or has very light objects on it; or Air Bag Warning Light The front passenger seat is occupied by a Occupant Classification Module (OCM) and Sensor The Occupant Classification Module (OCM) is located underneath the front passenger seat. The Sensor is located beneath the passenger seat cushion foam. Any weight on the seat will be sensed by the Sensor. The OCM uses input from the Sensor to determine the front passengers most probable classification. The small passenger, including a child; or Unoccupied seat The front passenger seat is occupied by a rear-facing child restraint; or The front passenger is not properly seated or his or her weight is taken off of the seat for a period of time. Front Passenger Seat Occupant Status Rear-facing child restraint Child, including a child in a forward-facing child restraint or booster seat*

Properly seated adult Full-power Front Passenger Air Bag Output Reduced-power deployment Reduced-power deployment OR Full-power deployment deployment OR reduced-power deployment Reduced-power deployment

* It is possible for a child to be classified as an adult, allowing a full-power Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag deployment. Never allow children to ride in the front passenger seat and never install a child restraint system, including a rear-facing child restraint, in the front passenger seat. Never install a rear-facing child restraint in comfortably on or near the floor 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 187 WARNING!

Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-facing child restraint. the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle. Children 12 years or younger should always ride buckled up in the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat. The OCS determines the front passengers most probable classification. The OCS estimates the seated weight on the front passenger seat and where that weight is located. The OCS commu-

nicates the classification status to the ORC. The ORC uses the classification to determine whether the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag inflation rate should be adjusted. In order for the OCS to operate as designed, it is important for the front passenger to be seated properly and properly wearing the seat belt. Properly seated passengers are:

Sitting upright Facing forward Sitting in the center of the seat with their feet Sitting with their back against the seatback and the seatback in an upright position Seated Properly SAFETY 187 Lighter Weight Passengers (Including Small Adults) When a lighter weight passenger, including a small adult, occupies the front passenger seat, the OCS may reduce the inflation rate of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag. This does not mean that the OCS is working improperly. Do not decrease OR increase the front passengers seated weight on the front passenger seat The front passengers seated weight must be prop-

erly positioned on the front passenger seat. Failure to do so may result in serious injury or death. The OCS determines the most probable classification of the occupant that it detects. The OCS will detect the front passengers decreased or increased seated weight, which may result in an adjusted inflation rate of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag in a collision. This does not mean that the OCS is working improperly. Decreasing the front passengers seated weight on the front passenger seat may result in a reduced-power deployment of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag. Increasing the front passengers seated weight on the front passenger seat may result in a full-power deploy-

ment of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag. 4 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 188 188 SAFETY Examples of improper front passenger seating include:

The front passengers weight is transferred to another part of the vehicle (like the door, arm rest or instrument panel). The front passenger leans forward, sideways, or turns to face the rear of the vehicle. The front passengers seatback is not in the full upright position. The front passenger carries or holds an object while seated (e.g., backpack, box, etc.). Objects are lodged under the front passenger seat. Objects are lodged between the front passenger seat and center console. Accessories that may change the seated weight on the front passenger seat are attached to the front passenger seat. Anything that may decrease or increase the front passengers seated weight. The OCS determines the front passengers most probable classification. If an occupant in the front passenger seat is seated improperly, the occupant may provide an output signal to the OCS that is different from the occupants prop-

erly seated weight input, for example:

Not Seated Properly Not Seated Properly Not Seated Properly Not Seated Properly 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 189 WARNING!

WARNING! (Continued) If a child restraint system, child, small teen-

ager or adult in the front passenger seat is seated improperly, the occupant may provide an output signal to the OCS that is different from the occupants properly seated weight input. This may result in serious injury or death in a collision. Always wear your seat belt and sit properly, with the seatback in an upright position, your back against the seatback, sitting upright, facing forward, in the center of the seat, with your feet comfortably on or near the floor. Do not carry or hold any objects (e.g., back-

packs, boxes, etc.) while seated in the front passenger seat. Holding an object may provide an output signal to the OCS that is different than the occupants properly seated weight input, which may result in serious injury or death in a collision.

(Continued) Placing an object on the floor under the front passenger seat may prevent the OCS from working properly, which may result in serious injury or death in a collision. Do not place any objects on the floor under the front passenger seat. The Air Bag Warning Light in the instrument panel will turn on whenever the OCS is unable to classify the front passenger seat status. A malfunction in the OCS may affect the operation of the air bag system. If the Air Bag Warning Light does not come on, or stays on after you start the vehicle, or it comes on as you drive, take the vehicle to an authorized dealer for service immediately. The passenger seat assembly contains critical OCS components that may affect the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag inflation. In order for the OCS to properly classify the seated weight of a front seat passenger, the OCS components must function as designed. Do not make any modifications to the front passenger seat components, assembly, or to the seat cover. If the seat, trim cover, or cushion needs service SAFETY 189 for any reason, take the vehicle to an authorized dealer. Only FCA US LLC approved seat accesso-

ries may be used. The following requirements must be strictly followed:

Do not modify the front passenger seat assembly or components in any way. Do not use prior or future model year seat covers or cushions not designated by FCA US LLC for the specific model being repaired. Always use the correct seat cover and cushion specified for the vehicle. 4 Do not replace the seat cover or cushion with an aftermarket seat cover or cushion. Do not add a secondary seat cover or mat. At no time should any Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) component or SRS related component or fastener be modified or replaced with any part except those which are approved by FCA US LLC. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 190 190 SAFETY Unapproved modifications or service proce-

dures to the passenger seat assembly, its related components, seat cover or cushion may inadvertently change the air bag deployment in case of a frontal collision. This could result in death or serious injury to the front passenger if the vehicle is involved in a collision. A modified vehicle may not comply with required Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS) and/or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (CMVSS). If it is necessary to modify the air bag system for persons with disabilities, contact an authorized dealer. Knee Impact Bolsters The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the driver and front passenger, and position the front occupants for improved inter-

action with the front air bags. WARNING!

WARNING!

AIRBAG or AIRBAG on a label or on the seat trim on the outboard side of the seats. The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occu-

pant injury during certain side impacts, in addi-

tion to the injury reduction potential provided by the seat belts and body structure. Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact bolsters in any way. Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band radios, etc. Supplemental Driver And Front Passenger Knee Air Bags This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the steering column and a Supple-

mental Passenger Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the glove compartment. The Supplemental Knee Air Bags provide enhanced protection during a frontal impact by working together with the seat belts, preten-

sioners, and front air bags. Supplemental Side Air Bags Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs) This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs). Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags

(SABs) are located in the outboard side of the front seats. The SABs are marked with SRS Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the outboard side of the seatbacks trim cover. The inflating SAB deploys through the seat seam into the space between the occupant and the door. The SAB moves at a very high speed and with such a high force that it could injure occupants if they are not seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area where the SAB inflates. Children are at an even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 191 WARNING!

Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects between you and the Side Air Bags;

the performance could be adversely affected and/or objects could be pushed into you, causing serious injury. Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains

(SABICs) This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs). Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains

(SABICs) are located above the side windows. The trim covering the SABICs is labeled SRS AIRBAG or AIRBAG. SABICs may help reduce the risk of head and other injuries to front and rear seat outboard occupants in certain side impacts, in addition to the injury reduction potential provided by the seat belts and body structure. The SABIC deploys downward, covering the side windows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and covers the window. The SABICs inflate with enough force to injure occupants if they are not belted and seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area where the SABICs inflate. Children are at an even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag. The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in certain side impact events. WARNING!

Do not mount equipment, or stack luggage or other cargo up high enough to block the deployment of the SABICs. The trim covering above the side windows where the SABIC and its deployment path are located should remain free from any obstructions. SAFETY 191 WARNING! (Continued) In order for the SABICs to work as intended, do not install any accessory items in your vehicle which could alter the roof. Do not add an aftermarket sunroof to your vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require perma-

nent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the vehicle for any reason. 4 Side Impacts The Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain side impacts. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular impact event is appropriate, based on the severity and type of collision. The side impact sensors aid the ORC in determining the appro-

priate response to impact events. The system is calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags on the impact side of the vehicle during impacts that require Side Air Bag occupant protection. In side Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)

(Continued) Label Location 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 192 192 SAFETY impacts, the Side Air Bags deploy inde-

pendently; a left side impact deploys the left Side Air Bags only and a right-side impact deploys the right Side Air Bags only. Vehicle damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags should have deployed. The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side colli-

sions, including some collisions at certain angles, or some side collisions that do not impact the area of the passenger compartment. The Side Air Bags may deploy during angled or offset frontal collisions where the front air bags deploy. Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time than it takes to blink your eyes. WARNING!

WARNING!

Occupants, including children, who are up against or very close to Side Air Bags can be seriously injured or killed. Occupants, including children, should never lean on or sleep against the door, side windows, or area where the side air bags inflate, even if they are in an infant or child restraint. Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate) are necessary for your protec-

tion in all collisions. They also help keep you in position, away from an inflating Side Air Bag. To get the best protection from the Side Air Bags, occupants must wear their seat belts properly and sit upright with their backs against the seats. Children must be properly restrained in a child restraint or booster seat that is appropriate for the size of the child. Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean against the door or window. Sit upright in the center of the seat. Being too close to the Side Air Bags during deployment could cause you to be severely injured or killed. Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision. The Side Air Bags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some collisions, Side Air Bags wont deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even though you have Side Air Bags. NOTE:

Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim, but they will open during air bag deploy-

ment. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 193 Rollover Events Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners are designed to activate in certain rollover events. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) deter-

mines whether deployment in a particular roll-

over event is appropriate, based on the severity and type of collision. Vehicle damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners should have deployed. The Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners will not deploy in all rollover events. The rollover sensing system determines if a rollover event may be in progress and whether deployment is appropriate. In the event the vehicle experi-

ences a rollover or near rollover event, and deployment is appropriate, the rollover sensing system will deploy the side air bags and seat belt pretensioners on both sides of the vehicle. The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in certain rollover or side impact events. Air Bag System Components NOTE:

The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) moni-

tors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated with electrical Air Bag System Components listed below:

Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) Air Bag Warning Light Steering Wheel and Column Instrument Panel Knee Impact Bolsters Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags Seat Belt Buckle Switch Supplemental Side Air Bags Supplemental Knee Air Bags Front and Side Impact Sensors Seat Belt Pretensioners Seat Track Position Sensors Occupant Classification System 4 SAFETY 193 If A Deployment Occurs The front air bags are designed to deflate imme-

diately after deployment. NOTE:

Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with the air bag system. If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any or all of the following may occur:

The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions and/or skin reddening to the occu-

pants as the air bags deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals. They are not perma-

nent and normally heal quickly. However, if you havent healed significantly within a few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor immediately. As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the process that gener-

ates the non-toxic gas used for air bag infla-

tion. These airborne particles may irritate the skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 194 WARNING!

Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has equipped) power 194 SAFETY eye irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on your clothing, follow the garment manufacturers instructions for cleaning. Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have deployed. If you are involved in another colli-

sion, the air bags will not be in place to protect you. Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot protect you in another collision. Have the air bags, seat belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer immediately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller System serviced as well. NOTE:

Air bag covers may not be obvious in the inte-

rior trim, but they will open during air bag deployment. After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an authorized dealer immediately. Enhanced Accident Response System In the event of an impact, if the communication network remains intact, and the power remains intact, depending on the nature of the event, the ORC will determine whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform the following functions:

Cut off fuel to the engine (if equipped) Cut off battery power to the:

Engine Electric Motor (if equipped) Electric power steering Brake booster Electric park brake Cut off battery power to the electric motor (if Automatic transmission gear selector Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as the battery has power or for 15 minutes from the intervention of the Enhanced Accident Response System. Unlock the power door locks Your vehicle may also be designed to perform any of these other functions in response to the Enhanced Accident Response System:

Turn off the Fuel Filter Heater, Turn off the HVAC Blower Motor, Close the HVAC Circula-

tion Door Horn Front wiper Headlamp washer pump NOTE:

After an accident, remember to cycle the ignition to the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position and remove the key from the ignition switch to avoid draining the battery. Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine compartment and on the ground near the engine compartment and fuel tank before resetting the system and starting the engine. If there are no fuel leaks or damage to the vehicle electrical devices (e.g. headlights) after an acci-

dent, reset the system by following the procedure described below. If you have any doubt, contact an authorized dealer. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 195 Enhanced Accident Response System Reset Procedure If applicable, refer to the Hybrid Supplement for additional information. In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System functions after an event, the ignition switch must be changed from ignition START or ON/RUN to ignition OFF. Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine compartment and on the ground near the engine compartment and fuel tank before reset-

ting the system and starting the engine. Maintaining Your Air Bag System WARNING!

Modifications to any part of the air bag system could cause it to fail when you need it. You could be injured if the air bag system is not there to protect you. Do not modify the components or wiring, including adding any kind of badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper passenger side of the instrument panel. Do not modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or add aftermarket side steps or running boards.

(Continued) WARNING! (Continued) It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system. Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag system. The air bag may inflate acciden-

tally or may not function properly if modifica-

tions are made. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any air bag system service. If your seat, including your trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any way

(including removal or loosening/tightening of seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to an authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to modify the air bag system for persons with disabilities, contact an autho-

rized dealer. Event Data Recorder (EDR) This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data Recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicles systems SAFETY 195 performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:

How various systems in your vehicle were operating;

Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened;

How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and, 4 How fast the vehicle was traveling. These data can help provide a better under-

standing of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. NOTE:

EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforce-

ment, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 196 196 SAFETY To read data recorded by an EDR, special equip-

ment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR. Child Restraints Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all times, including babies and children. Every state in the United States, and every Canadian province, requires that small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it. Children 12 years or younger should ride prop-

erly buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front. WARNING!

In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to hold even an infant on your lap could become so great that you could not hold the child, no matter how strong you are. The child and others could be badly injured or killed. Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the childs size. There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child seat Owners Manual to make sure you have the correct seat for your child. Carefully read and follow all the instruc-

tions and warnings in the child restraint Owners Manual and on all the labels attached to the child restraint. Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Standards. You should also make sure that you can install it in the vehicle where you will use it. NOTE:

For additional information, refer to http://

www.nhtsa.gov/parents-and-caregivers or call: 18883274236 Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canadas website for additional information:

http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/motorvehicle-

safety/safedrivers-childsafety-index-53.htm 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 197 Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles SAFETY 197 Infants and Toddlers Small Children Larger Children Children Too Large for Child Restraints Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint Children who are two years old or younger and who have not reached the height or weight limits of their child restraint Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child Restraint, facing rearward in a rear seat of the vehicle Children who are at least two years old or who have outgrown the height or weight limit of their rear-facing child restraint Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five-point Harness, facing forward in a rear seat of the vehicle 4 Children who have outgrown their forward-facing child restraint, but are too small to properly fit the vehicles seat belt Children 12 years old or younger, who have outgrown the height or weight limit of their booster seat Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle seat belt, seated in a rear seat of the vehicle Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in a rear seat of the vehicle 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 198 198 SAFETY Infant And Child Restraints Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing in the vehicle until they are two years old or until they reach either the height or weight limit of their rear-facing child restraint. Two types of child restraints can be used rear-facing: infant carriers and convertible child seats. The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle. It is recommended for children from birth until they reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier. Convertible child seats can be used either rear-facing or forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher weight limit in the rear-facing direction than infant carriers do, so they can be used rear-facing by children who have outgrown their infant carrier but are still less than at least two years old. Children should remain rear-facing until they reach the highest weight or height allowed by their convertible child seat. WARNING!

WARNING!

Do not install a rear-facing car seat using a rear support leg in this vehicle. The floor of this vehicle is not designed to manage the crash forces of this type of car seat. In a crash, the support leg may not function as it was designed by the car seat manufacturer, and your child may be more severely injured as a result. Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-facing child restraint. Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 199 Older Children And Child Restraints Children who are two years old or who have outgrown their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forward-facing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children who are over two years old or who have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for as long as possible, up to the highest weight or height allowed by the child seat. All children whose weight or height is above the forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicles seat belts fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicles seat cushion while the childs back is against the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster seat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the seat belt. WARNING!

Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a collision. The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturers directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint. After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward because it can loosen the child restraint attachments. Remove the child restraint before adjusting the vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat has been adjusted, reinstall the child restraint. When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchorages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious personal injury. SAFETY 199 Children Too Large For Booster Seats Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this simple 5-step test to decide whether the child can use the vehicles seat belt alone:

1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of the vehicle seat?

4 2. Do the childs knees bend comfortably over the front of the vehicle seat while the child is still sitting all the way back?

3. Does the shoulder belt cross the childs shoulder between the neck and arm?

4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching the childs thighs and not the stomach?

5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?

If the answer to any of these questions was no, then the child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the child is using the lap/

shoulder belt, check seat belt fit periodically 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 200 200 SAFETY and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched. A childs squirming or slouching can move the belt out of position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use a booster seat to position the seat belt on the child correctly. WARNING!

Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder belt will not protect a child properly, which may result in serious injury or death. A child must always wear both the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt correctly. Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints Restraint Type Combined Weight of the Child + Child Restraint Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An X Below LATCH Lower Anchors Only Seat Belt Only LATCH Lower Anchors + Top Tether Anchor Seat Belt + Top Tether Anchor Rear-Facing Child Up to 65 lbs (29.5 kg) X Rear-Facing Child More than 65 lbs (29.5 kg) X X Forward-Facing Child Up to 65 lbs (29.5 kg) X Forward-Facing Child More than 65 lbs (29.5 kg) X X Restraint Restraint Restraint Restraint

 

 

20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 201 Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren

(LATCH) Restraint System LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In This Vehicle If applicable, refer to the Hybrid Supplement for additional information. SAFETY 201 LATCH Label Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH, which stands for Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCH-equipped child seats. There are two lower anchorages located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback and one top tether anchorage located behind the seating position. These anchorages are used to install LATCH-equipped child seats without using the vehicles seat belts. Some seating positions may have a top tether anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these seating positions, the seat belt must be used with the top tether anchorage to install the child restraint. Please see the following table for more information. 7 Passenger Stow n Go Seating LATCH Positions Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per 4 seating position Top Tether Anchorage Symbol 7 Passenger Bench Seat LATCH Positions Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per seating position Top Tether Anchorage Symbol 8 Passenger LATCH Positions Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per seating position Top Tether Anchorage Symbol 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 202 202 SAFETY Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH What is the weight limit (childs weight + weight of the child restraint) for using the LATCH anchorage system to attach the child restraint?

65 lbs (29.5 kg) Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt be used together to attach a rear-facing or forward-facing child restraint?

Can two child restraints be attached using a common lower LATCH anchorage?

Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the front passenger seat?

No No Yes Use the LATCH anchorage system until the combined weight of the child and the child restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt and tether anchor instead of the LATCH system once the combined weight is more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Do not use the seat belt when you use the LATCH anchorage system to attach a rear-facing or forward-facing child restraint. Booster seats may be attached to the LATCH anchorages if allowed by the booster seat manufacturer. See your booster seat owners manual for more information. Never share a LATCH anchorage with two or more child restraints. If the center position does not have dedicated LATCH lower anchorages, use the seat belt to install a child seat in the center position next to a child seat using the LATCH anchorages in an outboard position. The child seat may touch the back of the front passenger seat if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact. See your child restraint owners manual for more information. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 203 Can the rear head restraints be removed?

Yes Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH NOTE:

If the folding, non-adjustable head restraint interferes with the installation of the child restraint, the head restraint may be folded and the child seat installed in front of it. WARNING!

Always make sure the head restraint is in its upright position when the seat is to be used by an occupant who is not in a child restraint. Sitting in a seat with the head restraint in its lowered position could result in serious injury or death in a collision. SAFETY 203 The 2nd row head restraints on bench and the center head restraint in the 8 passenger vehicle can be removed if they interfere with the installation of the child restraint. 2nd row Stow 'n Go head restraints are not removable. The 3rd row center head restraint is removable in all vehicles, but the 3rd row outboard head restraints are not removable. Refer to Head Restraints in Getting To Know Your Vehicle for further information. 4 Car Seat With Head Restraint Folded 1 Folded Headrest 2 Child Restraint 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 204 204 SAFETY Locating The LATCH Anchorages If applicable, refer to the Hybrid Supplement for additional information. The lower anchorages are round bars that are found at the rear of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback, below the anchorage symbols on the seatback. They are just visible when you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint. You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the gap between the seatback and seat cushion. Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages If applicable, refer to the Hybrid Supplement for additional information. There are tether strap anchorages located behind all second row seating positions. The third row has a tether anchor on the 40% seat for the right outboard position and in the center of the 60%

seat for either the center or left outboard seating position. All tether anchorages are located on the back of the seat, near the floor. LATCH Anchorages (Second Row Anchorages Shown) 8 Passenger Seating LATCH Anchorages (Second Row Anchorages Shown) Shown) 7 Passenger Bench Seating Stow n Go Anchorage Shown) LATCH Anchorages (Second Row Bench Anchorages Tether Strap Anchorages (Second Row 7 Passenger 7 Passenger Stow n Go Seating 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 205 Tether Strap Anchorages (Second Row 8 Passenger Anchorage Shown) anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some rear-facing child restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end to attach to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap after it is attached to the anchorage. Center Seat LATCH This vehicle has 4 lower LATCH anchorages in the third row, rear seat. Anchorages A and B are used for the right outboard position behind the front passenger (1). Anchorages C and D are used for the center seating position (2). The left outboard position (3) does not have lower anchorages. Do not install a child restraint using anchorages B and C. This is not a LATCH position in your vehicle. SAFETY 205 If a child restraint installed in the center position blocks the seat belt webbing or buckle for the outboard position, do not use that outboard position. If a child seat in the center position blocks the outboard LATCH anchors or seat belt, do not install a child seat in that outboard position. WARNING!

Use anchorages C and D to install a 4 LATCH-compatible child restraint in the center seating position (2). Do not install a LATCH-compatible child restraint using anchorages B and C. This is not a LATCH-compatible position in your vehicle. Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more than one child restraint. Please refer to "To Install A LATCH-Compat-

ible Child Restraint" for typical installation instructions. Always follow the directions of the child restraint manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not all child restraint systems will be installed as described here. Tether Strap Anchorages

(Third Row 60/40 Anchorage Shown) LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side. Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the Center Seat LATCH Positions 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 206 206 SAFETY To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint If the selected seating position has a Switch-

able Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat belt, following the instruc-

tions below. See the section Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt to check what type of seat belt each seating position has. 1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the tether strap of the child seat so that you can more easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages. 2. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for that seating position. For some second row seats, you may need to recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint (if adjustable) to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its rear-most position to make room for the child seat. You may also move the front seat forward to allow more room for the child seat. 3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seating position. 4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the top tether anchorage. See the section Installing Child Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage for directions to attach a tether anchor. 5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack in the straps according to the child restraint manufacturers instructions. 6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direction. How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR

(ALR) Seat Belt:

When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being used by other occupants or being used to secure child restraints. An unused belt could injure a child if they play with it and accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before installing a child restraint using the LATCH system, buckle the seat belt behind the child restraint and out of the childs reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint installation, instead of buckling it behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the child restraint belt path and then buckle it. Do not lock the seat belt. Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and that they should not play with them. WARNING!

Improper installation of a child restraint to the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the restraint. The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturers directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint. Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 207 Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt. WARNING!

Improper installation or failure to properly secure a child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint. The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturers directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint. The seat belts in the passenger seating posi-

tions are equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be switched into a locked mode by pulling all of the webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back into the retractor. Refer to the Automatic Locking Mode descrip-

tion in Switchable Automatic Locking Retrac-

tors (ALR) under Occupant Restraint Systems for additional information on ALR. Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing Child Restraints In This Vehicle If applicable, refer to the Hybrid Supplement for additional information. 7 Passenger Bench Seat Automatic Locking Retractor

(ALR) Locations ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor Top Tether Anchorage Symbol SAFETY 207 7 Passenger Stow n Go Seating Automatic Locking 4 Retractor (ALR) Locations ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor Top Tether Anchorage Symbol 8 Passenger Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor Top Tether Anchorage Symbol 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 208 208 SAFETY What is the weight limit (childs weight + weight of the child restraint) for using the Tether Anchor with the seat belt to attach a forward facing child restraint?

Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the front passenger seat?

Can the rear head restraints be removed?

Frequently Asked Questions Weight limit of the Child Restraint Always use the tether anchor when using the seat belt to install a forward facing child restraint, up to the recommended weight limit of the child restraint. Contact between the front passenger seat and the child restraint is allowed, if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact. The 2nd row head restraints on bench and the center head restraint in the 8 passenger vehicle can be removed if they interfere with the installation of the child restraint. 2nd row Stow 'n Go head restraints are not removable. The 3rd row center head restraint is removable in all vehicles, but the 3rd row outboard head restraints are not removable. Refer to Head Restraints in Getting To Know Your Vehicle for further information. Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating position with an ALR retractor. Yes Yes No Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the seat belt against the belt path of the child restraint?

NOTE:

If the folding, non-adjustable head restraint interferes with the installation of the child restraint, the head restraint may be folded and the child seat installed in front of it. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 209 WARNING!

Always make sure the head restraint is in its upright position when the seat is to be used by an occupant who is not in a child restraint. Sitting in a seat with the head restraint in its lowered position could result in serious injury or death in a collision. Car Seat With Head Restraint Folded 1 Folded Headrest 2 Child Restraint Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR):

Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt. WARNING!

Improper installation or failure to properly secure a child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint. The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturers directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint. 1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating position. For some second row seats, you may need to recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint (if adjust-

able) to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its rear-most position to make room for the child seat. You may also move the front seat forward to allow more room for the child seat. 4 SAFETY 209 2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path. 3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click. 4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight against the child seat. 5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract back into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode. 6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is locked, you should not be able to pull out any webbing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5. 7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the lap portion around the child restraint while you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the vehicle seat. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 210 210 SAFETY 8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether strap. See the section Installing Child Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage for direc-

tions to attach a tether anchor. 9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direc-

tion. Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary. Seat Belt Park Stitch If Equipped The rear outboard seat belts may be equipped with a park stitch to raise the latch plate for easier access to occupants. If the park stitch interferes with the tight installation of a child restraint, slide the latch plate over the stitching to shorten the lap portion of the belt and install the car seat following the steps above. When the car seat is removed from the vehicle, slide the latch plate above the park stitch to enable occupants to latch the seatbelt securely. If the park stitch interferes with the lock-off features of the child restraint, do not use the lock-off feature. Instead, switch the seat belt to the locking mode, as described in the steps above or move the car seat to a different seating position. Seat Belt Park Stitch Seat Belt Park Stitch Location 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 211 Installing Child Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage If applicable, refer to the Hybrid Supplement for additional information. WARNING!

Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car seat to any location in front of the car seat, including the seat frame or a tether anchorage. Only attach the tether strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether anchorage that is approved for that seating position, located behind the top of the vehicle seat. See the section Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren (LATCH) Restraint System for the location of approved tether anchorages in your vehicle. 1. Look behind the seating position where you plan to install the child restraint to find the tether anchorage. You may need to move the seat forward to provide better access to the tether anchorage. If there is no top tether anchorage for that seating position, move the child restraint to another position in the vehicle if one is available. Top Tether Anchorage Locations 2nd Row 8 Passenger SAFETY 211 Top Tether Anchorage Locations 3rd Row 4 2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path for the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head restraints, raise the head restraint, and where possible, route the tether strap under the head restraint and between the two posts. If not possible, lower the head restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard side of the head restraint. 3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 212 212 SAFETY 4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child restraint manufacturers instructions. WARNING!

An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to increased head motion and possible injury to the child. Use only the anchorage position directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap. If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat, make sure the tether strap does not slip into the opening between the seat-

backs as you remove slack in the strap. Third Row Tether Attachment The tether anchorage found on the back of the 60% seat in the third row may be used by either the left outboard or the center seating position. Only tether one child restraint to the tether anchorage at a time. To connect the tether strap hook to the tether anchorage for either seating position on the 60% third row seat:

1. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path for the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If the car seat is in the center, raise the center head restraint and route the tether strap around the inboard (left) side of the head restraint support posts, as shown in the diagram. 3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram. 4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child restraint manufacturers instructions. Outboard Tether Attachments 3rd Row Rear Seat Tether Strap Attachment (Second Row 7 Passenger Stow n Go Anchorage Shown) 2. Center Tether Attachment 3rd Row 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 213 WARNING!

Do not connect the tether strap for more than one child restraint to the tether anchorage on the 60% seat in the third row. This anchorage is intended for one child restraint at a time. Transporting Pets Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet. An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a collision. Pets should be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts. SAFETY TIPS Transporting Passengers NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO AREA. WARNING!

Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may cause serious injury or death. It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly. Exhaust Gas SAFETY 213 WARNING!

Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO), follow these safety tips:

Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or out of the area. 4 If you are required to drive with the trunk/

liftgate/rear doors open, make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation mode. If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running, adjust your heating or cooling controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the blower at high speed. The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly main-

tained engine exhaust system. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 214 214 SAFETY Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment. In addi-

tion, inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required. Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle Seat Belts Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system. Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding seat belt or retractor condition, replace the seat belt. Air Bag Warning Light The Air Bag warning light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the igni-

tion switch is first turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on during starting, stays on, or turns on while driving, have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible. After the bulb check, this light will illu-

minate with a single chime when a fault with the Air Bag System has been detected. It will stay on until the fault is removed. If the light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving, have an authorized dealer service the vehicle imme-

diately. Refer to Occupant Restraint Systems in Safety for further information. Defroster Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place the blower control on high speed. You should be able to feel the air directed against the windshield. See an authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable. Floor Mat Safety Information Always use floor mats designed to fit your vehicle. Only use a floor mat that does not inter-

fere with the operation of the accelerator, brake or clutch pedals. Only use a floor mat that is securely attached using the floor mat fasteners so it cannot slip out of position and interfere with the accelerator, brake or clutch pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways. WARNING!

An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or stacked floor mat, or damaged floor mat fasteners may cause your floor mat to interfere with the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals and cause a loss of vehicle control. To prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:

ALWAYS securely attach your floor mat using the floor mat fasteners. DO NOT install your floor mat upside down or turn your floor mat over. Lightly pull to confirm mat is secured using the floor mat fasteners on a regular basis.

(Continued) 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 215 WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING FLOOR MAT FROM THE VEHICLE installing any other floor mat. NEVER install or stack an additional floor mat on top of an existing floor mat. before ONLY install floor mats designed to fit your vehicle. NEVER install a floor mat that cannot be properly attached and secured to your vehicle. If a floor mat needs to be replaced, only use a FCA approved floor mat for the specific make, model, and year of your vehicle. ONLY use the drivers side floor mat on the drivers side floor area. To check for inter-

ference, with the vehicle properly parked with the engine off, fully depress the accel-

erator, the brake, and the clutch pedal (if present) to check for interference. If your floor mat interferes with the operation of any pedal, or is not secure to the floor, remove the floor mat from the vehicle and place the floor mat in your trunk. ONLY use the passengers side floor mat on the passengers side floor area.

(Continued) ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or slide into the drivers side floor area when the vehicle is moving. Objects can become trapped under accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals and could cause a loss of vehicle control. NEVER place any objects under the floor mat (e.g., towels, keys, etc.). These objects could change the position of the floor mat and may cause interference with the accel-

erator, brake, or clutch pedals. If the vehicle carpet has been removed and re-installed, always properly attach carpet to the floor and check the floor mat fasteners are secure to the vehicle carpet. Fully depress each pedal to check for inter-

ference with the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals then re-install the floor mats. It is recommended to only use mild soap and water to clean your floor mats. After cleaning, always check your floor mat has been properly installed and is secured to your vehicle using the floor mat fasteners by lightly pulling mat. SAFETY 215 Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle Tires Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges. Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires (including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure. 4 Lights Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn signal and high beam indi-

cator lights on the instrument panel. Door Latches Check for proper closing, latching, and locking. Fluid Leaks Check area under the vehicle after overnight parking for fuel, coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel, or brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should be located and corrected immediately. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 216 216 STARTING AND OPERATING STARTING THE ENGINE Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust both inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belts. WARNING!

When exiting the vehicle, always remove the key fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle. Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-

tended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear selector.

(Continued) WARNING! (Continued) Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to chil-

dren, and do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may cause serious injury or death. Start the engine with the gear selector in the NEUTRAL (N) or PARK (P) position. Apply the brake before shifting to any driving range. Normal Starting NOTE:

Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal. To Turn On The Engine Using ENGINE START/

STOP Button 1. The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL. 2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing the ENGINE START/STOP button once. 3. The system takes over and attempts to start the vehicle. If the vehicle fails to start, the starter will disengage automatically after 10 seconds. 4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to the engine starting, push the button again. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 217 ENGINE START/STOP Button Functions With Drivers Foot OFF The Brake Pedal (In PARK Or NEUTRAL Position) The ENGINE START/STOP button operates similar to an ignition switch. It has three posi-

tions; OFF, ACC, and RUN. To change the igni-

tion positions without starting the vehicle and to use the accessories follow these steps:

Starting with the ignition in the OFF position, Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once to place the ignition to the ACC position

(instrument cluster will display ACC), Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a second time to place the ignition to the RUN position (instrument cluster will display ON/RUN), Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a third time to return the ignition to the OFF position

(instrument cluster will display OFF). NOTE:

Only press one pedal at a time while driving the vehicle. Torque performance of the vehicle could be reduced if both pedals are pressed at the same time. If pressure is detected on both pedals simultaneously, a warning message will display in the instrument cluster. Refer to Instrument Cluster Display in Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel for further infor-

mation. AutoPark AutoPark is a supplemental feature to assist in placing the vehicle in PARK should the situa-

tions on the following pages occur. It is a back up system and should not be relied upon as the primary method by which the driver shifts the vehicle into PARK. The conditions under which AutoPark will engage are outlined on the following pages. STARTING AND OPERATING 217 WARNING!

Driver inattention could lead to failure to place the vehicle in PARK. ALWAYS DO A VISUAL CHECK that your vehicle is in PARK by verifying that a solid (not blinking) P is indicated in the instrument cluster display and near the gear selector. If the "P" indicator is blinking, your vehicle is not in PARK. As an added precau-

tion, always apply the parking brake when exiting the vehicle. AutoPark is a supplemental feature. It is not designed to replace the need to shift your vehicle into PARK. It is a back up system and should not be relied upon as the primary method by which the driver shifts the vehicle into PARK. 5 ALWAYS DO A VISUAL CHECK that your vehicle is in PARK by looking for the P in the Instru-

ment Cluster Display and on the shifter. As an added precaution, always apply the parking brake. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 218 218 STARTING AND OPERATING If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver attempts to turn off the engine, if certain condi-

tions are met, the vehicle will AutoPark, auto-

matically shifting the vehicles transmission to the PARK position. The rotary shifter will auto-

matically reset itself to the PARK position. The vehicles ignition will then move to the OFF posi-

tion (Engine off). When AutoPark is activated the instrument cluster will display the message AutoPark Engaged AutoPark will engage when all of these condi-

tions are met:

Vehicle is equipped with a rotary selector Vehicle is not in PARK Vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver exits the vehicle with the engine running, if certain conditions are met, the vehicle will AutoPark, automatically shifting the vehicles transmis-

sion to the PARK position. The Electric Park Brake SAFE HOLD feature will also activate in some conditions. Please reference SAFE HOLD pages for additional information regarding this function. CAUTION!

Engine will remain running. AutoPark will engage when all of these condi-

tions are met:

Vehicle is equipped with a rotary selector Driver has pushed the ENGINE START/STOP Vehicle is not in PARK BUTTON Vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less Drivers door is ajar Drivers seat belt is unbuckled Brake pedal is not depressed The MESSAGE AutoPark Engaged will display in the instrument cluster. AutoPark In Stop/Start Autostop Mode AutoPark will engage when all of these condi-

tions are met:

Vehicle is equipped with a rotary shifter Vehicle is not in PARK Vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less Drivers door is ajar Drivers seat belt is unbuckled or Brake Pedal is not depressed The MESSAGE AutoPark Engaged will display in the instrument cluster. WARNING!

Never use the PARK position as a substi-

tute for the parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully when exiting the vehicle to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage. Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the transmission gear selector out of PARK with the brake pedal released. Make sure the transmission is in PARK before exiting the vehicle.

(Continued) 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 219 WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) The transmission may not engage PARK if the vehicle is moving. Always bring the vehicle to a complete stop before shifting to PARK, and verify that the transmission gear position indicator solidly indicates PARK (P) without blinking. Ensure that the vehicle is completely stopped, and the PARK position is properly indicated, before exiting the vehicle. It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle could accel-

erate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.

(Continued) Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running. Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a complete stop, then apply the parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK, and turn the igni-

tion OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF mode, the transmission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted movement. When exiting the vehicle, always make sure the ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the key fob from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle. Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-

tended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear selector.

(Continued) STARTING AND OPERATING 219 Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in a location accessible to chil-

dren), and do not leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. CAUTION!

Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed:

5 Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop. Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above idle speed. Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 220 220 STARTING AND OPERATING To Turn On The Engine Using ENGINE START/

STOP Button 1. The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL. 2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing the ENGINE START/STOP button once. To release the parking brake manually, the igni-

tion switch must be in the ON/RUN position. Press on the brake pedal, then push the park brake switch momentarily. If the driver shifts into PARK while moving, the vehicle may Park. PARK will engage ONLY when vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less. The MESSAGE Vehicle Speed is Too High to Shift to P will display in the Instrument Cluster Display if vehicle speed is above 1.2 mph

(1.9 km/h). The gear position indicator will blink continuously until the selector is returned to the proper position, or the requested shift can be completed. WARNING!

If vehicle speed is not below 1.2 mph

(1.9 km/h) when the driver shifts into PARK, the transmission will default to NEUTRAL until the vehicle speed drops below 1.2 mph

(1.9 km/h) and the above condition are met, enabling AutoPark. A vehicle left in the NEUTRAL position can roll. As an added precaution, always apply the parking brake when exiting the vehicle. Cold Weather Operation (Below 22F Or 30C) To ensure reliable starting at these tempera-

tures, use of an externally powered electric engine block heater (available from your autho-

rized dealer) is recommended. After Starting Warming Up The Engine The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will decrease as the engine warms up. If Engine Fails To Start WARNING!

Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing serious personal injury. Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has started, ignite and damage the converter and vehicle. If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery in another vehicle. This type of start can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer to Jump Starting Procedure in In Case Of Emergency for further information. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 221 To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE START/STOP Button 1. Place the gear selector in PARK, then push and release the ENGINE START/STOP button. 2. The ignition switch will return to the OFF position. 3. If the gear selector is not in PARK, the ENGINE START/STOP button must be held for two seconds or three short pushes in a row with the vehicle speed above 5 mph (8 km/h) before the engine will shut off. The ignition switch position will remain in the ACC position until the gear selector is in PARK and the button is pushed twice to the OFF position. If the gear selector is not in PARK and the ENGINE START/STOP button is pushed once, the instru-

ment cluster will display a Vehicle Not In Park message and the engine will remain running. Never leave a vehicle out of the PARK position, or it could roll. NOTE:

If the ignition switch is left in the ACC or RUN

(engine not running) position and the transmis-

sion is in PARK, the system will automatically time out after 30 minutes of inactivity and the ignition will switch to the OFF position. ENGINE BLOCK HEATER IF EQUIPPED The engine block heater warms the engine and permits quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a grounded, three-wire extension cord. For ambient temperatures below 0F (-18C), the engine block heater is recommended. For ambient temperatures below -20F (-29C), the engine block heater is required. The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood, behind to the passengers side head-

lamp. Follow the steps below to properly use the engine block heater:

1. Locate the engine block heater cord

(behind the passengers side headlamp). 2. Undo the hook-and-loop strap that secures the heater cord in place. 3. Pull the cord to the front of the vehicle and plug it into a grounded, three-wire extension cord. STARTING AND OPERATING 221 4. After the vehicle is running, reattach the cord to the hook-and-loop strap and prop-

erly stow away behind the passengers side headlamp. NOTE:

The engine block heater cord is a factory installed option. If your vehicle is not equipped, heater cords are available from your authorized Mopar dealer. The engine block heater will require 110 Volts AC and 6.5 Amps to activate the heater element. 5 The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one hour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine. WARNING!

Remember to disconnect the engine block heater cord before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt electrical cord could cause electrocution. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 222 222 STARTING AND OPERATING ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS A long break-in period is not required for the engine and drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle. Drive moderately during the first 300 miles

(500 km). After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable. While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in. Wide-open throttle accelera-

tion in low gear can be detrimental and should be avoided. The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. For the recommended viscosity and quality grades, refer to Dealer Service in Servicing And Maintenance. CAUTION!

Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil in the engine or damage may result. NOTE:

A new engine may consume some oil during its first few thousand miles (kilometers) of opera-

tion. This should be considered a normal part of the break-in and not interpreted as a problem. PARK BRAKE Electric Park Brake (EPB) Your vehicle is equipped with an Electric Park Brake System (EPB) that offers simple opera-

tion, and some additional features that make the park brake more convenient and useful. The park brake is primarily intended to prevent the vehicle from rolling while parked. Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the park brake is applied. Also, be certain to leave the transmission in PARK. You can engage the park brake in two ways;

Manually, by applying the park brake switch. Automatically, by enabling the Auto Park Brake feature in the customer programmable features section of the Uconnect Settings. The park brake switch is located in the inte-

grated center stack. Electric Park Brake Switch To apply the park brake manually, push the switch momentarily. You may hear a slight whir-

ring sound from the back of the vehicle while the park brake engages. Once the park brake is fully engaged, the BRAKE warning lamp in the instrument cluster and an indicator on the switch will illuminate. If your foot is on the brake pedal while you apply the park brake, you may notice a small amount of brake pedal move-

ment. The park brake can be applied even when the ignition switch is OFF, however, it can only be released when the ignition switch in the ACC or ON/RUN position. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 223 NOTE:

The EPB fault lamp will illuminate if the EPB switch is held for longer than 180 seconds. The light will extinguish upon releasing the switch. If the Auto Park Brake feature is enabled, the parking brake will automatically engage when-

ever the transmission is placed into PARK. Once the park brake is engaged, the BRAKE warning lamp in the instrument cluster and the LED indi-

cator on the switch will illuminate. If your foot is on the brake pedal, you may notice a small amount of brake pedal movement while the parking brake is engaging. The park brake will release automatically when the ignition is cycled to the ON/RUN position, the transmission is in DRIVE or REVERSE, and the driver seat belt is buckled and an attempt is made to drive the vehicle away by pressing the accelerator pedal. To release the parking brake manually, the igni-

tion switch must be in the ON/RUN position. Press on the brake pedal, then push the park brake switch momentarily. You may hear a slight whirring sound from the back of the vehicle while the parking brake disengages. You may also notice a small amount of movement in the brake pedal. Once the park brake is fully disengaged, the BRAKE warning lamp in the instrument cluster and the LED indicator on the switch will extinguish. NOTE:

When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade. Apply the park brake before placing the gear selector in PARK, otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the gear selector out of PARK. The park brake should always be applied when-

ever the driver is not in the vehicle. WARNING!

Never use the PARK position as a substi-

tute for the parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage. When exiting the vehicle, always make sure the ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the key fob from the vehicle, and lock your vehicle.

(Continued) STARTING AND OPERATING 223 WARNING! (Continued) Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing chil-

dren to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the transmis-

sion gear selector. Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, (or in a location accessible to chil-

dren), and do not leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. 5 Be sure the parking brake is fully disen-

gaged before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake failure and a collision. Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage or injury. Also be certain to leave the transmission in PARK. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll and cause damage or injury.

(Continued) 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 224 224 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING! (Continued) Driving the vehicle with the parking brake engaged, or repeated use of the parking brake to slow the vehicle may cause serious damage to the brake system. CAUTION!

If the Brake System Warning Light remains on with the parking brake released, a brake system malfunction is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an authorized dealer immediately. If exceptional circumstances should make it necessary to engage the park brake while the vehicle is in motion, push on the electric park brake switch for as long as engagement is desired. The BRAKE warning lamp will illumi-

nate, and a continuous chime will sound. The rear stop lamps will also be illuminated auto-

matically while the vehicle remains in motion. To disengage the park brake while the vehicle is in motion, release the switch. If the vehicle is brought to a complete stop using the park brake, when the vehicle reaches approximately 3 mph (4.8 km/h), the park brake will remain engaged. In the unlikely event of a malfunction of the Electric Park Brake system, a yellow EPB fault lamp will illuminate. This may be accompanied by the BRAKE warning lamp flashing. In this case, urgent service of the electric park brake system is required. Do not rely on the park brake to hold the vehicle stationary. SafeHold can be temporarily bypassed by pushing the Electric Park Brake Switch while the driver door is open and brake pedal is pressed. Once manually bypassed, SafeHold will be enabled again once the vehicle reaches 12 mph (20 km/h) or the ignition is cycled to the OFF position and back to ON again. Auto Park Brake The Electric Park Brake can be programmed to be applied automatically whenever the vehicle is at a standstill and the automatic transmission is placed in PARK. Auto Park Brake is enabled and disabled by customer selection through the Customer Programmable Features section of the Uconnect Settings. SafeHold SafeHold is a safety feature of the Electric Park Brake System that will engage the park brake automatically if the vehicle is left unsecured. If the automatic transmission is not in PARK, the seat belt is unbuckled, the driver door is open, the vehicle is at a standstill, and there is no attempt to depress the brake pedal or acceler-

ator pedal, the park brake will automatically engage to prevent the vehicle from rolling. Brake Service Mode We recommend having your brakes serviced by an authorized dealer. You should only make repairs for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment. You should only enter Brake Service Mode during brake service. When servicing your rear brakes, it may be necessary for you or your technician to push the rear piston into the rear caliper bore. With the Electric Park Brake system, this can only be done after retracting the Electric Park Brake actuator. Fortunately, actuator retraction can be done easily by entering the Brake Service through the Uconnect Settings in your vehicle. This menu based system will guide you through the steps necessary to retract the EPB actuator in order to perform rear brake service. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 225 Brake Service Mode has requirements that must be met in order to be activated:

The vehicle must be at a standstill. AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION WARNING!

The park brake must be unapplied. Never use the PARK position as a substi-

The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL. While in service mode, the Electric Park Brake fault lamp will flash continuously while the igni-

tion switch is ON. When brake service work is complete, the following steps must be followed to reset the parking brake system to normal operation:

Ensure the vehicle is at a standstill. Press the brake pedal with moderate force. Apply the Electric Park Brake Switch. WARNING!

You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only that service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic. tute for the parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully when exiting the vehicle to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage. Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the transmission gear selector out of PARK with the brake pedal released. Make sure the transmission is in PARK before exiting the vehicle. The transmission may not engage PARK if the vehicle is moving. Always bring the vehicle to a complete stop before shifting to PARK, and verify that the transmission gear position indicator solidly indicates PARK (P) without blinking. Ensure that the vehicle is completely stopped, and the PARK position is properly indicated, before exiting the vehicle.

(Continued) STARTING AND OPERATING 225 WARNING! (Continued) It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle could accel-

erate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal. Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running. Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a complete stop, then apply the parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK, and turn the igni-

tion OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF mode, the transmission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted movement.

(Continued) 5 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 226 226 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING! (Continued) CAUTION!

When exiting the vehicle, always make sure the ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the key fob from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle. Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-

tended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear selector. Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in a location accessible to chil-

dren), and do not leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed:

Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop. Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above idle speed. Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal. NOTE:

You must press and hold the brake pedal while shifting out of PARK. This vehicle is equipped with an Ignition Park Interlock which requires the transmission to be in PARK before the ignition can be turned to the OFF mode. This helps the driver avoid inadver-

tently leaving the vehicle without placing the transmission in PARK. This system also locks the transmission in PARK whenever the ignition is in the OFF mode. NOTE:

The transmission is NOT locked in PARK when the ignition is in the ACC mode (even though the engine will be off). Ensure that the transmission is in PARK, and the ignition is OFF (not in ACC mode) before exiting the vehicle. Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmis-

sion Shift Interlock system (BTSI) that holds the transmission gear selector in PARK unless the brakes are applied. To shift the transmission out of PARK, the engine must be running and the brake pedal must be pressed. The brake pedal must also be pressed to shift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle is stopped or moving at low speeds. The transmission is controlled using a rotary electronic gear selector located on the center console. The transmission gear selector has PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE, and LOW shift positions. Using the LOW position manually downshifts the transmission to a lower gear based on vehicle speed. The transmission gear range (PRNDL) is displayed both above the gear selector and in the instrument cluster. To select a gear range, simply rotate the gear selector. Ignition Park Interlock Nine-Speed Automatic Transmission 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 227 Push down on the gear selector and then rotate it, to access the L position. You must also press the brake pedal to shift the transmission out of PARK (or NEUTRAL, when stopped or moving at low speeds). To shift past multiple gear ranges at once (such as PARK to DRIVE), simply rotate the gear selector to the appropriate detent. Select the DRIVE range for normal driving. NOTE:

In the event of a mismatch between the gear selector position and the actual transmission gear (for example, driver selects PARK while driving), the position indicator will blink continu-

ously until the selector is returned to the proper position, or the requested shift can be completed. The electronically-controlled transmission adapts its shift schedule based on driver inputs, along with environmental and road conditions. The transmission electronics are self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles

(kilometers). The nine-speed transmission has been devel-

oped to meet the needs of current and future FWD/AWD vehicles. Software and calibration is refined to optimize the customers driving expe-

rience and fuel economy. By design, some vehicle and driveline combinations utilize 9th gear only in very specific driving situations and conditions. Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when shifting between these gears. Transmission Gear Selector STARTING AND OPERATING 227 Gear Ranges Do not depress the accelerator pedal when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range. NOTE:

After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating. This is especially important when the engine is cold. PARK (P) This range supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission. The engine can be started in this range. Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in motion. Apply the parking brake when exiting the vehicle in this range. When parking on a level surface, you may shift the transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking brake. When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before shifting the transmission to PARK. As an added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade. 5 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 228 228 STARTING AND OPERATING When exiting the vehicle, always:

Apply the parking brake. Shift the transmission into PARK. Turn the ignition OFF. Remove the key fob from the vehicle. WARNING!

Never use the PARK position as a substi-

tute for the parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully when exiting the vehicle to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage. Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the transmission gear selector out of PARK with the brake pedal released. Make sure the transmission is in PARK before exiting the vehicle. The transmission may not engage PARK if the vehicle is moving. Always bring the vehicle to a complete stop before shifting to PARK, and verify that the transmission gear position indi-

cator solidly indicates PARK (P) without blinking. Ensure that the vehicle is completely stopped, and the PARK position is properly indicated, before exiting the vehicle.

(Continued) WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle could accel-

erate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal. Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running. Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a complete stop, then apply the parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK, and turn the igni-

tion OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF mode, the transmission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted movement. When exiting the vehicle, always make sure the ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the key fob from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle. with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-

tended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear selector. Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in a location accessible to chil-

dren), and do not leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. CAUTION!

Before moving the transmission gear selector out of PARK, you must start the engine, and also press the brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the gear selector could result.

(Continued) DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this can damage the drivetrain. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 229 The following indicators should be used to ensure that you have properly engaged the transmission into the PARK position:

Look at the transmission gear position display and verify that it indicates the PARK position (P), and is not blinking. With brake pedal released, verify that the gear selector will not move out of PARK. REVERSE (R) This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop. NEUTRAL (N) Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged periods with the engine running. The engine may be started in this range. Apply the park brake and shift the transmission into PARK if you must exit the vehicle. WARNING!

Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe practices that limit your response to changing traffic or road conditions. You might lose control of the vehicle and have a collision. CAUTION!

Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause severe transmission damage. Refer to Recreational Towing in Starting And Operating and Towing A Disabled Vehicle in In Case Of Emergency for further information. DRIVE (D) This range should be used for most city and highway driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission automatically upshifts through all forward gears. The DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteris-

tics under all normal operating conditions. If the transmission temperature exceeds normal operating limits, the transmission controller may modify the transmission shift schedule, reduce engine torque, and/or expand the range of torque converter clutch engage-

ment. This is done to prevent transmission damage due to overheating. STARTING AND OPERATING 229 If the transmission becomes extremely hot, the Transmission Temperature Warning Light will illuminate, a warning message will appear in the instrument cluster, and the transmission may operate differently until the transmission cools down. During cold temperatures, transmission opera-

tion may be modified depending on engine and transmission temperature as well as vehicle speed. This feature improves warm up time of the engine and transmission to achieve maximum efficiency. Engagement of the torque converter clutch, and shifts into 8th or 9th gear, are inhibited until the transmission fluid is warm refer to the Note under Torque Converter Clutch in this section. Normal opera-

tion will resume once the transmission temperature has risen to a suitable level. LOW (L) Use this range for engine braking when descending very steep grades. In this range, the transmission will downshift for increased engine braking. To access the LOW position, push down on the gear selector and rotate it fully clockwise. 5 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 230 230 STARTING AND OPERATING Transmission Limp Home Mode Transmission function is monitored electronically for abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission may operate only in a fixed gear, or may remain in NEUTRAL. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be illuminated. Limp Home Mode may allow the vehicle to be driven to an authorized dealer for service without damaging the transmission. In the event of a momentary problem, the trans-

mission can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the following steps:

1. Stop the vehicle. 2. Shift the transmission into PARK, if possible. If not, shift the transmission to NEUTRAL. 3. Push and hold the ignition switch until the engine turns OFF. 4. Wait approximately 30 seconds. 5. Restart the engine. 6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no longer detected, the trans-

mission will return to normal operation. NOTE:

Even if the transmission can be reset, we recommend that you visit an authorized dealer at your earliest possible convenience. An autho-

rized dealer has diagnostic equipment to assess the condition of your transmission. If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer service is required. Torque Converter Clutch A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been included in the automatic transmis-

sion on your vehicle. A clutch within the torque converter engages automatically at calibrated speeds. This may result in a slightly different feeling or response during normal operation in the upper gears. When the vehicle speed drops or during some accelerations, the clutch auto-

matically disengages. NOTE:

The torque converter clutch will not engage until the engine and/or transmission is warm

(usually after 1 to 3 miles [2 to 5 km] of driving). Because the engine speed is higher when the torque converter clutch is not engaged, it may seem as if the transmission is not shifting prop-

erly when the vehicle is cold. This is normal. The torque converter clutch will function normally once the powertrain is sufficiently warm. ACTIVE NOISE CANCELLATION Your vehicle is equipped with an Active Noise Cancellation System. This system is designed to address exhaust and engine noise. The system relies on four microphones embedded in the headliner, which monitor exhaust and engine noise, and assists an onboard frequency gener-

ator, which creates counteracting sound waves in the audio systems speakers. This helps keep the vehicle quiet at idle and during drive. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 231 POWER STEERING The electric power steering system will give you good vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces. The system will vary its assist to provide light efforts while parking and good feel while driving. If the elec-

tric steering system experiences a fault that reduces assist or prevents the vehicle from providing assist, you will still have the ability to steer the vehicle manually. WARNING!

Continued operation with reduced assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be obtained as soon as possible. NOTE:

If the Steering icon is displayed and the POWER STEERING SYSTEM OVER TEMP message is displayed on the instrument cluster screen, they indicate that extreme steering maneuvers may have occurred which caused an over temperature condition in the power steering system. Once driving conditions are safe, pull over and let the vehicle idle for a few moments until the icon and message turn off. Refer to Instrument Cluster Display in Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel for further information. If the SERVICE POWER STEERING"

OR "POWER STEERING ASSIST OFF -

SERVICE SYSTEM message and a steering wheel icon are displayed on the instrument cluster screen, it indicates that the vehicle needs to be taken to the dealer for service. It is likely the vehicle has lost power steering assistance. Refer to Warning Lights And Messages in Getting To Know Your Instru-

ment Panel for further information. Even if the power steering assistance is no longer operational, it is still possible to steer the vehicle. Under these conditions there will be a substantial increase in steering effort, especially at low speeds and during parking maneuvers. The power steering system is fully electric; it requires no power steering fluid. If the condition persists, see an authorized dealer for service. STARTING AND OPERATING 231 STOP/START SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED The Stop/Start function is developed to reduce fuel consumption. The system will stop the engine automatically during a vehicle stop if the required conditions are met. Releasing the brake pedal, pressing the accelerator pedal or shifting out of DRIVE (D) will automatically re-start the engine. This vehicle has been upgraded with a heavy duty starter, enhanced battery, and other upgraded engine parts to handle the additional engine starts. 5 Auto Stop/Start The Stop/Start feature is enabled after every normal customer engine start. At that time, the system will go into STOP/START READY and if all other conditions are met, can go into a STOP/START AUTOSTOP ACTIVE. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 232 be viewed in the instrument cluster display Stop/

Start screen. In the following situations the engine will not stop:

If Stop/Start is manually disabled by the Stop/Start OFF button. Hood is open. pressure. The transmission is not in a forward gear. 232 STARTING AND OPERATING To Activate Auto STOP/START, The Following Must Occur:

The system must be in STOP/START READY state. A STOP/START READY message will be displayed in the instrument cluster within the Stop/Start section. Refer to Instrument Cluster Display in Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel for further information. Drivers seat belt is not buckled. Drivers door is not closed. The vehicle must be completely stopped. Battery temperature is too warm or cold. The shifter must be in a forward gear and the brake pedal depressed. The engine will shut down, the tachometer will move to the zero position and the Stop/Start telltale will illuminate indicating you are in Autostop. Customer settings will be maintained throughout the Auto Stop/Start process. Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not Autostop Prior to engine shut down, the system will check many safety and comfort conditions for Stop/Start and ensure they are fulfilled. Detailed information about the operation of the Stop/Start system may Battery charge is low. During this time a message will display "Stop/Start Not Ready Battery Charging". The vehicle is on a steep grade. Cabin heating or cooling is in process and an acceptable cabin temperature has not been achieved. HVAC is set to full defrost mode at a high blower speed. HVAC set to MAX A/C. Engine has not reached normal operating temperature. Brake pedal is not pressed with sufficient Other Factors Which Can Inhibit Autostop Include:

Accelerator pedal input. Engine temp too high. 5 mph threshold not achieved from previous AUTOSTOP. Steering angle beyond threshold. ACC is on and speed is set. It may be possible for the vehicle to be driven several times without the Stop/Start system going into a Stop/Start READY state under more extreme conditions of the items listed above. To Start The Engine While In Auto Stop/Start To Manually Turn Off The Stop/Start System 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 233 While in a forward gear, the engine will start when the brake pedal is released or the throttle pedal is depressed. The transmission will auto-

matically re-engage upon engine restart. Conditions That Will Cause The Engine To Start Automatically While In Auto Stop/Start:

The transmission selector is moved out of DRIVE. To maintain cabin temperature comfort. HVAC is set to full defrost mode. HVAC system temperature or fan speed is manually adjusted. Battery voltage drops too low. During this time a message will display "Stop/Start Not Ready Battery Charging". Low brake vacuum (e.g. after several brake pedal applications). Stop/Start OFF switch is pushed. A Stop/Start system error occurs. STARTING AND OPERATING 233 Automatic Shutdown This vehicle is equipped with an automatic shut-

down feature. If the vehicle is left in READY mode (vehicle running) with the gear selector in PARK for one hour after the driver exits, this feature will automatically turn the vehicle off. Notifications have been added into this feature to raise awareness of the timed event:

In the interior of the vehicle, the instrument cluster will display Ready To Drive, and will be accompanied by three audible chimes while exiting. These interior warnings will occur regardless of whether the key fob remains in the vehicle or is removed. For the exterior of the vehicle, the horn will sound three times if the fob is removed from the vehicle and the vehicle is in the READY mode. Please consider this feature when intentionally running the vehicle for extended periods of time over one hour. To restart the vehicle, follow the normal vehicle starting process. NOTE:

If the vehicle is left in the ACC or RUN (engine not running) position and the transmission is in PARK, the system will automatically time out 5 Stop/Start OFF Button 1. Push the Stop/Start OFF switch (located on the instrument panel). The light on the switch will illuminate. 2. The STOP/START OFF message will appear in the instrument cluster display. Refer to Instrument Cluster Display in Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel for further information. 3. At the next vehicle stop (after turning off the Stop/Start system) the engine will not be stopped. 4. The Stop/Start system will reset itself back to an ON condition every time the ignition is turned off and back on. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 234 234 STARTING AND OPERATING

(shut down) after an initial 30 minutes of inac-

tivity, followed by the additional amount of time for power accessory delay selected in the radio settings menu. Once the vehicle times out, it will switch to the OFF position. To Manually Turn On The Stop/Start System After turning off the Stop/Start system, push the Stop/Start OFF switch again (located on the instrument panel). The light on the switch will turn off. System Malfunction If there is a malfunction in the Stop/Start system, the system will not shut down the engine. A SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM message will appear in the instrument cluster display and the Stop/Start telltale will remain yellow. Refer to Instrument Cluster Display in Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel for further information. If the SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM message appears in the instrument cluster display, have the system checked by your authorized dealer. SPEED CONTROL IF EQUIPPED When engaged, the Speed Control takes over accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph (40 km/h). The Speed Control buttons are located on the right side of the steering wheel. Speed Control Buttons 1 On/Off 2 SET (+)/Accel 3 RES/Resume 4 SET (-)/Decel 5 CANC/Cancel NOTE:

In order to ensure proper operation, the Speed Control System has been designed to shut down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at the same time. If this occurs, the Speed Control System can be reactivated by pushing the Speed Control on/off button and resetting the desired vehicle set speed. WARNING!

Speed Control can be dangerous where the system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose control and have an accident. Do not use Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 235 To Activate Push the on/off button to activate the Speed Control. The cruise indicator light in the instru-

ment cluster display will illuminate. To turn the system off, push the on/off button a second time. The cruise indicator light will turn off. The system should be turned off when not in use. WARNING!

Leaving the Speed Control system on when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want. You could lose control and have an accident. Always leave the system off when you are not using it. To Set A Desired Speed Turn the Speed Control on. NOTE:

The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed and on level ground before pushing the SET (+) or SET (-) button. When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, push the SET (+) or SET (-) button and release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed. Metric Speed (km/h) Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in a 1 km/h increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 km/h. STARTING AND OPERATING 235 To Vary The Speed Setting To Increase Speed When the Speed Control is set, you can increase speed by pushing the SET (+) button. The drivers preferred units can be selected through the instrument panel settings. Refer to Instrument Cluster Display in Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel for more information. The speed increment shown is dependent on the chosen speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):

U.S. Speed (mph) Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in a 1 mph increase in set speed. Each subse-

quent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 mph. If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to increase until the button is released, then the new set speed will be established. 5 If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to increase until the button is released, then the new set speed will be established. To Decrease Speed When the Speed Control is set, you can decrease speed by pushing the SET (-) button. The drivers preferred units can be selected through the instrument panel settings. Refer to Instrument Cluster Display in Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel for more information. The speed increment shown is dependent on the chosen speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):

U.S. Speed (mph) Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph decrease in set speed. Each subse-

quent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 mph. If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to decrease until the button is released, then the new set speed will be established. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 236 236 STARTING AND OPERATING Metric Speed (km/h) Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 km/h decrease in set speed. Each subse-

quent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 km/h. If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to decrease until the button is released, then the new set speed will be established. To Accelerate For Passing Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed. To Resume Speed To resume a previously set speed, push the RES button and release. Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph (32 km/h). To Deactivate A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANC

(cancel) button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle will deactivate the Speed Control without erasing the set speed from memory. Pushing the on/off button or placing the ignition in the OFF position erases the set speed from memory. ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) IF EQUIPPED Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the driving convenience provided by cruise control while traveling on highways and major road-

ways. However, it is not a safety system and not designed to prevent collisions. Speed Control function performs differently. Please refer to the proper section within this chapter. ACC will allow you to keep cruise control engaged in light to moderate traffic conditions without the constant need to reset your cruise control. ACC utilizes a radar sensor and a forward facing camera designed to detect a vehicle directly ahead of you. NOTE:

If the sensor does not detect a vehicle ahead of you, ACC will maintain a fixed set speed. If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead, ACC will apply limited braking or accelerate

(not to exceed the original set speed) auto-

matically to maintain a preset following distance, while matching the speed of the vehicle ahead. The Cruise Control system has two control modes:

Adaptive Cruise Control mode for main-

taining an appropriate distance between vehicles. Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode for cruising at a constant preset speed. For additional information, refer to Normal

(Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode in this section. NOTE:

Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control will not react to preceding vehicles. Always be aware of the mode selected. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 237 You can change the mode by using the Cruise Control buttons. The two control modes func-

tion differently. Always confirm which mode is selected. WARNING!

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a conve-

nience system. It is not a substitute for active driving involvement. It is always the drivers responsibility to be attentive of road, traffic, and weather conditions, vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle ahead; and, most importantly, brake operation to ensure safe operation of the vehicle under all road condi-

tions. Your complete attention is always required while driving to maintain safe control of your vehicle. Failure to follow these warn-

ings can result in a collision and death or serious personal injury.

(Continued) STARTING AND OPERATING 237 WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) The ACC system:

You should switch off the ACC system:

Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming vehicles, and stationary objects (e.g., a stopped vehicle in a traffic jam or a disabled vehicle). When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy snow, sleet, heavy traffic, and complex driving situations (i.e., in highway construc-

tion zones). Cannot take street, traffic, and weather When entering a turn lane or highway off ramp; when driving on roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered, slippery, or have steep uphill or downhill slopes. When towing a trailer up or down steep 5 slopes. When circumstances do not allow safe driving at a constant speed. conditions into account, and may be limited upon adverse sight distance conditions. Does not always fully recognize complex driving conditions, which can result in wrong or missing distance warnings. Will bring the vehicle to a complete stop while following a target vehicle and hold the vehicle for approximately 3 minutes in the stop position. If the target vehicle does not start moving within 3 minutes the parking brake will be activated, and the ACC system will be cancelled.

(Continued) 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 238 238 STARTING AND OPERATING Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation The Speed Control buttons (located on the right side of the steering wheel) operates the ACC system. of the Adaptive Cruise Control and Forward Collision Warning System. When the driver door is open at low speed. When the driver seat belt is unbuckled at low Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) speed. To Activate/Deactivate Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control

(ACC) on/off button. The ACC menu in the instrument cluster displays ACC Ready. You can only engage ACC if the vehicle speed is above 0 mph (0 km/h). The minimum set speed for the ACC system is 20 mph (32 km/h). When the system is turned on and in the READY state, the instrument cluster displays ACC Ready. When the system is OFF, the instrument cluster display Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off. NOTE:

You cannot engage ACC under the following conditions:

When you apply the brakes. When the parking brake is applied. When the automatic transmission is in PARK, REVERSE or NEUTRAL. When the vehicle speed is outside of the speed range. When the brakes are overheated. Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons 1 Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control On/Off 2 SET (+)/Accel 3 RES/Resume 4 SET (-)/Decel 5 Distance Setting Increase 6 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On/Off 7 Distance Setting Decrease 8 CANC/Cancel NOTE:

Any chassis/suspension or tire size modifica-

tions to the vehicle will effect the performance Adaptive Cruise Control Ready To turn the system off, push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button again. At this time, the system will turn off and the instrument cluster display will show Adap-

tive Cruise Control (ACC) Off. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 239 system is set when the vehicle speed is above 20 mph (32 km/h), the set speed shall be the current speed of the vehicle. position. NOTE:

ACC cannot be set if there is a stationary vehicle in front of your vehicle in close proximity. Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal, after the ACC has been set. If you do not, the vehicle may continue to accelerate beyond the set speed. If this occurs:

The message ACC DRIVER OVERRIDE will display in the instrument cluster display. The system will not be controlling the distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead. The vehicle speed will only be determined by the position of the accelerator pedal. STARTING AND OPERATING 239 The gear selector is removed from the DRIVE The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control System (ESC/TCS) activates. The vehicle parking brake is applied. Driver seat belt is unbuckled at low speeds. Driver door is opened at low speeds. To Turn Off The system will turn off and clear the set speed in memory if:

The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off 5 button is pushed. The Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control on/

off button is pushed. The ignition is placed in the OFF position. To Resume If there is a set speed in memory, push the RES

(resume) button and then remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. The instrument cluster display will display the last set speed. Adaptive Cruise Control Off WARNING!

Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system on when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want. You could lose control and have a collision. Always leave the system off when you are not using it. To Set A Desired ACC Speed To Cancel When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push the SET (+) button or the SET (-) button and release. The instrument cluster display will show the set speed. If the system is set when the vehicle speed is below 20 mph (32 km/h), the set speed shall be defaulted to 20 mph (32 km/h). If the The following conditions cancel the system:

The brake pedal is applied. The CANC (cancel) button is pushed. An Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) event occurs. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 240 240 STARTING AND OPERATING NOTE:

To Vary The Speed Setting If your vehicle stays at standstill for longer than two seconds, then the driver will either have to push the RES (resume) button, or apply the accelerator pedal to reengage the ACC to the existing set speed. ACC cannot be resumed if there is a stationary vehicle in-front of your vehicle in close proximity. WARNING!

The Resume function should only be used if traffic and road conditions permit. Resuming a set speed that is too high or too low for prevailing traffic and road conditions could cause the vehicle to accelerate or decelerate too sharply for safe operation. Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collision and death or serious personal injury. To Increase Speed While ACC is set, you can increase the set speed by pushing the SET (+) button. The driver's preferred units can be selected through the instrument cluster. Refer to Instru-

ment Cluster Display in Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel for more information. The speed increment shown is dependent on the chosen speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):

U.S. Speed (mph) Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in a 1 mph increase in set speed. Each subse-

quent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 mph. If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to increase in 5 mph increments until the button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected in the instrument cluster display. Metric Speed (km/h) Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in a 1 km/h increase in set speed. Each subse-

quent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 km/h. If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to increase in 10 km/h increments until the button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected in the instrument cluster display. To Decrease Speed While ACC is set, the set speed can be decreased by pushing the SET (-) button. The driver's preferred units can be selected through the instrument cluster. Refer to Instru-

ment Cluster Display in Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel for more information. The speed decrement shown is dependent on the chosen speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):

U.S. Speed (mph) Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph decrease in set speed. Each subse-

quent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 mph. If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to decrease in 5 mph decrements until the button is released. The decrease in set speed is reflected in the instrument cluster display. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 241 Metric Speed (km/h) Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 km/h decrease in set speed. Each subse-

quent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 km/h. If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to decrease in 10 km/h decrements until the button is released. The decrease in set speed is reflected in the instrument cluster display. NOTE:

When you override and push the SET (+) button or SET (-) buttons, the new set speed will be the current speed of the vehicle. When you use the SET (-) button to decel-

erate, if the powertrain braking power does not slow the vehicle sufficiently to reach the set speed, the brake system will automati-

cally slow the vehicle. The ACC system decelerates the vehicle to a full stop when following a target vehicle. If an ACC host vehicle follows a target vehicle to a standstill, after two seconds the driver will either have to push the RES (resume) button, or apply the accelerator pedal to reengage the ACC to the existing set speed. The ACC system maintains set speed when driving up hill and down hill. However, a slight speed change on moderate hills is normal. In addition, downshifting may occur while climbing uphill or descending downhill. This is normal operation and necessary to main-

tain set speed. When driving up hill and down hill, the ACC system will cancel if the braking temperature exceeds normal range (over-

heated). Setting The Following Distance In ACC The specified following distance for ACC can be set by varying the distance setting between four bars (longest), three bars (long), two bars

(medium) and one bar (short). Using this distance setting and the vehicle speed, ACC calculates and sets the distance to the vehicle ahead. This distance setting displays in the instrument cluster display. STARTING AND OPERATING 241 Distance Setting 4 Bars (Longest) 5 Distance Setting 3 Bars (Long) 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 242 242 STARTING AND OPERATING Distance Setting 2 Bars (Medium) NOTE:

The brake lights will illuminate whenever the ACC system applies the brakes. A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC predicts that its maximum braking level is not sufficient to maintain the set distance. If this occurs, a visual alert BRAKE will flash in the instrument cluster display and a chime will sound while ACC continues to apply its maximum braking capacity. To decrease the distance setting, push the Distance Setting Decrease button and release. Each time the button is pushed, the distance setting decreases by one bar (shorter). If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will maintain the set speed. If a slower moving vehicle is detected in the same lane, the instru-

ment cluster displays the Sensed Vehicle Indi-

cator icon, and the system adjusts vehicle speed automatically to maintain the distance setting, regardless of the set speed. The vehicle will then maintain the set distance until:

The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above the set speed. The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or view of the sensor. The distance setting is changed. Distance Setting 1 Bar (Short) The system disengages. (Refer to the infor-

To increase the distance setting, push the Distance Setting Increase button and release. Each time the button is pushed, the distance setting increases by one bar (longer). mation on ACC Activation). The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited;

however, the driver can always apply the brakes manually, if necessary. Brake Alert NOTE:

The BRAKE! Screen in the instrument cluster display is a warning for the driver to take action and does not necessarily mean that the Forward Collision Warning system is applying the brakes autonomously. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 243 Overtake Aid When driving with ACC engaged and following a vehicle, the system will provide an additional acceleration up to the ACC set speed to assist in passing the vehicle. This additional acceleration is triggered when the driver utilizes the left turn signal and will only be active when passing on the left hand side. ACC Operation At Stop If the ACC system brings your vehicle to a stand-

still while following a target vehicle, and the target vehicle starts moving within two seconds of your vehicle coming to a standstill, your vehicle will resume motion without the need for any driver action. If the target vehicle does not start moving within two seconds of your vehicle coming to a stand-

still, the driver will either have to push the RES

(resume) button, or apply the accelerator pedal to reengage the ACC. The vehicle will accelerate to the existing set speed. NOTE:

After the ACC system holds your vehicle at a standstill for approximately three consecutive minutes, the parking brake will be activated, and the ACC system will be cancelled. While the ACC system is holding your vehicle at a standstill, if the driver seatbelt is unbuckled or the driver door is opened, the parking brake will be activated, and the ACC system will be cancelled. WARNING!

When the ACC system is resumed, the driver must ensure that there are no pedestrians, vehicles or objects in the path of the vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collision and death or serious personal injury. Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu The instrument cluster displays the current ACC system settings. The instrument cluster display is located in the center of the instrument cluster. The information it displays depends on ACC system status. Push the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button (located on the steering wheel) until one of the following displays in the instrument cluster display:

STARTING AND OPERATING 243 Adaptive Cruise Control Off When ACC is deactivated, the display will read Adaptive Cruise Control Off. Adaptive Cruise Control Ready When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting has not been selected, the display will read Adaptive Cruise Control Ready. Push the SET (+) or the SET (-) button (located on the steering wheel) and the following will display in the instrument cluster display:

ACC SET When ACC is set, the set speed will display in the instrument cluster. The ACC screen may display once again if any ACC activity occurs, which may include any of the following:

System Cancel 5 Driver Override System Off ACC Proximity Warning ACC Unavailable Warning The instrument cluster display will return to the last display selected after five seconds of no ACC display activity 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 244 244 STARTING AND OPERATING Display Warnings And Maintenance Wipe Front Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle Warning The ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor warning will display and also a chime will indicate when conditions temporarily limit system performance. This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such as in snow or heavy rain. The ACC system may also become temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such as mud, dirt or ice. In these cases, the instrument cluster display will show ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor and the system will deactivate. The ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor message can sometimes be displayed while driving in highly reflective areas (i.e. tunnels with reflective tiles, or ice and snow). The ACC system will recover after the vehicle has left these areas. Under rare conditions, when the radar is not tracking any vehicles or objects in its path this warning may temporarily occur. NOTE:

If the ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor warning is active Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control is still available. For additional information refer to Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode in this section. If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should examine the sensor. It may require cleaning or removal of an obstruction. The sensor is located in the center of the vehicle behind the lower grille. To keep the ACC System operating properly, it is important to note the following maintenance items:

Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully wipe the sensor lens with a soft cloth. Be cautious not to damage the sensor lens. Do not remove any screws from the sensor. Doing so could cause an ACC system malfunction or failure and require a sensor realignment. If the sensor or front end of the vehicle is damaged due to a collision, see an autho-

rized dealer for service. Do not attach or install any accessories near the sensor, including transparent material or aftermarket grilles. Doing so could cause an ACC system failure or malfunction. When the condition that deactivated the system is no longer present, the system will return to the Adaptive Cruise Control Off state and will resume function by simply reactivating it. NOTE:

If the ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor message occurs frequently (e.g. more than once on every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or other obstruction, have the radar sensor realigned at an authorized dealer. Clean Front Windshield Warning The ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front Windshield warning will display and also a chime will indicate when conditions tempo-

rarily limit system performance. This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such as in snow or heavy rain and fog. The ACC system may also become temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such as mud, dirt, or ice on wind-

shield, driving directly into the sun and fog on the inside of glass. In these cases, the instru-

ment cluster display will show ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front Windshield and the system will have degraded perfor-

mance. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 245 The ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front Windshield message can sometimes be displayed while driving in adverse weather conditions. The ACC/FCW system will recover after the vehicle has left these areas. Under rare conditions, when the camera is not tracking any vehicles or objects in its path this warning may temporarily occur. If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should examine the windshield and the camera located on the back side of the inside rear view mirror. They may require cleaning or removal of an obstruction. When the condition that created limited func-

tionality is no longer present, the system will return to full functionality. NOTE:

If the ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front Windshield message occurs frequently

(e.g. more than once on every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or other obstruction, have the windshield and forward facing camera inspected at an authorized dealer. Service ACC/FCW Warning If the system turns off, and the instrument cluster displays ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required or Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required, there may be an internal system fault or a temporary malfunction that limits ACC functionality. Although the vehicle is still driv-

able under normal conditions, ACC will be temporarily unavailable. If this occurs, try acti-

vating ACC again later, following an ignition cycle. If the problem persists, see an authorized dealer. Precautions While Driving With ACC In certain driving situations, ACC may have detection issues. In these cases, ACC may brake late or unexpectedly. The driver needs to stay alert and may need to intervene. Towing A Trailer Towing a trailer is not advised when using ACC. STARTING AND OPERATING 245 Offset Driving ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that is offset from your direct line of travel, or a vehicle merging in from a side lane. There may not be sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead. The offset vehicle may move in and out of the line of travel, which can cause your vehicle to brake or accelerate unexpectedly. 5 Offset Driving Condition Example 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 246 246 STARTING AND OPERATING Turns And Bends When driving on a curve with ACC engaged, the system may decrease the vehicle speed and acceleration for stability reasons, with no target vehicle detected. Once the vehicle is out of the curve the system will resume your original Set Speed. This is a part of normal ACC system func-

tionality. NOTE:

On tight turns ACC performance may be limited. Using ACC On Hills When driving on hills, ACC may not detect a vehicle in your lane. Depending on the speed, vehicle load, traffic conditions, and the steep-

ness of the hills, ACC performance may be limited. Lane Changing ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the lane in which you are trav-

eling. In the illustration shown, ACC has not yet detected the vehicle changing lanes and it may not detect the vehicle until it's too late for the ACC system to take action. ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the lane. There may not be sufficient distance to the lane-changing vehicle. Always be attentive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary. ACC Hill Example Turn Or Bend Example Lane Changing Example 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 247 Narrow Vehicles Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer edges of the lane or edging into the lane are not detected until they have moved fully into the lane. There may not be sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead. Stationary Objects And Vehicles ACC does not react to stationary objects and stationary vehicles. For example, ACC will not react in situations where the vehicle you are following exits your lane and the vehicle ahead is stopped in your lane. Always be attentive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary. Narrow Vehicle Example Stationary Object And Stationary Vehicle Example STARTING AND OPERATING 247 General Information The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interfer-

ence, and 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Le prsent appareil est conforme aux CNR d`Innovation, Science and Economic Develop-

ment applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorise aux deux conditions suivantes:

1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouil-

lage, et 5 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 248 248 STARTING AND OPERATING 2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radiolectrique subi, mme si le brouillage est susceptible d'en comprom-

ettre le fonctionnement. La operacin de este equipo est sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones:

1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia perjudicial y 2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cual-

quier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operacin no deseada. NOTE:

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compli-

ance could void the users authority to operate the equipment. Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode In addition to Adaptive Cruise Control mode, a Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode is available for cruising at fixed speeds. The Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode is designed to maintain a set cruising speed without requiring the driver to operate the accel-

erator. Cruise Control can only be operated if the vehicle speed is above 20 mph (32 km/h). To change between the different control modes, push the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button which turns the ACC and the Normal

(Fixed Speed) Cruise Control off. Pushing the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control on/off button will result in turning on (changing to) the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode. WARNING!

In the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode, the system will not react to vehicles ahead. In addition, the proximity warning does not activate and no alarm will sound even if you are too close to the vehicle ahead since neither the presence of the vehicle ahead nor the vehicle-to-vehicle distance is detected. Be sure to maintain a safe distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead. Always be aware which mode is selected. To Set A Desired Speed Turn the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control on. When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, push the SET (+) or SET (-) button and release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed. Once a speed has been set a message CRUISE CONTROL SET TO MPH (km/h) will appear indicating what speed was set. This light will turn on when the system is turned on via the on/off control. It turns green when the cruise control is set. To Vary The Speed Setting To Increase Speed When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control is set, you can increase speed by pushing the SET (+) button. The drivers preferred units can be selected through the instrument cluster. Refer to Instru-

ment Cluster Display in Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel for more information. The speed increment shown is dependent on the speed of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) units:

U.S. Speed (mph) Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in a 1 mph increase in set speed. Each subse-

quent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 mph. If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to increase in 5 mph increments until the button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected in the instrument cluster display. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 249 Metric Speed (km/h) Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in a 1 km/h increase in set speed. Each subse-

quent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 km/h. If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to decrease in 5 mph decrements until the button is released. The decrease in set speed is reflected in the instrument cluster display. If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to increase in 10 km/h increments until the button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected in the instrument cluster display. Metric Speed (km/h) Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 km/h decrease in set speed. Each subse-

quent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 km/h. To Decrease Speed When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control is set, you can decrease speed by pushing the SET (-) button. The drivers preferred units can be selected through the instrument cluster. Refer to Instru-

ment Cluster Display in Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel for more information. The speed decrement shown is dependent on the speed of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) units:

U.S. Speed (mph) Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph decrease in set speed. Each subse-

quent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 mph. If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to decrease in 10 km/h decrements until the button is released. The decrease in set speed is reflected in the instrument cluster display. To Cancel The following conditions will cancel the Normal

(Fixed Speed) Cruise Control without clearing the memory:

The brake pedal is applied. The CANC (cancel) button is pushed. The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control System (ESC/TCS) activates. STARTING AND OPERATING 249 The vehicle parking brake is applied. The braking temperature exceeds normal range (overheated). The gear selector is removed from the DRIVE position. To Resume Speed To resume a previously set speed, push the RES button and release. Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph (32 km/h). To Turn Off The system will turn off and erase the set speed in memory if:

The Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control on/

5 off button is pushed. The ignition is placed in the OFF position. The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button is pushed. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 250 250 STARTING AND OPERATING PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST IF EQUIPPED The ParkSense Rear Park Assist system provides visual and audible indications of the distance between the rear fascia and a detected obstacle when backing up (e.g. during a parking maneuver). If your vehicle is equipped with an Automatic Transmission, the vehicle brakes may be automatically applied and released when performing a reverse parking maneuver if the system detects a possible colli-

sion with an obstacle. NOTE:

The driver can override the automatic braking function by pressing the gas pedal, turning ParkSense off via ParkSense switch, or changing the gear while the automatic brakes are being applied. Automatic brakes will not be available if ESC is not available. Automatic brakes will not be available if there is a faulted condition detected with the Park-

Sense Park Assist system or the Braking System Module. The automatic braking function may not provide enough vehicle deceleration to avoid colliding with a detected obstacle depending on vehicle speed, road conditions, and brake capability. The automatic braking function may not be applied fast enough for moving obstacles that approach the rear of the vehicle from the left and/or right sides. The automatic braking function can be enabled/disabled from the Customer-Programmable Features section of the Uconnect System. ParkSense will retain its last known configu-

ration state for the automatic braking func-

tion through ignition cycles. The automatic braking function is intended to assist the driver in avoiding possible collisions with detected obstacles when backing up in REVERSE gear. NOTE:

The driver is always responsible for controlling the vehicle. The system is provided to assist the driver and not to substitute the driver. The driver must stay in full control of the vehicle's acceleration and braking and is responsible for the vehicle's movements. Refer to ParkSense System Usage Precau-

tions for limitations of this system and recom-

mendations. ParkSense will retain the last system state

(enabled or disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is changed to the ON/RUN position. ParkSense can be active only when the gear selector is in REVERSE. If ParkSense is enabled at this gear selector position, the system will remain active until the vehicle speed is increased to approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or above. When in REVERSE and above the system's operating speed, a warning will appear within the instrument cluster display indicating the vehicle speed is too fast. The system will become active again if the vehicle speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately 6 mph (9 km/h). 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 251 ParkSense Sensors ParkSense Visual Alert The four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear fascia/bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within the sensors field of view. The sensors can detect obstacles from approxi-

mately 12 inches (30 cm) up to 79 inches (200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the hori-

zontal direction, depending on the location, type and orientation of the obstacle. The ParkSense Warning screen will only be displayed if Sound and Display is selected from the Customer - Programmable Features section of the Uconnect System. Refer to "Uconnect Settings in Multimedia for further information. The ParkSense Warning screen is located within the instrument cluster display. It provides visual warnings to indicate the distance between the rear fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle. Refer to Instrument Cluster Display in Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel for further information. ParkSense Display When the vehicle is in REVERSE and an obstacle has been detected, the warning display will turn on indicating the system status, and remain on until the vehicle is moved out of REVERSE. The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing a single arc in one or more regions based on the obstacles distance and location relative to the vehicle. Rear Sensor Locations STARTING AND OPERATING 251 If an obstacle is detected in the center rear region, the display will show a single solid arc in the center rear region and will produce a one-half second tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the display will show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the sound tone will change from slow, to fast, to continuous. If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right rear region, the display will show a single flashing arc in the left and/or right rear region and will produce a fast sound tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the display will show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the tone will change from fast to continuous. 5 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 252 252 STARTING AND OPERATING Single 1/2 Second Tone/Solid Arc Slow Tone/Solid Arc Fast Tone/Flashing Arc Slow Tone/Solid Arc Fast Tone/Flashing Arc Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 253 STARTING AND OPERATING 253 The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone. The following chart shows the warning alert operation when the system is detecting an obstacle:

Rear Distance

(inches/cm) Arcs Left Arcs Center Arcs Right Greater than 79 inches

(200 cm) None None None Audible Alert None Chime Radio Volume Reduced No WARNING ALERTS 79-59 inches

(200-150 cm) 59-47 inches

(150-120 cm) 47-39 inches

(120-100 cm) 39-25 inches

(100-65 cm) 25-12 inches

(65-30 cm) Less than 12 inches

(30 cm) None 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing 4th Solid 3rd Flashing 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing None 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing None 6th Solid None Single 1/2-

Second Tone

(for rear center only) Yes None 5th Solid None Slow only) Yes None None Slow only) Yes

(for rear center

(for rear center

(for rear center Fast only) Yes Fast Continuous 5 Yes Yes NOTE:

ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if on, when the system is sounding an audio tone. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 254 254 STARTING AND OPERATING Enabling And Disabling ParkSense ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with the ParkSense switch, located on the switch panel below the Uconnect display. When the ParkSense switch is pushed to disable the system, the instrument cluster will display the PARKSENSE OFF message for approximately five seconds. Refer to Instrument Cluster Display in Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel for further information. When the gear selector is moved to REVERSE and the system is disabled, the instrument cluster display will show the PARK-

SENSE OFF message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE. The ParkSense switch LED will be on when Park-

Sense is disabled or requires service. The Park-

Sense switch LED will be off when the system is enabled. If the ParkSense switch is pushed, and requires service, the ParkSense switch LED will blink momentarily, and then the LED will be on. NOTE:

When KeySense feature is present, the ParkSense System will reject customer input to turn the system off via the hard switch. The instrument cluster display will show "KeySense in Use Selected Feature Cannot be Disabled" message. Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist System During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense Rear Park Assist System has detected a faulted condition, the instrument cluster will actuate a single chime, once per ignition cycle, and it will display the PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS or the PARKSENSE UNAVAIL-

ABLE SERVICE REQUIRED message. Refer to Instrument Cluster Display in Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel for further infor-

mation. When the gear selector is moved to REVERSE and the system has detected a faulted condition, the instrument cluster display will show the "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS" or "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED" message for five seconds while the vehicle is in REVERSE. Under this condition, ParkSense will not operate and PARKSENSE OFF message will be displayed. If PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS appears in the instrument cluster display, make sure the outer surface and the underside of the rear fascia/bumper is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt, or other obstruction and then cycle the ignition. If the message continues to appear, see an autho-

rized dealer. If PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED appears in the instrument cluster display, see an authorized dealer. Cleaning The ParkSense System Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car wash soap, and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could damage the sensors. ParkSense System Usage Precautions NOTE:

Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow, ice, mud, dirt, and debris to keep the Park-

Sense system operating properly. Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could affect the performance of ParkSense. When you turn ParkSense off, the instrument cluster will display PARKSENSE OFF. Furthermore, once you turn ParkSense off, it remains off until you turn it on again, even if you cycle the ignition. When you move the gear selector to the REVERSE position and ParkSense is turned off, the instrument cluster display will show PARKSENSE OFF message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 255 WARNING!

CAUTION!

Drivers must be careful when backing up ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is STARTING AND OPERATING 255 unable to recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles. Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not detected at all. Obstacles located above or below the sensors will not be detected when they are in close proximity. The vehicle must be driven slowly when using ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the driver looks over his/her shoulder when using ParkSense. 5 ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of the radio when it is sounding a tone. Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking care not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt, or debris. Failure to do so can result in the system not working prop-

erly. The ParkSense system might not detect an obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it could provide a false indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia/bumper. ParkSense should be disabled when the lift-

gate is in the open position. Use the ParkSense switch to turn the Park-

Sense system off if objects such as bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc. are placed within 12 inches (30 cm) from the rear fascia/

bumper. Failure to do so can result in the system misinterpreting a close object as a sensor problem, causing the PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED message to be displayed in the instrument cluster display. even when using ParkSense. Always check carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before backing up. You are responsible for safety and must continue to pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death. Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recommended that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly is disconnected from the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do so can result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the rear fascia when the loudspeaker sounds the continuous tone. Also, the sensors could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size and shape, giving a false indica-

tion that an obstacle is behind the vehicle. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 256 256 STARTING AND OPERATING PARKSENSE FRONT AND REAR PARK ASSIST IF EQUIPPED The ParkSense Park Assist system provides visual and audible indications of the distance between the rear and/or front fascia and a detected obstacle when backing up or moving forward (e.g. during a parking maneuver). If your vehicle is equipped with an Automatic Trans-

mission, the vehicle brakes may be automati-

cally applied and released when performing a reverse parking maneuver if the system detects a possible collision with an obstacle. NOTE:

The driver can override the automatic braking function by pressing the gas pedal, turning ParkSense off via ParkSense switch, or changing the gear while the automatic brakes are being applied. Automatic brakes will not be available if ESC is not available. Automatic brakes will not be available if there is a faulted condition detected with the Park-

Sense Park Assist system or the Braking System Module. The automatic braking function may not NOTE:

provide enough vehicle deceleration to avoid colliding with a detected obstacle depending on vehicle speed, road conditions, and brake capability. The automatic braking function may not be applied fast enough for moving obstacles that approach the rear of the vehicle from the left and/or right sides. The automatic braking function can be enabled/disabled from the Customer-Programmable Features section of the Uconnect System. ParkSense will retain its last known configu-

ration state for the automatic braking func-

tion through ignition cycles. The automatic braking function is intended to assist the driver in avoiding possible collisions with detected obstacles when backing up in REVERSE gear. The driver is always responsible for controlling the vehicle. The system is provided to assist the driver and not to substitute the driver. The driver must stay in full control of the vehicle's acceleration and braking and is responsible for the vehicle's movements. Refer to ParkSense System Usage Precau-

tions for limitations of this system and recom-

mendations. ParkSense will retain the last system state

(enabled or disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is changed to the ON/RUN position. ParkSense can be active only when the gear selector is in REVERSE or DRIVE. If ParkSense is enabled at one of these gear selector positions, the system will remain active until the vehicle speed is increased to approximately 7 mph

(11 km/h) or above. When in REVERSE and above the system's operating speed, a warning will appear in the instrument cluster display indicating the vehicle speed is too fast. The 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 257 system will become active again if the vehicle speed is decreased to speeds less than approx-

imately 6 mph (9 km/h). ParkSense Sensors The six ParkSense sensors, located in the rear fascia/bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within the sensors field of view. The sensors can detect obstacles from approxi-

mately 12 inches (30 cm) up to 79 in (200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal direction, depending on the location, type and orientation of the obstacle. Rear Sensor Locations The six ParkSense sensors, located in the front fascia/bumper, monitor the area in front of the vehicle that is within the sensors field of view. The sensors can detect obstacles from approxi-

mately 12 inches (30 cm) up to 47 in (120 cm) from the front fascia/bumper in the horizontal direction, depending on the location, type and orientation of the obstacle. ParkSense Visual Alert The ParkSense Warning screen will only be displayed if Sound and Display is selected from the Customer - Programmable Features section of the Uconnect System. Refer to

"Uconnect Settings in Multimedia for further information. The ParkSense Warning screen is located within the instrument cluster display. It provides visual warnings to indicate the distance between the rear fascia/bumper and/or front fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle. Refer to Instrument Cluster Display in Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel for further information. STARTING AND OPERATING 257 ParkSense Display Rear Park Assist When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the warning display will turn on indicating the system status. The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing a single arc in one or more regions based on the obstacles distance and location relative to the vehicle. If an obstacle is detected in the center rear region, the display will show a single solid arc in the center rear region and will produce a one-half second tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the display will show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the sound tone will change from slow, to fast, to continuous. If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right rear region, the display will show a single flashing arc in the left and/or right rear region and will produce a fast sound tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the display will show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the tone will change from fast to continuous. 5 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 258 258 STARTING AND OPERATING Single 1/2 Second Tone/Solid Arc Slow Tone For Rear Only/Solid Arc Fast Tone/Flashing Arc Slow Tone/Solid Arc Fast Tone For Rear Only/Flashing Arc Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 259 STARTING AND OPERATING 259 The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone. The following chart shows the warning alert operation when the system is detecting an obstacle:

Rear Distance

(inches/cm) Arcs Left Arcs Center Arcs Right Audible Alert Chime Greater than 79 inches

(200 cm) None None None None Radio Volume Reduced No WARNING ALERTS 79-59 inches

(200-150 cm) 59-47 inches

(150-120 cm) 47-39 inches

(120-100 cm) 39-25 inches

(100-65 cm) 25-12 inches

(65-30 cm) Less than 12 inches

(30 cm) None 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing 4th Solid 3rd Flashing 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing None 6th Solid None Single 1/2-

Second Tone

(for rear center only) Yes None 5th Solid None Slow only) Yes None None Slow only) Yes

(for rear center

(for rear center

(for rear center None Fast only) Yes 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing Fast Continuous 5 Yes Yes NOTE:

ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if on, when the system is sounding an audio tone. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 260 260 STARTING AND OPERATING Front Park Assist When the vehicle is in DRIVE the ParkSense Warning screen will be displayed when an obstacle is detected. The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing a single arc in one or more regions based on the obstacles distance and location relative to the vehicle. If an obstacle is detected in the center front region, the display will show a single arc in the center front region. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the display will show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle. A fast sound tone will be produced when reaching the second flashing arc and will change to a contin-

uous sound tone when the first flashing arc appears. If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right front region, the display will show a single flashing arc in the left and/or right front region and will produce a fast sound tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the display will show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the tone will change from fast to continuous. Slow Tone For Rear Only/Solid Arc Fast Tone/Flashing Arc Fast Tone For Rear Only/Flashing Arc Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 261 The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone. The following chart shows the warning alert operation when the system is detecting an obstacle:

STARTING AND OPERATING 261 Front Distance

(inches/cm) Arcs Left Arcs Center Arcs Right Audible Alert Chime Radio Volume Reduced Greater than 47 inches

(120 cm) 47-39 inches

(120-100 cm) 39-25 inches

(100-65 cm) WARNING ALERTS None None None None No None 4th Solid None None No 3rd Flashing None None None No NOTE:

ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if on, when the system is sounding an audio tone. Front Park Assist Audible Alerts ParkSense will turn off the Front Park Assist audible alert (chime) after approximately three seconds when an obstacle has been detected, the vehicle is stationary, and brake pedal is applied. Adjustable Chime Volume Settings Front and Rear chime volume settings can be selected from the Customer-Programmable Features section of the Uconnect System, refer to Uconnect Settings in Multimedia for further information. If the Uconnect System is equipped, chime volume settings will not be accessible from the instrument cluster display. 25-12 inches

(65-30 cm) 2nd Flashing 2nd Flashing 2nd Flashing Fast Yes Less than 12 inches

(30 cm) 1st Flashing 1st Flashing 1st Flashing Continuous Yes 5 The chime volume settings include LOW, MEDIUM, and HIGH. The factory default volume setting is MEDIUM. ParkSense will retain its last known configura-

tion state through ignition cycles. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 262 262 STARTING AND OPERATING Enabling And Disabling ParkSense ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with the ParkSense switch, located on the switch panel below the Uconnect display. When the ParkSense switch is pushed to disable the system, the instrument cluster will display the PARKSENSE OFF message for approximately five seconds. Refer to Instrument Cluster Display in Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel for further information. When the gear selector is moved to REVERSE and the system is disabled, the instrument cluster display will show the PARKSENSE OFF message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE. The ParkSense switch LED will be on when Park-

Sense is disabled or requires service. The Park-

Sense switch LED will be off when the system is enabled. If the ParkSense switch is pushed, and requires service, the ParkSense switch LED will blink momentarily, and then the LED will be on. NOTE:

When KeySense feature is present, the Park-

Sense System will reject customer input to turn the system off via the hard switch. The instru-

ment cluster display will show "KeySense in Use Selected Feature Cannot be Disabled"

message. Service The ParkSense Park Assist System During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense System has detected a faulted condition, the instrument cluster will actuate a single chime, once per ignition cycle, and it will display the

"PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS", "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS", or the "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED" message for five seconds. When the gear selector is moved to REVERSE and the system has detected a faulted condition, the instrument cluster display will show a "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS", "PARK-

SENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS"

or "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED" pop up message for five seconds. After five seconds, a vehicle graphic will be displayed with a "WIPE OFF" or SERVICE overlay, depending on the location and fault type. The system will continue to provide arc alerts for the side that is functioning properly. These arc alerts will interrupt the "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS", "PARK-

SENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS", or "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED" messages if an object is detected within the five second pop-up duration. The vehicle graphic will remain displayed for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE. Refer to Instrument Cluster Display in Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel for further information. If "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS" or "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS" appears in the instrument cluster display make sure the outer surface and the underside of the rear fascia/bumper and/or front fascia/bumper is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction and then cycle the ignition. If the message continues to appear see an authorized dealer. If the "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED" message appears in the instrument cluster display, see an authorized dealer. Cleaning The ParkSense System Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car wash soap and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could damage the sensors. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 263 ParkSense System Usage Precautions Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, NOTE:

Ensure that the front and rear bumper are free of snow, ice, mud, dirt, and debris to keep the ParkSense system operating prop-

erly. Construction equipment, large trucks, and other vibrations could affect the performance of ParkSense. When you turn ParkSense off, the instrument cluster will display PARKSENSE OFF. Furthermore, once you turn ParkSense off, it remains off until you turn it on again, even if you cycle the ignition key. When you move the gear selector to the REVERSE position and ParkSense is turned off, the instrument cluster will display PARK-

SENSE OFF for five seconds while the vehicle is in REVERSE. ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of the radio when it is sounding a tone. taking care not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris. Failure to do so can result in the system not working prop-

erly. The ParkSense system might not detect an obstacle behind or in front of the appro-

priate fascia/bumper, or it could provide a false indication that an obstacle is behind or in front of the appropriate fascia/bumper. Use the ParkSense switch to turn the Park-

Sense system off if objects such as bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc. are placed within 12 inches (30 cm) from the rear fascia/

bumper. Failure to do so can result in the system misinterpreting a close object as a sensor problem, causing the PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED message to be displayed in the instrument cluster. ParkSense should be disabled when the lift-

gate is in the open position. There may be a delay in the object detection rate if the object is moving. This may cause the automatic braking application to be delayed. STARTING AND OPERATING 263 WARNING!

Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using ParkSense. Always check carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before backing up. You are responsible for safety and must continue to pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death. Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recommended that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly is disconnected from the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do so can result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the rear fascia when the loudspeaker sounds the continuous tone. Also, the sensors could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size and shape, giving a false indica-

tion that an obstacle is behind the vehicle. 5 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 264 264 STARTING AND OPERATING CAUTION!

ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles. Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not detected at all. Obstacles located above or below the sensors will not be detected when they are in close proximity. The vehicle must be driven slowly when using ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the driver looks over his/her shoulder when using ParkSense. PARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED The ParkSense Active Park Assist system is intended to assist the driver during parallel and perpendicular parking maneuvers by identifying a proper parking space, providing audible/

visual instructions, and controlling the steering wheel. The ParkSense Active Park Assist system is defined as semi-automatic since the driver maintains control of the accelerator, gear selector and brakes. Depending on the driver's parking maneuver selection, the ParkSense Active Park Assist system is capable of maneu-

vering a vehicle into a parallel or a perpendic-

ular parking space on either side (i.e., driver side or passenger side). NOTE:

The driver is always responsible for controlling the vehicle, responsible for any surrounding objects, and must intervene as required. The system is provided to assist the driver and not to substitute the driver. During a semi-automatic maneuver, if the driver touches the steering wheel after being instructed to remove their hands from the steering wheel, the system will cancel, and the driver will be required to manually complete the parking maneuver. The system may not work in all conditions

(e.g. environmental conditions such as heavy rain, snow, etc., or if searching for a parking space that has surfaces that will absorb the ultrasonic sensor waves). New vehicles from the dealership must have at least 30 miles (48 km) accumulated before the ParkSense Active Park Assist system is fully calibrated and performs accu-

rately. This is due to the systems dynamic vehicle calibration to improve the perfor-

mance of the feature. The system will also continuously perform the dynamic vehicle calibration to account for differences such as over or under inflated tires and new tires. Enabling And Disabling The ParkSense Active Park Assist System The ParkSense Active Park Assist system can be enabled and disabled with the ParkSense Active Park Assist switch, located on the switch panel below the Uconnect display. To enable the ParkSense Active Park Assist system, push the ParkSense Active Park Assist switch once (LED turns on). To disable the ParkSense Active Park Assist system, push the ParkSense Active Park Assist switch again (LED turns off). 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 265 STARTING AND OPERATING 265 The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will turn off automatically for any of the following conditions:

The parking maneuver is completed. The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will only operate and search for a parking space when the following conditions are present:

The gear position is in DRIVE. When pushed, the LED on the ParkSense Active Park Assist switch will blink momentarily, and then the LED will turn off if any of the above conditions are not present. Vehicle speed greater than 18 mph (30 km/h) The ignition is in the RUN position. when searching for a parking space. The ParkSense Active Park Assist switch is Vehicle speed greater than 5 mph (7 km/h) activated. during active steering guidance into the parking space. Touching the steering wheel during active steering guidance into the parking space. Pushing the ParkSense Front and Rear Park Assist switch. The drivers door is opened. The liftgate is opened. Electronic Stability Control/Anti-Lock Braking System intervention. The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will allow a maximum of eight shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE. If the maneuver cannot be completed within eight shifts, the system will cancel and the instrument cluster display will instruct the driver to complete the maneuver manually. The drivers door is closed. The liftgate is closed. Vehicle speed is less than 15 mph (25 km/h). NOTE:

If the vehicle is driven above approximately 15 mph (25 km/h), the instrument cluster display will instruct the driver to slow down. If the vehicle is driven above approximately 18 mph (30 km/h), the system will cancel. The driver must then reactivate the system by pushing the ParkSense Active Park Assist switch. The outer surface and the underside of the front and rear fascias/bumpers are clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction. Parallel Parking Space Assistance Operation/Display When the ParkSense Active Park Assist system is enabled the Active ParkSense Searching -

Push OK for Perpendicular Park message will appear in the instrument cluster display. You may switch to perpendicular parking if you desire. Push the OK button on the left side steering wheel switch to change your parking space setting. 5 NOTE:

When searching for a parking space, use the turn signal indicator to select which side of the vehicle you want to perform the parking maneuver. The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will automatically search for a parking space on the passenger's side of the vehicle if the turn signal is not activated. The driver needs to make sure that the selected parking space for the maneuver remains free and clear of any obstructions

(e.g. pedestrians, bicycles, etc.). 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 266 266 STARTING AND OPERATING The driver is responsible to ensure that the selected parking space is suitable for the maneuver and free/clear of anything that may be overhanging or protruding into the parking space (e.g., ladders, tailgates, etc. from surrounding objects/vehicles). When seeking for a parking space, the driver should drive as parallel or perpendicular

(depending on the type of maneuver) to other vehicles as possible. The feature will only indicate the last detected parking space (example: if passing multiple available parking spaces, the system will only indicate the last detected parking space for the maneuver). Active ParkSense Searching When an available parking space has been found, and the vehicle is not in position, you will be instructed to move forward to position the vehicle for a parallel parking sequence. Once the vehicle is in position, the system will instruct the driver to stop the vehicles move-

ment and remove hands from the steering wheel. Parking Space Found Keep Moving Forward Parking Space Found Stop And Remove Hands From Wheel 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 267 Once the vehicle is at a standstill with the drivers hands removed from the steering wheel, the system will then instruct the driver to place the gear selector into the REVERSE posi-

tion. Parking Space Found Shift To Reverse When the driver places the gear selector into the REVERSE position, the system may instruct the driver to wait for steering to complete. Check Surroundings Wait For Steering To Complete The system will then instruct the driver to check their surroundings and move backward. Check Surroundings Move Backward STARTING AND OPERATING 267 NOTE:

It is the drivers responsibility to use the brake and accelerator during the semi-auto-

matic parking maneuver. When the system instructs the driver to remove their hands from the steering wheel, the driver should check their surroundings and begin to back up slowly. The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will allow a maximum of eight shifts between DRIVE or REVERSE. If the maneuver cannot be completed within eight shifts, the system will cancel and the instrument cluster display will instruct the driver to complete the maneuver manually. 5 The system will cancel the maneuver if the vehicle speed exceeds 5 mph (7 km/h) during active steering guidance into the parking space. The system will provide a warning to the driver at 3 mph (5 km/h) that tells them to slow down. The driver is then responsible for completing the maneuver if the system is canceled. If the system is canceled during the maneuver for any reason, the driver must take full control of the vehicle. Once the vehicle is in a standstill condition, the driver will be instructed to place the gear selector into the DRIVE position. The system will then instruct the driver to check their surroundings and move forward. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 268 268 STARTING AND OPERATING When the vehicle has reached the end of its backward movement, the system will instruct the driver to check their surroundings and stop the vehicles movement. Check Surroundings STOP NOTE:

It is the drivers responsibility to use the brake and stop the vehicle. The driver should check their surroundings and be prepared to stop the vehicle either when instructed to, or when driver intervention is required. Check Surroundings Shift To Drive When the driver places the gear selector into the DRIVE position, the system may instruct the driver to wait for steering to complete. Check Surroundings Move Forward When the vehicle has reached the end of its forward movement, the system will instruct the driver to check their surroundings and stop the vehicles movement. Check Surroundings Wait For Steering To Complete Check Surroundings STOP

 

 

20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 269 NOTE:

It is the drivers responsibility to use the brake and stop the vehicle. The driver should check their surroundings and be prepared to stop the vehicle either when instructed to, or when driver intervention is required. Once the vehicle is in a standstill condition, the driver will be instructed to place the gear selector into the REVERSE position. STARTING AND OPERATING 269 The vehicle is now in the parallel park position. When the maneuver is complete, the driver will be instructed to check the vehicle's parking position. If the driver is satisfied with the vehicle position, they should shift to PARK. The "Active ParkSense Complete - Check Parking Position"

message will be momentarily displayed. Active ParkSense Complete Check Parking Position Check Surroundings Wait For Steering To Complete The system will then instruct the driver to check their surroundings and move backward. 5 Check Surroundings Shift To Reverse When the driver places the gear selector into the REVERSE position, the system may instruct the driver to wait for steering to complete. Check Surroundings Move Backward 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 270 270 STARTING AND OPERATING Perpendicular Parking Space Assistance Operation/Display NOTE:

When the ParkSense Active Park Assist system is enabled, the Active ParkSense Searching -

Push OK for Perpendicular Park message will show in the instrument cluster display. Push the OK button on the left side steering wheel switch to change your parking space setting to a perpendicular maneuver. You may switch back to parallel parking if you desire. Once the driver pushes OK for a perpendicular parking maneuver, the Active ParkSense Searching - Push OK for Parallel Park message will appear in the instrument cluster display. When searching for a parking space, use the turn signal indicator to select which side of the vehicle you want to perform the parking maneuver. The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will automatically search for a parking space on the passenger's side of the vehicle if the turn signal is not activated. The driver needs to make sure that the selected parking space for the maneuver remains free and clear of any obstructions

(e.g. pedestrians, bicycles, etc.). The driver is responsible to ensure that the selected parking space is suitable for the maneuver and free/clear of anything that may be overhanging or protruding into the parking space (e.g., ladders, tailgates, etc. from surrounding objects/vehicles). Active ParkSense Searching Display When seeking for a parking space, the driver should drive as parallel or perpendicular

(depending on the type of maneuver) to other vehicles as possible. The feature will only indicate the last detected parking space (example: if passing multiple available parking spaces, the system will only indicate the last detected parking space for the maneuver). 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 271 When an available parking space has been found, and the vehicle is not in position, you will be instructed to move forward to position the vehicle for a perpendicular parking sequence. Once the vehicle is in position, you will be instructed to stop the vehicles movement and remove your hands from the steering wheel. STARTING AND OPERATING 271 Once the vehicle is at a standstill with your hands removed from the steering wheel, you will be instructed to place the gear selector into the REVERSE position. Parking Space Found Keep Moving Forward From Wheel Parking Space Found Shift To Reverse Parking Space Found Stop And Remove Hands 5 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 272 272 STARTING AND OPERATING When the driver places the gear selector into the REVERSE position, the system may instruct the driver to wait for steering to complete. NOTE:

When the vehicle has reached the end of its backward movement, the system will instruct the driver to check their surroundings and stop the vehicles movement. Check Surroundings STOP NOTE:

It is the drivers responsibility to use the brake and stop the vehicle. The driver should check their surroundings and be prepared to stop the vehicle either when instructed to, or when driver intervention is required. It is the drivers responsibility to use the brake and accelerator during the semi-auto-

matic parking maneuver. When the system instructs the driver to remove their hands from the steering wheel, the driver should check their surroundings and begin to back up slowly. The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will allow a maximum of eight shifts between DRIVE or REVERSE. If the maneuver cannot be completed within eight shifts, the system will cancel and the instrument cluster display will instruct the driver to complete the maneuver manually. The system will cancel the maneuver if the vehicle speed exceeds 5 mph (7 km/h) during active steering guidance into the parking space. The system will provide a warning to the driver at 3 mph (5 km/h) that tells them to slow down. The driver is then responsible for completing the maneuver if the system is canceled. If the system is canceled during the maneuver for any reason, the driver must take control of the vehicle. Check Surroundings Wait For Steering To Complete The system will then instruct the driver to check their surroundings and move backward. Check Surroundings Move Backwards 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 273 Once the vehicle is in a standstill condition, the driver will be instructed to place the gear selector into the DRIVE position. The system will then instruct the driver to check their surroundings and move forward. Check Surroundings Shift To Drive When the driver places the gear selector into the DRIVE position, the system may instruct the driver to wait for steering to complete. Check Surroundings Move Forward When the vehicle has reached the end of its forward movement, the system will instruct the driver to check their surroundings and stop the vehicles movement. STARTING AND OPERATING 273 NOTE:

It is the drivers responsibility to use the brake and stop the vehicle. The driver should check their surroundings and be prepared to stop the vehicle either when instructed to, or when driver intervention is required. Once the vehicle is in a standstill condition, the driver will be instructed to place the gear selector into the REVERSE position. 5 Check Surroundings Shift To Reverse Check Surroundings Wait For Steering To Complete Check Surroundings STOP 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 274 274 STARTING AND OPERATING When the driver places the gear selector into the REVERSE position, the system may instruct the driver to wait for steering to complete. Your vehicle is now in the perpendicular park position. When the maneuver is complete, the driver will be instructed to check the vehicle's parking position. If the driver is satisfied with the vehicle position, they should shift to PARK. The "Active ParkSense Complete - Check Parking Position" message will be momentarily displayed. Check Surroundings Wait For Steering To Complete The system will then instruct the driver to check their surroundings and move backward. Active ParkSense Complete Check Parking Position Check Surroundings Move Backwards WARNING!

Drivers must be careful when performing parallel or perpendicular parking maneuvers even when using the ParkSense Active Park Assist system. Always check carefully behind and in front of your vehicle, look behind and in front of you, and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before backing up and moving forward. You are responsible for safety and must continue to pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death. CAUTION!

The ParkSense Active Park Assist system is only a parking aid and it is unable to recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles. Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not detected at all. Obstacles located above or below the sensors will not be detected when they are in close proximity.

(Continued) 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 275 CAUTION! (Continued) The vehicle must be driven slowly when using the ParkSense Active Park Assist system in order to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is detected. It is recom-

mended that the driver looks over his/her shoulder when using the ParkSense Active Park Assist system. LANESENSE IF EQUIPPED LaneSense Operation The LaneSense system is operational at speeds above 37 mph (60 km/h) and below 112 mph

(180 km/h). It uses a forward looking camera to detect lane markings and measure vehicle posi-

tion within the lane boundaries. When both lane markings are detected and the driver unintentionally drifts out of the lane (no turn signal applied), the LaneSense system provides a haptic warning in the form of torque applied to the steering wheel to prompt the driver to remain within the lane boundaries. The LaneSense system will also provide a visual warning through the instrument cluster display to prompt the driver to remain within the lane boundaries. The driver may manually override the haptic warning by applying torque into the steering wheel at any time. When only a single lane marking is detected and the driver unintentionally drifts across that lane marking (no turn signal applied), the Lane-

Sense system provides a visual warning through the instrument cluster display to prompt the driver to remain within the lane. When only a single lane marking is detected, a haptic (torque) warning will not be provided. NOTE:

When operating conditions have been met, the LaneSense system will monitor if the drivers hands are on the steering wheel and provide an audible and visual warning to the driver when the drivers hands are not detected on the steering wheel. The system will cancel if the driver does not return their hands to the wheel. STARTING AND OPERATING 275 Turning LaneSense On Or Off The LaneSense button is located on the switch panel below the Uconnect display. To turn the LaneSense system on, push the LaneSense button (LED turns off). A Lane-

Sense On message is shown in the instrument cluster display. 5 Lane Sense On Message To turn the LaneSense system off, push the LaneSense button again (LED turns on). NOTE:

The LaneSense system will retain the last system state on or off from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is changed to the ON/RUN position. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 276 276 STARTING AND OPERATING LaneSense Warning Message The LaneSense system will indicate the current lane drift condition through the instrument cluster display. Instrument Cluster Display When the LaneSense system is on, the lane lines are gray when both of the lane boundaries have not been detected and the LaneSense telltale is solid white. visual warnings in the instrument cluster display if an unintentional lane departure occurs on the left side. When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been approached and is in a lane departure situation, the visual warning in the instrument cluster display will show the left inside lane line flashing yellow (on/off), while the outside lane line on the left of the display will remain solid yellow. The LaneSense telltale solid white to flashing yellow. changes from Left Lane Departure Both Lane Lines Detected When the LaneSense system is on, the lane lines turn from gray to white. The LaneSense telltale markings have been detected and the system is armed to provide visual warnings in the instrument cluster display and a torque warning in the steering wheel if an uninten-

tional lane departure occurs. is solid green when both lane System ON (Gray Lines) With White Telltale Left Lane Departure Only Left Lane Detected When the LaneSense system is on, the LaneSense Telltale when the left lane marking has been detected and the system is ready to provide is solid white only Lane Approached (Flashing Yellow Inside Line, Solid Yellow Outside Line/Flashing) With Yellow Telltale NOTE:

The LaneSense system operates with similar behavior for a right lane departure when only the right lane marking has been detected. Lanes Sensed (White Lines) With Green Telltale When the LaneSense system senses a lane drift situation, the left inside and outside lane lines turn solid yellow. The LaneSense telltale changes from solid green to solid yellow. At this time torque is applied to the steering wheel in the opposite direction of the lane boundary. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 277 For example: If approaching the left side of the lane the steering wheel will turn to the right. For example: If approaching the left side of the lane the steering wheel will turn to the right. STARTING AND OPERATING 277 Changing LaneSense Status The LaneSense system has settings to adjust the intensity of the torque warning and the warning zone sensitivity (Early/Medium/Late) that you can configure through the Uconnect system screen. Refer to Uconnect Settings in Multimedia for further information. NOTE:

When enabled the system operates above 37 mph (60 km/h) and below 112 mph

(180 km/h). 5 Lane Sensed (Solid Yellow Inside Line, Solid Yellow Outside Line) With Solid Yellow Telltale Lane Approached (Flashing Yellow Inside Line, Solid Yellow Outside Line) With Flashing Yellow Telltale warnings. Use of the turn signal suppresses the NOTE:

The LaneSense system operates with similar behavior for a right lane departure. The system will not apply torque to the steering wheel whenever a safety system engages (Anti-Lock Brakes, Traction Control System, Electronic Stability Control, Forward Collision Warning, etc.). When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been approached and is in a lane depar-

ture situation, the left inside lane line flashes yellow (on/off) while the left outside line remains solid yellow. The LaneSense telltale changes from solid yellow to flashing yellow. At this time torque is applied to the steering wheel in the opposite direction of the lane boundary. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 278 278 STARTING AND OPERATING PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera allows you to see an on-screen image of the rear surround-

ings of your vehicle whenever the gear selector is put into REVERSE. The image will be displayed on the touchscreen display along with a caution note Check Entire Surroundings across the top of the screen. After five seconds, this note will disappear. The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera is located on the rear of the vehicle above the rear license plate. NOTE:

The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera has programmable modes of operation that may be selected through the Uconnect System. Refer to Uconnect Settings in Multimedia for further information. unless the vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph

(13 km/h), the vehicle is shifted into PARK or the ignition is placed in the OFF position. A touchscreen button to disable display of the camera image is made available when the vehicle is not in REVERSE gear. Display of the camera image after shifting out of REVERSE can be disabled via a touchscreen button personal-

ization entry in the camera settings menu. When enabled, active guide lines are overlaid on the image to illustrate the width of the vehicle and its projected backup path based on the steering wheel position. Different colored zones indicate the distance to the rear of the vehicle. The following table shows the approximate distances for each zone:

ParkView Camera Location When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE

(with camera delay turned off), the rear camera mode is exited and the navigation or audio screen appears again. When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE

(with camera delay turned on), the camera image will continue to be displayed for up to 10 seconds after shifting out of REVERSE Zone Red Yellow Green Distance To The Rear Of The Vehicle 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm) 1 ft - 6.5 ft (30 cm - 2 m) 6.5 ft or greater (2 m or greater) 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 279 NOTE:

If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens. WARNING!

Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera. Always check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before backing up. You are responsible for the safety of your surroundings and must continue to pay attention while backing up. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death. CAUTION!

To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should only be used as a parking aid. The ParkView camera is unable to view every obstacle or object in your drive path. To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be driven slowly when using ParkView to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended that the driver look frequently over his/her shoulder when using ParkView. STARTING AND OPERATING 279 SURROUND VIEW CAMERA SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle may be equipped with the Surround View Camera System that allows you to see an on-screen image of the surroundings and top view of your vehicle whenever the gear selector is put into REVERSE or a different view is selected through the "on screen soft buttons". The top view of the vehicle will show which doors are open. The image will be displayed on the touchscreen display along with a caution note Check Entire Surround-

ings across the top of the screen. After five seconds, this note will disappear. The Surround View Camera System is comprised of four sequen-

tial cameras located in the front grille, rear liftgate and side mirrors. NOTE:

The Surround View Camera System has program-

mable settings that may be selected through the Uconnect System. Refer to Uconnect Settings in Multimedia for further information. When the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE, the rear camera view and top view is the default view of the system. 5 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 280 280 STARTING AND OPERATING When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE

(with camera delay turned on), the camera image will continue to be displayed for up to 10 seconds after shifting out of REVERSE unless the vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph

(13 km/h), the vehicle is shifted into PARK or the ignition is placed in the OFF position. There Zone Red Yellow Green Modes Of Operation Manual activation of the Surround View camera is selected by pressing the Surround View Camera soft key located in the Controls screen within the Uconnect system. Top View The Top view will show in the Uconnect System with Rear View and Front View in a split view display. There is integrated ParkSense arcs in the image at the front and rear of the vehicle. The arcs will change color from yellow to red corresponding the distance zones to the oncoming object. is a touch screen button X to disable the display of the camera image. When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE

(with camera delay turned off), the Surround View Camera mode is exited and the last known screen appears again. When enabled, active guide lines are overlaid on the image to illustrate the width of the vehicle, including the side view mirrors and its projected backup path based on the steering wheel position. Different colored zones indicate the distance to the rear of the vehicle. The following table shows the approximate distances for each zone:

Distance To The Rear Of The Vehicle 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm) 1 ft - 6.5 ft (30 cm - 2 m) 6.5 ft or greater (2 m or greater) NOTE:

turned. Front tires will be in image when the tires are Due to wide angle cameras in mirror, the image will appear distorted. Top view will show which sliding doors are open. ParkSense Arcs Open front doors will remove outside image. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 281 Rear View This is the Default view of the system in REVERSE and is always paired with the Top view of the vehicle with optional active guide lines for the projected path when enabled. Rear Cross Path View Pressing the Rear Cross Path soft key will give the driver a wider angle view of the rear camera system. The Top view will be disabled when this is selected Front View Deactivation The system can be deactivated in the following conditions:

The speed of the vehicle reaches greater than 8 mph (13 km/h). The vehicle shifted into PARK from a different gear. If the vehicle is in any gear other than REVERSE, press the X button. The camera delay system is turned off manu-

ally through the Uconnect settings menu. Refer to Uconnect Settings in Multimedia for further information. The Front view will show you what is immediately in front of the vehicle and is always paired with the Top view of the vehicle. NOTE:

Front Cross Path View Pressing the Front Cross Path soft key will give the driver a wider angle view of the front camera system. The Top view will be disabled when this is selected. If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds up on the camera lenses, clean the lenses, rinse with water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lenses. If a malfunction with the system has occurred, see an authorized dealer. STARTING AND OPERATING 281 WARNING!

Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using the Surround View Camera. Always check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before backing up. You are responsible for the safety of your surroundings and must continue to pay attention while backing up. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death. 5 CAUTION!

To avoid vehicle damage, Surround View should only be used as a parking aid. The Surround View camera is unable to view every obstacle or object in your drive path. To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be driven slowly when using Surround View to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended that the driver look frequently over his/her shoulder when using Surround View. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 282 282 STARTING AND OPERATING REFUELING THE VEHICLE There is no fuel filler cap. Two flapper doors inside the pipe seal the system. WARNING!

Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when the fuel door is open or the tank is being filled. Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is in violation of most state and federal fire regulations and may cause the Malfunction Indicator Light to turn on. A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You could be burned. Always place fuel containers on the ground while filling. CAUTION!

1. Put the vehicle in park and switch the igni-

tion off. 2. Push the center-rear edge of the fuel filler door (3 o'clock position) and release to open. 5. Keep the nozzle in the filler for five seconds after nozzle clicks to allow fuel to drain from the nozzle. 6. Remove the fuel filler nozzle. 7. To close the fuel filler door, push the center-rear edge (3 oclock position) of the fuel filler door and then release. The fuel filler door will latch closed. NOTE:

In certain cold conditions, ice may prevent the fuel filler door from opening. If this occurs, lightly push on the fuel filler door around the perimeter to break the ice build up. Take care to open both flappers with the funnel to avoid spills. Fuel Filler Door 3. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler pipe, the nozzle opens and holds both flapper doors while refueling. To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not top off the fuel tank after filling. 4. When the fuel nozzle clicks or shuts off, the fuel tank is full. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 283 VEHICLE LOADING Certification Label As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Administration regulations, your vehicle has a certification label affixed to the driver's side door or pillar. This label contains the month and year of manu-

facture, Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) front and rear, and Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is included on this label and indicates the Month, Day and Hour of manufacture. The bar code that appears on the bottom of the label is your VIN. Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle including driver, passengers, vehicle, options and cargo. The label also specifies maximum capacities of front and rear axle systems (GAWR). Total load must be limited so GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not exceeded. Payload The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allow-

able load weight a truck can carry, including the weight of the driver, all passengers, options and cargo. Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front and rear axles. The load must be distributed in the cargo area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded. Each axle GAWR is determined by the compo-

nents in the system with the lowest load carrying capacity (axle, springs, tires or wheels). Heavier axles or suspension components some-

times specified by purchasers for increased durability does not necessarily increase the vehicle's GVWR. Tire Size The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label represents the actual tire size on your vehicle. Replacement tires must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size. STARTING AND OPERATING 283 Rim Size This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size listed. Inflation Pressure This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for all loading conditions up to full GAWR. Curb Weight The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full capacity condi-

tions, and with no occupants or cargo loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are added. 5 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 284 284 STARTING AND OPERATING Loading The actual total weight and the weight of the front and rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined by weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation. The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commercial scale to ensure that the GVWR has not been exceeded. The weight on the front and rear of the vehicle should then be determined separately to be sure that the load is properly distributed over the front and rear axle. Weighing the vehicle may show that the GAWR of either the front or rear axles has been exceeded but the total load is within the speci-

fied GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted from front to rear or rear to front as appropriate until the specified weight limitations are met. Store the heavier items down low and be sure that the weight is distributed equally. Stow all loose items securely before driving. Improper weight distributions can have an adverse effect on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way the brakes operate. CAUTION!

Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If you do, parts on your vehicle can break, or it can change the way your vehicle handles. This could cause you to lose control. Also overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle. TRAILER TOWING In this section you will find safety tips and infor-

mation on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully review this information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as possible. To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage, follow the requirements and recom-

mendations in this manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing. Common Towing Definitions The following trailer towing related definitions will assist you in understanding the following information:

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) The Gross vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) is the total allowable weight of your vehicle. This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR. Refer to Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certification Label in this chapter for further information. Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) The Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all cargo, consum-

ables and equipment (permanent or temporary) loaded in or on the trailer in its "loaded and ready for operation" condition. The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight of the trailer must be supported by the scale. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 285 Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) The Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR. Refer to Vehicle Loading/

Vehicle Certification Label in this chapter for further information. WARNING!

It is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose control of the vehicle and have a collision. Tongue Weight (TW) The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the hitch ball by the trailer. You must consider this as part of the load on your vehicle. Trailer Frontal Area The frontal area is the maximum height multi-

plied by the maximum width of the front of a trailer. Trailer Sway Control The Trailer Sway Control can be a mechanical telescoping link that can be installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue that typi-

cally provides adjustable friction associated with the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling. If equipped, the electronic Trailer Sway Control

(TSC) recognizes a swaying trailer and automat-

ically applies individual wheel brakes and/or reduces engine power to attempt to eliminate the trailer sway. Weight-Carrying Hitch A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some other connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds of hitches are the most popular on the market today and they are commonly used to tow small and medium sized trailers. Weight-Distributing Hitch A weight-distributing system works by applying leverage through spring (load) bars. They are typically used for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the tow vehicle's front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used in accor-

dance with the manufacturer's directions, it STARTING AND OPERATING 285 provides for a more level ride, offering more consistent steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing safety. The addition of a fric-

tion/hydraulic sway control also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and contrib-

utes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability. Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (load equalizing) hitch are recom-

mended for heavier Tongue Weights (TW) and may be required depending on vehicle and trailer configuration/loading to comply with Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) requirements. WARNING!

An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch system may reduce handling, stability, braking performance, and could result in a collision. Weight Distributing Systems may not be compatible with Surge Brake Couplers. Consult with your hitch and trailer manufac-

turer or a reputable Recreational Vehicle dealer for additional information. 5 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 286 286 STARTING AND OPERATING Trailer Hitch Classification The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition. Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions Class Class I - Light Duty Class II - Medium Duty Class III - Heavy Duty Class IV - Extra Heavy Duty Max. Trailer Hitch Industry Standards 2,000 lbs (907 kg) 3,500 lbs (1,587 kg) 5,000 lbs (2,267 kg) 10,000 lbs (4,535 kg) Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings) chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given drivetrain. All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle. Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings) The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain. Engine/

Transmission 3.6L/Automatic Trailer Tow Package Yes No Combined Weight Frontal Area Max. Tongue Weight Max. GTW (Gross Trailer Weight) GCWR (Gross Rating) 8,600 lbs (3,900 kg) 40 sq ft (3.72 sq m) 3,600 lbs (1,632 kg) 360 lbs (163 kg) 6,500 lbs (2,948 kg) 40 sq ft (3.72 sq m) 1500 lbs (680 kg) 149 lbs (67 kg) Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 287 NOTE:

The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo, and should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Information placard. Refer to Tires in Servicing And Main-

tenance for further information. Vehicle Loading Chart Follow these steps to determine the total weight the vehicle can carry. 1. Determine the cargo capacity of your vehicle. Load Capacity = GVWR Curb (weight of vehicle full fluids NO Occupants). 2. Determine occupant count. For calculation purposes, average weight of an occupant is 150 lb (68 kg). STARTING AND OPERATING 287 EXAMPLE:

GVWR = 6005 lbs (2723 kg) CURB = 4500 lbs (2041 kg) Load Capacity = GVWR CURB = 6005 lbs

(2723 kg) - 4500 lbs (2041 kg) = 1505 lbs

(682 kg) 4 Occupants (at 150 lbs [68 kg]) + Max Trailer =

1505 lbs (682 kg) 600 lbs (272 kg) (4 x 150 lbs [68 kg]) 360 lbs (163 kg) (10% of 3600 lbs [1632 kg]) = 545 lbs (247 kg) of cargo in vehicle 5 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 288 288 STARTING AND OPERATING Number Of Persons / Weight Of Occupants Max Cargo No Tongue Load, Max Trailer Trailer Max Cargo With Max Trailer 360 lb

(136 kg) Tongue Load 2 People / 300 lbs (136) kg 4 people / 600 lbs (272 kg) 7 people / 1050 lbs (476 kg) Make sure loading does not exceed GAWR of front or rear axles. GAWR is found on sticker in Drivers Side Door Jamb. 1205 lbs (546 kg) 845 lbs (383 kg) 1205 lbs (546 kg) 360 lbs (136 kg) =

845 lbs (383 kg) 955 lbs (433 kg) 360 lbs (136 kg) =

545 lbs (247 kg) 455 lbs (206 kg) 360 lbs (163 kg) =

95 lbs (43 kg) 955 lbs (433 kg) 545 lbs (247 kg) 455 lbs (206 kg) 95 lbs (43 kg) 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 289 Trailer And Tongue Weight Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on your bumper or trailer hitch. the Tire And Loading Information placard for the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo for your vehicle. STARTING AND OPERATING 289 WARNING!

Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer and will not shift during travel. When trailering cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts can occur that may be difficult for the driver to control. You could lose control of your vehicle and have a collision. When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not overload your vehicle or trailer. Over-

loading can cause a loss of control, poor performance or damage to brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering, suspension, chassis structure or tires. 5 Safety chains must always be used between your vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to the hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for turning corners.

(Continued) Towing Requirements To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drivetrain components, the following guidelines are recommended. CAUTION!

Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles (805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine, axle or other parts could be damaged. Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h) and do not make starts at full throttle. This helps the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at the heavier loads. Perform the maintenance listed in the Sched-

uled Servicing. Refer to Scheduled Servicing in Servicing And Maintenance for the proper maintenance intervals. When towing a trailer, never exceed the GAWR or GCWR ratings. Weight Distribution Consider the following items when computing the weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:

The tongue weight of the trailer. The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put in or on your vehicle. The weight of the driver and all passengers. NOTE:

Remember that everything put into or on the trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional factory-installed options or dealer-installed options must be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle. Refer to 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 290 290 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING! (Continued) Towing Requirements Tires Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a Towing Requirements Trailer Brakes Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake Vehicles with trailers should not be parked compact spare tire. on a grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle transmission in PARK. For four-wheel drive vehicles, make sure the transfer case is not in NEUTRAL. Always, block or "chock" the trailer wheels. GCWR must not be exceeded. Total weight must be distributed between the tow vehicle and the trailer such that the following four ratings are not exceeded:

GVWR GTW GAWR Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized. Do not drive more than 50 mph (80 km/h) when towing while using a full size spare tire. Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to Tires in Servicing And Maintenance for proper tire inflation proce-

dures. Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures before trailer usage. Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage before towing a trailer. Refer to Tires in Servicing And Maintenance for the proper inspection procedure. When replacing tires, refer to Tires in Servicing And Maintenance for the proper tire replacement procedures. Replacing tires with a higher load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle's GVWR and GAWR limits. system or vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer. This could cause inad-

equate braking and possible personal injury. An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is required when towing a trailer with electronically actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic brake controller is not required. Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1,000 lbs (453 kg) and required for trailers in excess of 2,000 lbs (907 kg). 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 291 WARNING!

Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle's hydraulic brake lines. It can over-

load your brake system and cause it to fail. You might not have brakes when you need them and could have an accident. Towing any trailer will increase your stop-

ping distance. When towing, you should allow for additional space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you. Failure to do so could result in an accident. CAUTION!

If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs

(453 kg) loaded, it should have its own brakes and they should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances. Towing Requirements Trailer Lights And Wiring Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size, stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required for motoring safety. The Trailer Tow Package may include a four and seven-pin wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer harness and connector. NOTE:

Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles wiring harness. The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector. Refer to the following illustra-

tions. STARTING AND OPERATING 291 NOTE:

Disconnect trailer wiring connector from the vehicle before launching a boat (or any other device plugged into vehicles electrical connect) into water. Be sure to reconnect once clear from water area. 5 Four-Pin Connector 1 Female Pins 2 Male Pin 3 Ground 4 Park 5 Left Stop/Turn 6 Right Stop/Turn 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 292 292 STARTING AND OPERATING Seven-Pin Connector 1 Battery 2 Backup Lamps 3 Right Stop/Turn 4 Electric Brakes 5 Ground 6 Left Stop/Turn 7 Running Lamps Towing Tips Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping, and backing up the trailer in an area located away from heavy traffic. loads. Speed Control If Equipped Do not use on hilly terrain or with heavy Automatic Transmission Select the DRIVE range when towing. The trans-

mission controls include a drive strategy to avoid frequent shifting when towing. For increased engine braking on steep downhill grades, select the LOW range. When using the Speed Control, if you experi-

ence speed drops greater than 10 mph

(16 km/h), disengage until you can get back to cruising speed. Use Speed Control in flat terrain and with light loads to maximize fuel efficiency. Cooling System To reduce potential for engine and transmission overheating, take the following actions:

City Driving In city traffic while stopped, place the trans-

mission in NEUTRAL (N), but do not increase engine idle speed. Highway Driving Reduce speed. Temporarily turn off air conditioning. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 293 RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.) Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle Towing Condition Wheel OFF The Ground Flat Tow Dolly Tow On Trailer NONE Front Rear ALL NOTE:

To avoid inadvertent Electric Park Brake engagement, you must ensure that the Auto Park Brake feature is disabled before towing this vehicle (if rear wheels are on the ground). The Auto Park Brake feature is enabled or disabled via the customer programmable features in the Uconnect Settings. When towing your vehicle, always follow Recreational Towing All Models DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the drivetrain will result. CAUTION!

DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the drivetrain will result. If this vehicle requires towing, make sure the drive wheels are OFF the ground. applicable state and provincial laws. Contact state and provincial Highway Safety offices for additional details. Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is released, and remains released, while being towed.

(Continued) If your vehicle is disabled and in need of commercial towing service, please refer to Towing A Disabled Vehicle in In Case Of Emergency for further information. STARTING AND OPERATING 293 All Models NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED OK OK CAUTION! (Continued) 5 Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmis-

sion damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 294 294 STARTING AND OPERATING Recreational towing is allowed ONLY if the front wheels are OFF the ground. This may be accom-

plished using a tow dolly (front wheels off the ground) or vehicle trailer (all four wheels off the ground). If using a tow dolly, follow this proce-

dure:

1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle, following the dolly manufacturer's instruc-

tions. 2. Drive the front wheels onto the tow dolly. 3. Apply the park brake. 4. Place the transmission in PARK. 5. Turn the ignition OFF. 6. Properly secure the front wheels to the dolly, following the dolly manufacturer's instructions. 7. Turn the ignition to the ON/RUN mode, but do not start the vehicle. 8. Press and hold the brake pedal. 9. Release the park brake. 10. Turn the ignition OFF. 11. Release the brake pedal. DRIVING TIPS Driving On Slippery Surfaces Information in this section will aid in safe controlled launches in adverse conditions. Acceleration Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slippery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs when there is a difference in the surface traction under the front (driving) wheels. WARNING!

Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous. Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the front wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle and possibly have a collision. Accelerate slowly and carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction

(ice, snow, wet, mud, loose sand, etc.). Traction When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a wedge of water to build up between the tire and road surface. This is hydro-

planing and may cause partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability. To reduce this possibility, the following precau-

tions should be observed:

Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are slushy. Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles. Replace the tires when tread wear indicators first become visible. Keep tires properly inflated. Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a sudden stop. Driving Through Water Driving through water more than a few inches/

centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure safety and prevent damage to your vehicle. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 295 Flowing/Rising Water WARNING!

Do not drive on or across a road or path where water is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flowing water can wear away the road or path's surface and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water. Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can carry your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this warning may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you. Shallow Standing Water Although your vehicle is capable of driving through shallow standing water, consider the following Warnings and Cautions before doing so. WARNING!

Driving through standing water limits your vehicles traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving through standing water.

(Continued) WARNING! (Continued) CAUTION! (Continued) Driving through standing water limits your Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when STARTING AND OPERATING 295 vehicles braking capabilities, which increases stopping distances. Therefore, after driving through standing water, drive slowly and lightly press on the brake pedal several times to dry the brakes. Failure to follow these warnings may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you. CAUTION!

Always check the depth of the standing water before driving through it. Never drive through standing water that is deeper than the bottom of the tire rims mounted on the vehicle. Determine the condition of the road or the path that is under water and if there are any obstacles in the way before driving through the standing water.

(Continued) driving through standing water. This will minimize wave effects. Driving through standing water may cause damage to your vehicles drivetrain compo-

nents. Always inspect your vehicles fluids

(i.e., engine oil, transmission, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination (i.e., fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance) after driving through standing water. Do not continue to operate the vehicle if any fluid appears contaminated, as this may result in further damage. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Getting water inside your vehicles engine can cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious internal damage to the engine. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. 5 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 296 296 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS The Hazard Warning Flashers switch is located in the lower center area of the instrument panel. NOTE:

With extended use, the Hazard Warning Flashers may wear down your battery. ASSIST AND SOS MIRROR IF EQUIPPED Push the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers. When the switch is activated, all directional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an emergency. Push the switch a second time to turn off the Hazard Warning Flashers. This is an emergency warning system and it should not be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists. When you must leave the vehicle to seek assis-

tance, the Hazard Warning Flashers will continue to operate even though the ignition is placed in the OFF position. Assist And SOS Mirror 1 SOS Button 2 ASSIST Button If equipped, the rearview mirror contains an ASSIST and a SOS button. WARNING!

ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the steering wheel. You have full responsibility and assume all risks related to the use of the features and applications in this vehicle. Only use the features and applications when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an accident involving serious injury or death. NOTE:

Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by the subscriber. The SOS and ASSIST buttons will only func-

tion if you are connected to an operable LTE

(voice/data) or 4G (data) network. Other Uconnect services will only be operable if your SiriusXM Guardian service is active and you are connected to an operable LTE

(voice/data) or 4G (data) network. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 297 ASSIST Call The ASSIST Button is used to automatically connect you to any one of the following support centers:

Roadside Assistance If you get a flat tire, or need a tow, just push the ASSIST button and you will be connected to a representative for assistance. Roadside Assistance will know what vehicle is being driven and its location. Additional fees may apply for roadside assis-

tance. SiriusXM Guardian Customer Care In-vehicle support for SiriusXM Guardian. cancellation button on the Device Screen. Termination of the SOS Call will turn off the green LED light on the Rearview Mirror. 2. The LED light located between the ASSIST and SOS buttons on the Rearview Mirror will turn green once a connection to a SOS oper-

ator has been made. 3. Once a connection between the vehicle and a SOS operator is made, the SOS Call system may transmit the following important vehicle information to a SOS operator:

Indication that the occupant placed a Vehicle Customer Care Total support for all SOS Call other vehicle issues. SOS Call Mirror. 1. Push the SOS Call button on the Rearview vehicle NOTE:

In case the SOS Call button is pushed in error, there will be a 10 second delay before the SOS Call system initiates a call to a SOS operator. To cancel the SOS Call connection, push the SOS call button on the Rearview Mirror or press the The vehicle brand The last known GPS coordinates of the 4. You should be able to speak with the SOS operator through the vehicle audio system to determine if additional assistance is needed. IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 297 WARNING!

ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the steering wheel. You have full responsibility and assume all risks related to the use of the features and applications in this vehicle. Only use the features and applications when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an accident involving serious injury or death. NOTE:

Your vehicle may be transmitting data as 6 authorized by the subscriber. Once a connection is made between the vehicles SOS Call system and the SOS operator, the SOS operator may be able to open a voice connection with the vehicle to determine if additional assistance is needed. Once the SOS operator opens a voice connection with the vehicles SOS Call system, the operator should be able to speak with you or other vehicle occupants and hear 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 298 298 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY sounds occurring in the vehicle. The vehicles SOS Call system will attempt to remain connected with the SOS operator until the SOS operator terminates the connection. 5. The SOS operator may attempt to contact appropriate emergency responders and provide them with important vehicle infor-

mation and GPS coordinates. WARNING!

If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger

(e.g., fire or smoke is visible, dangerous road conditions or location), do not wait for voice contact from an Emergency Services Agent. All occupants should exit the vehicle immediately and move to a safe location. Never place anything on or near the vehicles operable network and GPS antennas. You could prevent operable network and GPS signal reception, which can prevent your vehicle from placing an emergency call. An operable network and GPS signal reception is required for the SOS Call system to function properly.

(Continued) WARNING! (Continued) The SOS Call system is embedded into the vehicles electrical system. Do not add aftermarket electrical equipment to the vehicles electrical system. This may prevent your vehicle from sending a signal to initiate an emergency call. To avoid inter-

ference that can cause the SOS Call system to fail, never add aftermarket equipment

(e.g., two-way mobile radio, CB radio, data recorder, etc.) to your vehicles electrical system or modify the antennas on your vehicle. IF YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BATTERY POWER FOR ANY REASON (INCLUDING DURING OR AFTER AN ACCIDENT), THE UCONNECT FEATURES, APPS AND SERVICES, AMONG OTHERS, WILL NOT OPERATE. Modifications to any part of the SOS Call system could cause the air bag system to fail when you need it. You could be injured if the air bag system is not there to help protect you. SOS Call System Limitations Vehicles sold in Mexico DO NOT have SOS Call system capabilities. SOS or other emergency line operators in Mexico may not answer or respond to SOS system calls. If the SOS Call system detects a malfunction, any of the following may occur at the time the malfunction is detected, and at the beginning of each ignition cycle:

The Rearview Mirror light located between the ASSIST and SOS buttons will continuously be illuminated red. The Device Screen will display the following message Vehicle device requires service. Please contact your dealer. An In-Vehicle Audio message will state Vehicle device requires service. Please contact your dealer. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 299 WARNING!

The vehicle battery loses power or becomes NOTE:

disconnected during a vehicle crash LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network and/or authorized by the subscriber. Your vehicle may be transmitting data as IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 299 Ignoring the Rearview Mirror light could mean you will not have SOS Call services. If the Rearview Mirror light is illuminated, have an authorized dealer service the SOS Call system immediately. The Occupant Restraint Control module turns on the air bag Warning Light on the instrument panel if a malfunction in any part of the system is detected. If the Air Bag Warning Light is illuminated, have an authorized dealer service the Occupant Restraint Control system immediately. Even if the SOS Call system is fully functional, factors beyond FCA US LLCs control may prevent or stop the SOS Call system operation. These include, but are not limited to, the following factors:

Delayed accessories mode is active The ignition is in the OFF position The vehicles electrical systems are not intact The SOS Call system software and/or hard-

ware are damaged during a crash Global Positioning Satellite signals are unavailable or obstructed Equipment malfunction at the SOS operator facility Operator error by the SOS operator LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network congestion Weather tunnels Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or WARNING!

ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the steering wheel. You have full responsibility and assume all risks related to the use of the features and applications in this vehicle. Only use the features and applications when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an accident involving serious injury or death. Never place anything on or near the vehicles LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) and GPS antennas. You could prevent LTE (voice/

data) or 4G (data) and GPS signal reception, which can prevent your vehicle from placing an emergency call. An operable LTE (voice/

data) or 4G (data) network connection and a GPS signal is required for the SOS Call system to function properly. NOTE:

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compli-

ance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. 6 CAUTION!

To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror. Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 300 300 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY General Information The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interfer-

ence, and 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. BULB REPLACEMENT Replacement Bulbs Lamps Center & Rear Dome Lamp Center & Rear Reading Lamps Front Door Courtesy Lamp Front Header Reading Lamps If Equipped Le prsent appareil est conforme aux CNR d`Innovation, Science and Economic Develop-

ment applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorise aux deux conditions suivantes:

1. 2. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouil-

lage, et l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radiolectrique subi, mme si le brouillage est susceptible d'en comprom-

ettre le fonctionnement. La operacin de este equipo est sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones:

1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia perjudicial y 2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cual-

quier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operacin no deseada. NOTE:

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compli-

ance could void the users authority to operate the equipment. Interior Bulbs Bulb Number LED (Serviced At An Authorized Dealer) LED (Serviced At An Authorized Dealer) LED (Serviced At An Authorized Dealer) LED (Serviced At An Authorized Dealer) 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 301 Lamps Instrument Cluster Lamps Liftgate Lamp(s) Overhead Console Reading Lamps Removable Console Lamp If Equipped Visor Vanity Lamps High Intensity Discharge Headlamp Lamps Halogen Headlamp Dedicated Daytime Running Lamp (If Equipped) Front Turn Signal Lamp Side Marker Lamp Front Park Lamp Front Fog Lamp IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 301 Interior Bulbs Exterior Bulbs Bulb Number LED (Serviced At An Authorized Dealer) LED (Serviced At An Authorized Dealer) LED (Serviced At An Authorized Dealer) LED (Serviced At An Authorized Dealer) 6501966 Bulb Number Low Beam - D3S High Beam - 9005LL 6 Reflector Low Beam - H11LL Projector Halogen Low Beam - 9005HL+

All High Beams - 9005LL LED (Serviced At An Authorized Dealer) PWY24WNA (If Halogen Headlamp Equipped) PWY24WSV (If HID Headlamp Equipped) PWY24WNA (If Bulb Equipped) LED (Serviced At An Authorized Dealer) W3W H11LL 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 302 302 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY Lamps LED Front Fog Lamp Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) Stop/Turn Signal Lamp Rear Tail/Side Marker Lamp Backup Lamp License Lamp Replacing Exterior Bulbs High Intensity Discharge (HID) Headlamps If Equipped The headlamps contain a type of high voltage discharge light source. High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the headlamp switch off. Because of this, you should not attempt to service a HID headlamp light source yourself. If an HID headlamp light source fails, take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for service. Exterior Bulbs Bulb Number LED (Serviced At An Authorized Dealer) LED (Serviced At An Authorized Dealer) W21/5WLL Rear Tail - Body Side - W21/5WLL (If Bulb Equipped);

LED (Serviced At An Authorized Dealer) Rear Tail - Liftgate - W5WLL (If Bulb Equipped);

LED (Serviced At An Authorized Dealer) Rear Side Marker: W3W W21W LED (Serviced At An Authorized Dealer) NOTE:

On vehicles equipped with HID headlamps, when the headlamps are turned on, there is a blue hue to the lights. This diminishes and becomes more white after approximately 10 seconds, as the system charges. WARNING!

A transient high voltage occurs at the bulb sockets of HID headlamps when the headlamp switch is turned ON. It may cause serious electrical shock or electrocution if not serviced properly. See an authorized dealer for service. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 303 Halogen Headlamps 1. Reach behind the headlamp housing to access the headlamp bulb cap. 2. Firmly grasp the headlamp bulb cap and rotate it counterclockwise to unlock it. 3. Firmly grasp the headlamp bulb socket assembly and rotate counterclockwise to remove from the housing. Headlamp Bulb Cap Headlamp Bulb Socket 4. Disconnect the bulb from the electrical connector and then connect the replace-

ment bulb. IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 303 CAUTION!

Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol. 5. 6. Install the bulb and connector assembly into the headlamp housing and rotate clock-

wise to lock it in place. Install the headlamp bulb cap in the head-

lamp housing and rotate clockwise to lock it in place. 6 Headlamp Bulb 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 304 304 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY Front Turn Signal Lamp Front And Rear Side Marker Lamps 1. Remove the three fasteners from the inner wheel liner and carefully peel back liner for access. 2. Firmly grasp the front side marker lamp socket and rotate a quarter turn counter-

clockwise to remove it from the lamp assembly. 1. Open the hood. 2. Twist the front turn signal lamp socket assembly counterclockwise, and then remove the front turn signal lamp assembly from the lamp housing. Front Turn Signal Lamp Socket 3. Pull the bulb out of the socket and insert the replacement bulb. 4. Install the front turn signal lamp socket assembly into the housing, and rotate the front turn signal lamp socket clockwise to lock it in place. Inner Wheel Liner Fasteners Front Side Marker Lamp Bulb Removal 3. Remove bulb from the front side marker lamp socket and replace with a new bulb. 4. Install front side marker lamp socket in lamp assembly and rotate a quarter turn clockwise to lock into place. 5. Position the inner wheel liner in place and install the three fasteners. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 305 Front Fog Lamp Halogen CAUTION!

trim. 6. Reverse process to reinstall the liftgate 1. Remove fasteners from inner wheel liner and carefully peel back liner for access. 2. Reach through the front fascia to the fog lamp housing to access the bulb. Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol. 3. Rotate the front fog lamp bulb counterclock-

wise, and remove the bulb from the front fog lamp housing. 5. Install the front fog lamp bulb into the front fog lamp housing, and rotate the bulb clock-

wise to lock it in place. 6. Position the inner wheel liner in place and install fasteners. Rear Liftgate Mounted Back-Up Lamps And Tail Lamps (If Bulb Equipped) 1. Raise the liftgate. 2. Use a fiber stick or flat blade screw driver to pry off the bulb access cover on the lower liftgate trim. 3. Back-up lamps/tail lamp (if bulb equipped) are now visible. Rotate socket(s) counter-

clockwise. 4. Remove/replace bulb(s). 5. Reinstall the socket(s). Front Fog Lamp Socket 4. Disconnect the bulb from the electrical connector and then connect the replace-

ment bulb. IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 305 Rear Bodyside Mounted Taillamps 1. Raise the liftgate. 2. Remove two torx head screws on the bodyside lamp using a T30 screwdriver. 3. Remove lamp from vehicle body and locate bulb socket on rear of lamp. Rotate socket counterclockwise. 4. Remove/replace bulb(s). 5. Reinstall the socket(s). 6 6. Reverse process to reinstall the lamp onto vehicle. Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) The center high-mounted stop lamp is an LED assembly. See an authorized dealer for replace-

ment. Rear License Lamp The rear license lamps are LED. See an autho-

rized dealer for replacement. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 306 306 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY FUSES WARNING!

When replacing a blown fuse, always use an appropriate replacement fuse with the same amp rating as the original fuse. Never replace a fuse with another fuse of higher amp rating. Never replace a blown fuse with metal wires or any other material. Do not place a fuse inside a circuit breaker cavity or vice versa. Failure to use proper fuses may result in serious personal injury, fire and/or property damage. Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition is off and that all the other services are switched off and/or disengaged. If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an authorized dealer. If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air bag system, braking system), power unit systems (engine system, trans-

mission system) or steering system blows, contact an authorized dealer. General Information The fuses protect electrical systems against excessive current. When a device does not work, you must check the fuse element inside the blade fuse for a break/melt. Also, please be aware that when using power outlets for extended periods of time with the engine off may result in vehicle battery discharge. Blade Fuses 1 Fuse Element 2 Blade Fuse with a good/functional fuse ele-

ment. 3 Blade fuse with a bad/not functional fuse el-

ement (blown fuse). 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 307 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 307 Fuse Location The fuses are grouped into a controller located in the engine compartment. Underhood Fuses The Power Distribution Center (PDC) is located in the engine compartment near the battery. This center contains cartridge fuses, mini-fuses, micro-fuses, circuit breakers and relays. A label that identifies each component is printed on the inside of the cover. Before any procedure is done on the PDC, make sure engine is turned off. Remove the cover by unlatching the two locks located at each side of the PDC cover, avoid the usage of screw drivers or any other tool to remove the cover, since they may apply exces-

sive force and result in a broken/damaged part. After service is done, secure the cover with its two locks. Cavity Cartridge Fuse Blade Fuse F06 F07 F08 F09 F10 F11 F12 F13 F14 F15 F16 F17 40 Amp Green 30 Amp Pink 25 Amp Clear Ignition Coil/Fuel Injector 6 25 Amp Clear Amplifier/Active Noise Control Power Distribution Center Description Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used ECM ECM Starter Battery Sensor (IBS) ECM (ESS Only) CBC Feed #3 (Power Locks) 5 Amp Tan 10 Amp Red 10 Amp Red 20 Amp Yellow 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 308 308 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY Cavity F18 F19 F20 F21 F22 F23 F24 F25A F25B F26 F27 F28A F28B F29 F30A F30B F31 F32 F33 F34 Cartridge Fuse 40 Amp Green 25 Amp Clear 25 Amp Clear 40 Amp Green 25 Amp Clear 20 Amp Blue 30 Amp Pink 25 Amp Clear Blade Fuse Description CBC Feed #4 (Exterior Lighting #1) 2nd Row Folding Seats Solenoid LT 10 Amp Red A/C Compressor Clutch 2nd Row Folding Seat Solenoid RT 10 Amp Red Active Grill Shutter/ PWR Mirror Not Used Not used RR Wiper Handsfree LT & RT RR Door Release Mod Front HVAC Blower Motor RR Slide Door Module-RT Diagnostic Report USB + AUX Port / Video USB Port Not Used Media HUB 1&2 PWR Lumbar SW Not Used ECM Power Liftgate Module RR Door Module-LT 20 Amp Yellow 10 Amp Red 10 Amp Red 10 Amp Red 15 Amp Blue 15 Amp Blue 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 309 Cavity Blade Fuse Cartridge Fuse 25 Amp Clear 40 Amp Green 60 Amp Yellow 25 Amp Clear 40 Amp Green 30 Amp Pink 30 Amp Pink 30 Amp Pink 30 Amp Pink 25 Amp Clear 25 Amp Clear 30 Amp Pink 30 Amp Pink 40 Amp Green IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 309 CBC Feed #4 (Exterior Lighting #2) Description Sunroof Control Module Not Used Vacuum Cleaner Rear HVAC Blower Motor Not Used Not Used Folding Seat Module Fuel Pump Motor Power Inverter Driver Door Module Passenger Door Module Not Used RR Sliding Door Module-LT RR Door Module-RT Front Wiper Brake Vacuum Pump Not Used ESP-ECU And Valves 20 Amp Yellow CBC Feed #1 (Interior Lights) 6 F35 F36 F37 F38 F39 F40 F41 F42 F43 F44 F45 F46 F47 F48 F49 F50 F51 F52 F53 F54 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 310 310 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY Cartridge Fuse Cavity F55A F55B F56A F56B F57 F58 F59 F60 F61 F62 F63 F64 F65 F66 30 Amp Pink Blade Fuse 15 Amp Blue 15 Amp Blue 10 Amp Red 10 Amp Red 20 Amp Yellow 20 Amp Yellow 15 Amp Blue Description Radio Frequency HUB/ Keyless Ignition System (KIN) / (Electronic Steering Lock-BUX ONLY) DVD / Video Routing Module (VRM Front and Rear HVAC Control Module / Occupant Classification Module (OCM)/Electronic Steering Lock (ESL) ESP/ESC Not Used Not Used Trailer Tow Receptacle If Equipped Rear Cargo APO Trailer Tow Right Stop/Turn If Equipped Not Used Equipped RT HID Headlamp Not Used SGW 20 Amp Yellow Trailer Tow Left Stop/Turn If 15 Amp Blue Instrument Panel Cluster (IPC)/

20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 311 Cavity F67 F68 F69 F70 F71 F72 F73 F74 F75 F76 F77A F77B F78A Cartridge Fuse 30 Amp Pink 20 Amp Blue Blade Fuse 10 Amp Red 20 Amp Yellow 10 Amp Red 5 Amp Tan 20 Amp Yellow 10 Amp Red 10 Amp Red 15 Amp Blue IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 311 Description Haptic Lane Feedback Module

(HALF) / Parktronics System (PTS)/

Drivers Assist System Module

(DASM) Not Used Not Used Not Used Horn Heated Mirrors If Equipped Rear Defroster (EBL) Trailer Tow Backup 6 Overhead Console / RR ISC Uconnect/DCSD/Telematics RR Entertainment Screen 1 & 2/

Media HUB 1 & 2/3rd Row USB Charge Only/2nd Row USB Charge Only/Vaccum Cleaner SW/3rd Row Recline ST SW/LT & RT Stow N Go SW/LT & RT Sliding Door SW Backlight Rain Sensor/Sunroof /CRVMM Transmission Control Module

(TCM)/ E-Shifter 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 312 312 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY Cavity F78B F79 F80 F81 F82 F83 F84 F85 F86 F87 F88 F89 F90 F91 F92 F93 F94 F95A Cartridge Fuse Blade Fuse 15 Amp Blue 10 Amp Red Description Instrument Cluster ICS/Front And Rear HVAC/ SCCM/

20 Amp Blue 30 Amp Pink TT Park Lights If Equipped Headlamp Washer Pump If 20 Amp Yellow 20 Amp Yellow 20 Amp Yellow 5 Amp Tan EPB Not Used Not Used Not Used Equipped Not Used Cigar Lighter Not Used Not Used Front Heated Seats Rear Heated Seats Not Used Steering Wheel Security Gateway Not Used ESC Motor Pump 15 Amp Blue Front Ventilated Seats/Heated 40 Amp Green 10 Amp Red USB Charge Port ACC RUN 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 313 Cavity F95B F96 F97 F98 F99 F100A F100B CB1 CB2 CB3 Cartridge Fuse Blade Fuse 10 Amp Red Selectable Fuse Location USB IP 10 Amp Red Occupant Restraint Controller 10 Amp Red Occupant Restraint Controller 30 Amp Pink 15 Amp Blue 10 Amp Red 10 Amp Red Circuit Breakers 25 Amp 25 Amp *

25 Amp IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 313 Description

(Direct) B+

(ORC) (Airbag)

(ORC) (Airbag) Left HID Headlamp Trailer Tow Module - If Equipped AHLM Rear Camera/LBSS/RBSS/CVPM/

Humidity Sensor/In Vehicle Temperature Sensor 6 Power Seats (Driver) Power Seats (Pass) FRT PWR Window W/O Door Nodes

+ RR PWR Window Lockout

* 30Amp mini fuse is substituted for 25Amp Circuit Breaker. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 314 314 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING IF EQUIPPED WARNING!

Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel. Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You could be crushed. Never put any part of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift. The jack is designed to be used as a tool for changing tires only. The jack should not be used to lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or slippery areas. Jack And Spare Tire Location 2. Unlatch the Portable Air Compressor or Tire The jacking tools, spare tire and portable air compressor (if equipped) or tire service kit (if equipped) are stowed behind an access panel on the left hand side of the vehicle. Service Kit if equipped. Unscrew the wing nut that is holding the Inflatable Spare Tire and gently remove it from the storage area. Remove wrench from foam tray. NOTE:

Depending on the trim level of the vehicle, the options for spare tire equipment may vary. Jacking Equipment Location Equipment Removal 1. Remove the access panel to the jacking Jacking Equipment equipment. 1 Inflatable Spare Tire 2 Tire Service Kit 3 Wrench 4 Fuel Filler Funnel 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 315 3. Remove Jack by turning the jack screw 2. Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers. counterclockwise to collapse from storage area that is located behind the tire. 3. Apply the parking brake. IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 315 4. Place the gear selector into PARK (P). 5. Place the ignition in OFF mode. 6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally opposite the jacking position. For example, if the drivers front wheel is being changed, block the passengers rear wheel. 6 Jacking Equipment 1 Inflatable Spare Tire 2 Portable Air Compressor Jack Location 1 Jack Screw 2 Jack Preparations For Jacking Jacking Equipment 1 Inflatable Spare Tire 2 Portable Air Compressor 1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface. Avoid ice or slippery areas. Wheel Blocked WARNING!

Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel. NOTE:

Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the vehicle is being lifted or raised. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 316 316 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY Jacking Instructions WARNING!

Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle:

Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the edge of the roadway as possible before raising the vehicle. Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers. Apply the parking brake firmly and set the transmission in PARK. Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be raised. Do not let any passenger sit in the vehicle when it is on a jack. Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift. WARNING! (Continued) Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for lifting this vehicle during a tire change. If working on or near a roadway, be extremely careful of motor traffic. NOTE:

Refer to Tires in Servicing And Maintenance for information about the inflatable spare tire, its use, and operation. Extending The Wrench 1. Loosen (but do not remove) the wheel lug nuts by turning them to the left, one turn while the wheel is still on the ground. Jack Warning Label CAUTION!

(Continued) Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on locations other than those indicated in the Jacking Instructions for this vehicle. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 317 2. There are two jack engagement locations on each side of the vehicle body. These locations are on the sill flange of the vehicle body. Jack Locations WARNING!

Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You could be crushed. Never get any part of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift. IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 317 Front Lifting Point Rear Lifting Point 6 Front Jack Location Rear Jacking Location CAUTION!

Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on locations other than those indicated. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 318 318 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 3. Place the wrench on the jack screw and turn clockwise until the jack head is properly engaged in the described location. Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is securely engaged. 4. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw clockwise, using the swivel wrench. Raise the vehicle only until the tire just clears the surface and enough clearance is obtained to install the compact spare tire. Minimum tire lift provides maximum stability. WARNING!

Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough to remove the tire. 5. Remove the wheel lug nuts, for vehicles with wheel covers, remove the cover from the wheel by hand. Do not pry the wheel cover off. Then pull the wheel off the hub. 6. Install the inflatable spare on the vehicle, located in the rear cargo area of the vehicle. WARNING!

To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury. Mounting Inflatable Spare Tire CAUTION!

Be sure to mount the inflatable spare tire with the valve stem facing outward. The vehicle could be damaged if the inflatable spare tire is mounted incorrectly. NOTE:

Do not install the wheel cover on the inflatable spare tire. 7. Leave the vehicle on the jack and start inflating the inflatable spare after the tire has been mounted to the vehicle. Secure the wheel to the hub by tightening the nuts with the wrench. After inflation, once the vehicle is lowered you will have a second opportunity to torque the lug nuts. 8. Inflate the tire to the prescribed pressure 60 psi (4.2 Bar) using the Portable Air Compressor or Tire Service Kit if equipped. Refer to Portable Air Compressor in this section for usage procedure if equipped. Refer to Tire Service Kit For Inflating Tire in this section for usage procedure if equipped. 9. Lower the vehicle once the inflatable Spare has reached its pressure and the compressor-hose has been removed from the tire valve. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 319 10. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the wrench while at the end of the handle for increased leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until each nut has been tightened twice. Refer to Torque Specifica-

tions in Technical Specifications for proper wheel lug nut torque. If in doubt about the correct tightness, have them checked with a torque wrench by an autho-

rized dealer or at a service station. 11. Lower the jack to its fully-closed position. WARNING!

A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire repaired or replaced immediately. 12. Place the deflated (flat) tire and foam tray cover assembly in the rear cargo area. Do not stow the deflated tire in the inflatable spare tire location. Have the full-sized tire repaired or replaced, as soon as possible. 13. Stow the jack back in the stowage compart-

ment and place the access panel back. The stud of the storage area must be threaded through the lower part of the jack. Then turn the Jack Screw clockwise to secure it in place. NOTE:

Stow the foam tray and components in the cargo area. IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 319 Road Tire Installation Vehicles Equipped With Wheel Covers 1. Mount the road tire on the axle. 2. To ease the installation process for steel wheels with wheel covers, install two lug nuts on the mounting studs which are on each side of the valve stem. Install the lug nuts with the cone shaped end of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug nuts. 6 Storing The Jack 1 Jack Screw 2 Jack 3 Stud Tire And Wheel Cover Or Center Cap 1 Valve Stem 2 Valve Notch 3 Wheel Lug Nut 4 Wheel Cover 5 Mounting Stud 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 320 320 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 3. Align the valve notch in the wheel cover with 6. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the valve stem on the wheel. Install the cover by hand, snapping the cover over the two lug nuts. Do not use a hammer or exces-

sive force to install the cover. 4. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped end of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten all the lug nuts until the wheel sits flush onto the hub and there is no play. The nuts will have to be fully tightened once the vehicle is lowered. Tightening an improperly seated wheel under vehicle load can damage the threads, cause vibration, and undermine safety. the wrench while at the end of the handle for increased leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until each nut has been tightened twice. Refer to Torque Specifica-

tions in Technical Specifications for proper wheel lug nut torque. If in doubt about the correct tightness, have them checked with a torque wrench by an autho-

rized dealer or at a service station. 7. After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut torque with a torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly seated against the wheel. WARNING!

To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury. 2. 5. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack handle counterclockwise. Vehicles Without Wheel Covers 1. Mount the road tire on the axle. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped end of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten all the lug nuts until the wheel sits flush onto the hub and there is no play. The nuts will have to be fully tightened once the vehicle is lowered. Tightening an improperly seated wheel under vehicle load can damage the threads, cause vibration, and undermine safety. WARNING!

To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury. 3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack handle counterclockwise. 4. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the wrench while at the end of the handle for increased leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until each nut has been tightened twice. Refer to Torque Specifica-

tions in the Technical Specifications section for proper wheel lug nut torque. If in doubt about the correct tightness, have them checked with a torque wrench by an authorized dealer or at a service station. 5. After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut torque with a torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly seated against the wheel. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 321 Portable Air Compressor If Equipped Your vehicle may be equipped with a Portable Air Compressor. Use the Portable Air Compressor located in the side compartment of the cargo area to inflate the inflatable tire to 60 psi (4.2 Bar). Portable Air Compressor 1 Power Plug 2 Deflation Button 3 Pressure Gauge 4 Power Button 5 Air Hose Portable Air Compressor Usage With Inflatable Spare Tire 1. Remove the Portable Air Compressor from the storage location. 2. Raise the vehicle as described in the Jacking Instructions within this section. 3. Install the Inflatable Spare tire as described in the Jack Instruc-

tions section in this manual. Make sure that the valve stem is located near the ground, and then screw the air hose of the Portable Air Compressor to the valve stem. 4. Uncoil the power plug and connect it the vehicles 12 Volt power Outlet. 5. Always start the engine before turning ON the Portable Air Compressor. 6. Switch the power button ON. IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 321 7. Inflate the tire to 60 psi

(4.2 Bar) recommended as per the label on the wheel or if the vehicle equipped with the inflat-

able spare tire pressure indicated on the Tire and Loading information label located on the driver-side door opening. NOTE:

If the tire is over inflated, use the deflation button to reduce the tire air pressure. 8. After the tire reaches the recommended pressure, lower the vehicle with the jack as described in the Jack Instructions 6 section in this manual. 9. Remove the speed limit label sticker from the Portable Air Compressor and place it on the center of the steering wheel. 10. Return the Portable Air Compressor to the foam tray and secure it with the strap. Store the foam tray in the cargo area. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 322 322 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY WARNING!

Do not lift or carry the Portable Air Compressor by the hose. Always stow the Portable Air Compressor only in the provided place. The metal end fitting from Power Plug may get hot after use, so it should be handled carefully. Keep the Portable Air Compressor away from open flames or heat source. Tire Service Kit For Inflating Tire If Equipped Your vehicle may be equipped with a Tire Service Kit. Use the Tire Service Kit located in the side compartment of the cargo area to inflate the inflatable tire to 60 psi (4.2 Bar). Tire Service Kit And Components And Operation Tire Service Kit Components 1 Mode Select Knob 2 Sealant/Air Hose 3 Hose Accessories 4 Sealant Bottle 5 Power Plug 6 Power Switch 7 Deflation Button 8 Pressure Gauge Using The Mode Select Knob And Hoses Your Tire Service Kit is equipped with the following symbols to indicate the air or sealant mode. Selecting Air Mode Push in the Mode Select Knob and turn to this position for air mode operation only. Selecting Sealant Mode Using The Power Button Using The Deflation Button Push in the Mode Select Knob and turn to this position to inject the Tire Service Kit Sealant and to inflate the tire. Push and release the Power Button once to turn On the Tire Service Kit. Push and release the Power Button again to turn Off the Tire Service Kit. the Deflation Button to Push reduce the air pressure in the tire if it becomes over-inflated. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 323 WARNING!

WARNING! (Continued) Keep Tire Service Kit away from open Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains flames or heat source. A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the Tire Service Kit in the place provided. Failure to follow these warnings can result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you. Take care not to allow the contents of Tire Service Kit to come in contact with hair, eyes, or clothing. Tire Service Kit sealant is harmful if inhaled, swallowed, or absorbed through the skin. It causes skin, eye, and respiratory irritation. Flush immediately with plenty of water if there is any contact with eyes or skin. Change clothing as soon as possible, if there is any contact with clothing.

(Continued) latex. In case of an allergic reaction or rash, consult a physician immediately. Keep Tire Service Kit out of reach of children. If swal-

lowed, rinse mouth immediately with plenty of water and drink plenty of water. Do not induce vomiting! Consult a physician imme-

diately. Whenever You Stop To Use Tire Service Kit:

1. Pull over to a safe location and turn on the vehicles Hazard Warning Flashers. 2. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with the deflated tire) is in a position that is near to the ground. This will allow the Tire Service Kit Hose to reach the valve stem and keep the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground. This will provide the best positioning of the kit when running the air pump. Move the vehicle as necessary to place the valve stem in this position before proceeding. 3. Place the transmission in PARK (P) and cycle the ignition in the OFF position. 4. Ensure the park brake is engaged. IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 323 Setting Up To Use Tire Service Kit:

1. Remove the Tire Service Kit from the storage location. 2. Uncoil the Sealant/Air Hose. Remove the cap from the valve stem and then screw the fitting in at the end of the Sealant/Air Hose clockwise onto the valve stem. 3. Place the Tire Service Kit on the ground next to the deflated tire. 4. Uncoil the Power Plug and insert the plug into the vehicles 12 Volt power outlet. 6 5. Engage parking brake before turning the engine ON. 6. Always start the engine before turning ON the Tire Service Kit. 7. Turn the Mode Select Knob to Air Mode position. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 324 324 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY NOTE:

Do not fill inflatable spare tire with sealant. Refer to Tire Service Kit in this chapter for repairing tires. 8. Switch the power button ON. 9. Inflate the tire to 60 psi

(4.2 Bar) recommended as per the label on the wheel or if the vehicle equipped with the inflat-

able spare tire pressure indicated on the Tire and Loading information label located on the driver-side door opening. NOTE:

If the tire is over inflated, use the deflation button to reduce the tire air pressure. section in this manual. 10. After the tire reaches the recommended pressure, lower the vehicle with the jack as described in the Jack Instructions 11. Remove the speed limit label sticker from the Tire Service Kit and place it on the center of the steering wheel. 12. Return the Tire Service Kit to the foam tray and secure it with the strap. Store the foam tray in the cargo area. Return Inflatable Spare Tire To return Inflatable Spare Tire to its storage location. 1. Return the Jack. 2. Deflate the spare tire. Use the Tire Service Kit or Portable Air Compressor and push the deflation button to do this step. Refer to Portable Air Compressor in this section for additional information. The inflatable spare tire will return to its original shape. 3. 4. 5. 6. Install the inflatable spare tire back into its original stowage location and position facing outward. Install the foam tray with wrench and funnel installed. Install and tighten the wing nut by hand. Install the Tire Service Kit or Portable Air Compressor (if equipped) and tighten the strap. 7. Install access panel door. TIRE SERVICE KIT IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle may be equipped with a Tire Service Kit. Small punctures up to 1/4 inch

(6 mm) in the tire tread can be sealed with Tire Service Kit. Foreign objects (e.g., screws or nails) should not be removed from the tire. Tire Service Kit can be used in outside temperatures down to approximately -4F (-20C). This kit will provide a temporary tire seal, allowing you to drive your vehicle up to 100 miles (160 km) with a maximum speed of 50 mph (80 km/h). Tire Service Kit Storage The Tire Service Kit is secured with a strap and is stored in the storage bin located behind the rear cargo trim panel. Tire Service Kit Location

 

 

20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 325 Tire Service Kit Tire Service Kit And Components And Operation 4 Sealant Bottle 5 Power Plug 6 Power Switch 7 Deflation Button 8 Pressure Gauge Using The Mode Select Knob And Hoses Your Tire Service Kit is equipped with the following symbols to indicate the air or sealant mode. Selecting Air Mode Push in the Mode Select Knob and turn to this position for air pump operation only. Selecting Sealant Mode Push in the Mode Select Knob and turn to this position to inject the Tire Service Kit Sealant and to inflate the tire. Push and release the Power Button once to turn On the Tire Service Kit. Push and release the Power Button again to turn Off the Tire Service Kit. IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 325 Using The Deflation Button the Deflation Button Push to reduce the air pressure in the tire if it becomes over-inflated. Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions Replace the Tire Service Kit Sealant Bottle prior to the expiration date (printed at the lower right hand corner on the bottle label) to assure optimum operation of the system. Refer to Sealant Bottle Replacement in this section for further information. The Sealant Bottle is a one tire application use and needs to be replaced after each use. Always replace these components immedi-

ately at your original equipment vehicle dealer. 6 When the Tire Service Kit sealant is in a liquid form, clean water, and a damp cloth will remove the material from the vehicle or tire and wheel components. Once the sealant dries, it can easily be peeled off and properly discarded. For optimum performance, make sure the valve stem on the wheel is free of debris before connecting the Tire Service Kit. Tire Service Kit Components Using The Power Button 1 Mode Select Knob 2 Sealant/Air Hose 3 Hose Accessories 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 326 326 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY The Tire Service Kit Sealant is only intended to seal punctures less than 1/4 inch (6 mm) diameter in the tread/contact surface of your vehicles tires. The Tire Service Kit Sealant is not intended to WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) If the puncture in the tire tread is approximately 1/4 inch (6 mm) or larger. Take care not to allow the contents of Tire Service Kit to come in contact with hair, eyes, or clothing. Tire Service Kit sealant is harmful if inhaled, swallowed, or absorbed through the skin. It causes skin, eye, and respiratory irritation. Flush immediately with plenty of water if there is any contact with eyes or skin. Change clothing as soon as possible, if there is any contact with clothing. Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains latex. In case of an allergic reaction or rash, consult a physician immediately. Keep Tire Service Kit out of reach of children. If swal-

lowed, rinse mouth immediately with plenty of water and drink plenty of water. Do not induce vomiting! Consult a physician imme-

diately. seal punctures on the tires' side walls. If the tire has any sidewall damage. You can use the Tire Service Kit air pump to inflate bicycle tires. The kit also comes with two needles, located in the Accessory Storage Compartment (on the bottom of the air pump) for inflating sport balls, rafts, or similar inflatable items. However, use only the Air Pump and make sure the Mode Select Knob is in the Air Mode when inflating such items to avoid injecting sealant into them. If the tire has any damage from driving with extremely low tire pressure. If the tire has any damage from driving on a flat tire. If the wheel has any damage. If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or the wheel. Keep Tire Service Kit away from open Do not lift or carry the Tire Service Kit by the flames or heat source. hoses. WARNING!

Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the vehicle closest to traffic. Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when using the Tire Service Kit. Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the vehicle under the following circumstances:

(Continued) A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the Tire Service Kit in the place provided. Failure to follow these warnings can result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.

(Continued) 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 327 Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit Whenever You Stop To Use Tire Service Kit:

1. Pull over to a safe location and turn on the vehicles Hazard Warning flashers. 2. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with the deflated tire) is in a position that is near to the ground. This will allow the Tire Service Kit Hose to reach the valve stem and keep the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground. This will provide the best positioning of the kit when injecting the sealant into the deflated tire and running the air pump. Move the vehicle as necessary to place the valve stem in this position before proceeding. 3. Place the transmission in PARK (P) and cycle the ignition in the OFF position. 4. Apply the parking brake. Setting Up To Use Tire Service Kit:

1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose and then remove the cap from the fitting at the end of the hose. 2. Place the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground next to the deflated tire. 3. Remove the cap from the valve stem and then screw the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose onto the valve stem. 4. Uncoil the Power Plug and insert the plug into the vehicles 12 Volt power outlet. NOTE:

Do not remove foreign objects (e.g., screws or nails) from the tire. IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 327 Injecting Tire Service Kit Sealant Into The Deflated Tire:

1. Always start the vehicle before turning the Tire Service Kit on. 2. Ensure the Mode Select Knob is to the Sealant Mode position. 3. After pushing the Power Button, the sealant (white fluid) will flow from the Sealant Bottle through the Sealant Hose and into the tire. NOTE:

Sealant may leak out through the puncture in the tire. 6 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 328 328 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY If the sealant (white fluid) does not flow within 0 10 seconds through the Sealant Hose:

If the sealant (white fluid) does flow through the Sealant Hose:

1. Push the Power Button to turn the Tire Service Kit off. Disconnect the Sealant Hose from the valve stem. Make sure the valve stem is free of debris. Reconnect the Sealant Hose to the valve stem. Check that the Mode Select Knob is in the Sealant Mode position and not Air Mode. Push the Power Button to turn the Tire Service Kit on. 2. Connect the Power Plug to a different 12 Volt power outlet in your vehicle or another vehicle, if available. Make sure the vehicle is running before turning the Tire Service Kit on. 3. The Sealant Bottle may be empty due to previous use. Call for assistance. 1. Continue to operate the pump until sealant is no longer flowing through hose (typically takes 30 -

70 seconds). As the sealant flows through the Sealant Hose, the Pressure Gauge can read as high as 70 psi (4.8 Bar). The Pressure Gauge will decrease quickly from approximately 70 psi (4.8 Bar) to the actual tire pressure when the Sealant Bottle is empty. 2. The pump will start to inject air into the tire immediately after the Sealant Bottle is empty. Continue to operate the pump and inflate the tire to the cold tire inflation pressure found on the tire and loading information label located in the driver-side door opening. Check the tire pressure by looking at the Pressure Gauge. If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi (1.8 Bar) pressure within 15 minutes:

The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive the vehicle further. Call for assis-

tance. If the tire inflates to the recommended pressure or is at least 26 psi (1.8 Bar) pressure within 15 minutes:

NOTE:

If the tire becomes over-inflated, push the Deflation Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recommended inflation pressure before continuing. 1. Push the Power Button to turn the Tire Service Kit off. 2. Remove the speed limit label from the Tire Service Kit and place sticker on the steering wheel. 3. Immediately disconnect the Sealant Hose from the valve stem, reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end of the hose, and place the Tire Service Kit in the vehicle storage loca-

tion. Proceed to Drive Vehicle. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 329 Drive Vehicle:

Immediately after injecting sealant and inflating the tire, drive the vehicle 5 miles (8 km) or 10 minutes to ensure distribution of the Tire Service Kit Sealant within the tire. Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h). WARNING!

The Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat tire repair. Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced after using the Tire Service Kit. Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) until the tire is repaired or replaced. Failure to follow this warning can result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you. Have the tire checked as soon as possible at an authorized dealer. After Driving:

Pull over to a safe location. Refer to Whenever You Stop To Use Tire Service Kit in this section before continuing. If tire pressure is less than 19 psi (1.3 Bar):

The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive the vehicle further. Call for assistance. If the tire pressure is 19 psi (1.3 Bar) or higher:

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 329 1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose, and then remove the cap from the fitting at the end of the hose. 2. Place the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground next to the deflated tire. 3. Remove the cap from the valve stem, and then screw the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose onto the valve stem. 4. Uncoil the Power Plug and insert the plug into the vehicle's 12 Volt power outlet. 5. Uncoil the Hose and screw the fitting at the end of the hose onto the valve stem. 6. Turn the Mode Select Knob and turn to the Air Mode position. 7. Check the pressure in the tire by reading the Pressure Gauge. 1. Push the Power Button to turn on Tire Service Kit and inflate the tire to the cold tire inflation pres-

sure found on the tire and loading information label located in the driver-side door opening. NOTE:

If the tire becomes over-inflated, push the Deflation Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recommended inflation pressure before continuing. 6 2. Disconnect the Tire Service Kit from the valve stem, reinstall the cap on the valve stem and unplug from 12 Volt outlet. 3. Place the Tire Service Kit in its proper storage area in the vehicle. 4. Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced at the earliest opportunity at an authorized dealer or tire service center. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 330 330 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY steering wheel after the tire has been repaired. 6. Replace the Sealant Bottle at an authorized dealer as soon as possible. Refer to Sealant Bottle Replacement in this section for further information. NOTE:

When having the tire serviced, advise the autho-

rized dealer or service center that the tire has been sealed using the Tire Service Kit. Sealant Bottle Replacement:

1. Unwrap the power cord. 2. Unwrap the hose. 5. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the 3. Remove the bottle cover. 5. Pull the bottle away from the Compressor. Remove The Bottle Cover Remove The Bottle 4. Rotate the bottle up beyond vertical to NOTE:

release. For sealant bottle installation, follow these steps reverse order. Replacement sealant bottles are available at authorized service centers. Unwrap The Hose Rotate The Bottle Up Preparations For Jump Start The battery in your vehicle is located on the left side of the engine compartment. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 331 JUMP STARTING If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jump started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster pack. Jump starting can be dangerous if done improperly so please follow the procedures in this section carefully. NOTE:

When using a portable battery booster pack follow the manufacturers operating instruc-

tions and precautions. Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is frozen. It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury. CAUTION!

Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any other booster source with a system voltage greater than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor, alternator or electrical system may occur. WARNING!

Remote Positive Post Remote Negative Post IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 331 WARNING!

Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the ignition switch is ON. You can be injured by moving fan blades. Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent electrical contact. You could be seriously injured. Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or sparks away from the battery. 6 1. Apply the parking brake, shift the auto-

matic transmission into PARK (P) and place the ignition to OFF. 2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unneces-

sary electrical accessories. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 332 332 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 3. If using another vehicle to jump start the battery, park the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF. WARNING!

Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this could establish a ground connection and personal injury could result. Jump Starting Procedure WARNING!

Failure to follow this jump starting procedure could result in personal injury or property damage due to battery explosion. CAUTION!

Failure to follow these procedures could result in damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle or the discharged vehicle. Connecting The Jumper Cables 5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the 1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the remote positive (+) post of the vehicle with the discharged battery. 2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery. 3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable to the negative (-) post of the booster battery. 4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper cable to the remote negative post near the windshield cowl (exposed metal part of the discharged vehicles engine). WARNING!

Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative

(-) post of the discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark could cause the battery to explode and could result in personal injury. Only use the specific ground point, do not use any other exposed metal parts. booster battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery. 6. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables in the reverse sequence. Disconnecting The Jumper Cables 1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable from the remote negative post of the vehicle with the discharged battery. 2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative

(-) jumper cable from the negative (-) post of the booster battery. 3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable from the positive (+) post of the booster battery. 4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper cable from the remote positive (+) post of the vehicle with the discharged battery. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 333 REFUELING IN EMERGENCY The funnel for the Cap-Less Fuel System is located with the spare tire (if equipped) or in the upper storage bin. If your vehicle is out of fuel and an auxiliary fuel can is needed, insert the funnel into the filler neck and proceed to fill the vehicle. If frequent jump starting is required to start your vehicle you should have the battery and charging system inspected at an authorized dealer. CAUTION!

Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets draw power from the vehicles battery, even when not in use (i.e., cellular devices, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long enough without engine operation, the vehicles battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from starting. Emergency Fuel Fill Funnel For more information on the Cap-Less Fuel System refer to Refueling The Vehicle in Starting And Operating in this manual. IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 333 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS In any of the following situations, you can reduce the potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action. On the highways slow down. In city traffic while stopped, place the trans-

mission in NEUTRAL (N), but do not increase engine idle speed. NOTE:

There are steps that you can take to slow down an impending overheat condition:

If your Air Conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C system adds heat to the engine cooling system and turning the A/C off can help remove this heat. 6 You can also turn the temperature control to maximum heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control to high. This allows the heater core to act as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the engine cooling system. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 334 334 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY WARNING!

MANUAL PARK RELEASE You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood, do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot. CAUTION!

Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your vehicle. If temperature gauge reads H, pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on the H, turn the engine off immediately, and call for service. WARNING!

You should be seated in the drivers seat with your foot firmly placed on the brake pedal to maintain control of the vehicle before activating the Manual Park Release. If possible, you should apply the parking brake. Activating the Manual Park Release will allow your vehicle to roll away if it is not secured or properly connected to a tow vehicle. Activating the Manual Park Release on an unsecured vehicle could lead to serious injury or death for those in or around the vehicle. To move the vehicle in cases where the trans-

mission will not shift out of PARK (P) (such as a depleted battery), a Manual Park Release is available. Manual Park Release Access Cover Follow These Steps To Activate The Manual Park Release:

1. Apply firm pressure to the brake pedal while seated in the drivers seat. 2. Apply the parking brake, if possible. 3. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool, remove the Manual Park Release access cover, which is to the lower left of the steering column. 4. The Manual Park Release access cover is connected to a red tether strap. Pull the tether strap out as far as it will go, then release it. The transmission should now be in NEUTRAL (N), allowing the vehicle to be moved. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 335 NOTE:

When the lever is locked in the released posi-

tion, the tether will remain outside of the trim panel and the access cover cannot be rein-

stalled. 5. Release the parking brake only when the vehicle is securely connected to a tow vehicle. To Reset The Manual Park Release:

1. Apply firm pressure to the brake pedal while seated in the drivers seat. 2. Pull the tether strap out again, then release it. 3. Allow the tether to retract with the lever back to its original position. 4. Verify that the transmission is in PARK (P). 5. Confirm that the tether has retracted fully and re-install the access cover. If the access cover cannot be re-installed, repeat steps 1 through 4. FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it can often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the front wheels. Then shift back and forth between DRIVE (D) and REVERSE (R) while gently pressing the accelerator. NOTE:

Shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE can only be achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h) or less. Whenever the transmission remains in NEUTRAL (N) for more than two seconds, you must press the brake pedal to engage DRIVE or REVERSE. Use the least amount of accelerator pedal pres-

sure that will maintain the rocking motion without spinning the wheels or racing the engine. IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 335 NOTE:

Push the "ESC OFF" switch to place the Elec-

tronic Stability Control (ESC) system in "Partial Off" mode, before rocking the vehicle. Refer to Electronic Brake Control in Safety for further information. Once the vehicle has been freed, push the "ESC OFF" switch again to restore "ESC On" mode. WARNING!

Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed. 6 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 336 336 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY CAUTION!

CAUTION! (Continued) Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to transmission overheating and failure. Allow the engine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for at least one minute after every five rocking-motion cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce the risk of transmission failure during prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle.

(Continued) When rocking a stuck vehicle by shifting between DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin the wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain damage may result. Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast may lead to transmission over-

heating and failure. It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels above 30 mph

(48 km/h) while in gear (no transmission shifting occurring). TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial towing service. Towing Condition Flat Tow Wheel Lift Or Dolly Tow Flatbed Wheel OFF The Ground NONE Front Rear ALL ALL MODELS NOT ALLOWED OK NOT ALLOWED BEST METHOD 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 337 Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other equipment designed for this purpose, following equipment manufacturers instructions. Use of safety chains is mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to main structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers or associated brackets. State and local laws regarding vehicles under tow must be observed. NOTE:

You must ensure that the Auto Park Brake feature is disabled before towing this vehicle

(if rear wheels are on the ground), to avoid inadvertent Electric Park Brake (EPB) engagement. The Auto Park Brake feature is enabled or disabled via the customer programmable features in the Uconnect Settings. Vehicles with a discharged battery or total electrical failure when the Electric Parking Brake (EPB) is engaged, will need a wheel dolly or jack to raise the rear wheels off the ground when moving the vehicle onto a flatbed. The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed. If flatbed equipment is not available, this vehicle must be towed with the front wheels OFF the ground (using a towing dolly, or wheel lift equipment with the front wheels raised). NOTE:

Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is released, and remains released, while being towed. CAUTION!

Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 337 Vehicle Recovery Tow Points Your vehicle is equipped with Vehicle Recovery Points that can be used to recover a disabled vehicle, located on the underbody of the vehicle. NOTE:

Ensure that the towing service tow hooks are properly seated and secured in the attach-

ment points. This recovery tow feature should be used by a trained professional only. Use approved receptacle location to free the disabled vehicle from its environment. 6 Front Recovery Points 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 338 338 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY CAUTION!

CAUTION! (Continued) Recovery feature:

Is to be used by a professional ONLY. Recovery load should:

Be applied at constant speed. Is used only to provide recovery of the Be applied parallel to the center line of the length of the vehicle. Is NOT to be used to recover secondary Not be an abrupt acceleration. NOTE:

The Safehold feature will engage the Electric Park Brake whenever the driver's door is opened (if the ignition is ON, transmission is not in PARK, and brake pedal is released). If you are towing this vehicle with the ignition in the ON/

RUN mode, you must manually disable the Elec-

tric Park Brake each time the driver's door is opened, by pressing the brake pedal and then releasing the EPB. vehicle. vehicle. vehicle. vehicle. Is NOT to be used for transporting the vehicle over the road, i.e. Flat Towing. Is to be used by a professional ONLY. Is used only to provide recovery of the Is NOT to be used to recover secondary Is NOT to be used for transporting the vehicle over the road, i.e. Flat Towing.

(Continued) Be applied at constant speed. Be applied parallel to the center line of the length of the vehicle. Not be an abrupt acceleration. If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.) while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN mode, not the ACC mode. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 339 If the key fob is unavailable, or the vehicle's battery is discharged, refer to Manual Park Release in this section for instructions on shifting the transmission out of PARK in order to move the vehicle. CAUTION!

Do not use sling-type equipment when towing. Vehicle damage may occur. When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck, do not attach to front or rear suspen-

sion components. Damage to your vehicle may result from improper towing. Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is released, and remains released, while being towed. ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM

(EARS) This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced Acci-

dent Response System. Please refer to Occupant Restraint Systems in Safety for further information on the Enhanced Accident Response System (EARS) function. IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 339 EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR) This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data Recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record data that will assist in understanding how a vehicles systems performed under certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle. Please refer to Occupant Restraint Systems in Safety for further information on the Event Data Recorder (EDR). 6 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 340 340 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE SCHEDULED SERVICING Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change indicator system. The oil change indi-

cator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance. Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change indicator message will illuminate. This means that service is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions such as frequent short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or cold ambient temperatures will influence when the Oil Change Required message is displayed. Severe Operating Conditions can cause the change oil message to illuminate as early as 3,500 miles (5,600 km) since last reset. Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km). Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator message after completing the sched-

uled oil change. If a scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than your autho-

rized dealer, the message can be reset by refer-

ring to Instrument Cluster Display in Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel. NOTE:

Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), 12 months or 350 hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The 350 hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a concern for fleet customers. Severe Duty All Models Change Engine Oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) or 350 hours of engine run time if the vehicle is operated in a dusty and off road environment or is operated predominately at idle or only very low engine RPM. This type of vehicle use is considered Severe Duty. Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:

Check engine oil level Check windshield washer fluid level Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or damage. Rotate tires at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir and brake master cylinder, fill as needed Check function of all interior and exterior lights 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 341 Maintenance Plan Required Maintenance Intervals Refer to the required maintenance intervals. Change oil and filter At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System:

Rotate the tires at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required Inspect the CV/Universal joints Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses and park brake Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses Inspect exhaust system Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or off-road conditions. If required, replace engine air filter. SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 341 7 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 342 342 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first) Or Years:

Or Kilometers:

Additional Inspections Inspect the CV/Universal joints. Inspect front suspension, boot seals, tie rod ends, and replace if necessary. Inspect the brake linings, parking brake function. Inspect front accessory drive tensioner, idler pulley, and replace if necessary. Additional Maintenance Replace engine air cleaner filter. Replace air conditioning/cabin air filter. Replace spark plugs1 Replace the front accessory drive belt. 0 0 0 0 3

, 3 0 0 0 8 4

, X X 0 0 0 0 2

, 2 0 0 0 2 3

, X X X X 0 0 0 0 4

, 4 0 0 0 4 6

, X X X X 0 0 0 0 5

, 5 0 0 0 0 8

, X 0 0 0 0 7

, 7 0 0 0 2 1 1

, X 0 0 0 0 6

, 6 0 0 0 6 9

, X X X X X 0 0 0 0 9

, 9 0 0 0 4 4 1

, X X 0 0 0 0 8

, 8 0 0 0 8 2 1

, X X X X 10 11 12 13 14 15 0 0 0 0 1 1

, 0 0 0 6 7 1

, X 0 0 0 0 3 1

, 0 0 0 8 0 2

, X 0 0 0 0 2 1

, 0 0 0 2 9 1

, X X X X X 0 0 0 0 4 1

, 0 0 0 4 2 2

, X X X X 0 0 0 0 0 1

, 0 0 0 0 6 1

, X X X X X 0 0 0 0 5 1

, 0 0 0 0 4 2

, X X X X 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 343 Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first) Or Years:

Or Kilometers:

Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years or 150,000 miles (240,000 km) whichever comes first. Replace PCV valve. 0 0 0 0 2

, 2 0 0 0 2 3

, 0 0 0 0 3

, 3 0 0 0 8 4

, 0 0 0 0 4

, 4 0 0 0 4 6

, 0 0 0 0 5

, 5 0 0 0 0 8

, 0 0 0 0 6

, 6 0 0 0 6 9

, 0 0 0 0 7

, 7 0 0 0 2 1 1

, 0 0 0 0 8

, 8 0 0 0 8 2 1

, 0 0 0 0 9

, 9 0 0 0 4 4 1

, SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 343 10 11 12 13 14 15 0 0 0 0 1 1

, 0 0 0 6 7 1

, 0 0 0 0 2 1

, 0 0 0 2 9 1

, 0 0 0 0 3 1

, 0 0 0 8 0 2

, 0 0 0 0 4 1

, 0 0 0 4 2 2

, 0 0 0 0 5 1

, 0 0 0 0 4 2

, X 0 0 0 0 0 1

, 0 0 0 0 6 1

, X X 1. The spark plug change interval is mileage based only, yearly intervals do not apply. WARNING!

WARNING! (Continued) You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.

(Continued) Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and performance. This could cause an accident. Heavy Duty Use Of The Vehicle 7 Change engine oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) or 350 hours of engine run time if the vehicle is operated in a dusty and off road environment or is operated predominately at idle or only very low engine RPM. This type of vehicle use is considered Severe Duty. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 344 344 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE ENGINE COMPARTMENT 3.6L Engine 1 Engine Coolant Pressure Cap 2 Engine Oil Fill 3 Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap 4 Engine Air Cleaner 5 Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 6 Battery 7 Engine Oil Dipstick 8 Windshield Washer Fill Checking Oil Level Adding Washer Fluid 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 345 To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off. Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain the oil level between the MIN and MAX markings on the dipstick. Adding one quart or one liter of oil when the reading is at the MIN mark will result in a MAX reading on these engines. CAUTION!

Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aera-

tion, or loss of oil pressure. This could damage your engine. Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil in the engine or damage may result. Windshield Washer Fluid Cap The fluid reservoir is located in the front of the engine compartment. Be sure to check the fluid level in the reservoir at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent (not radiator antifreeze) and operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the residual washer fluid. When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take some washer fluid, apply it to a cloth or towel, and wipe clean the wiper blades; this will help blade performance. SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 345 To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This rating information can be found on most washer fluid containers. WARNING!

Commercially available windshield washer solvents are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care must be exercised when filling or working around the washer solution. 7 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 346 346 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Maintenance-Free Battery Your vehicle is equipped with a mainte-

nance-free battery. You will never have to add water, nor is periodic maintenance required. WARNING!

Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with large amounts of water. Refer to Jump Starting Procedure in In Case Of Emer-

gency for further information. Keep flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable clamps to touch each other. Battery posts, terminals, and related acces-

sories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after handling. Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Pressure Washing CAUTION!

It is essential when replacing the cables on the battery that the positive cable is attached to the positive post and the nega-

tive cable is attached to the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive (+) and negative (-) and are identified on the battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal posts and free of corrosion. If a fast charger is used while the battery is in the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to the battery. Do not use a fast charger to provide starting voltage. CAUTION!

Cleaning the engine compartment with a high pressure washer is not recommended. Precautions have been taken to safeguard all parts and connections however, the pressures generated by these machines is such that complete protection against water ingress cannot be guaranteed. DEALER SERVICE An authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are available which include detailed service information for your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before attempting any procedure yourself. NOTE:

Intentional tampering with emissions control systems may void your warranty and could result in civil penalties being assessed against you. WARNING!

You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 347 Engine Oil Change Engine Oil Refer to Scheduled Servicing in this section for the proper maintenance intervals. NOTE:

Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), 12 months or 350 hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The 350 hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a concern for fleet customers. Gasoline Engine Oil Selection For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet the require-

ments of FCA Material Standard MS-6395. American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil Identification Symbol This symbol means that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute (API). The manufacturer only recommends API Certified engine oils. This symbol certifies 0W-20, 5W-20, 0W-30, 5W-30 and 10W-30 engine oils. CAUTION!

Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Engine Oil Viscosity Mopar SAE 0W-20 engine oil approved to FCA Material Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil, Shell Helix or equivalent is recommended for all operating temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy. SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 347 The engine oil filler cap also shows the recom-

mended engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on engine oil filler cap location, refer to the Engine Compartment illustration in this section. Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number should not be used. Synthetic Engine Oils You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recommended oil quality requirements are met, and the recommended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are followed. Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number should not be used. 7 Materials Added To Engine Oil The manufacturer strongly recommends against the addition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 348 348 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters, indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the environment. Contact an authorized dealer, service station or govern-

mental agency for advice on how and where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area. Engine Oil Filter The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter at every engine oil change. Engine Oil Filter Selection This manufacturer's engines have a full-flow type disposable oil filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be used to ensure most efficient service. Mopar engine oil filters are high quality oil filters and are recommended. Engine Air Cleaner Filter Refer to the Maintenance Plan in this section for the proper maintenance intervals. NOTE:

Be sure to follow the Severe Duty Conditions maintenance interval if applicable. Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be used to ensure most efficient service. Mopar engine air cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recommended. Accessory Drive Belt Inspection WARNING!

The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can provide a measure of protection in the case of engine backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is near the engine compartment before starting the vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury. WARNING!

Do not attempt to inspect an accessory drive belt with vehicle running. When working near the radiator cooling fan, disconnect the fan motor lead. The fan is temperature controlled and can start at any time regardless of ignition mode. You could be injured by the moving fan blades. You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a compe-

tent mechanic. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 349 When inspecting accessory drive belts, small cracks that run across the ribbed surface of a belt from rib to rib, are considered normal. These are not a reason to replace belt. However, cracks running along a rib (not across) are not normal. Any belt with cracks running along a rib must be replaced. Also, have the belt replaced if it has excessive wear, frayed cords, or severe glazing. Accessory Belt (Serpentine Belt) Conditions that would require replacement:

Rib chunking (one or more ribs has sepa-

rated from belt body) Rib or belt wear Longitudinal belt cracking (cracks between two ribs) Belt slips Belt broken Groove jumping" (belt does not maintain correct position on pulley) NOTE:

Identify and correct problem before new belt is installed Noise (objectionable squeal, squeak, or rumble is heard or felt while drive belt is in operation) Some conditions can be caused by a faulty component such as a belt pulley. Belt pulleys should be carefully inspected for damage and proper alignment. Belt replacement on some models requires the use of special tools, we recommend having your vehicle serviced at an authorized dealer. Air Conditioner Maintenance For best possible performance, your air condi-

tioner should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the start of each warm season. This service should include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test. SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 349 Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time. WARNING!

Use only refrigerants and compressor lubri-

cants approved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning system. Some unap-

proved refrigerants are flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to Warranty Information located online, for further warranty information. The air conditioning system contains refrig-

erant under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be done by an experienced technician. 7 CAUTION!

Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning system as the chemicals can damage your air conditioning components. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 350 350 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R1234yf R1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoroolefin (HFO) that is endorsed by the Environmental Protection Agency and is an ozone-friendly substance with a low global-warming potential. The manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by an authorized dealer using recovery and recycling equipment. NOTE:

Use only manufacturer approved A/C system PAG compressor oil, and refrigerants. Air Conditioning Filter Replacement (Cabin Air Filter) WARNING!

Do not remove the cabin air filter while the vehicle is running, or while the ignition is in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. With the cabin air filter removed and the blower operating, the blower can contact hands and may propel dirt and debris into your eyes, resulting in personal injury. The cabin air filter is located in the fresh air inlet behind the glove compartment. Perform the following procedure to replace the filter:

1. Remove all contents from the glove compartment. 3. There are glove compartment travel stops on either side of the glove compartment door. To release them, push inward on each travel stop, and pull the glove compartment door down until the travel stops pass clear of their hooking points. 4. Open the glove compartment door as far as possible to gain access to the cabin air filter compartment cover. Glove Compartment 1 Glove Compartment Travel Stops 2 Glove Compartment Tension Tether Clip 2. Open the glove compartment door partially, leaving extra slack on the glove compart-

ment tension tether. Detach the glove compartment tension tether by sliding the black tension tether clip down, and popping it out of the slot on the side of the glove compartment door. Cabin Air Filter Compartment Cover 1 Compartment Cover 2 Compartment Snap 5. Pry up the lid of each individual compart-

ment snap, and detach it from the rest of the snap. There is a small space on the side of each snap to use for separating the lid 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 351 from the snap. Once detached, remove the rest of the snap completely from the compartment cover. 6. After removing the snaps, lift up the compartment cover to gain access to the fresh air inlet. Fresh Air Inlet 1 Filter Cover 2 Retaining Tabs 7. Remove the filter cover by prying back each of the retaining tabs from their hooking points, and then pulling the filter cover out to expose the cabin air filter. Remove the air filter by pulling it straight out of the housing. 8. Install the new air filter with the arrow on the filter pointing toward the floor. CAUTION!

The cabin air filter is identified with an arrow to indicate airflow direction through the filter. Failure to properly install the filter will result in the need to replace it more often. 9. Once the filter is replaced, reinstall the filter cover, making sure the retaining tabs are fully secured into their housings. 10. Close the cabin air filter compartment cover, and reinsert the snaps into their slots. Push the snap lids until fully attached. 11. Push the glove compartment door to the near closed position to reengage the glove compartment travel stops. Finally, pull the glove compartment tension tether clip down and slide it back into the slot on the side of the glove compartment door. Body Lubrication Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate, tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be lubricated SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 351 periodically with a lithium based grease, such as Mopar Spray White Lube to ensure quiet, easy operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant, the parts concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating, excess oil and grease should be removed. Particular attention should also be given to hood latching components to ensure proper function. When performing other underhood services, the hood latch release mechanism, and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated. The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a year, preferably in the Autumn and Spring. Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant, such as Mopar Lock Cylinder Lubri-

cant directly into the lock cylinder. Windshield Wiper Blades Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulations of salt or road film. Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield. 7 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 352 352 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc. NOTE:

Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor performance of blades may be present with chattering, marks, water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions are present, clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary. The wiper blades and wiper arms should be inspected periodically, not just when wiper performance problems are experienced. This inspection should include the following points:

Wear or uneven edges Foreign material Hardening or cracking Deformation or fatigue If a wiper blade or wiper arm is damaged, replace the affected wiper arm or blade with a new unit. Do not attempt to repair a wiper arm or blade that is damaged. Front Wiper Blade Removal/Installation 2. To disengage the wiper blade from the wiper arm, flip up the release tab on the wiper blade and while holding the wiper arm with one hand, slide the wiper blade down towards the base of the wiper arm. CAUTION!

Do not allow the wiper arm to spring back against the glass without the wiper blade in place or the glass may be damaged. 1. Lift the wiper arm to raise the wiper blade off of the glass, until the wiper arm is in the full up position. Wiper Blade With Release Tab In Unlocked Position 1 Wiper Blade 2 Release Tab 3 Wiper Arm Wiper Blade With Release Tab In Locked Position 1 Wiper Blade 2 Release Tab 3 Wiper Arm 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 353 3. With the wiper blade disengaged, remove the wiper blade from the wiper arm by holding the wiper arm with one hand and separating the wiper blade from the wiper arm with the other hand (move the wiper blade toward the right side of the vehicle to separate the wiper blade from the wiper arm). Wiper Blade Removed From Wiper Arm 1 Wiper Blade 2 Release Tab 3 Wiper Arm 4. Gently lower the wiper arm onto the glass. Installing The Front Wipers Rear Wiper Blade Removal/Installation 1. Lift the wiper arm off of the glass, until the wiper arm is in the full up position. 2. Position the wiper blade near the hook on the tip of the wiper arm with the wiper release tab open and the blade side of the wiper facing up and away from the wind-

shield. 3. Insert the hook on the tip of the arm through the opening in the wiper blade under the release tab. 4. Slide the wiper blade up into the hook on the wiper arm and rotate the wiper blade until it is flush against the wiper arm. Fold down the latch release tab and snap it into its locked position. Latch engagement will be accompanied by an audible click. 5. Gently lower the wiper blade onto the glass. SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 353 1. Lift the rear wiper arm pivot cap away from the glass to allow the rear wiper blade to be raised off of the glass. NOTE:

The rear wiper arm cannot be fully raised off the glass unless the wiper arm pivot cap is unsnapped first. Attempting to fully raise the rear wiper arm without unsnapping the wiper arm pivot cap may damage the vehicle. 7 Wiper Pivot Cap In Unlocked Position 1 Wiper Arm Pivot Cap 2 Wiper Arm 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 354 354 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 2. Lift the rear wiper arm fully off the glass. 3. To remove the wiper blade from the wiper arm, grasp the bottom end of the wiper blade nearest to wiper arm with your right hand. With your left hand hold the wiper arm as you pull the wiper blade away from the wiper arm past its stop far enough to unsnap the wiper blade pivot pin from the receptacle on the end of the wiper arm. NOTE:

Resistance will be accompanied by an audible snap. 4. Still grasping the bottom end of the wiper blade, move the wiper blade upward and away from the wiper arm to disengage. Wiper Blade In Folded Out Position 1 Wiper Arm Pivot Cap 2 Wiper Blade 3 Wiper Arm Wiper Blade Removed From Wiper Arm 1 Wiper Blade 2 Wiper Blade Pivot Pin 3 Wiper Arm Receptacle 4 Wiper Arm 5. Gently lower the tip of the wiper arm onto the glass. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 355 Installing The Rear Wiper Exhaust System 1. Lift the rear wiper arm pivot cap away from the glass to allow the rear wiper blade to be raised off of the glass. NOTE:

The rear wiper arm cannot be fully raised off the glass unless the wiper arm pivot cap is unsnapped first. Attempting to fully raise the rear wiper arm without unsnapping the wiper arm pivot cap may damage the vehicle. 2. Lift the rear wiper arm fully off the glass. 3. Insert the wiper blade pivot pin into the opening on the end of the wiper arm. Grab the bottom end of the wiper arm with one hand, and press the wiper blade flush with the wiper arm until it snaps into place. 4. Lower the wiper blade onto the glass and snap the wiper arm pivot cap back into place. The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly main-

tained engine exhaust system. If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system; or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle; or when the under-

side or rear of the vehicle is damaged; have an authorized technician inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or misposi-

tioned parts. Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition, have the exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required. SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 355 WARNING!

Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing CO, refer to Safety Tips in Safety for further information. A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over materials that can burn. Such materials might be grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn. CAUTION!

The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control device and may seri-

ously reduce engine performance and cause serious damage to the engine.

(Continued) 7 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 356 356 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE CAUTION! (Continued) Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In the event of engine malfunction, particularly involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Continued opera-

tion of your vehicle with a severe malfunction could cause the converter to overheat, resulting in possible damage to the converter and vehicle. Under normal operating conditions, the cata-

lytic converter will not require maintenance. However, it is important to keep the engine properly tuned to ensure proper catalyst opera-

tion and prevent possible catalyst damage. NOTE:

Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you. In unusual situations involving grossly malfunc-

tioning engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst over-

heating. If this occurs, stop the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool. Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer's specifica-

tions, should be obtained immediately. To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damage:

Do not interrupt the ignition when the trans-

mission is in gear and the vehicle is in motion. Do not try to start the vehicle by pushing or towing the vehicle. Do not idle the engine with any ignition components disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough idle or malfunc-

tioning operating conditions. Cooling System WARNING!

You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood, do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool. Never open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.

(Continued) WARNING! (Continued) Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry away from the radiator cooling fan when the hood is raised. The fan starts automati-

cally and may start at any time, whether the engine is running or not. When working near the radiator cooling fan, disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition to the OFF mode. The fan is temperature controlled and can start at any time the ignition is in the ON mode. Engine Coolant Checks Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protec-

tion every 12 months (before the onset of freezing weather, where applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty, the system should be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) by an authorized dealer. Check the front of the A/C condenser for any accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the face of the condenser. Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, and tight-

ness of the connection at the coolant recovery 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 357 bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for leaks. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT. Cooling System Drain, Flush And Refill NOTE:

Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed to be added to the system please contact an authorized dealer. If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains visible sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and flush with OAT coolant (anti-

freeze) (conforming to MS.90032). Refer to the Maintenance Plan in this section for the proper maintenance intervals. Selection Of Coolant Refer to Fluids And Lubricants in Technical Specifications for further information. NOTE:

(OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine damage and may decrease corro-

sion protection. Organic Additive Technology

(OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (anti-

freeze) or any globally compatible coolant

(antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine coolant

(antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency, the cooling system will need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon as possible. Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust prod-

ucts, as they may not be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the radiator. This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene glycol-based engine coolant

(antifreeze). Use of propylene glycolbased engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recom-

mended. Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than specified Organic Additive Technology Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 357 properly could lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed to be added to the system please contact an authorized dealer. Adding Coolant Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) that allows extended maintenance intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can be used up to ten years or 150,000 miles

(240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent reducing this extended maintenance period, it is important that you use the same engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) throughout the life of your vehicle. Please review these recommendations for using Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) that meets the require-

ments of FCA Material Standard MS.90032. When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):

We recommend using Mopar Antifreeze/

Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km) Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032. Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant that meets the requirements of FCA 7 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 358 358 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Material Standard MS.90032 and distilled water. Use higher concentrations (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below 34F

(37C) are anticipated. Please contact an authorized dealer for assistance. Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized water when mixing the water/

engine coolant (antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling system. NOTE:

It is the owner's responsibility to maintain the proper level of protection against freezing according to the temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is operated. Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed to be added to the system, please contact a local autho-

rized dealer. Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not recommended and can result in cooling system damage. If HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency, have a authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with OAT coolant

(conforming to MS.90032) as soon as possible. Cooling System Pressure Cap The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant (antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant expansion bottle/

recovery tank if so equipped. The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces. WARNING!

Do not open hot engine cooling system. Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to build up in the cooling system. To prevent scalding or injury, do not remove the pressure cap while the system is hot or under pressure. Do not use a pressure cap other than the one specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine damage may result. Disposal Of Used Coolant Used ethylene glycol-based coolant (antifreeze) is a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check with your local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your commu-

nity. To prevent ingestion by animals or chil-

dren, do not store ethylene glycol-based coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child or pet, seek emergency assistance immediately. Clean up any ground spills immediately. Coolant Level The coolant expansion bottle provides a quick visual method for determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the engine off and cold, the level of the coolant (antifreeze) in the bottle should be between the MAX and MIN lines marked on the bottle. As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month. When additional coolant (antifreeze) is needed to maintain the proper level, it should be added to the coolant bottle. Do not overfill. See an authorized dealer for service. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 359 Points To Remember NOTE:

When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/

kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming from the front of the engine compart-

ment. This is normally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vaporized when the ther-

mostat opens, allowing hot engine coolant (anti-

freeze) to enter the radiator. If an examination of your engine compartment shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate. Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle. Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (antifreeze) needs to be added, the contents of the coolant expansion bottle must also be protected against freezing. If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) addi-

tions are required, the cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks. Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concen-

tration at a minimum of 50% OAT coolant

(conforming to MS.90032) and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your engine which contains aluminum compo-

nents. Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed. Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the condenser clean. Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install ONLY the correct type ther-

mostat. Other designs may result in unsatis-

factory engine coolant (antifreeze) performance, poor gas mileage, and increased emissions. Brake System In order to ensure brake system performance, all brake system components should be inspected periodically. Refer to the Mainte-

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 359 nance Plan in this section for the proper main-

tenance intervals. WARNING!

Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and possible brake damage. You would not have your full braking capacity in an emergency. 7 Brake Master Cylinder The fluid in the master cylinder should be checked when performing under hood services or immediately if the Brake Warning Light is illuminated. Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing the cap. If necessary, add fluid to bring the fluid level up to the require-

ments described on the brake fluid reservoir. With disc brakes, fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear. Brake fluid level should be checked when pads are replaced. However, low fluid level may be caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 360 360 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Use only manufacturer's recommended brake fluid. Refer to Fluids And Lubricants in Tech-

nical Specifications for further information. WARNING!

Use only manufacturer's recommended brake fluid. Refer to Fluids And Lubricants in Technical Specifications for further informa-

tion. Using the wrong type of brake fluid can severely damage your brake system and/or impair its performance. The proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder reservoir. or moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has been in a tightly closed container. Keep the master cylinder reser-

voir cap secured at all times. Brake fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the air resulting in a lower boiling point. This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake failure. This could result in a collision.

(Continued) WARNING! (Continued) Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces. Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure. This could result in a collision. Selection Of Lubricant It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to ensure optimum transmission perfor-

mance and life. Use only the manufacturer's specified transmission fluid. Refer to Fluids And Lubricants in Technical Specifications for fluid specifications. It is important to main-

tain the transmission fluid at the correct level using the recommended fluid. To avoid contamination from foreign matter Automatic Transmission NOTE:

No chemical flushes should be used in any transmission; only the approved lubricant should be used. CAUTION!

Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturers recommended fluid may cause deterioration in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter shudder. Refer to Fluids And Lubricants in Technical Specifications for fluid specifications. Special Additives The manufacturer strongly recommends against using any special additives in the trans-

mission. Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to the transmission. Avoid using transmission sealers as they may adversely affect seals. CAUTION!

Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as the chemicals can damage your transmission components. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 361 Fluid Level Check The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not require adjustment under normal operating conditions. Routine fluid level checks are not required; therefore the transmission has no dipstick. An authorized dealer can check your transmission fluid level using special service tools. If you notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunction, visit an authorized dealer immedi-

ately to have the transmission fluid level checked. Operating the vehicle with an improper fluid level can cause severe transmis-

sion damage. CAUTION!

If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit an authorized dealer immediately. Severe transmission damage may occur. An authorized dealer has the proper tools to adjust the fluid level accurately. Fluid And Filter Changes Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at the factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for the life of the vehicle. Routine fluid and filter changes are not required. However, change the fluid and filter if the fluid becomes contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the transmission is disassembled for any reason. RAISING THE VEHICLE In the case where it is necessary to raise the vehicle, go to an authorized dealer or service station. TIRES Tire Safety Information Tire safety information will cover aspects of the following information: Tire Markings, Tire Identi-

fication Numbers, Tire Terminology and Defini-

tions, Tire Pressures, and Tire Loading. SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 361 Tire Markings Tire Markings 1 US DOT Safety Standards Code (TIN) 2 Size Designation 3 Service Description 4 Maximum Load 5 Maximum Pressure 6 Treadwear, Traction and Tempera-

ture Grades 7 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 362 362 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE NOTE:

P (Passenger) Metric tire sizing is based on US design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter P molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: P215/65R15 95H. European Metric tire sizing is based on European design standards. Tires designed to this standard have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width. The letter "P" is absent from this tire size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H. Tire Sizing Chart LT (Light Truck) Metric tire sizing is based on US design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the letters LT that are molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16. Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary emergency use only. Temporary high pressure compact spare tires have the letter T or S molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example:

T145/80D18 103M. High flotation tire sizing is based on US design standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded into the sidewall. Example:

31x10.5 R15 LT. Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT EXAMPLE:

P = Passenger car tire size based on US design standards, or

"....blank...." = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or LT = Light truck tire based on US design standards, or T or S = Temporary spare tire or 31 = Overall diameter in inches (in) 215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm) 65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%) Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or 10.5 = Section width in inches (in) 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 363 EXAMPLE:

R = Construction code

"R" means radial construction, or

"D" means diagonal or bias construction 15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in) Service Description:

95 = Load Index A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 363 H = Speed Symbol A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and posted speed limits) Load Identification:

Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:

XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or 7 LL = Light load tire or C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure Maximum Load Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry Maximum Pressure Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 364 364 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Tire Identification Number (TIN) The Tire Identification Number (TIN) may be found on one or both sides of the tire; however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire. DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 EXAMPLE:

DOT = Department of Transportation This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the US Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits) L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits) ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits) 03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits) 03 means the 3rd week 01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits) 01 means the year 2001 Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example:

031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 365 Tire Terminology And Definitions Term B-Pillar Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Maximum Inflation Pressure Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Tire Placard SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 365 Definition The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door. Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or kPa (kilopascals). The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall. Vehicle manufacturer's recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard. A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicles loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures. 7 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 366 366 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Tire Loading And Tire Pressure NOTE:

The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the drivers side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver's side door. Check the inflation pressure of each tire, including the spare tire (if equipped), at least monthly and inflate to the recommended pres-

sure for your vehicle. Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar) Tire And Loading Information Placard Example Tire Placard Location (Door) Tire And Loading Information Placard This placard tells you important information about the:

1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle. 2. Total weight your vehicle can carry. 3. Tire size designed for your vehicle. 4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and spare tires. Loading The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You will not exceed the tire's load carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire inflation pres-

sures specified on the Tire and Loading Infor-

mation placard in Vehicle Loading in the Starting And Operating section of this manual. NOTE:

Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear axles must not be exceeded. For further information on GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to Vehicle Loading in the Starting And Operating section of this manual. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 367 To determine the maximum loading conditions of your vehicle, locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs on the Tire and Loading Information placard. The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed the weight referenced here. Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit

(1) Locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs. on your vehicle's placard.

(2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.

(3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.

(4) The resulting figure equals the avail-

able amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if XXX amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400-750

(5x150) = 650 lbs.)

(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.

(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the avail-

able cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle. SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 367 Metric Example For Load Limit For example, if XXX amount equals 635 kg and there will be five 68 kg passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 295 kg (635-340

(5x68) = 295 kg) as shown in step 4. NOTE:

If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The following table shows examples on how to calculate total load, cargo/

luggage, and towing capacities of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants. This table is for illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle. 7 For the following example, the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs (392 kg). 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 368 368 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE WARNING!

Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never overload them. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 369 Tires General Information Tire Pressure Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four primary areas are affected by improper tire pressure:

Safety Fuel Economy Tread Wear Safety Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability WARNING!

Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause collisions. Underinflation increases tire flexing and can result in overheating and tire failure. Overinflation reduces a tire's ability to cushion shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause damage that result in tire failure. WARNING! (Continued) Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in loss of vehicle control. Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems. You could lose control of your vehicle. Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left. Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure. Both underinflation and overinflation affect the stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish response or over responsiveness in the steering. NOTE:

Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause erratic and unpredictable steering response. SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 369 Fuel Economy Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption. Tread Wear Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnormal wear patterns and reduced tread life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replace-

ment. Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfort-

able ride. Overinflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride. Tire Inflation Pressures The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver's side B-Pillar or rear edge of the driver's side door. At least once a month:

Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual judgement when determining proper inflation. Tires may look properly inflated even when they are under-inflated. Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible 7

(Continued) Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the vehicle to drift left or right. damage. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 370 370 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE CAUTION!

After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could damage the valve stem. Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always cold tire inflation pressure. Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall. Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with temperature changes. Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi

(7 kPa) per 12F (7C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in the Winter. Example: If garage temperature = 68F (20C) and the outside temperature = 32F (0C) then the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa), which equals 1 psi

(7 kPa) for every 12F (7C) for this outside temperature condition. Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi

(13 to 40 kPa) during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure build up or your tire pres-

sure will be too low. Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds, main-

taining correct tire inflation pressure is very important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading may be required for high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to an authorized tire dealer or original equipment vehicle dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures. WARNING!

High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum load is dangerous. The added strain on your tires could cause them to fail. You could have a serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h). 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 371 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 371 Tire Spinning When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice condi-

tions, do not spin your vehicle's wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping. Refer to Freeing A Stuck Vehicle in In Case Of Emergency for further information. WARNING!

Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continuously when you are stuck, and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed. 7 Radial Ply Tires WARNING!

Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly. The instability could cause a collision. Always use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never combine them with other types of tires. Tire Repair If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it meets the following criteria:

The tire has not been driven on when flat. The damage is only on the tread section of your tire (sidewall damage is not repairable). The puncture is no greater than a of an inch (6 mm). Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and additional information. Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced immediately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and service description (Load Index and Speed Symbol). Replace the tire pres-

sure sensor as well as it is not designed to be reused. Run Flat Tires If Equipped Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles (80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has limited driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immediately. A Run Flat tire is not repairable. When a run flat tire is changed after driving with underinflated tire condition, please replace the TPM sensor as it is not designed to be reused when driven under run flat mode 14 psi (96 kPa) condition. NOTE:

TPM Sensor must be replaced after driving the vehicle on a flat tire condition. It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the run flat mode. See the tire pressure monitoring section for more information. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 372 372 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Tread Wear Indicators Tread wear indicators are in the original equip-

ment tires to help you in determining when your tires should be replaced. Life Of Tire The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including, but not limited to:

Driving style. Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replace-

ment. Distance driven. Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or higher, and Summer tires typically have a reduced tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle scheduled maintenance is highly recommended. Tire Tread 1 Worn Tire 2 New Tire These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth becomes a 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm). When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced. Refer to Replacement Tires in this section for further information. WARNING!

Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure. You could lose control and have a collision resulting in serious injury or death. NOTE:

Wheel Valve Stem must be replaced as well when installing new tires due to wear and tear in existing tires. Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact with oil, grease, and gasoline. Replacement Tires The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures. The manufacturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva-

lent to the originals in size, quality and perfor-

mance when replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on Tread Wear Indicators in this section. Refer to the Tire and Loading Infor-

mation placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for the size designation of your tire. The Load Index and Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original equipment tire sidewall. See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the Tire Safety Information section of this manual for more information relating to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 373 It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously affect your vehicles handling. If you ever replace a wheel, make sure that the wheels specifications match those of the orig-

inal wheels. It is recommended you contact an authorized tire dealer or original equipment dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifications or capability. Failure to use equivalent replace-

ment tires may adversely affect the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle. WARNING!

Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating, or speed rating other than that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations of unap-

proved tires and wheels may change suspension dimensions and performance characteristics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering and suspension components. You could lose control and have a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle.

(Continued) WARNING! (Continued) Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity, other than what was originally equipped on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load index could result in tire overloading and failure. You could lose control and have a collision. Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle control. CAUTION!

Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may result in false speedometer and odometer readings. Tire Types SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 373 sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four;

failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle. Summer Or Three Season Tires If Equipped Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with Summer tires, be aware these tires are not designed for Winter or cold driving conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle when ambient temperatures are less than 40F

(5C) or if roads are covered with ice or snow. For more information, contact an authorized dealer. Summer tires do not contain the all season designation or mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. Use Summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle. 7 All Season Tires If Equipped All Season tires provide traction for all seasons

(Spring, Summer, Autumn, and Winter). Traction levels may vary between different all season tires. All season tires can be identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on the tire WARNING!

Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe injury or death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates the possibility of loss of vehicle control. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 374 374 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Snow Tires Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires during the Winter. Snow tires can be identified by a mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size and type to the orig-

inal equipment tires. Use snow tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle. Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph (120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to orig-

inal equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures. While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states prohibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be checked before using these tire types. Spare Tires If Equipped NOTE:

For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit instead of a spare tire, please refer to Tire Service Kit in In Case Of Emergency for further information. CAUTION!

Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a compact or limited use temporary spare installed. Damage to the vehicle may result. Refer to the Towing Requirements - Tires in Starting And Operating for restrictions when towing with a spare tire designated for tempo-

rary emergency use. Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And Wheel If Equipped Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and wheel equivalent in look and function to the original equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle of your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option, refer to an autho-

rized tire dealer for the recommended tire rota-

tion pattern. Compact Spare Tire If Equipped The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only. You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the drivers side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire. Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter T or S preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M. T, S = Temporary Spare Tire Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first opportunity. Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire. Do not install more than one compact spare tire and wheel on the vehicle at any given time. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 375 WARNING!

Compact and collapsible spares are for temporary emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive more than 50 mph

(80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control. Collapsible Spare Tire If Equipped The collapsible spare is for temporary emer-

gency use only. You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a collapsible spare by looking at the spare tire description on the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the drivers side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire. Collapsible spare tire description example:

165/80-17 101P. Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first opportunity. Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel is properly installed to the vehicle. Inflate the collapsible tire using the electric air pump before lowering the vehicle. Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a conventional tire on the collapsible spare wheel, since the wheel is designed specifically for the collapsible spare tire. WARNING!

Compact and Collapsible spares are for temporary emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive more than 50 mph

(80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control. SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 375 Full Size Spare If Equipped The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only. This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity. Limited Use Spare If Equipped The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use only. This tire is identified by a label located on the limited use spare wheel. This label contains the driving limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity. 7 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 376 376 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE WARNING!

Limited use spares are for emergency use only. Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the speed listed on the limited use spare wheel. Keep inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on your Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the drivers side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the drivers side door. Replace (or repair) the original equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle control. Wheel And Wheel Trim Care All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly using mild (neutral Ph) soap and water to maintain their luster and to prevent corro-

sion. Wash wheels with the same soap solution recommended for the body of the vehicle and remember to always wash when the surfaces are not hot to the touch. Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration caused by salt, sodium chloride, magnesium chloride, calcium chloride, etc., and other road chemicals used to melt ice or control dust on dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and mild soap to wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh chemicals or a stiff brush. They can damage the wheels protective coating that helps keep them from corroding and tarnishing. CAUTION!

Avoid products or automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or strong alkaline additives or harsh brushes. Many aftermarket wheel cleaners and automatic car washes may damage the wheel's protective finish. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap, Mopar Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is recommended. When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including excessive brake dust, care must be taken in the selection of tire and wheel cleaning chemicals and equipment to prevent damage to the wheels. Mopar Wheel Treatment or Mopar Chrome Cleaner or their equivalent is recom-

mended or select a non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner for aluminum or chrome wheels. CAUTION!

Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush, metal polishes or oven cleaner. These products may damage the wheel's protective finish. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap, Mopar Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is recommended. NOTE:

If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for an extended period after cleaning the wheels with wheel cleaner, drive your vehicle and apply the brakes to remove the water droplets from the brake components. This activity will remove the red rust on the brake rotors and prevent vehicle vibration when braking. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 377 Dark Vapor Chrome, Black Satin Chrome, or Low Gloss Clear Coat Wheels CAUTION!

If your vehicle is equipped with these specialty wheels, DO NOT USE wheel cleaners, abrasives, or polishing compounds. They will permanently damage this finish and such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. HAND WASH ONLY USING MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH. Used on a regular basis; this is all that is required to maintain this finish. Tire Chains (Traction Devices) Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body clearance. Follow these recommen-

dations to guard against damage:

Traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as recommended by the traction device manufacturer. Install on front tires only. For a 235/65R17 or 235/60R18 tire, use of a snow traction device with a maximum projection of 9 mm beyond the tire profile is recommended. SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 377 WARNING!

CAUTION! (Continued) Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow) between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable handling. You could lose control and have a collision. CAUTION!

To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the following precautions:

Because of restricted traction device clear-

ance between tires and other suspension components, it is important that only trac-

tion devices in good condition are used. Broken devices can cause serious damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise occurs that could indicate device breakage. Remove the damaged parts of the device before further use. Install device as tightly as possible and then retighten after driving about mile

(0.8 km). Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).

(Continued) Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle. Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pavement. Observe the traction device manufacturers instructions on the method of installation, operating speed, and conditions for use. Always use the suggested operating speed of the device manufacturers if it is less than 30 mph (48 km/h). Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire. Tire Rotation Recommendations 7 The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at different loads and perform different steering, driving, and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at unequal rates. These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires. The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 378 378 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE and wet traction levels, and contribute to a smooth, quiet ride. Refer to the Scheduled Servicing for the proper maintenance intervals. The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being performed. The suggested rotation method is the forward cross shown in the following diagram. This rotation pattern does not apply to some direc-

tional tires that must not be reversed. Tire Rotation (Forward Cross) DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES The following tire grading categories were established by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The specific grade rating assigned by the tire's manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on your vehicle. All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal safety requirements in addi-

tion to these grades. Treadwear The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to varia-

tions in driving habits, service practices, and differences in road characteristics and climate. Traction Grades The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance. WARNING!

The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 379 Temperature Grades The Temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under controlled conditions on a speci-

fied indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all passenger vehicle tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A repre-

sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel, than the minimum required by law. WARNING!

The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure. STORING THE VEHICLE If the vehicle should remain stationary for more than a month, observe the following precau-

tions:

Park your vehicle in a covered, dry and possibly airy location the windows open slightly. engaged. Disconnect the negative (-) terminal from the battery post and be sure that the battery is fully charged. During storage check battery charge quarterly. If you do not disconnect the battery from the electrical system, check the battery charge every 30 days. SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 379 Clean and protect the painted parts by applying protective waxes. Clean and protect polished metal parts by applying protective waxes. Apply talcum powder to the front and rear wiper blades and leave raised from the glass. Cover the vehicle with an appropriate cover taking care not to damage the painted surface by dragging across dirty surfaces. Do not use plastic sheeting which will not allow the evaporation of moisture present on the surface of the vehicle. Inflate the tires at a pressure of +7.25 psi

(+0.5 bar) higher than recommended on the tire placard and check it periodically. 7 Whenever you leave the vehicle stationary for two weeks or more, idle the vehicle for approximately five minutes, with the air conditioning system on and high fan speed. This will ensure proper lubrication of the system, thus minimizing the possibility of damage to the compressor when the vehicle is put back into operation. Check that the Electric Park Brake is not Do not drain the vehicles cooling system. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 380 380 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE CAUTION!

Before removal of the positive and negative terminals to the battery, wait at least a minute with ignition switch in the OFF position and close the drivers door. When reconnecting the positive and negative terminals to the battery be sure the ignition switch is in the OFF position and the drivers door is closed. The following maintenance recommendations will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle. What Causes Corrosion?

Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle. The most common causes are:

Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation BODYWORK Protection From Atmospheric Agents Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly corro-

sive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking, which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants, road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and under-

body protection. Stone and gravel impact Insects, tree sap and tar Salt in the air near seacoast localities Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants Body And Underbody Maintenance Cleaning Headlights Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog lights that are lighter and less suscep-

tible to stone breakage than glass headlights. Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be followed. To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution followed by rinsing. Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel wool or other aggressive mate-

rial to clean the lenses. Preserving The Bodywork Washing Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle in the shade using Mopar Car Wash, or a mild car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with clear water. If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumulated on your vehicle, use Mopar Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover to remove. Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as Mopar Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect your paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint. Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 381 CAUTION!

Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such as steel wool or scouring powder that will scratch metal and painted surfaces. Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi

(8,274 kPa) can result in damage or removal of paint and decals. Special Care If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive near the ocean, hose off the undercar-

riage at least once a month. It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and open. If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint, touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is considered the respon-

sibility of the owner. If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar cause that destroys the paint and protective coating, have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner. If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers, de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well packaged and sealed. If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider mud or stone shields behind each wheel. Use Mopar Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as possible. An authorized dealer has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle. INTERIORS Seats And Fabric Parts Use Mopar Total Clean to clean fabric uphol-

stery and carpeting. WARNING!

Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes. Many are potentially flammable, and if used in closed areas they may cause respiratory harm. SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 381 Seat Belt Maintenance Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chem-

ical solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric. Sun damage can also weaken the fabric. If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solu-

tion or lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth. Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do not work properly. WARNING!

A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.). 7 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 382 382 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Plastic And Coated Parts Leather Parts Use Mopar Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery. CAUTION!

Direct contact of air fresheners, insect repellents, suntan lotions, or hand sani-

tizers to the plastic, painted, or decorated surfaces of the interior may cause perma-

nent damage. Wipe away immediately. Damage caused by these type of products may not be covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic. 1. Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution may be used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp cloth. 2. Dry with a soft cloth. Mopar Total Clean is specifically recommended for leather upholstery. Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth. Stub-

born soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and Mopar Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not required to maintain the original condi-

tion. NOTE:

If equipped with light colored leather, it tends to show any foreign material, dirt, and fabric dye transfer more so than darker colors. The leather is designed for easy cleaning, and FCA recom-

mends Mopar total care leather cleaner applied on a cloth to clean the leather seats as needed. CAUTION!

Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or Ketone based cleaning products to clean leather seats, as damage to the seat may result. Glass Surfaces All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with Mopar Glass Cleaner, or any commercial household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear window equipped with electric defrosters or windows equipped with radio antennas. Do not use scrapers or other sharp instruments that may scratch the elements. When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the towel or cloth that you are using. Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 383 IDENTIFICATION DATA Vehicle Identification Number The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is on the left front corner of the instrument panel and is visible from outside of the vehicle through the windshield. Vehicle Identification Number NOTE:

It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 383 BRAKE SYSTEM Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic brake systems. If either of the two hydraulic systems loses normal capability, the remaining system will still function. However, there will be some loss of overall braking effectiveness. You may notice increased pedal travel during appli-

cation, greater pedal force required to slow or stop, and potential activation of the Brake Warning Light. In the event power assist is lost for any reason

(i.e., repeated brake applications with the engine off) the brakes will still function. However, the effort required to brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required with the power system operating. WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure that the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any time a wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the vehicle, the lug nuts/

bolts should be torqued using a properly cali-

brated torque wrench using a high quality six sided (hex) deep wall socket. Torque Specifications Lug Nut/Bolt Torque

**Lug Nut/

Bolt Size Lug Nut/Bolt Socket Size 100 Ft-Lbs

(135 Nm) M12 x 1.5 19 mm

**Use only authorized dealer recommended lug nuts/bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before tightening. Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting the tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles. 8 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 384 384 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Wheel Mounting Surface Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each nut/bolt has been tightened twice. Ensure that the socket is fully engaged on the lug nut/

bolt (do not insert it halfway). FUEL REQUIREMENTS 3.6L Engine Torque Patterns After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut/bolt torque to be sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated against the wheel. WARNING!

To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not tighten the lug nuts/bolts fully until the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result in personal injury. Do not use E-85 flex fuel or ethanol blends greater than 15% in this engine. These engines are designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide optimum fuel economy and perfor-

mance when using high quality unleaded Regular gasoline having a posted octane number of 87 as specified by the (R+M)/

2 method. The use of higher octane Premium gasoline is not required, as it will not provide any benefit over Regular gasoline in these engines. While operating on gasoline with an octane number of 87, hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is not a cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard making a heavy knocking sound, see your dealer immediately. Use of gasoline with an octane number lower than 87 can cause engine failure and may void or not be covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before considering service for the vehicle. Reformulated Gasoline Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning gasoline referred to as Refor-

mulated Gasoline. Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality. The use of reformulated gasoline is recom-

mended. Properly blended reformulated gaso-

line will provide improved performance and durability of engine and fuel system compo-

nents. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 385 Materials Added To Fuel Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends Do Not Use E-85 In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper octane rating, gasolines that contain detergents, corrosion and stability additives are recommended. Using gasolines that have these additives will help improve fuel economy, reduce emissions, and maintain vehicle perfor-

mance. Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline contains a higher level of detergents to further aide in minimizing engine and fuel system deposits. When available, the usage of TOP TIER Detergent gasoline is recommended. Visit www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Retailers. Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents should be avoided. Many of these mate-

rials intended for gum and varnish removal may contain active solvents or similar ingredients. These can harm fuel system gasket and diaphragm materials. Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxygenates such as ethanol. CAUTION!

DO NOT use E-85, gasoline containing methanol, or gasoline containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15). Use of these blends may result in starting and drivability problems, damage critical fuel system components, cause emissions to exceed the applicable standard, and/or cause the Malfunction Indicator Light to illuminate. Please observe pump labels as they should clearly communicate if a fuel contains greater than 15% ethanol (E-15). Problems that result from using gasoline containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15) or gasoline containing methanol are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or not be covered under New Vehicle Limited Warranty. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 385 Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gasoline containing up to 15% ethanol

(E-15). Use of gasoline with higher ethanol content may void the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85 fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:

Operate in a lean mode OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on Poor engine performance Poor cold start and cold drivability Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion 8 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 386 386 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications Fuel System Cautions Modifications that allow the engine to run on Compressed Natural Gas (CNG) or Liquid Propane (LP) may result in damage to the engine, emissions, and fuel system compo-

nents. Problems that result from running CNG or LP are not the responsibility of the manufac-

turer and may void or not be covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. MMT In Gasoline Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl

(MMT) is a manganese-containing metallic addi-

tive that is blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline blended with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond gasoline of the same octane number without MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and reduces emissions system performance in some vehicles. The manufac-

turer recommends that gasoline without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump; therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal and California reformulated gasoline. CAUTION!

Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicles performance:

The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by Federal law. Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance and damage the emissions control system. An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or igni-

tion malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune or malfunc-

tioning and may require immediate service. Contact an authorized dealer for service assistance. The use of fuel additives, which are now being sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended. Most of these products contain high concentrations of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle perfor-

mance problems resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not the responsi-

bility of the manufacturer and may void or not be covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. NOTE:

Intentional tampering with the emissions control system can result in civil penalties being assessed against you. Carbon Monoxide Warnings WARNING!

Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly. Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning:

Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running for an extended period. If the vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine running for more than a short period, adjust the ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle. Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with all side windows fully open. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 387 FLUID CAPACITIES Fuel (Approximate) 3.6L Engine Engine Oil With Filter 3.6L Engine (SAE 0W-20 , API Certified) Cooling System*

3.6L Engine (Mopar Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/

150,000 Mile (240,000 km) Formula) 13.1 Quarts Standard Duty Cooling 12.4 Liters Standard Duty Cooling 13.4 Quarts Heavy Duty Cooling 12.7 Liters Heavy Duty Cooling

* Includes heater and coolant reservoir filled to MAX level. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 387 US 19 Gallons 5 Quarts Metric 71 Liters 4.7 Liters 8 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 388 388 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS Engine Engine Coolant Engine Oil 3.6L Engine Engine Oil Filter Spark Plugs Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part We recommend you use Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile (240, 000 km) Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032. We recommend you use API Certified SAE 0W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-6395 such as Mopar, Pennzoil, and Shell Helix. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade. We recommend you use a Mopar Engine Oil Filter. We recommend you use Mopar Spark Plugs. Fuel Selection 3.6L Engine 87 Octane (R+M)/2 Method, 0-15% Ethanol (Do not use E-85). 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 389 CAUTION!

CAUTION! (Continued) Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than specified Organic Additive Technology

(OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine damage and may decrease corro-

sion protection. Organic Additive Technology

(OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any globally compatible coolant (anti-

freeze). If a non-OAT engine coolant (anti-

freeze) is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency, the cooling system will need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

(Continued) Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the radiator. This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene glycol-based engine coolant

(antifreeze). Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recom-

mended. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 389 8 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 390 390 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Chassis Automatic Transmission Brake Master Cylinder Refrigerant Compressor Oil Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part Use only Mopar ZF 8&9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid, or equivalent. Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or performance of your transmission. We recommend you use Mopar DOT 3 Brake Fluid, SAE J1703 should be used. Use only refrigerant R-1234yf Charge Amounts:

Single A/C System 1.94 lb (880g) Dual A/C System 2.31 lb (1,050g) Use only PAG oil PSD-1:

Single A/C System 140 ml Dual A/C System 190 ml 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 391 UCONNECT SYSTEMS For detailed information about your Uconnect 4/4C/4C Nav With 8.4-inch Display system, refer to your Uconnect Owners Manual Supple-

ment. NOTE:

Uconnect screen images are for illustration purposes only and may not reflect exact soft-

ware for your vehicle. CYBERSECURITY Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and may be equipped with both wired and wireless networks. These networks allow your vehicle to send and receive information. This information allows systems and features in your vehicle to function properly. MULTIMEDIA Your vehicle may be equipped with certain secu-

rity features to reduce the risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to vehicle systems and wireless communications. Vehicle software technology continues to evolve over time and FCA US LLC, working with its suppliers, evalu-

ates and takes appropriate steps as needed. Similar to a computer or other devices, your vehicle may require software updates to improve the usability and performance of your systems or to reduce the potential risk of unau-

thorized and unlawful access to your vehicle systems. The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to your vehicle systems may still exist, even if the most recent version of vehicle software (such as Uconnect software) is installed. 391 WARNING!

It is not possible to know or to predict all of the possible outcomes if your vehicles systems are breached. It may be possible that vehicle systems, including safety related systems, could be impaired or a loss of vehicle control could occur that may result in an accident involving serious injury or death. ONLY insert media (e.g., USB, SD card, or CD) into your vehicle if it came from a trusted source. Media of unknown origin could possibly contain malicious software, and if installed in your vehicle, it may increase the possibility for vehicle systems to be breached. As always, if you experience unusual vehicle behavior, take your vehicle to your nearest authorized dealer immediately. 9 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 392 392 MULTIMEDIA NOTE:

FCA US LLC or your dealer may contact you directly regarding software updates. To help further improve vehicle security and minimize the potential risk of a security breach, vehicle owners should:

Routinely check www.driveuconnect.com

(US Residents) or www.driveuconnect.ca

(Canadian Residents) to learn about available Uconnect software updates. Only connect and use trusted media devices (e.g. personal mobile phones, USBs, CDs). Privacy of any wireless and wired communica-

tions cannot be assured. Third parties may unlawfully intercept information and private communications without your consent. For further information, refer to Data Collection &

Privacy in your Uconnect Owners Manual Supplement or Onboard Diagnostic System

(OBD II) Cybersecurity in Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel. UCONNECT SETTINGS The Uconnect system uses a combination of buttons on the touchscreen and buttons on the faceplate located on the center of the instru-

ment panel. These buttons allow you to access and change the Customer Programmable Features. Many features can vary by vehicle. Buttons on the faceplate are located below and/or beside the Uconnect system in the center of the instrument panel. In addition, there is a Scroll/Enter control knob located on the right side. Turn the control knob to scroll through menus and change settings. Push the center of the control knob one or more times to select or change a setting. Your Uconnect system may also have Screen Off and Mute buttons on the faceplate. Push the Screen Off button on the faceplate to turn off the Uconnect screen. Push the button again or tap the screen to turn the screen on. Push the Back Arrow button to exit out of a Menu or certain option on the Uconnect system. Customer Programmable Features Uconnect 4 Settings Uconnect 4 Buttons On The Touchscreen And Buttons On The Faceplate 1 Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen 2 Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate button then press the button on the touchscreen to Press the Apps Settings display the settings menu screen and press the Up or Down Arrow buttons on the right side of the screen to move up or down through the available settings. Settings gives you to access all of the available programmable features. NOTE:

Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a time. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 393 Depending on the vehicle options, feature settings may vary. To change features, select the desired feature. This will bring you to the available options for the feature. Change feature settings as desired by pressing and releasing the preferred setting option until a check-mark appears next to the setting. Once the desired selection is made, either press the Back Arrow or the X button on the touchscreen to close the settings screen. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow buttons on the touchscreen allows you to toggle through the available settings. The list of programmable features include:

NOTE:

All settings should be changed with the ignition in the ON/RUN position. MULTIMEDIA 393 KeySense This feature allows you to control specific settings when the KeySense key is in use. The vehicles KeySense settings are protected by a unique 4-digit PIN, which the vehicle owner creates when accessing the specific settings for the first time. This 4-digit PIN can only be reset by an authorized dealer. After pressing the KeySense button on the touchscreen, and entering the KeySense PIN, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name Selectable Options ParkSense If Equipped Sound Only Sound and Display NOTE:

The ParkSense system setting will scan for objects behind the vehicle when the transmission gear selector is in REVERSE (R) and the vehicle speed is less than 7 mph (11 km/h), when enabled. It will provide an alert (audible and/or visual) to indicate the proximity to other objects. The system can be enabled with Sound Only or Sound and Display. Front ParkSense Volume Rear ParkSense Volume Rear ParkSense Braking Assist Low Low On Medium Medium Off High High 9 NOTE:

When the Rear ParkSense Braking Assist feature is selected, the Park Assist system will detect objects located behind the vehicle and utilize auton-

omous braking to stop the vehicle. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 394 394 MULTIMEDIA Setting Name Selectable Options Blind Spot Alert If Equipped Lights Lights & Chime NOTE:

When the Blind Spot Alert feature is selected, it will alert, visibly and/or audibly, to indicate objects are in your blind spot. The Blind Spot Alert feature can be activated in Lights mode. When this mode is selected, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is activated and will only show a visual alert in the exterior mirrors. When Lights & Chime mode is activated, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) will show a visual alert in the exterior mirrors as well as an audible alert when the turn signal is on. If your vehicle has experienced any damage in the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is not damaged, the sensor may have become misaligned. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor alignment. Having a sensor that is misaligned will result in the BSM not operating to specification. NOTE:

The Maximum Vehicle Speed feature can be set to 65, 70, 75, 80, or 85 mph (90, 95, 100, 105, 110 km/h). Maximum Vehicle Speed Start Up Fuel Level Message Early Low Fuel Alert

On On

Off Off Language After pressing the Language button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name Language English Espaol Selectable Options Franais NOTE:

When the Language feature is selected, you may select one of multiple languages (English / Franais / Espaol) for all display nomenclature, including the trip functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Press the Language button on the touchscreen, then press the desired language button on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to the language, showing that setting has been selected. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 395 Display After pressing the Display button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available. MULTIMEDIA 395 Selectable Options Manual NOTE:

To make changes to the "Display Brightness With Headlights ON" setting, the headlights must be on and the interior dimmer switch must not be in the "party" or "parade" position. The setting can be changed from 1-10. NOTE:

To make changes to the "Display Brightness With Headlights OFF" setting, the headlights must be off and the interior dimmer switch must not be in the "party" or "parade" position. Setting Name Display Mode Display Brightness Headlights ON Display Brightness Headlights OFF Touchscreen Beep Control Screen Time-Out If Equipped NOTE:

When the Control Screen Time-Out feature is selected, the Control Screen will stay open for five seconds before the screen times out. With the feature deselected, the screen will stay open until it is manually closed. Navigation Turn-By-Turn In Cluster If Equipped 9 NOTE:

When the Navigation Turn-By-Turn In Cluster feature is selected, the turn-by-turn directions will appear in the instrument cluster display as the vehicle approaches a designated turn within a programmed route. Phone Pop-Ups Displayed in Cluster If Equipped Auto

On On On On

Off Off Off Off 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 396 396 MULTIMEDIA Units After pressing the Units button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name Units Selectable Options Metric Custom NOTE:

The Custom option allows you to set the Speed (MPH, or km/h), Distance (mi, or km), Fuel Consumption [MPG (US), MPG (UK), L/100 km, or km/L], Pressure (psi, kPa, or bar), and Temperature (C, or F) units of measurement independently. Voice After pressing the Voice button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name Voice Response Length Show Command List Selectable Options Detailed With Help Never US Brief Always 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 397 Clock After pressing the Clock button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Selectable Options Sync Time With GPS If Equipped Setting Name Set Time Hours Set Time Minutes Time Format NOTE:

The Set Time Hours feature will allow you to adjust the hours. The Sync Time With GPS button on the touchscreen must be unchecked. NOTE:

The Set Time Minutes feature will allow you to adjust the minutes. The Sync Time With GPS button on the touchscreen must be unchecked. On

12 hrs AM NOTE:

Within the Set Time and Format setting, press the corresponding Arrow buttons on the touchscreen to adjust to the correct time. MULTIMEDIA 397 Off

24 hrs PM 9 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 398 398 MULTIMEDIA Camera If Equipped After pressing the Camera button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name Surround View Camera Delay If Equipped Selectable Options NOTE:

The Surround View Camera Delay setting determines whether or not the screen will display the 360 degree view image with guidelines for up to 10 seconds after the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE. This delay will be canceled if the vehicles speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into PARK (P), or the ignition is switched to the OFF position. Surround View Camera Guidelines If Equipped NOTE:

The Surround View Camera Guidelines feature allows you to see active guidelines over the surround view camera display whenever the gear selector is put into REVERSE or the surround view camera guidelines button on the touchscreen is pressed. The image will be displayed on the radio touch-

screen display. ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines NOTE:

The ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines setting overlays the Backup Camera image with active, or dynamic, grid lines to help illustrate the width of the vehicle and its projected backup path, based on the steering wheel position when the option is checked. A dashed center line overlay indicates the center of the vehicle to assist with parking or aligning to a hitch/receiver. Off Off Off On On On 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 399 Safety/Assistance After pressing the Safety/Assistance button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name LaneSense Warning If Equipped Early Selectable Options Medium NOTE:

The LaneSense Warning setting determines at what distance the LaneSense system warns you, through steering wheel feedback, of a possible lane departure. Sound Only Sound and Display LaneSense Strength If Equipped ParkSense If Equipped Front ParkSense Volume If Rear ParkSense Volume If Rear ParkSense Braking Assist If Surround View Camera Delay If Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped Low Low Low On On Medium Medium Medium Off Off MULTIMEDIA 399 Late High High High NOTE:

The Surround View Camera Delay setting determines whether or not the screen will display the 360 degree view image with guidelines for up to 10 seconds after the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE. This delay will be canceled if the vehicles speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into PARK (P), or the ignition is switched to the OFF position. 9 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 400 400 MULTIMEDIA Setting Name If Equipped Surround View Camera Guidelines On Selectable Options NOTE:

The Surround View Camera Guidelines feature allows you to see active guidelines over the surround view camera display whenever the gear selector is put into REVERSE or the surround view camera guidelines button on the touchscreen is pressed. The image will be displayed on the radio touch-

screen display. ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines If Equipped NOTE:

The ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines setting overlays the Backup Camera image with active, or dynamic, grid lines to help illustrate the width of the vehicle and its projected backup path, based on the steering wheel position when the option is checked. A dashed center line overlay indicates the center of the vehicle to assist with parking or aligning to a hitch/receiver. Blind Spot Alert If Equipped Lights Lights and Chime NOTE:

When the Blind Spot Alert feature is selected, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is activated and will show a visual alert in the outside mirrors, or it will show a visual alert in the outside mirrors as well as play an audible alert when the turn signal is on. When Off is selected, the BSM system is deactivated. If your vehicle has experienced any damage in the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is not damaged, the sensor may have become misaligned. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor alignment. A sensor that is misaligned will result in the BSM not operating to specification. Hill Start Assist If Equipped Keysense If Equipped On Off On On Off Off Off Off 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 401 Mirrors & Wipers After pressing the Mirror & Wipers button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

MULTIMEDIA 401 Setting Name Tilt Side Mirrors in Reverse If Equipped Rain Sensing Auto Wipers If Equipped Headlights with Wipers If Equipped Brakes After pressing the Brakes button on the touch-

screen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name Auto Park Brake Brake Service Selectable Options Selectable Options On On On On Yes Off Off Off Off No NOTE:

Selecting the Brake Service feature will display a pop-up asking whether or you would like to retract the park brakes to allow brake system service. 9 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 402 402 MULTIMEDIA Lights After pressing the Lights button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available. Setting Name Headlight Off Delay Selectable Options NOTE:

When the Headlight Off Delay feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time the headlights remain on after the engine is shut off. NOTE:

When this feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time the headlights remain on after the doors are unlocked with the key fob. NOTE:

When Daytime Running Lights feature is selected, the daytime running lights can be turned on or off. This feature is only available if allowed by law in the country of the vehicle purchase. Headlight Illumination On Approach Headlights With Wipers If Equipped Auto Dim High Beams If Equipped Daytime Running Lights Flash Lights With Lock Flash Lights With Power Sliding Door 60 sec 90 sec 60 sec 90 sec Off Off No Off Off 0 sec 30 sec 0 sec 30 sec On On Yes On On 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 403 MULTIMEDIA 403 Doors & Locks After pressing the Doors & Locks button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

NOTE:

The auto door lock feature default condition is enabled. When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically when the vehicles speed exceeds 12 mph

(20 km/h). The auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by an authorized dealer per written request of the customer. Please see an authorized dealer for service. Setting Name Auto Unlock On Exit Selectable Options NOTE:

When the Auto Unlock On Exit feature is selected, all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL

(N) position and the driver's door is opened. 1st Press 2nd Press On On Off On Flash Lights With Lock If Sound Horn With Lock If Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped Sound Horn With Remote Start If 1st Press of Key Fob Unlocks If Driver NOTE:

When the 1st Press of Key Fob Unlocks features Driver option is programmed, only the driver's door will unlock on the first push of the key fob unlock button; you must push the key fob unlock button twice to unlock the passengers doors. When All is programmed, all of the doors will unlock on the first press of the key fob unlock button. If All is programmed, all doors will unlock no matter which Passive Entry equipped door handle is grasped. If Driver is programmed, only the drivers door will unlock when the drivers door is grasped. Touching the handle more than once will only result in the drivers door opening once. If the driver door is opened, the interior door lock/unlock switch can be used to unlock all doors (or use key fob). 9 Off Off Off All 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 404 404 MULTIMEDIA Setting Name Passive Entry Hands Free Power Liftgate If Equipped Hands Free Power Sliding Door Flashing Lights with Power Sliding Door If Equipped Hands Free Power Lift Gate Hands Free Power Sliding Door Personal Settings Linked to Key Fob If Equipped NOTE:

When the Power Liftgate Alert feature is selected, an alert plays when the power liftgate is raising or lowering. NOTE:

The Sliding Door Alert feature only occurs when the hands-free feature is used, and not for other methods of opening the sliding door. On On On On On On On Selectable Options Off Off Off Off Off Off Off NOTE:

The Personal Settings Linked to Key Fob feature provides automatic recall of all settings stored to a memory location (drivers seat, exterior mirrors, steering column position, and radio station presets) to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle. The seat returns to the memorized seat location, if the settings is set to On, when the key fob is used to unlock the door. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 405 Auto-On Comfort If Equipped After pressing the Auto-On Comfort button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Steering Wheel With Vehicle Start (if equipped) Off All Starts Selectable Options Remote Start NOTE:

When this feature is selected, the drivers heated seat and heated steering wheel will automatically turn ON when temperatures are below 40F

(4.4C). When temperatures are above 80F (26.7C) the driver vented seat will turn on. MULTIMEDIA 405 Key Off Options After pressing the Engine Off Options button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name Key Off Power Delay If Equipped Selectable Options NOTE:

When the Engine Off Power Delay feature is selected, the power window switches, radio, Uconnect phone system (if equipped), DVD video system

(if equipped), power sunroof (if equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is placed in the OFF position. Opening either front door will cancel this feature. 9 Headlight Off Delay NOTE:

When the Headlight Off Delay feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time the headlights remain on after the engine is shut off. 45 sec 10 min 30 sec 90 sec 0 sec 5 min 0 sec 60 sec 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 406 406 MULTIMEDIA Setting Name Easy Exit Seat If Equipped Selectable Options On Off NOTE:

When the Easy Exit Seat feature is selected, it provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle. Audio After pressing the Audio button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name Equalizer Selectable Options Bass Mid Treble NOTE:

When in this display you may adjust the Bass, Mid, and Treble settings. Adjust the settings with the + and setting buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on the scale between the + and buttons on the touchscreen. Bass/Mid/Treble also allow you to simply slide your finger up or down to change the setting, as well as press directly on the desired setting. Balance/Fade Up Arrow Button Down Arrow Button Left Arrow Button Button Right Arrow Center C Button NOTE:

When in this display you may adjust the Balance/Fade of the audio by using the Arrow button on the touchscreen to adjust the sound level from the front and rear or right and left side speakers. Press the C Button on the touchscreen to reset the balance and fade to the factory setting. Speed Adjusted Volume Off 1 3 Surround Sound If Equipped Loudness On Yes NOTE:

This feature improves sound quality at lower volumes when enabled. 2 Off No 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 407 MULTIMEDIA 407 Setting Name AUX Volume Offset If Equipped Selectable Options NOTE:

This feature provides the ability to tune the audio level for portable devices connected through the AUX input. On On Off Off NOTE:

The AutoPlay setting, when activated, automatically starts playing music off of a connect device as soon as it is connected. Phone/Bluetooth After pressing the Phone/Bluetooth button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Phone Pop-ups Displayed in Cluster On Off Selectable Options List of Settings AutoPlay Setting Name Do Not Disturb NOTE:

The Do Not Disturb feature allows the paired phone to send a predetermined call, text, or both, to any incoming call, or text, before sending it directly to voicemail. It also keeps a counter of all missed calls and texts while on the road. Paired Phones and Audio Devices List of Paired Phones NOTE:

This feature shows which phones are paired to the Phone/Bluetooth system. For further information, refer to the Uconnect Owners Manual Supple-

ment. 9 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 408 408 MULTIMEDIA SiriusXM Setup If Equipped After pressing the SiriusXM Setup button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name Tune Start Channel Skip On Off Selectable Options List of Channels NOTE:

SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to exclude undesirable channels while scanning. This feature allows you to select the channels you would like to skip. Subscription Information Sirius ID NOTE:

New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio with your radio. Following the expiration of the free services, it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription Information screen to re-subscribe. 1. Press the Subscription Information button on the touchscreen to access the Subscription Information screen. 2. Write down the Sirius ID numbers for your receiver. To reactivate your service, either call the number listed on the screen or visit the provider online. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 409 Clear Personal Data After pressing the Clear Personal Data button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name Clear Personal Data Selectable Options NOTE:

When the Clear Personal Data feature is selected, it will remove all personal data including Bluetooth devices and presets. Restore Settings After pressing the Restore Settings button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name Restore Settings to Default Selectable Options NOTE:

When the Restore Settings to Default feature is selected it resets all settings to their default settings. Cancel Cancel Yes Yes MULTIMEDIA 409 9 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 410 410 MULTIMEDIA Customer Programmable Features Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Settings Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Buttons On The Touchscreen And Buttons On The Faceplate 1 Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen 2 Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate button, then press the button on the touchscreen to Press the Apps Settings display the menu setting screen. In this mode the Uconnect system allows you to access all of the available programmable features. NOTE:

at a time. Only one touchscreen area may be selected Depending on the vehicles options, feature settings may vary. When making a selection, press the button on the touchscreen to enter the desired mode. Once in the desired mode, press and release the preferred setting option until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that setting has been selected. Once the setting is complete, either press the Back Arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu, or press the X button on the touchscreen to close out of the settings screen. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow button on the right side of the screen will allow you to toggle up or down through the available settings. KeySense The vehicles KeySense settings are protected by a unique four digit PIN, which the vehicle owner creates when accessing the specific settings for the first time. This four digit PIN can only be reset by an authorized dealer. After pressing the KeySense button on the touchscreen, and entering the KeySense PIN, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name Forward Collision Sensitivity If Equipped Forward Collision Warning Active Braking If Equipped Near On Selectable Options Med Far Off NOTE:

When the Forward Collision Warning Active Braking feature is selected, the Advanced Brake Assist (ABA) applies additional brake pressure when the driver requests insufficient brake pressure to avoid a potential frontal collision. The ABA system becomes active at 5 mph (8 km/h). 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 411 MULTIMEDIA 411 Setting Name ParkSense If Equipped Front ParkSense Volume Rear ParkSense Volume Rear ParkSense Braking Assist Sound Low Low On Selectable Options Sound & Display High Med Med NOTE:

When the Rear ParkSense Braking Assist feature is selected, the Park Assist system will detect objects located behind the vehicle and utilize auton-

omous braking to stop the vehicle. Blind Spot Alert If Equipped Lights Lights & Chime NOTE:

When the Blind Spot Alert feature is selected, it will alert you, visibly and/or audibly, to indicate objects that are in your blind spot. The Blind Spot Alert feature can be activated in Lights mode. When this mode is selected, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is activated and will only show a visual alert in the exterior mirrors. When Lights & Chime mode is activated, BSM will show a visual alert in the exterior mirrors as well as an audible alert when the turn signal is on. If your vehicle has experienced any damage in the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is not damaged, the sensor may have become misaligned. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor alignment. Having a sensor that is misaligned will result in the BSM not operating to specification. Maximum Vehicle Speed

NOTE:

The Maximum Vehicle Speed feature can be set to 65, 70, 75, 80, or 85 mph (90, 95, 100, 105 or 110 km/h). 9 Off

20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 412 412 MULTIMEDIA Setting Name Start Up Fuel Level Message Earlier Low Fuel Alert Channel Skip On On Selectable Options List of Channels Off Off NOTE:

SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to exclude undesirable channels while scanning. This feature allows you to select the channels you would like to skip. Subscription Information Sirius ID NOTE:

New vehicle purchasers or lessees receive a free limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio with your radio. Following the expiration of the free services, it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription Information screen to re-subscribe. 1. Press the Subscription Information button on the touchscreen to access the Subscription Information screen. 2. Write down the Sirius ID numbers for your receiver. To reactivate your service, either call the number listed on the screen or visit the provider online. SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 413 MULTIMEDIA 413 Language After pressing the Language button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name Language Selectable Options List of Languages NOTE:

When the Language feature is selected, you may select one of multiple languages (English / Franais / Espaol) for all display nomenclature, including the trip functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Press the Language button on the touchscreen, then press the desired language button on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to the language, showing that setting has been selected. Display After pressing the Display button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Selectable Options Setting Name Display Display Brightness Headlights ON Display Brightness Headlights OFF Manual

NOTE:

To make changes to the "Display Brightness With Headlights ON" setting, the headlights must be on and the interior dimmer switch must not be in the "party" or "parade" position. NOTE:

To make changes to the "Display Brightness With Headlights OFF" setting, the headlights must be off and the interior dimmer switch must not be in the "party" or "parade" position. 9 Auto

20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 414 414 MULTIMEDIA Setting Name Set Theme Touchscreen Beep Control Screen Time-Out (if equipped) Navigation Next Turn Pop-ups In Cluster (if equipped) Phone Pop-Ups Displayed in Cluster Ready to Drive Pop-Up (if equipped) NOTE:

When the Set Theme feature is selected, you may select the theme for the display screen. To make your selection, press the Set Theme button on the touchscreen, then select the desired theme option button until a check-mark appears showing that the setting has been selected. Selectable Options NOTE:

When the Control Screen Time-Out feature is selected, the Control Screen will stay open for five seconds before the screen times out. With the feature deselected, the screen will stay open until it is manually closed. NOTE:

When the Navigation Next Turn Pop-ups In Cluster feature is selected, the turn-by-turn directions will appear in the instrument cluster display as the vehicle approaches a designated turn within a programmed route. Off Off Off Off Off Off On On On On On On 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 415 Units After pressing the Units button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name Units US Custom Selectable Options Metric NOTE:

The Custom option allows you to set the Speed (MPH, or km/h), Distance (mi, or km), Fuel Consumption [MPG (US), MPG (UK), L/100 km, or km/L], Pressure (psi, kPa, or bar), and Temperature (C, or F) units of measurement independently. MULTIMEDIA 415 Voice After pressing the Voice button on the touch-

screen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name Voice Response Length Show Command List Brief Never Selectable Options Detailed With Help Always 9 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 416 416 MULTIMEDIA Clock After pressing the Clock button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Selectable Options NOTE:

The Set Time Hours feature will allow you to adjust the hours. The Sync Time With GPS button on the touchscreen must be unchecked. NOTE:

The Set Time Minutes feature will allow you to adjust the minutes. The Sync Time with GPS button on the touchscreen must be unchecked. On

12 hrs AM On Off

24 hrs PM Off Sync Time With GPS (if equipped) Setting Name Set Time Hours Set Time Minutes Time Format Show Time In Status Bar (if equipped) 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 417 MULTIMEDIA 417 Camera If Equipped After pressing the Camera button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name Surround View Camera (if equipped) Selectable Options NOTE:

The Surround View Camera feature displays a complete 360 degree view of the vehicle's exterior environment while backing up. Surround View Camera Delay (if equipped) NOTE:

The Surround View Camera Delay setting determines whether or not the screen will display the 360 degree view image with guidelines for up to 10 seconds after the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE. This delay will be canceled if the vehicles speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into PARK (P), or the ignition is switched to the OFF position. Surround View Camera Guidelines (if equipped) NOTE:

The Surround View Camera Guidelines feature allows you to see active guidelines over the Surround View camera display whenever the gear selector is put into REVERSE or the Surround View Camera Guidelines button on the touchscreen is pressed. The image will be displayed on the radio touchscreen display. ParkView Backup Camera Delay (if equipped) NOTE:

The ParkView Backup Camera Delay setting determines whether or not the screen will display the rear view image with dynamic grid lines for up to 10 seconds after the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE. This delay will be canceled if the vehicles speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into PARK (P), or the ignition is switched to the OFF position. 9 Off Off Off Off On On On On 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 418 418 MULTIMEDIA Setting Name equipped) ParkView Backup Camera Active Guide Lines (if On Off Selectable Options NOTE:

The ParkView Backup Camera Active Guide Lines feature overlays the Backup Camera image with active, or dynamic, grid lines to help illustrate the width of the vehicle and its projected backup path, based on the steering wheel position when the option is checked. A dashed center line overlay indicates the center of the vehicle to assist with parking or aligning to a hitch/receiver. Safety & Driving Assistance After pressing the Safety & Driving Assistance button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Forward Collision Warning If Off Only Warning Warning + Active Braking Selectable Options Setting Name Equipped NOTE:

Changing the FCW status to Off prevents the system from warning you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you. The FCW system state is kept in memory from one ignition cycle to the next. If the system is turned Off, it will remain off when the vehicle is restarted. FCW includes Advanced Brake Assist (ABA). The ABA applies additional brake pressure when the driver requests insufficient brake pressure to avoid a potential frontal collision. When the Only Warning option is selected a chime sounds alerting you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you and more brake pressure is needed. When the Warning + Active Braking option is selected, it applies the brakes to slow your vehicle in case of a potential forward collision and sounds an audible chime to alert you. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 419 MULTIMEDIA 419 Setting Name Forward Collision Warning Sensitivity If Equipped Near Selectable Options Med NOTE:

The Forward Collision Warning Sensitivity setting determines at what relative distance the vehicle directly in front of you needs to be at before the system warns you of a possible collision based on the option selected. Far gives you the most amount of reaction time, whereas Near gives you the least amount of reaction time, based on the distance between the two vehicles. The default setting is Med. LaneSense Warning If Equipped Early NOTE:

The LaneSense Warning setting determines at what distance the LaneSense system will warn you, through steering wheel feedback, of a possible lane departure. LaneSense Strength If Equipped ParkSense If Equipped Low Sound Only Sound and Display NOTE:

The ParkSense system setting will scan for objects behind the vehicle when the transmission gear selector is in REVERSE and the vehicle speed is less than 7 mph (11 km/h), when enabled. It will provide an alert (audible and/or visual) to indicate the proximity to other objects. The system can be enabled with Sound Only, or Sound and Display. Far Late High High High Med Med Med Med Front ParkSense Volume Rear ParkSense Volume Rear ParkSense Braking Assist (if equipped) Sliding Door Alert If Equipped Low Low On On 9 Off Off NOTE:

When the Sliding Door Alert feature is selected, a chime plays when the sliding door reverses or an obstacle is sensed. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 420 420 MULTIMEDIA Setting Name Selectable Options Blind Spot Alert If Equipped Off Lights Lights & Chime NOTE:

When the Blind Spot Alert feature is selected, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is activated and will show a visual alert in the outside mirrors, or it will show a visual alert in the outside mirrors as well as play an audible alert when the turn signal is on. When Off is selected, the BSM system is deactivated. If your vehicle has experienced any damage in the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is not damaged, the sensor may have become misaligned. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor alignment. A sensor that is misaligned will result in the BSM not operating to specification. Hill Start Assist If Equipped KeySense If Equipped Surround View Camera (if equipped) If Equipped Surround View Camera Delay (if equipped) If Equipped On On On On NOTE:

The Surround View Camera feature displays a complete 360 degree view of the vehicle's exterior environment while backing up. Off Off Off Off NOTE:

The Surround View Camera Delay setting determines whether or not the screen will display the 360 degree view image with guidelines for up to 10 seconds after the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE. This delay will be canceled if the vehicles speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into PARK (P), or the ignition is switched to the OFF position. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 421 Setting Name Surround View Camera Guidelines

(if equipped) If Equipped Selectable Options MULTIMEDIA 421 On On NOTE:

The Surround View Camera Guidelines feature allows you to see active guidelines over the Surround View camera display whenever the gear selector is put into REVERSE or the Surround View Camera Guidelines button on the touchscreen is pressed. The image will be displayed on the radio touchscreen display. ParkView Backup Camera Delay (if On equipped) If Equipped NOTE:

The ParkView Backup Camera Delay setting determines whether or not the screen will display the rear view image with dynamic grid lines for up to 10 seconds after the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE. This delay will be canceled if the vehicles speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into PARK (P), or the ignition is switched to the OFF position. ParkView Backup Camera Active Guide Lines (if equipped) If Equipped NOTE:

The ParkView Backup Camera Active Guide Lines feature overlays the Backup Camera image with active, or dynamic, grid lines to help illustrate the width of the vehicle and its projected backup path, based on the steering wheel position when the option is checked. A dashed center line overlay indicates the center of the vehicle to assist with parking or aligning to a hitch/receiver. 9 Off Off Off 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 422 422 MULTIMEDIA Mirrors & Wipers After pressing the Mirror & Wipers button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name Rain Sensing Auto Wipers Tilt Side Mirrors in Reverse Headlights with Wipers Setting Name Auto Park Brake Brake Service Selectable Options Selectable Options On On On On Yes Off Off Off Off No Brakes After pressing the Brakes button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

NOTE:

Selecting the Brake Service feature will display a pop-up asking whether or you would like to retract the park brakes to all break system service. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 423 MULTIMEDIA 423 Lights After pressing the Lights button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name Headlight Off Delay Selectable Options NOTE:

When the Headlight Off Delay feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time the headlights remain on after the vehicle is shut off. Headlight Illumination On Approach NOTE:

When the Headlight Illumination On Approach feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time the headlights remain on after the doors are unlocked with the key fob. NOTE:

When the Auto Dim High Beams feature is selected, the high beam headlights will activate/deactivate automatically under certain conditions. NOTE:

When Daytime Running Lights feature is selected, the daytime running lights can be turned on or off. This feature is only available if allowed by law in the country of the vehicle purchase. 9 Headlights With Wipers (if equipped) Auto Dim High Beams (if equipped) Daytime Running Lights Flash Lights With Lock Flash Lights With Sliding Door 30 sec 90 sec 30 sec 90 sec Off Off Off Off Off 0 sec 60 sec 0 sec 60 sec On On On On On 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 424 424 MULTIMEDIA Doors & Locks After pressing the Doors & Locks button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

NOTE:

The auto door lock feature default condition is enabled. When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically when the vehicles speed exceeds 12 mph

(20 km/h). The auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by an authorized dealer per written request of the customer. Please see an authorized dealer for service. Setting Name Auto Unlock On Exit Selectable Options NOTE:

When the Auto Unlock On Exit feature is selected, all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL

(N) position and the driver's door is opened. Off Off Off 1st Press 2nd Press On On Off On Flash Lights With Lock Sound Horn With Lock (If equipped) Sound Horn With Remote Start (if equipped) 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks Driver Door All Doors NOTE:

When the 1st Press of Key Fob Unlocks features Driver option is selected, only the driver's door will unlock on the first push of the key fob unlock button; you must push the key fob unlock button twice to unlock the passengers doors. When All is selected, all of the doors will unlock on the first press of the key fob unlock button. If All is programmed, all doors will unlock no matter which Passive Entry equipped door handle is grasped. If Driver is programmed, only the drivers door will unlock when the drivers door is grasped. Touching the handle more than once will only result in the drivers door opening once. If the driver door is opened, the interior door lock/unlock switch can be used to unlock all doors (or use key fob). 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 425 Selectable Options MULTIMEDIA 425 Setting Name Passive Entry

(If equipped) Personal Settings Linked to Key Fob Hands Free Power Liftgate Hands Free Power Sliding Door Flash Lights with Sliding Door Hands Free Sliding Door Hands Free Power Lift Gate On On On On On On On NOTE:

The Personal Settings Linked to Key Fob feature provides automatic recall of all settings stored to a memory location (drivers seat, exterior mirrors, steering column position, and radio station presets) to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle. The seat returns to the memorized seat location, if the settings is set to On, when the key fob is used to unlock the door. NOTE:

When the Power Liftgate Alert feature is selected, an alert plays when the power liftgate is raising or lowering. NOTE:

When the Sliding Door Alert feature is selected, a chime plays when the sliding door reverses or an obstacle is sensed. Off Off Off Off Off Off Off 9 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 426 426 MULTIMEDIA Seats & Comfort If Equipped After pressing the Seats & Comfort button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name Auto-on Dr Heat/Vent Seat &

Steering Wheel (if equipped) Off All Starts Selectable Options Remote Start NOTE:

When this feature is selected, the drivers heated seat and heated steering wheel will automatically turn on when temperatures are below 40F

(4.4C). When temperatures are above 80F (26.7C) the driver vented seat will turn on. Key Off Options After pressing the Engine Off Options button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name Easy Exit Seat (if equipped) Key Off Power Delay (if equipped) Selectable Options Off 45 sec 10 min On 0 sec 5 min NOTE:

When the Easy Exit Seat feature is selected, it provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle. NOTE:

When the Engine Off Power Delay feature is selected, the power window switches, radio, Uconnect phone system (if equipped), DVD video system

(if equipped), power sunroof (if equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF. Opening either front door will cancel this feature. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 427 MULTIMEDIA 427 Setting Name Headlight Off Delay Selectable Options 0 sec 60 sec 30 sec 90 sec NOTE:

When the Headlight Off Delay feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time the headlights remain on after the engine is shut off. Audio After pressing the Audio button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name Balance/Fade Selectable Options Speaker Icon NOTE:

When in this display you may adjust the Balance/Fade of the audio by pressing and dragging the Speaker Icon toward any location in the box. Equalizer Bass Mid Treble NOTE:

When in this display you may adjust the Bass, Mid, and Treble settings. Adjust the settings with the + and setting buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on the scale between the + and buttons on the touchscreen. Bass/Mid/Treble also allow you to simply slide your finger up or down to change the setting, as well as press directly on the desired setting. Speed Adjusted Volume Off 1 2 3 9 Surround Sound (if equipped) AUX Volume Offset (if equipped) On

Off

NOTE:

This feature provides the ability to tune the audio level for portable devices connected through the AUX input. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 428 428 MULTIMEDIA Setting Name Auto Play Phone Pop-ups Displayed in Cluster Setting Name Do Not Disturb Phone/Bluetooth After pressing the Phone/Bluetooth button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

On On Selectable Options Selectable Options List Of Settings NOTE:

Press Do Not Disturb to access the available settings. The following settings are: Auto Reply (both, text, call), Auto Reply Message (custom, default), and Custom Auto Reply Message (create message). Paired Phones And Audio Devices List Of Paired Phones NOTE:

This feature shows which phones and audio devices are paired to the Phone/Bluetooth system. For further information, refer to the Uconnect Owners Manual Supplement. Smartphone Projection Manager On Off Off Off 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 429 MULTIMEDIA 429 SiriusXM Setup If Equipped After pressing the SiriusXM Setup button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name Tune Start Channel Skip On Off Selectable Options List of Channels NOTE:

SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to exclude undesirable channels while scanning. This feature allows you to select the channels you would like to skip. Subscription Information Sirius ID NOTE:

New vehicle purchasers or lessees receive a free limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio with your radio. Following the expiration of the free services, it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription Information screen to re-subscribe. 1. Press the Subscription Information button on the touchscreen to access the Subscription Information screen. 2. Write down the Sirius ID numbers for your receiver. To reactivate your service, either call the number listed on the screen or visit the provider online. SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription. 9 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 430 430 MULTIMEDIA Accessibility If Equipped After pressing the Accessibility button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Selectable Options Setting Name Accessibility If Equipped Video Button Readback On On NOTE:

The Accessibility feature announces a function prior to performing the action selected when using DVD/Blu-ray and USB Video functions, when it is activated. For example, when activated, and the Play button is selected, the system will announce Play button selected, and then once pressed again the Play button will perform its action. Off Off 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 431 MULTIMEDIA 431 Restore Settings To Default After pressing the Reset button on the touch-

screen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name Restore App Drawer Restore Settings To Default Clear Personal Data NOTE:

When the Restore Settings feature is selected it will reset all settings to their default settings. OK OK OK Selectable Options Cancel Cancel Cancel NOTE:

When the Clear Personal Data feature is selected it will remove all personal data including Bluetooth devices and presets. System Information After pressing the System Information button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name Software License Selectable Options System Software Information Screen NOTE:

When this feature is selected, a Software License screen will appear, displaying the system software version. 9 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 432 432 MULTIMEDIA SAFETY AND GENERAL INFORMATION Safety Guidelines WARNING!

ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the steering wheel. You have full responsibility and assume all risks related to the use of the Uconnect features and applications in this vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an accident involving serious injury or death. Ensure that all persons read this manual care-

fully before using the system. It contains instructions on how to use the system in a safe and effective manner. Do NOT attach any object to the touchscreen. Doing so can result in damage to the touch-

screen. Please read and follow these safety precau-

tions. Failure to do so may result in injury or property damage. Glance at the screen only when safe to do so. If prolonged viewing of the screen is required, park in a safe location and set the parking brake. Stop use immediately if a problem occurs. Failure to do so may cause injury or damage to the product. Return it to an authorized dealer for repair. Ensure the volume level of the system is set to a level that still allows you to hear outside traffic and emergency vehicles. Safe Usage Of The Uconnect System Read all instructions in this manual carefully before using your system to ensure proper usage. The Uconnect system is a sophisticated elec-

tronic device. Do not let young children use the system. Permanent hearing loss may occur if you play your music or the system at loud volumes. Exercise caution when setting the volume on the system. Keep drinks, rain and other sources of mois-

ture away from the system. Besides damage to the system, moisture can cause electric shocks as with any electronic device. NOTE:

Many features of this system are speed depen-

dent. For your own safety, it is not possible to use some of the touchscreen features while the vehicle is in motion. Exposure To Radio Frequency Radiation The internal wireless radio operates within guidelines found in radio frequency safety stan-

dards and recommendations, which reflect the consensus of the scientific community. The radio manufacturer believes the internal wire-

less radio is safe for use by consumers. The level of energy emitted is far less than the elec-

tromagnetic energy emitted by wireless devices such as mobile phones. However, the use of wireless radios may be restricted in some situa-

tions or environments, such as aboard airplanes. If you are unsure of restrictions, you are encouraged to ask for authorization before turning on the wireless radio. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 433 Care And Maintenance Touchscreen Do not press the touchscreen with any hard or sharp objects (pen, USB stick, jewelry, etc.), which could scratch the touchscreen surface!

Do not spray any liquid or caustic chemicals directly on the screen! Use a clean and dry microfiber lens cleaning cloth in order to clean the touchscreen. If necessary, use a lint-free cloth dampened with a cleaning solution, such as isopropyl alcohol or an isopropyl alcohol and water solution ratio of 50:50. Be sure to follow the solvent manufacturer's precautions and directions. UCONNECT 4 WITH 7-INCH DISPLAY 2. Media Introduction Uconnect 4 With 7-Inch Display MULTIMEDIA 433 Press the Media button on the touchscreen to access media sources such as USB De-

vice, AUX, and Bluetooth as long as the re-

quested media is present. 3. Climate 4. Apps Refer to Climate Controls in Getting To Know Your Vehicle for further details. Press the Apps button on the touchscreen to access Smartphone and Connected vehi-

cle options. Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display 5. Controls NOTE:

Uconnect screen images are for illustration purposes only and may not reflect exact soft-

ware for your vehicle. 1. Radio Press the Radio button on the touchscreen to enter Radio Mode. The different tuner modes; AM, FM, and SXM can be selected by pressing the corresponding buttons on the touchscreen in Radio Mode. Press the Controls button on the touchscreen to adjust the heated and vented seats or heat-

ed steering wheel (If Equipped). Press the Phone button on the touchscreen to access the Uconnect Phone feature. 9 6. Phone 7. Settings Press the Settings button on the touchscreen to access the Uconnect Settings menu. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 434 434 MULTIMEDIA Drag & Drop Menu Bar The Uconnect features and services in the main menu bar are easily changed for your conve-

nience. Simply follow these steps:

NOTE:

This feature is only available if the vehicle is in PARK. Radio Mode Radio Controls The radio is equipped with the following modes:

AM FM SiriusXM Satellite Radio If Equipped Press the Radio button on the touchscreen, bottom left corner, to enter the Radio Mode. The different tuner modes, AM, FM, and SXM, can then be selected by pressing the corresponding buttons in the Radio mode. Volume/Power Control Push the Volume/Power control knob to turn off the screen and mute the radio. Push the Volume/Power control knob a second time to turn the screen back on and unmute the radio. The electronic volume control turns continu-

ously (360 degrees) in either direction, without stopping. Turning the Volume/Power control knob clockwise increases the volume, and counterclockwise decreases it. Tune/Scroll Control When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played. Turn the rotary Tune/Scroll control knob clock-

wise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the radio station frequency. Push the Enter/Browse button to choose a selection. Screen Close The X button on the touchscreen at the top right, provides a means to close the Direct Tune Screen. The Direct Tune Screen also auto closes if no activity occurs within a few seconds. Seek And Direct Tune Functions The Seek Up and Down functions are activated by pressing the double arrow buttons on the touchscreen to the right and left of the radio station display or by pressing the left Steering Wheel Audio Control up or down. Seek Up Press and release the Seek Up button on the touchscreen to tune the radio to the next listen-

able station or channel. During a Seek Up func-

tion, if the radio reaches the starting station after passing through the entire band two times, the radio will stop at the station where it began. Uconnect 4 Main Menu 1. Press the Apps button to open the App screen. 2. Press and hold, then drag the selected App to replace an existing shortcut in the main menu bar. The new app shortcut, that was dragged down onto the main menu bar, will now be an active App/shortcut. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 435 Fast Seek Up Press and hold the Seek Up button on the touchscreen to advance the radio through the available stations or channels at a faster rate. The radio stops at the next available station or channel when the button on the touchscreen is released. Seek Down Press and release the Seek Down button on the touchscreen to tune the radio to the next listen-

able station or channel. During a Seek Down function, if the radio reaches the starting station after passing through the entire band two times, the radio will stop at the station where it began. Fast Seek Down Press and hold the Seek Down button on the touchscreen to advance the radio through the available stations or channel at a faster rate. The radio stops at the next available station or channel when the button on the touchscreen is released. Direct Tune Press the Tune button on the touchscreen located at the bottom of the radio screen. The Direct Tune button on the touchscreen is avail-

able in AM, FM, and SXM radio modes and can be used to direct tune the radio to a desired station or channel. Press the available number button on the touchscreen to begin selecting a desired station. Once a number has been entered, any numbers that are no longer possible (stations that cannot be reached) will become deacti-

vated/grayed out. Undo You can backspace an entry by pressing the bottom left on the touchscreen. OK Once the last digit of a station has been entered, press the OK button, and the Direct Tune screen will close. The system will automat-

ically tune to that station. The selected Station or Channel number is displayed in the Direct Tune text box. Setting Presets The Presets are available for all Radio Modes, and are activated by pressing any of the six Preset buttons on the touchscreen, located at the top of the screen. When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit into memory, press and hold the desired numbered button on the touchscreen MULTIMEDIA 435 for more than two seconds or until you hear a confirmation beep. The Radio stores up to 12 presets in each of the Radio modes. A set of six presets are visible at the top of the radio screen. You can switch between the two radio presets by pressing the Arrow button located in the upper right of the radio touchscreen. Browse In AM/FM When in either AM or FM, the Browse Screen provides a means to edit the Presets List and is entered by pushing the ENTER/BROWSE button. Scrolling Preset List Once in the Browse Presets screen, you can scroll the preset list by rotation of the TUNE/

SCROLL knob, or by pressing the Up and Down Arrow keys, located on the right of the screen. Preset Selection From List A Preset can be selected by pressing any of the listed Presets or by pushing the ENTER/

BROWSE button on the TUNE/SCROLL knob to select the currently highlighted Preset. When selected, the radio tunes to the station stored in the Preset and returns to the main radio screen. 9 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 436 436 MULTIMEDIA Deleting Presets A Preset can be deleted in the Presets Browse screen by pressing the Trash Can icon for the corresponding Preset. Return To Main Radio Screen You can return to the Main Radio Screen, by pressing the X button on the touchscreen when in the Browse Presets screen. SiriusXM Satellite Radio Mode If Equipped SiriusXM Satellite Radio uses direct satel-

lite-to-receiver broadcasting technology to provide clear, coast to coast radio content. Siri-

usXM is a subscription based service. SiriusXM All Access Package All satellite radio equipped vehicles come with a one year trial to the SiriusXM All Access package, providing over 160 channels of the best programming for all the places life takes you. In your vehicle Youll get every channel available on your radio, including all the premium programming like Howard Stern, every NFL game, every MLB game, every NASCAR race, Oprah Radio, and more. On the go With a SiriusXM Internet Radio subscription included with the All Access trial, youll get SiriusXM on your computer, smartphone, or tablet. Including:

A huge On Demand catalog Xtra Channels featuring SiriusXM Latino a collection of Spanish-language channels MySXM allowing you to personalize your favorite music channels Go to siriusxm.com/getallaccess for more infor-

mation SiriusXM services require subscriptions, sold separately after the 12-month trial included with the new vehicle purchase. If you decide to continue your service at the end of your trial subscription, the plan you choose will automatically renew and bill at then-current rates until you call SiriusXM at 866-635-2349 to cancel. See SiriusXM Customer Agreement for complete terms at www.siriusxm.com. All fees and programming subject to change. Our satellite service is available only to those at least 18 and older in the 48 contiguous USA and D.C. Our SiriusXM satellite service is also available in PR (with coverage limitations). Our Internet radio service is available throughout our satellite service area and in AK. 2019 SiriusXM Radio Inc. Sirius, XM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM Radio Inc. Service available in Canada; see www.siriusxm.ca. This functionality is only available for radios equipped with a Satellite receiver. In order to receive satellite radio, the vehicle needs to be outside with a clear view to the sky. If the screen shows Acquiring Signal, you might have to change the vehicles position in order to receive a signal. In most cases, the satellite radio does not receive a signal in underground parking garages or tunnels. No Subscription Radios equipped with a Satellite receiver, require a subscription to the SiriusXM Service. When the Radio does not have the necessary subscription, the Radio is able to receive the Pre-View channel only. Acquiring SiriusXM Subscription To activate the SiriusXM Satellite Radio subscription, U.S. residents call:

1-800-643-2112 Canadian residents call:

1-877-438-9677 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 437 NOTE:

You will need to provide the SiriusXM ID (RID) located at the bottom of the Channel 0 screen. Replay The Satellite Mode is activated by a press of the SXM button on the touchscreen. When in Satellite mode:

The SXM button on the touchscreen is high-

lighted. The SiriusXM Presets are displayed at the top of the screen. The Genre is displayed below the Presets Bar. The SiriusXM Channel Number is displayed in the center. The Program Information is displayed at the bottom of the Channel Number. The SiriusXM function buttons are displayed below the Program Information. Tuning is done by operating the Tune Knob or by Direct Tune, similar to other Radio Bands, see Presets, browse, Tune Knob, and Direct Tune. In addition to the tuning Operation functions common to all Radio modes, the replay, Traffic/

Weather Jump, and fav button functions are available in SiriusXM Mode. The replay function provides a means to store and replay up to 22 minutes of music audio and 48 minutes of talk radio. Once the channel is switched, content in replay memory is lost. Press the Replay button on the touchscreen. The play/pause, rewind/forward and live buttons will display at the top of the screen, along with the replay time. You can exit by pressing the Replay button on the touchscreen, any time during the Replay mode. Play/Pause Press the Pause/Play button on the touch-

screen to pause the playing of live or rewound content at any time. Play can be resumed again by pressing of the Pause/Play button on the touchscreen. Rewind Press the RW button on the touchscreen to rewind the content in steps of five seconds. Pressing the RW button on the touchscreen for more than two seconds rewinds the content. The Radio begins playing the content at the point at which the press is released. MULTIMEDIA 437 Forward Each press of the FW button on the touchscreen forwards the content in steps of five seconds. Forwarding of the content can only be done when the content is previously rewound, and therefore, can not be done for live content. A continuous press of the FW button on the touch-

screen also forwards the content. The Radio begins playing the content at the point at which the press is released. Live Press the Live button on the touchscreen to resume playing of Live content. Favorites Press the Fav button on the touchscreen to acti-

vate the favorites menu, which will time out in five seconds in absence of user interaction. You can exit the Favorites Menu by a press of the X in the top right corner. The favorites feature enables you to set a favorite artist, or song that is currently playing. The Radio then uses this information to alert you when either the favorite song, or favorite artist are being played at any time by any of the SiriusXM Channels. 9 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 438 438 MULTIMEDIA The maximum number of favorites that can be stored in the Radio is 50. Fav. Artist: While the song is playing to set a Favorite Artist, press the Fav button on the touchscreen and then the Fav. Artist button on the touchscreen. Fav. Song: While the song is playing to set a Favorite Song, press the Fav button on the touchscreen and then the Fav Song button on the touchscreen. Browse In SXM Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to edit Presets, Favorites, Game Zone, and Jump settings, along with providing the SiriusXM Channel List. This Screen contains many submenus. You can exit a sub menu to return to a parent menu by pressing the Back Arrow. All Press the All button at the left of the Browse Screen. Channel List Press the Channel List, or Genre, to display all the SiriusXM Channel Numbers. You can scroll the Channel list by pressing the Up and Down Arrows, located on the right side of the screen. Scrolling can also be done by operating the TUNE/SCROLL knob. Genre Press the Genre button on the touchscreen to display a list of Genres. You can select any desired Genre by pressing the Genre list, the Radio tunes to a channel with the content in the selected Genre. Presets Press the Presets button located at the left of the Browse screen. You can scroll the Presets list pressing the Up and Down Arrows located at the right side of the screen. Scrolling can also be done by operating the TUNE/SCROLL knob as well. Preset Selection A Preset can be selected by pressing any of the listed Presets, or by pushing the ENTER/

BROWSE button on the TUNE/SCROLL knob to select the currently highlighted Preset. When selected, the Radio tunes to the station stored in the Preset, and returns to the main Radio screen. Deleting A Preset A Preset can be deleted in the Presets Browse screen by pressing the Trash Can Icon for the corresponding Preset. Favorites Press the Favorites button located at the left of the Browse screen. The Favorites menu provides a means to Edit the Favorites list and to configure the Alert Settings, along with providing a list of Channels currently airing any of the items in the Favorites list. You can scroll the Favorites list by pressing the Up and Down Arrows located at the right side of the screen. Scrolling can also be done by oper-

ating the TUNE/SCROLL knob as well. Remove Favorites Press the Remove Favorites tab at the top of the screen. Press the Delete All button on the touch-

screen to delete all of the Favorites or press the Trash Can icon next to the Favorite to be deleted. Alert Settings Press the Alert Setting tab at the top of the screen. The Alert Settings menu allows you to choose from a Visual alert or Audible and Visual alert when one of your favorites is airing on any of the SiriusXM channels. Game Zone Press the Game Zone button, located at the left of the Browse screen. This feature provides you 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 439 with the ability to select teams, edit the selec-

tion, and set alerts. On Air Press the On-Air tab at the top of the screen. The On-Air list provides a list of Channels currently airing any of the items in the Selections list, and pressing any of the items in the list tunes the radio to that channel. Select Teams Press the Select Teams button on the touch-

screen to activate the League Scroll list. Press the chosen league and a scroll list of all teams within the league will appear, then you can select a team by pressing the corresponding box. A check mark appears for all teams that are chosen. Remove Selection Press the Remove Selection tab at the top of the screen. Press the Delete All button on the touch-

screen to delete all of the Selections or press the Trash Can Icon next to the Selection to be deleted. Alert Settings Press the Alert Setting tab at the top of the screen. The Alert Settings menu allows you to choose from Alert me to on-air games upon start or Alert upon score update or both when MULTIMEDIA 439 Press the Balance & Fade button on the touch-

screen to Balance audio between the front speakers or fade the audio between the rear and front speakers. Pressing the Front, Rear, Left, or Right buttons or press and drag the red Speaker Icon to adjust the Balance/Fade. Equalizer one or more of your selections is airing on any of the SiriusXM channels. Featured Press the Featured button, located on the left of the Browse screen. This feature provides a list of your featured favorite stations. Audio Settings Press the Audio button on the Satellite Radio main menu or within the Settings main menu, to activate the Audio settings screen for adjusting Balance & Fade, Equalizer, Speed Adjusted Volume, Loudness, AUX Volume Offset, Auto Play, and Radio Off With Door. You can return to the Radio screen by pressing the X located at the top right. Balance & Fade Equalizer Press the Equalizer button on the touchscreen to activate the Equalizer screen. Press the + or buttons, or by pressing and dragging over the level bar for each of the equal-

izer bands. The level value, which spans between plus or minus nine, is displayed at the bottom of each of the Bands. 9 Balance & Fade 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 440 440 MULTIMEDIA Speed Adjusted Volume When Surround Sound is On, you can hear audio coming from every direction as in a movie theatre or home theatre system. Press the On button on the touchscreen to acti-

vate Loudness. Press Off to deactivate this feature. When Loudness is On, the sound quality at lower volumes improves. AUX Volume Offset Surround Sound Loudness Speed Adjusted Volume Press the Speed Adjusted Volume button on the touchscreen to activate the Speed Adjusted Volume screen. The Speed Adjusted Volume is adjusted by selecting from Off, 1, 2, or 3. This alters the automatic adjustment of the audio volume with variation to vehicle speed. Volume increases automatically as speed increase to compensate for normal road noise. Surround Sound If Equipped Press the On button on the touchscreen to acti-

vate Surround Sound. Press Off to deactivate this feature. AUX Volume Offset Press the AUX Volume Offset button on the touchscreen to activate the AUX Volume Offset screen. The AUX Volume Offset is adjusted by pressing of the + and buttons. This alters the AUX input audio volume. The level value, which spans between plus or minus three, is displayed above the adjustment bar. Loudness 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 441 Auto Play Radio Off With Door Media Mode Auto Play Radio Off With Door Press the Auto Play button on the touchscreen to activate the Auto Play screen. The Auto Play feature has two settings On and Off. With Auto Play on, music will begin to play from a connected device, immediately after it is connect to the radio. Press the Radio Off With Door button on the touchscreen to activate the Radio Off With Door screen. The Radio Off With Door feature, when acti-

vated, keeps the radio on until the driver or passenger door is opened, or when the Radio Off Delay selected time has expired. MULTIMEDIA 441 USB/iPod Mode Overview USB/iPod Mode is entered by either inserting a USB device or iPod and cable into the USB Port or by pressing the Select Source button on the left side of the display, and then selecting USB 1, or USB 2 (if equipped). Seek Up /Seek Down Press and release the Seek Up button on the touchscreen for the next selection on the USB device/iPod. Press and release the Seek Down button on the touchscreen to return to the beginning of the current selection or to return to the beginning of the previous selection if the USB device/iPod is within the first three seconds of the current selection. 9 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 442 442 MULTIMEDIA Browse Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to display the browse window. The left side of the browse window displays a list of ways you can browse through the contents of the USB device/

iPod. If supported by the device, you can browse by Folders, Artists, Playlists, Albums, Songs, etc. Press the desired button on the left side of the screen. The center of the browse window shows items and its sub-functions, which can be scrolled by pressing the Up and Down buttons to the right. The Tune/Scroll knob can also be used to scroll. Media Mode Press the Media button on the touchscreen to select the desired audio source: USB. Repeat Press the Repeat button on the touchscreen to toggle the repeat functionality. The Repeat button on the touchscreen is highlighted when active. The Radio will continue to play the current track, repeatedly, as long as the repeat is active. Press the Repeat button on the touch-

screen a second time to turn this feature off. Shuffle Press the Shuffle button on the touchscreen to play the selections on the USB/iPod device in random order to provide an interesting change of pace. Press the Shuffle button on the touch-

screen a second time to turn this feature off. Info Press the Info button on the touchscreen to display the current track information. Press the Info button on the touchscreen a second time to cancel this feature. Tracks Press the Tracks button on the touchscreen to display a pop up with the Song List. The currently playing song is indicated by an arrow and lines above and below the song title. When in the Tracks List screen, you can rotate the Tune/Scroll knob to highlight a track (indicated by the line above and below the track name) and then push the Enter/Browse knob to start playing that track. Pressing the Tracks button on the touchscreen while the pop up is displayed will close the pop up. Audio Refer to Radio Mode for adjusting the audio settings. AUX Mode Overview AUX (Auxiliary Mode) is entered by inserting an AUX device using a cable with a 3.5 mm audio jack into the AUX port or by pressing the AUX button on the left side of the display. Inserting Auxiliary Device Gently insert the Auxiliary device cable into the AUX Port. If you insert an Auxiliary device with the ignition and the radio on, the unit will switch to AUX mode and begin to play when you insert the device cable. Controlling The Auxiliary Device The control of the auxiliary device (e.g., selecting playlists, play, fast forward, etc.) cannot be provided by the radio; use the device controls instead. Adjust the volume with the Volume/Mute rotary knob, or with the volume of the attached device. NOTE:

The radio unit is acting as the amplifier for audio output from the Auxiliary device. Therefore, if the volume control on the Auxiliary device is set too low, there will be insufficient audio signal for the radio unit to play the music on the device. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 443 Media Mode Press the Media button on the touchscreen to select the desired audio source: AUX. Audio Refer to Radio Mode for adjusting the audio settings. BLUETOOTH MODE Overview Bluetooth Streaming Audio (BTSA) or Blue-

tooth Mode is entered by pairing a Bluetooth device, containing music, to the Uconnect System. Before proceeding, the Bluetooth device must be paired to the Uconnect Phone to communi-

cate with the Uconnect System. NOTE:

See the pairing procedure in the Uconnect Phone section for more details. To access Bluetooth mode, press the Select Source button on the left side of the display, and then select Bluetooth. MULTIMEDIA 443 currently playing song is indicated by a red arrow and lines above and below the song title. Pressing the Tracks button on the touchscreen while the pop up is displayed will close the pop up. Audio Refer to Radio Mode for adjusting the audio settings. Android Auto & Apple CarPlay If Equipped Android Auto NOTE:

Feature availability depends on your carrier and mobile phone manufacturer. Some Android Auto features may or may not be available in every region and/or language. Android Auto is a feature of your Uconnect system, and your Android 5.0 Lollipop, or higher, powered smartphone with a data plan, that allows you to project your smartphone and a number of its apps onto the touchscreen radio display. Android Auto automatically brings you useful information, and organizes it into simple cards that appear just when they are needed. Android Auto can be used with Google's best-in-class speech technology, the steering 9 Bluetooth Mode Seek Up

/Down Press and release the Seek Up button on the touchscreen for the next selection on the Blue-

tooth device. Press and release the Seek Down button on the touchscreen to return to the beginning of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the Bluetooth device is within the first second of the current selection. Media Mode Press the Media button on the touchscreen to select the desired audio source: Bluetooth. Tracks If the Bluetooth device supports this feature, press the Tracks button on the touchscreen to display a pop up with the Song List. The 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 444 444 MULTIMEDIA wheel controls, the knobs and buttons on your radio faceplate, and the radio displays touch-

screen to control many of your apps. To use Android Auto, follow the following procedure:

1. Download the Android Auto app from the your Google Android-powered smartphone. store Play on 2. Connect your Android-powered smart-

phone to one of the media USB ports in your vehicle. If the Android Auto app was not downloaded, the first time you plug your device in, the app will begin to download. NOTE:

Be sure to use the factory-provided USB cable that came with your phone, as aftermarket cables may not work. 3. Once the device is connected and recog-

nized, the Phone icon on the drag & drop menu bar changes to the Android Auto Icon. Android Auto should launch, but if it does not, refer to Android Auto And Apple CarPlay Tips And Tricks in this section for the procedure to enable the feature Auto-

Show. You can also launch it by touching the Android Auto icon on the touchscreen. Once Android Auto is up and running on your Uconnect system, the following features can be utilized using your smartphones data plan:

Google Maps for navigation Google Play Music, Spotify, iHeart Radio, etc. Handsfree Calling, and Texting for communi-

for music cation Hundred of compatible apps NOTE:

To use Android Auto, make sure you are in an area with cellular coverage. Android Auto may use cellular data and your cellular coverage is shown in the upper right corner of the radio screen. Signal Strength NOTE:

Requires compatible smartphone running Android 5.0 Lollipop or higher and download app on Google Play. Android, Android Auto and Google Play are trademarks of Google Inc. Android Auto 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 445 Android Auto Maps Push and hold the VR button on the steering wheel or tap the microphone icon to ask Google to take you to a desired destination by voice. You can also touch the Navigation icon in Android Auto to access Google Maps. NOTE:

If the VR button is not held, and is only pushed, the built-in Uconnect VR prompts you and any navigation command said launches the built-in Uconnect navigation system. While using Android Auto, Google Maps provides voice-guided:

Navigation Live traffic information Lane guidance MULTIMEDIA 445 smartphones data plan, you can stream endless music on the road. NOTE:

Music apps, playlists, and stations must be set up on your smartphone prior to using Android Auto, for them to work with Android Auto. Android Auto Maps For further information, refer to www.android.com/auto/ (U.S. Residents) https://www.android.com/intl/en_ca/auto

(Canadian Residents). For further information on the navigation function, please refer to https://support.google.com/android or https://support.google.com/androidauto/. Android Auto Music Android Auto allows you to access and stream your favorite music with apps like Google Play Music, iHeartRadio, and Spotify. Using your Android Auto Music NOTE:

To see the metadata for the music playing through Android Auto, select the Uconnect Systems media screen. 9 For further information refer to https://support.google.com/androidauto. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 446 446 MULTIMEDIA Android Auto Communication With Android Auto connected, press and hold the VR button on the steering wheel to activate voice recognition specific to the Android Auto. This will allow you to send and reply to text messages, have incoming text messages read out loud, and place and receive hands-free calls. Call In Progress Android Auto Apps The Android Auto App will display all the compatible apps that are available to use with Android Auto, every time it is launched. You must have the compatible app downloaded, and you must be signed in to the app for it to work with Android Auto. Refer to g.co/androidauto to see the latest list of available apps for Android Auto. Contacts Apple CarPlay Integration NOTE:

Feature availability depends on your carrier and mobile phone manufacturer. Some Apple CarPlay features may or may not be available in every region and/or language. Uconnect works seamlessly with Apple CarPlay, the smarter, more secure way to use your iPhone in the car, and stay focused on the road. Use your Uconnect Touchscreen display, the vehicle's knobs and controls, and your voice with Siri to get access to Apple Music, Maps, Messages, and more. To use Apple CarPlay, make sure you are using iPhone 5 or later, have Siri enabled in Settings, ensure your iPhone is unlocked for the very first connection only, and then use the following procedure:

1. Connect your iPhone to one of the media USB ports in your vehicle. NOTE:

Be sure to use the factory-provided Lightning cable that came with your phone, as after-

market cables may not work. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 447 2. Once the device is connected and Messages recognized, the Phone icon on the drag &

drop menu bar changes to the Apple CarPlay Icon. Apple CarPlay should launch, but if not, refer to Android Auto And Apple CarPlay Tips And Tricks in this section for the procedure to enable the feature AutoShow. You can also touch the Apple CarPlay icon on the touchscreen to launch it. Apple CarPlay Once Apple CarPlay is up and running on your Uconnect system, the following features can be utilized using your iPhones data plan:

Phone Music Maps NOTE:

To use Apple CarPlay make sure that cellular data is turned on, and that you are in an area with cellular coverage. Your data and cellular coverage is shown on the left side of the radio screen. NOTE:

Requires compatible iPhone. See dealer for phone compatibility. Data plan rates apply. Vehicle user interface is a product of Apple. Apple CarPlay is a trademark of Apple Inc. iPhone is a trademark of Apple Inc., regis-

tered in the US and other countries. Apple terms of use and privacy statements apply. Apple CarPlay Phone With Apple CarPlay, press and hold the VR button on the steering wheel to activate a Siri voice recognition session. You can also press and hold the Home button within Apple CarPlay to start talking to Siri. This allows you MULTIMEDIA 447 to make calls or listen to voice mail as you normally would using Siri on your iPhone. NOTE:

Only temporarily pushing the VR button on the steering wheel launches a built-in VR session, not a Siri session, and it will not function with Apple CarPlay. Apple CarPlay Music Apple CarPlay allows you to access all your artists, playlists, and music from iTunes. Using your iPhones data plan, you can also use select third party audio apps including music, news, sports, podcasts and more. 9 Apple CarPlay Music 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 448 448 MULTIMEDIA Apple CarPlay Messages Just like Phone, Apple CarPlay allows you to use Siri to send or reply to text messages. Siri can also read incoming text messages, but drivers will not be able to read messages, as everything is done via voice. Apple CarPlay Maps To use your Apple Maps for navigation on your Uconnect system, launch Apple CarPlay, and push and hold the VR button on the steering wheel to use Siri to set your desired destination. Alternatively, choose a nearby destination by pressing Destinations and selecting a category, by launching Siri from the destinations page, or even by typing in a destination. Apple CarPlay Maps NOTE:

If the Voice Recognition (VR) button is not held, and is only pushed, the built-in Uconnect VR prompts you and any navigation command said launches the built-in Uconnect navigation system. Apple CarPlay Apps To use a compatible app with Apple CarPlay, you must have the compatible app downloaded, and you must be signed in to the app. Refer to http://www.apple.com/ios/carplay/

(U.S. Residents) or https://www.apple.com/ca/

ios/carplay/ (Canadian Residents) to see the latest list of available apps for Apple CarPlay. Android Auto And Apple CarPlay Tips And Tricks AutoPlay AutoPlay is a feature of the Uconnect system that automatically begins playing music off of the connected device, as soon as it is connected. This feature can be turned on or off in the Uconnect Settings, within the Audio Settings category. Its default setting is on. NOTE:

AutoPlay is not supported by Android Auto. AutoShow AutoShow is a feature of the Uconnect system that automatically launches and displays Android Auto/Apple CarPlay when the phone is initially connected to the USB media port. This feature can be turned on and off in the Uconnect Settings, within the Display Settings category. The default setting is on. Android Auto Automatic Bluetooth Pairing After connecting to Android Auto for the first time and undergoing the setup procedure, the smartphone will automatically pair to the Uconnect system via Bluetooth without any setup required every time it is within range, if Bluetooth is turned on. NOTE:

Android Auto features cannot be used with Bluetooth, a USB connection is required for its use. Android Auto uses both Bluetooth and USB connections to function, and the connected device will be unavailable to other devices when connected using Android Auto. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 449 Phone Mode Overview Multiple Devices Connecting To The Uconnect System It is possible to have multiple devices connected to the Uconnect system. For example, if using Android Auto/Apple CarPlay, the connected device will be the one that will be used to place hands-free phone calls or send hands-free text messages. However, another device can also be paired to the Uconnect system, via Bluetooth, as an audio source, so the passenger can stream music. NOTE:

If using a Samsung device, every time it is connected to a media USB, and there is another device plugged in, you will need to manually change the configuration of the USB connection in order for the Samsung device to send data. The Uconnect 4 built-in media functions will be unavailable when Android Auto/Apple CarPlay are in use. Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Radio Phone Menu 1 Favorite Contacts 2 Mobile Phone Battery Life 3 Currently Paired Mobile Phone 4 Siri 5 Mute Microphone 6 Transfer To/From Uconnect System 7 Conference Call*

8 Phone Settings 9 Text Messaging**

10 Direct Dial Pad 11 Recent Call Log 12 Browse Phone Book Entries 13 End Call MULTIMEDIA 449 14 Call/Redial/Hold 15 Do Not Disturb 16 Reply With Text Message

* Conference Call feature only available on Global System Mobile (GSM) mobile devices

** Text messaging feature not available on all mobile phones [requires Bluetooth Message Access Profile (MAP) profile]

Uconnect Phone is a voice-activated, hands-free, in-vehicle communications system. Uconnect Phone allows you to dial a phone number with your mobile phone. Uconnect Phone supports the following features:

9 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 450 450 MULTIMEDIA Voice Activated Features:

Hands-Free dialing via Voice (Call John Smith Mobile or, Dial 248-555-1212). Screen Activated Features Dialing via keypad using touchscreen. For Uconnect customer support:

U.S. residents - visit UconnectPhone.com Viewing and calling contacts from phone-

or call:

Hands-Free text to speech listening of your books displayed on the touchscreen. 877-855-8400 incoming SMS messages. Hands-free text message reply. (Forward one of 18 pre-defined SMS messages to incoming calls/text messages). Redialing last dialed numbers (Redial). logs. Setting favorite contact phone numbers so they are easily accessible on the main phone screen. Viewing and calling contacts from recent call 800-465-2001 or (French) call:

800-387-9983 Canadian residents - (English) call:

Calling back the last incoming call number Reviewing your recent incoming SMS.

(Call Back). View call logs on screen (Show incoming via the touchscreen. Listen to music on your Bluetooth device calls, Show Outgoing calls, Show missed Calls, Show Recent Calls). Searching contacts phone number (Search for John Smith Mobile). NOTE:

Examples of Voice Commands are provided throughout this manual. For quick use, go to the Voice Command Quick Reference Section. Pairing up to 10 phones/audio devices for easy access to connect to them quickly. NOTE:

Your phone must be capable of SMS messaging via Bluetooth for messaging features to work properly. Your mobile phones audio is transmitted through your vehicles audio system; the system automatically mutes your radio when using the Uconnect Phone. Visit UconnectPhone.com Uconnect Phone allows you to transfer calls between the system and your mobile phone as you enter or exit your vehicle and enables you to mute the system's microphone for private conversation. WARNING!

ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the steering wheel. You have full responsibility and assume all risks related to the use of the Uconnect features and applications in this vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an accident involving serious injury or death. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 451 The Uconnect Phone is driven through your Bluetooth Hands-Free Profile mobile phone. Uconnect features Bluetooth technology - the global standard that enables different elec-

tronic devices to connect to each other without wires or a docking station, so Uconnect Phone works no matter where you stow your mobile phone (be it your purse, pocket, or briefcase), as long as your phone is turned on and has been paired to the vehicle's Uconnect Phone. The Uconnect Phone allows up to 10 mobile phones or audio devices to be linked to the system. Only one linked (or paired) mobile phone and one audio device can be used with the system at a time. Uconnect Phone Button The Uconnect Phone button on your steering wheel is used to get into the phone mode and make calls, show recent, incoming, outgoing calls, view phonebook etc. Uconnect Voice Command Button The Uconnect Voice Command button on your steering wheel is only used for barge in and when you are already in a call and you want to send tones or make another call. The button on your steering wheel is also used to access the Voice Commands for the Uconnect Voice Command features if your vehicle is equipped. Please see the Uconnect Voice Command section for direction on how to use the button. The Uconnect Phone is fully integrated with the vehicle's audio system. The volume of the Uconnect Phone can be adjusted either from the radio volume control knob or from the steering wheel radio control. Phone Operation Operation Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect Phone and to navigate through the Uconnect Phone menu structure. Voice commands are required after most Uconnect Phone prompts. There are two general methods for how Voice Command works:

1. Say compound commands like Call John Smith mobile. 2. Say the individual commands and allow the system to guide you to complete the task. MULTIMEDIA 451 You will be prompted for a specific command and then guided through the available options. Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for the beep, which follows the Listen prompt or another prompt. For certain operations, compound commands can be used. For example, instead of saying Call and then John Smith and then mobile, the following compound command can be said: Call John Smith mobile. For each feature explanation in this section, only the compound command form of the voice command is given. You can also break the commands into parts and say each part of the command when you are asked for it. For example, you can use the compound command form voice command Search for John Smith, or you can break the compound command form into two voice commands:

Search Contact and when asked John Smith. Please remember, the Uconnect Phone works best when you talk in a normal conversational tone, as if speaking to someone sitting a few feet/meters away from you. 9 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 452 452 MULTIMEDIA Natural Speech Your Uconnect Phone Voice system uses a Natural Language Voice Recognition (VR) engine. Natural speech allows the user to speak commands in phrases or complete sentences. The system filters out certain non-word utter-

ances and sounds such as ah and eh. The system handles fill-in words such as I would like to. The system handles multiple inputs in the same phrase or sentence such as make a phone call and to Kelly Smith. For multiple inputs in the same phrase or sentence, the system iden-

tifies the topic or context and provides the asso-

ciated follow-up prompt such as Who do you want to call? in the case where a phone call was requested but the specific name was not recognized. The system utilizes continuous dialog; when the system requires more information from the user it will ask a question to which the user can respond without pushing the Voice Command button on your steering wheel. Help Command If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to know your options at any prompt, say Help following the beep. To activate the Uconnect Phone from idle, simply push the Phone button (if active) on your steering wheel and say a command or say help. All Uconnect Phone sessions begin with a push of the VR button or the Phone button (if active) on the radio control head. Cancel Command At any prompt, after the beep, you can say Cancel and you will be returned to the main menu. You can also push the VR button or Phone button (if active) on your steering wheel when the system is listening for a command and be returned to the main or previous menu. Pair (Link) Uconnect Phone To A Mobile Phone To begin using your Uconnect Phone, you must pair your compatible Bluetooth enabled mobile phone. Mobile phone pairing is the process of establishing a wireless connection between a cellular phone and the Uconnect system. To complete the pairing process, you need to reference your mobile phone Owner's Manual. Please visit UconnectPhone.com for complete mobile phone compatibility information. NOTE:

You must have Bluetooth enabled on your phone to complete this procedure. The vehicle must be in PARK. 1. Place the ignition in the ACC or ON position. 2. Press the Phone button in the Menu Bar on the touchscreen. NOTE:

If there are no phones currently connected with the system, a pop-up will appear asking if you would like to pair a mobile phone. 3. Select Yes to begin the pairing process. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 453 4. Search for available devices on your Search for available devices on your Bluetooth enabled mobile phone. Press the Settings button on your mobile phone. Select Bluetooth and ensure it is enabled. Once enabled, the mobile phone will begin to search for Bluetooth connections. Bluetooth enabled mobile phone (see below). When prompted on the phone, select Uconnect and accept the connection request. 6. Uconnect Phone will display an in progress screen while the system is connecting. 7. When your mobile phone finds the Uconnect system, select Uconnect. 8. When prompted on the mobile phone, accept the connection request from Uconnect Phone. NOTE:

Some mobile phones will require you to enter the PIN number. 9. When the pairing process has successfully completed, the system will prompt you to choose whether or not this is your favorite phone. Selecting Yes will make this phone the highest priority. This phone will take precedence over other paired phones within range and will connect to the Uconnect system automatically when entering the vehicle. Only one mobile phone and/or one Bluetooth audio device can be connected MULTIMEDIA 453 to the Uconnect system at a time. If No is selected, simply select Uconnect from the mobile phone/audio device Bluetooth screen, and the Uconnect system will recon-

nect to the Bluetooth device. NOTE:

Software updates on your phone or the Uconnect system may interfere with the Bluetooth connection. If this happens, simply repeat the pairing process. However, first, make sure to delete the device from the list of phones on your Uconnect system. Next, be sure to remove Uconnect from the list of devices in your phones Bluetooth settings. Pair Additional Mobile Phones 1. Press the Phone Settings button on the touchscreen from the Phone main screen. 2. Press the Add Device button on the touch-

screen. 9 3. Search for available devices on your Bluetooth enabled mobile phone. When prompted on the phone, enter the name and PIN shown on the Uconnect screen. Pairing A Phone 5. If No is selected, and you still would like to pair a mobile phone, press the Phone Settings button from the Uconnect Phone main screen. Select Paired Phones, and then press the Add Device button on the touch-

screen. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 454 454 MULTIMEDIA 4. Uconnect Phone will display an in process screen while the system is connecting. 5. When the pairing process has successfully completed, the system will prompt you to choose whether or not this is your favorite phone. Selecting Yes will make this phone the highest priority. This phone will take precedence over other paired phones within range. NOTE:

For phones which are not made a favorite, the phone priority is determined by the order in which it was paired. The latest phone paired will have the higher priority. You can also use the following VR commands to bring up the Paired Phone screen from any screen on the radio:

Show Paired Phones or Connect My Phone Pair A Bluetooth Streaming Audio Device 1. Press the Media button on the touch-

screen to begin. 2. Change the Source to Bluetooth. 3. Press the Bluetooth button on the touch-

screen to display the Paired Audio Devices screen. You can also use a following VR command to bring up a list of paired audio devices:

Show Paired Phones or 4. Press the Add Device button on the touch-

Connect My Phone screen. NOTE:

If there is no device currently connected with the system, a pop-up will appear. 5. Search for available devices on your Blue-

tooth-enabled audio device. When prompted on the device, enter the PIN shown on the Uconnect screen. Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone Or Audio Device After Pairing Uconnect Phone will automatically connect to the highest priority paired phone and/or Audio Device within range. If you need to choose a particular phone or Audio Device follow these steps:

1. Press the Phone Settings button on the 6. Uconnect Phone will display an in process touchscreen. screen while the system is connecting. 7. When the pairing process has successfully Sources button on the touchscreen. 2. Press the Paired Phones or Paired Audio completed, the system will prompt you to choose whether or not this is your favorite device. Selecting Yes will make this device the highest priority. This device will take prece-

dence over other paired devices within range. NOTE:

For devices which are not made a favorite, the device priority is determined by the order in which it was paired. The latest device paired will have the higher priority. 3. Press to select the particular Phone or the particular Audio Device. A pop-up menu will appear, press Connect Phone. 4. Press the X button to exit out of the Settings screen. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 455 Disconnecting A Phone Or Audio Device 4. The options pop-up will be displayed. 1. Press the Phone Settings button on the 5. Press the Delete Device button on the touchscreen. touchscreen. 2. Press the Paired Phones or Paired Audio 6. Press the X button to exit out of the Settings Devices button on the touchscreen. screen. 3. Press the Settings button located to the Making A Phone Or Audio Device A Favorite right of the device name. 1. Press the Phone Settings button on the 4. The options pop-up will be displayed. touchscreen. 5. Press the Disconnect Device button on the 2. Press the Paired Phones or Paired Audio Devices button on the touchscreen. 6. Press the X button to exit out of the Settings 3. Press the Settings button located to the right of the device name. Deleting A Phone Or Audio Device 4. The options pop-up will be displayed. 1. Press the Phone Settings button on the 5. Press the Make Favorite button on the touchscreen. screen. touchscreen. touchscreen; you will see the chosen device move to the top of the list. 2. Press the Pair Phones or Paired Audio Devices button on the touchscreen. 6. Press the X to exit out of the Settings screen. 3. Press the Settings button located to the right of the device name for a different Phone or Audio Device than the currently connected device. MULTIMEDIA 455 Phonebook Download (Automatic Phonebook Transfer From Mobile Phone) If Equipped If equipped and specifically supported by your phone, Uconnect Phone automatically down-

loads names (text names) and number entries from the mobile phones phonebook. Specific Bluetooth Phones with Phonebook Access Profile may support this feature. See Uconnect website, UconnectPhone.com, for supported phones. To call a name from a downloaded mobile phone book, follow the procedure in the Uconnect Voice Recognition Quick Tips section. Automatic download and update of a phone book, if supported, begins as soon as the Bluetooth wireless phone connection is made to the Uconnect Phone, for example, after you start the vehicle. A maximum of 5,000 contact names with four numbers per contact will be downloaded and updated every time a phone is connected to the Uconnect Phone. 9 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 456 456 MULTIMEDIA Depending on the maximum number of entries downloaded, there may be a short delay before the latest downloaded names can be used. Until then, if available, the previ-

ously downloaded phonebook is available for use. 2. After loading the mobile phonebook, select Contacts from the Phone main screen, and then select the appropriate number. Press the Down Arrow symbol button next to the selected number to display the options pop-up. In the pop-up select Add to Favorites. Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile phone is accessible. This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or deleted on the Uconnect Phone. These can only be edited on the mobile phone. The changes are transferred and updated to Uconnect Phone on the next phone connection. Managing Your Favorites There are two ways you can add an entry to your Favorites. 1. After loading the mobile phonebook, press the Favorites button on the touchscreen, and then press one of the +Add favorite Contact buttons that appears on the list. NOTE:

If the Favorites list is full, you will be asked to remove an existing favorite. To Remove A Favorite 1. To remove a Favorite, select Favorites from the Phone main screen. Favorites 2. Next select the Down Arrow icon next to the contact you want to remove from your favor-

ites. This will bring up the options for that favorite contact. Mobile Phonebook Recent Call Log SMS Message Viewer 3. Press Remove from Favs. Dial By Saying A Number Phone. Check with your mobile service provider for the features that you have. Ways To Initiate A Phone Call Listed below are all the ways you can initiate a phone call with Uconnect Phone. Redial Dial by pressing in the number Voice Commands (Dial by Saying a Name, Call by Saying a Phonebook Name, Redial or Call Back) Phone Call Features The following features can be accessed through the Uconnect Phone if the feature(s) are avail-

able and supported by Bluetooth on your mobile service plan. For example, if your mobile service plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be accessed through the Uconnect 1. Push the VR button on your steering wheel to begin. 2. After the Listening prompt and the following beep, say Dial 151-123-4444. 3. The Uconnect Phone will dial the number 151-123-4444. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 457 Call By Saying A Phonebook Name Touch-Tone Number Entry 1. Push the VR button on your steering wheel 1. Press the Phone button on the touch-

to begin. screen. 2. After the Listening prompt and the 2. Press the Dial button on the touchscreen. following beep, say Call John Doe Mobile. 3. The Uconnect Phone will dial the number associated with John Doe, or if there are multiple numbers it will ask which number you want to call for John Doe. Call Controls The touchscreen allows you to control the following call features:

Answer End Ignore Hold/unhold Mute/unmute 3. The Touch-Tone screen will be displayed. 4. Use the numbered buttons on the touch-

screens to enter the number and press Call. If your vehicle has two or three buttons on the steering wheel (VR, Phone Send, and Phone End) press the VR button to send a touch-tone and say Send 1234# or you can say Send Voicemail Password if Voicemail password is stored in your mobile phonebook. Recent Calls You may browse a list of the most recent of each of the following call types:

All Calls Transfer the call to/from the phone Swap two active calls Join two active calls together Incoming Calls Outgoing Calls Missed Calls These can be accessed by pressing the recent calls button on the Phone main screen. MULTIMEDIA 457 You can also push the VR button on your steering wheel and say Show my incoming calls from any screen and the incoming calls will be displayed. NOTE:

Incoming can also be replaced with Outgoing, Recent, or Missed. Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call No Call Currently In Progress When you receive a call on your mobile phone, the Uconnect Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio system. Push the Phone button on the steering wheel to accept the call. You can also press the Answer button on the touchscreen or press the caller ID box. Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call Call Currently In Progress If a call is currently in progress and you have another incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for call waiting that you normally hear when using your mobile phone. Press the Uconnect Phone button on the steering wheel, answer button on the touchscreen or caller ID box to place the current call on hold and answer the incoming call. 9 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 458 458 MULTIMEDIA NOTE:

The Uconnect Phone compatible phones in the market today do not support rejecting an incoming call when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user can only answer an incoming call or ignore it. Do Not Disturb With Do Not Disturb, you can disable notifica-

tions from incoming calls and texts, allowing you to keep your eyes on the road and hands on the wheel. For your convenience, there is a counter display to keep track of your missed calls and text messages while you were using Do Not Disturb. Do Not Disturb can automatically reply with a text message, a call, or both when declining an incoming call and send it to voicemail. Automatic reply messages can be:

I am driving right now, I will get back to you shortly. Create a custom auto reply message up to 160 characters. NOTE:

Only the first 25 characters can be seen on the touchscreen while typing a custom message. While in Do Not Disturb, Conference Call can be selected so you can still place a second call without being interrupted by incoming calls. NOTE:

Reply with text message is not compatible with iPhones. Toggling Between Calls If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold), press the Swap button on the Phone main screen. Only one call can be placed on hold at a time. You can also push the Phone button to toggle between the active and held phone call. Auto reply with text message is only available on phones that support Bluetooth MAP. Join Calls Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold During an active call, press the Hold button on the Phone main screen. Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In Progress You can place a call on hold by pressing the Hold button on the Phone main screen, then dial a number from the dialpad, recent calls, SMS Inbox or from the phonebooks. To go back to the first call, refer to Toggling Between Calls in this section. To combine two calls, refer to Join Calls in this section. When two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold), press the Join Calls button on the Phone main screen to combine all calls into a Conference Call. Call Termination To end a call in progress, momentarily press the Phone End button on the touchscreen or the Phone End button on the steering wheel. Only the active call(s) will be terminated and if there is a call on hold, it will become the new active call. Redial Press the Redial button on the touchscreen, or push the VR button and after the Listening prompt and the following beep, say Redial. The Uconnect Phone will call the last number that was dialed from your mobile phone. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 459 Call Continuation Advanced Phone Connectivity Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone The Uconnect Phone allows ongoing calls to be transferred from your mobile phone to the Uconnect Phone without terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call from your connected mobile phone to the Uconnect Phone or vice versa, press the Transfer button on the Phone main screen. Connect Or Disconnect Link Between The Uconnect Phone And Mobile Phone If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth connection between a Uconnect Phone paired mobile phone and the Uconnect Phone, follow the instructions described in your mobile phone User's Manual. Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the Uconnect Phone after the vehicle ignition has been switched to OFF. NOTE:

The call will remain within the vehicle audio system until the phone becomes out of range for the Bluetooth connection. It is recom-

mended to press the Transfer button on the touchscreen when leaving the vehicle. Browsing SMS Using the steering wheel commands, you can view and manage the last 10 SMS messages received on the instrument panel. To use this function, the mobile phone must support the SMS exchange function through Bluetooth. Select the PHONE button on the instrument panel menu, and then select SMS Reader using the arrow keys on the steering wheel controls. The SMS Reader submenu allows the last 10 SMS messages to be displayed. MULTIMEDIA 459 Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect Phone Voice Command For the best performance:

Adjust the rearview mirror to provide at least inch (1 cm) gap between the overhead console (if equipped) and the mirror. Always wait for the beep before speaking. Speak normally, without pausing, just as you would speak to a person sitting a few feet/

meters away from you. Ensure that no one other than you is speaking during a voice command period. Performance is maximized under:

Low-To-Medium Blower Setting Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed Low Road Noise Smooth Road Surface Fully Closed Windows Dry Weather Condition 9 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 460 460 MULTIMEDIA WARNING!

ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the wheel. You have full responsibility and assume all risks related to the use of the Uconnect features and applications in this vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an accident involving serious injury or death. Even though the system is designed for many languages and accents, the system may not always work for some. NOTE:

It is recommended that you do not store names in your favorites phonebook while the vehicle is in motion. Phonebook (Mobile and Favorites) name recognition rate is optimized when the entries are not similar. You can say O (letter O) for 0 (zero). Even though international dialing for most number combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing number combinations may not be supported. Far End Audio Performance Bluetooth Communication Link Audio quality is maximized under:

Low-To-Medium Blower Setting Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed Low Road Noise Smooth Road Surface Fully Closed Windows Dry Weather Conditions Operation From The Driver's Seat Performance such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness to a large degree rely on the phone and network, and not the Uconnect Phone. Echo at the far end can sometimes be reduced by lowering the in-vehicle audio volume. Mobile phones have been found to lose connec-

tion to the Uconnect Phone. When this happens, the connection can generally be re-established by switching the mobile phone OFF/ON. Your mobile phone is recommended to remain in Bluetooth ON mode. Power-Up After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the ON/RUN or ACC position, or after a language change, you must wait at least 15 seconds prior to using the system. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 461 STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS IF EQUIPPED The remote sound system controls are located on the rear surface of the steering wheel at the three and nine oclock positions. Both controls are rocker-type switches with a push-button in the center. Steering Wheel Audio Controls

(Back View Of Steering Wheel) The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a push-button in the center and controls the volume and mode of the sound system. Pushing the top of the rocker switch will increase the volume, and pushing the bottom of the rocker switch will decrease the volume. Pushing the center button will make the radio switch between the various modes available

(AM/FM/SXM or Media etc.) The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a push-button in the center. The function of the left-hand control is different depending on which mode you are in. The following describes the left-hand control operation in each mode. Radio Operation Pushing the top of the switch will Seek Up for the next listenable station and pushing the bottom of the switch will Seek Down for the next listenable station. The button located in the center of the left-hand control will tune to the next preset station that you have programmed in the radio preset button. MULTIMEDIA 461 Media Mode Pushing the top of the switch once goes to the next track on the selected media (AUX/USB/

Bluetooth). Pushing the bottom of the switch once goes to the beginning of the current track, or to the beginning of the previous track if it is within eight seconds after the current track begins to play. NOTE:

While In Media Mode, the center button on the left rocker switch is nonfunctional. AUX/USB/MP3 CONTROL There are numerous USB ports located throughout the vehicle. This feature allows an external USB device to be plugged into the USB port. Plugging in a smartphone device to a USB Port may activate Android Auto or Apple CarPlay features, if equipped. For further information, refer to Android Auto or Apple CarPlay in the Owners Manual Supplement. 9 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 462 462 MULTIMEDIA Front Center Stack AUX Jack And USB Ports Center Console USB Charging Port NOTE:

The USB outlet in the bottom of the instrument panel can be switched from ignition only to constant battery powered all the time. See an authorized dealer for details. 1 USB Port 2 AUX Jack 3 Uconnect Theater Rear Data USB Port (if equipped) The data USB ports are located on the instru-

ment panel below the climate controls. There are multiple USB Charge Only ports in this vehicle. In the center console On the back of the front row seats in the Uconnect Theater Media hubs Above the rear cup holders in the third row of seats 3rd Row USB Charging Port NOTE:

The USB Charge Only ports will recharge battery operated USB devices when connected. UCONNECT THEATER IF EQUIPPED Uconnect Theater Overview Your Uconnect Theater is designed to give your family years of enjoyment. There are multiple ways to interact with your Uconnect Theater system;

Play your favorite CDs, DVDs, or Blu-ray Discs Plug and play a variety of standard video games or devices into the HDMI port Listen to audio over the wireless headphones Plug and play a variety of devices into the Video USB port Plug in standard headphones to listen to audio Project your mobile phone or tablet screen onto the rear Uconnect Theater touchscreens Please review this Owner's Manual to become familiar with its features and operation. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 463 Getting Started Uconnect Theater Controls MULTIMEDIA 463 Accessing The System From The Uconnect System You can access your Uconnect Theater system from the radio touchscreen following the steps below:

Option 1 1. Press the Media button. 2. Press the Uconnect Theater button icon. Uconnect Theater Screen Option 2 1 Uconnect Theater Touchscreen (Rear Touch-

screens) 2 Uconnect System (Front Touchscreen) 3 Uconnect Theater Media Hub (Headphone Jack, HDMI Input, USB Charge Only Port) There are three different ways to operate the features of the Uconnect Theater:

The Remote Control The Uconnect System The Individual Uconnect Theater Touch-

screens 1. Press the Apps button on the bottom of the touchscreen. 2. Press the Uconnect Theater button on the touchscreen. You may need to navigate to different pages in the Apps drawer to find the Uconnect Theater button. NOTE:

The Uconnect Theater icon may be dragged and dropped down from the Apps drawer to the drag

& drop menu to create an App/shortcut. Refer to Drag & Drop Menu Bar in this section for more information. Uconnect Theater Summary Screen 1 Power All On/Off (Controls Both Screens) 2 Mute All On/Off (Controls Both Screens) 3 Lock All On/Off (Controls Both Screens) 4 Source Drop-Down List for Current Screen 5 Lock On/Off for Current Screen 6 Mute On/Off for Current Screen 7 Power On/Off for Current Screen 9 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 464 464 MULTIMEDIA Parents can control certain features of the system with the Uconnect Theater Controls screens, right from the Uconnect touchscreen radio. Options include:

Change media sources or select Apps by using the drop-down list Lock one or both screens Mute an individual screen or both screens Turn On/Off one or both screens View media showing on a specific screen while gear selector is in PARK (P) Listen in to a particular Uconnect Theater screen through the vehicles sound system by selecting the Listen In feature after selecting the Press to Enter option. Accessing The System From The Uconnect Theater Rear Screens You can also access your Uconnect Theater system from the rear screens from the steps below:

NOTE:

A message asking if you would like to pair a remote will pop up if one has not already been paired to the system. 2. If YES is selected to pair a remote, push any button on the remote and pairing will immediately start. 3. If NO is selected, the Uconnect Theater home screen will pop up. NOTE:

There will be a touchscreen notification message when pairing is successful. Test to make sure the remote is successfully paired by dragging your finger across the gesture pad. If you do not see the on-screen Arrow, try using the Screen button on the remote to switch between rear screen one and rear screen two to make sure the remote is controlling the intended screen. It may take several seconds for the remote to react when initially paired. 1. Lift screen upward, the system will auto-

If remote does not pair, refer to Pairing The matically power on. Remote in this section for an alternative pairing process. Pairing The Remote Remote Pairing If the remote needs to be paired to your Uconnect Theater system, follow the procedure below:

1. Install batteries into both remotes. 2. Press the Settings icon found in the lower right portion of the Uconnect Theater touch-

screen. 3. Press the Remote button towards the bottom of the Uconnect Theater touch-

screen, within the settings menu. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 465 4. Press the Pair Remote option. Press the OK Unpairing The Remote Media Sources MULTIMEDIA 465 button. A touchscreen notification will appear indicating that your remote has been paired successfully or unsuccessfully. 5. Test to make sure the remote is success-

fully paired by dragging your finger across the gesture pad. If you do not see the On-Screen arrow, try using the Screen button on the remote to switch between rear screen one and rear screen two to make sure the remote is controlling the intended screen. It may take several seconds for the remote to react when initially paired. NOTE:

If pairing fails, try resetting the remote by pushing and holding the Play/Pause, Down Arrow, and the Screen button simultaneously for about five seconds until the back light flashes. If the remote is ever non-operational, try re-pairing the remote. The system can accommodate up to 10 paired remote controls. In events such as updating the Uconnect Theater software, or taking a remote to another vehicle, the remote will need to be unpaired from your Uconnect Theater system. To unpair the remote:

1. Press the Settings icon found in the lower right portion of the Uconnect Theater touchscreen. 2. Press the Remote button towards the bottom of the Uconnect Theater touch-

screen, within the settings menu. 3. Select Manage Remote Controls from the Remote section of "Settings and follow the on-screen instructions to complete the unpairing process. 4. Once complete, the remote will be ready to pair again. NOTE:

There will be a touchscreen notification message when unpairing is successful. Repeat the above steps to unpair a second remote. Media Source Selection 1 Selected Source Screen 1 2 Screen 2 Source Selection Drop Down Users can select content for each screen from the front radio touchscreen by choosing desired content from the Select Input drop-down menu. Options include Blu-ray Disc, HDMI, USB, Apps, and Viewing the other rear screen. 9 NOTE:

Use the View Screen function to pull content from one screen to the other with a single press of a button. Doing this however will disable and 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 466 466 MULTIMEDIA gray out certain player controls on the screen viewing the other screen's content. Uconnect Theater Remote Control 5. Fast Forward Button Push and hold to fast forward through the current audio track or video chapter. Push once to skip to the next track. Replacing The Remote Control Batteries Each remote control requires two AAA batteries for operation. To replace the batteries:

1. Locate the battery compartment on the back of the remote, then slide the battery cover downward. 2. Remove the old batteries and follow battery recycling procedures for your area. 3. Install new batteries, making sure to orient them according to the polarity diagram shown inside the battery compartment. 4. Replace the battery compartment cover. 6. Play/Pause Button

? Begin/resume or pause disc play. 7. Fast Rewind Button Push and hold to fast rewind through the current audio track or video chapter. Push once to revert back to the previous track. 8. OK Button Push to select the highlighted option in a menu. 9. Screen Selector Button Push the screen selector to toggle between screen 1 (Driver Side), or screen 2 (Passenger Side). 10. Back Button Push to exit out of menus or return to previous screen. 11. Power Button Turns the screen for the selected channel on or off. 12. Screen Indicator Indicates which screen

(1 or 2) is being controlled by the remote control. Remote Control 1. Gesture Pad Control pointer position by running your finger over this area and tapping to select items on the touchscreen, functions similar to a computer/laptop mouse. 2. Mute Button Mutes headphone audio. 3. Home Button Push to access available Sources. 4. Arrow Buttons Push the Arrow buttons to highlight an item or scroll through menus. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 467 Uconnect Theater Home Screen And Controls MULTIMEDIA 467 General Settings To change Source Card order, select Source Card Reorder, then press and hold source card on the touchscreen, and drag and drop in desired order. You can also adjust settings such as:

Brightness Media port lighting on and off Clock on and off NOTE:

System information can also be displayed under General Settings. Remote Settings Under this setting, you can access the following:

Manage Remotes (this allows you to unpair remotes) Pair Remote Remote sensitivity (this adjusts the speed and sensitivity of cursor on screen when using gesture pad) 9 Uconnect Theater Home Screen (Rear Touchscreens) 1 Search Button (Front USB Media Search) 2 Power Button 3 Settings Button 4 Toggle Button List And Icon View 5 Source Card Page Indicator 6 Wired Headphone Volume 7 Rear Climate Control Button 8 Home Button 9 Source Cards Source Card Selection You can choose sources such as HDMI, USB, Apps, or Blu-ray. You may also view content of the opposite screen in one step by choosing the View Screen source card. NOTE:

Source card order can be changed by pressing the Settings button on the touch-

screen and scrolling down to "Source Card Order". Use the View Screen function to pull content from one screen to the other in a single press of a button. Doing this however will disable and gray out certain player controls on the screen viewing the other screen's content. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 468 l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouil-

lage, et Play A DVD/Blu-ray Or USB Media File From Uconnect System 468 MULTIMEDIA General Information The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interfer-

ence, and 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Brand: Delphi Model: FCA REMOTE Le prsent appareil est conforme aux CNR d`Innovation, Science and Economic Develop-

ment applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorise aux deux conditions suivantes:

1. 2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radiolectrique subi, mme si le brouillage est susceptible d'en comprom-

ettre le fonctionnement. Marque: Delphi Modle: FCA REMOTE La operacin de este equipo est sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones:

1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia perjudicial y 2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cual-

quier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operacin no deseada. Marca: Delphi Modelo: FCA REMOTE NOTE:

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compli-

ance could void the users authority to operate the equipment. 1. Insert a Blu-ray Disc or DVD disc into the disc player with the label facing up, or insert a USB drive into rear Video USB port. NOTE:

The DVD/Blu-ray Disc player and Video USB port are both located under the radio controls in the instrument panel. 2. Press the Uconnect Theater button on the radio touchscreen. Refer to Accessing The System From The Uconnect System in this section for further information. 3. Select Disc or USB from the source controls

(i.e. select the desired source from the Select Input 1 or Select Input 2 menu for the respective screen). 4. For DVD/Blu-ray disc press the Press to Enter feature in the Movie Snapshot on the radio touchscreen, then press OK on the following screen. The steps to start a DVD are dependent on the steps required by that specific DVD. For USB Media Files - Press Music, Movie, or Folders, then select media title from list(s). 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 469 5. To play a DVD/Blu-ray disc on both screens simultaneously, select Disc from both screen drop downs, or choose Disc Source on one screen and push the View Screen button on the other. MULTIMEDIA 469 NOTE:

After selecting Press to Enter or the Movie Snapshot, the control functions for that screen appears. These controls only apply to the indi-

vidual screen selected and include:

Press to turn Selected Screen On/Off. 1. Power 2. Mute Mute rear headphones for selected source for the current ignition cycle. Pressing mute again will unmute rear headphones. Press to enable/disable Remote Control functions and Rear Touchscreen Controls for the selected source. 4. View Select this button to view full screen video if vehicle is not moving. Button is disabled when not viewing a video source or when the vehicle is in motion. 9 5. Listen In Select this button to play one of the rear screens audio over the vehicles audio system. Source Controls From The Uconnect System Uconnect Theater 3. Lock DVD/Blu-ray Disc Player 1 Disc Player (Rear) 2 Rear Video USB Port Uconnect System Media Control Screen 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 470 470 MULTIMEDIA NOTE:

To view video content on the radio screen, bring the vehicle to a stop. Disc Menu When listening to a CD Audio disc, CD Data disc, DVD, or Blu-ray, pushing the remote controls Arrow buttons will navigate the cursor on the rear touchscreen in the desired direction, on whichever touchscreen is selected. The UP, DOWN, LEFT, and RIGHT Arrow buttons, and the OK and MENU buttons on the remote, along with the corresponding buttons overlaid on the radio touchscreen, can be used to navigate the disc menu when it appears. This can be used to select specific chapters in a movie, to navigate special features, or to play the movie from the menu. NOTE:

Inserting a disc into the player will auto play the disc if already in the Disc" source menu on the rear screens, and the disc supports auto play. Blu-ray Controls Disc Specific Functions The four colored buttons (red, green, blue, yellow) are designed for use with certain Blu-ray disc movie titles to access particular Uconnect Theater Apps features or software on the disc. See the docu-

mentation provided with your Blu-ray disc movie to see if these buttons can be used. The 5-way control buttons located to the right of the four colored buttons, are used to navigate and select items in the discs menu, like play movie, scene selection, etc. Apps Home Screen Sudoku App Home Screen Rear Touchscreen Blu-ray Controls Disc Specific Functions 1 Red Button 2 Green Button 3 Blue Button 4 5-Way Control Buttons 5 Move 5-Way Controls Button 6 Yellow Button 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 471 Select the Apps source card to play pre-loaded games. Pressing the Help button teaches users how to play each game. Pick from games:

Back Seat Bingo Are We There Yet? Uconnect 4C NAV Checkers Hanging Fruit License Plate Game Math Flash Cards Solitaire Sudoku Tic Tac Toe NOTE:

To exit a game, press Exit button then Back Arrow, or Home button on the touchscreen. Are We There Yet? App 1 Decrease Timing Between Notifications Button 2 Notifications ON/OFF Button 3 Increase Timing Between Notifications Button 4 Arrival Time 5 Time Remaining Until Destination Is Reached 6 Distance Remaining MULTIMEDIA 471 When a navigation route has been set from the Uconnect system, the second row passengers can use Are We There Yet? for an animated screen showing distance and time remaining on navigation routes, as well as the estimated time of arrival with pop-up notifications. Notifications and their frequency can be set up for route information by using the Arrow buttons, and can be turned on and off using the Notifications button on the Are We There Yet? App. Esti-

mated time of arrival notifications pop up at the bottom center of the screen. 9 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 472 472 MULTIMEDIA Using The Rear Video USB Port Rear Video USB Port Plug in a USB drive, iPhone, iPod or mass storage device and play your favorite music or movies. NOTE:

To view USB media on the rear theater screens, insert a USB drive into the port next to the DVD/

Blu-ray Disc player. The USB drive port is located under the radio controls in the instru-

ment panel. Play Video Games Connect the video game console to the HDMI 1 or 2 ports, located behind the first row seat. Search Screen On the rear screen you can browse the content of the USB device by going to the USB source. Use the search feature to find your music faster. AUX/HDMI/USB 1 Headphone Jack (Headphone Output Only) 2 HDMI Port 3 USB Port (Charge Only) NOTE:

Certain high-end video games will exceed the power limit of the vehicle's Power Inverter. Refer to Power Inverter in Getting To Know Your Vehicle in this guide for further information. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 473 Headphones Operation The headphones receive two separate channels of audio using an infrared transmitter from the video screens. If no audio is heard after increasing the volume control, there are a number of things that can be done to troubleshoot the issue:

Verify that the screen is turned on. Make sure that the headphones are on. Verify that the headphone channel selector button is on the desired channel. This button switches between the audio of screen 1 and screen 2. Install two new AAA type batteries in the headphones. MULTIMEDIA 473 Changing The Audio Mode For Headphones 1. Ensure the remote control and the head-

phones are on the same channel. 2. Push the Home button on the remote control. 3. When the Home menu appears on the touchscreen, use the Arrow buttons on the remote control to navigate to the available modes and push the OK button to select the new mode or use the Gesture Pad at the top of the remote control. Headphone Channel Selector Button 9 1 Power ON/OFF Button 2 Volume Control Wheel 3 Channel Selector Button The headphone power indicator and controls are located on the right ear cup. NOTE:

Uconnect Theater must be turned on before sound can be heard from the headphones. To conserve battery life, the headphones will auto-

matically turn off approximately three minutes after the Uconnect Theater system is turned off. Check to see that the channel is not muted. Uconnect Theater Headphones 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 474 474 MULTIMEDIA Replacing The Headphone Batteries Each set of headphones requires two AAA batteries for operation. To replace the batteries:

1. Locate the battery compartment on the left ear cup of the headphones, and then slide the battery cover downward. 2. Remove the old batteries and follow battery recycling procedures for your area. 3. Install new batteries, making sure to orient them according to the polarity diagram shown inside the battery compartment. 4. Replace the battery compartment cover. Stereo Headphone Lifetime Limited Warranty Who Does This Warranty Cover? This warranty covers the initial user or purchaser ("you" or

"your") of this particular Aptiv PLC (Aptiv) wire-

less headphone ("Product"). The warranty is not transferable. How Long Does the Coverage Last? This warranty lasts as long as you own the Product. What Does This Warranty Cover? Except as specified below, this warranty covers any Product that in normal use is defective in work-

manship or materials. What Does This Warranty Not Cover? This warranty does not cover any damage or defect that results from misuse, abuse or modification of the Product other than by Aptiv. Foam earpieces, which will wear over time through normal use, are specifically not covered

(replacement foam is available for a nominal charge). APTIV IS NOT LIABLE FOR ANY INJURIES OR DAMAGES TO PERSONS OR PROPERTY RESULTING FROM THE USE OF, OR ANY FAILURE OR DEFECT IN, THE PRODUCT, NOR IS APTIV LIABLE FOR ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, EXEMPLARY, PUNITIVE OR OTHER DAMAGES OF ANY KIND OR NATURE WHATSOEVER. Some states and jurisdictions may not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so the above limitation may not apply to you. This warranty gives you specific legal rights. You may also have other rights, which vary from jurisdiction to jurisdiction. What Will Aptiv Do? Aptiv, at its option, will repair or replace any defective Product. Aptiv reserves the right to replace any discontinued Product with a comparable model. THIS WARRANTY IS THE SOLE WARRANTY FOR THIS PRODUCT, SETS FORTH YOUR EXCLUSIVE REMEDY REGARDING DEFECTIVE PRODUCTS, AND IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES

(EXPRESS OR IMPLIED), INCLUDING ANY WARRANTY FOR MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. If you have any questions or comments regarding your Aptiv wireless headphones, please email hpservice@aptiv.com or phone:

888-293-3332 Display Settings When watching a video source, pressing the Settings icon on the touchscreen activates the Settings menu. These settings control the appearance of the video on the screen. The factory default settings are already set for optimum viewing, so there is no need to change these settings under normal circumstances. To change the settings, use one of the touch-

screens or remote. To reset all values back to the original settings, select Reset to Defaults, then select YES. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 475 Listening To Audio With The Screen Closed To listen to only audio portion of the channel with the screen closed:

Set the audio to the desired source and channel. Close the video screen. When the screen is reopened, the video screen will automatically turn back on and show the appropriate display menu or media. If the screen is closed and there is no audio heard, verify that the headphones are turned on

(the ON indicator is illuminated) and the head-

phone selector switch is on the desired channel. If the headphones are turned on, push the remote controls power button to turn audio on. If audio is still not heard, check that fully charged batteries are installed in the head-

phones. MULTIMEDIA 475 Rear Climate Controls The rear climate controls can also be controlled using the Uconnect Theater system. Refer to Climate Controls in Getting To Know Your Vehicle for further information. Icon ON OFF Climate Control ON Button Press and release this button to turn the Rear Climate. Climate Control OFF Button Press and release this button to turn the Climate Controls off. Description Rear Climate Controls 9 AUTO Button Automatically controls the rear interior cabin temperature by adjusting airflow distribution and amount. Toggling this function will cause the system to switch between manual mode and automatic modes. Refer to Automatic Operation in Getting To Know Your Vehicle for more information. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 476 476 MULTIMEDIA Icon Rear Passenger Temperature Up and Down Buttons Provides the rear passengers with independent temperature control. Press the button on the touchscreen to increase or decrease the temperature. The temperature will get warmer as you move up toward the red arrow and colder as you move down toward the blue arrow. Description Headliner Mode Headliner Mode Air comes from the outlets in the headliner. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air. Moving the air vanes of the outlets to one side will shut off the airflow. Bi-Level Mode Bi-Level Mode Air comes from both the headliner outlets and the floor outlets. NOTE:

In many temperature positions, the Bi-Level mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the headliner outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets. Floor Mode Floor Mode Air comes from the floor outlets. Blower Control Blower Control is used to regulate the amount of air forced through the climate system. There are seven blower speeds available. Adjusting the blower will cause automatic mode to switch to manual operation. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 477 Accessibility If Equipped Accessibility is a feature of the DVD/Blu-ray/

USB Video system that announces a function prior to performing the action. Refer to Uconnect Settings in this chapter for further information. Wireless Streaming If Equipped Your Uconnect Theater system may be equipped with Wireless Streaming functionality that allows you to project your smartphone or tablet onto your rear Uconnect Theater touch-

screens. This Source Card will allow you to wire-

lessly link your compatible Android devices to your Uconnect Theater system and stream your device onto the touchscreens. Choose the Wireless Streaming Source Card on your rear Uconnect Theater touchscreen. Wireless Streaming Source Card 1. Enable your devices Wi-Fi. The first row passengers can also access wire-

less streaming by choosing the source in the Uconnect Theater menu on the front Uconnect touchscreen. 2. Select the Wireless Streaming feature on your device. The name of this feature is device dependent and could include: mirror, cast, or smart view. MULTIMEDIA 477 NOTE:

For system compatibility, consult your device's Owner's Manual or www.uconnectphone.com to see if your device supports wireless streaming technology compatibility. Apple devices do not support this feature. To link your device to the rear Uconnect Theater touchscreens:

NOTE:

Refer to your device's Owners Manual or www.uconnectphone.com for further information. 3. Select Pacifica Wireless Network from the list of available networks on your device. 9 Streaming Source On Front Uconnect Touchscreen 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 478 478 MULTIMEDIA 4. When prompted by an Authentication NOTE:

Screen, press Accept on the touchscreen to begin wireless streaming on your device. If prompted, verify that the code on the rear touchscreen and the device match. Streaming Device Source Card Your phone will be added as an additional Source Card on the Uconnect Theater touch-

screens. NOTE:

The Authentication Screen will appear on both rear touchscreens. The touchscreen screen on which Accept is selected will be the primary controller for the wireless streaming session. Some devices will allow you to control your device through the Uconnect Theater rear touchscreens. They will react to your selec-

tions from the touchscreen and be repre-

sented on your device as well. When supported, the Uconnect Theater task bar will appear at the top and bottom of the Uconnect Theater touchscreen, framing your streaming device. Devices that do not support this feature will not respond to Uconnect Theater touch-

screen but can still be controlled using the streaming device. Settings Below is a list of the settings available for the Wireless Streaming feature of your Uconnect Theater system:

Wireless Streaming Settings Wireless: ON/OFF Turn on and off the wire-

less feature of the Uconnect Theater system. Manage Devices Allows the user to delete the paired devices. Local Network Name Allows the user to rename the Pacifica Wireless Network. Refer to the Wireless Streaming video on the Uconnect YouTube Channel at www.youtube.com/DriveUconnect for tips and additional information on the Wireless Streaming function. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 479 BD And DVD Region Codes Many BD and DVD discs are coded by geographic region. These region codes must match in order for the disc to play. If the region code for the BD or DVD disc does not match the region code for the Blu-ray Disc player, the disc will not play. USA and Canada are set for BD : code A / DVD : code 1. Recorded Discs The Blu-ray Disc player will play CD-R and CD-RW discs recorded in CD-Audio or Video-CD format, or as a CD-ROM containing MP3, AAC or WMA files. The player will also play DVD-Video content recorded to a DVD-R or DVD-RW disc. DVD-ROM discs (either pressed or recorded) are not supported. Compressed audio and DivX recorded on DVD is playable. If you record a disc using a personal computer, there may be cases where the Blu-ray Disc player may not be able to play some or the entire disc, even if it is recorded in a compatible format and is playable on other players. To help avoid playback problems, use the following guidelines when recording discs. Open sessions are ignored. Only sessions that are closed are playable. For multi-session CDs that contain only multiple CD-Audio sessions, the player will renumber the tracks so each track number is unique. For CD Data (or CD-ROM) discs, always use the ISO-9660 (Level 1 or Level 2), Joliet, or Romeo format. Other formats (such as HFS, or others) are not supported. The player recognizes a maximum of 2000 files and 255 folders (includes the ROOT folder) per CD-R and CD-RW disc. Mixed media recordable DVD formats will only play the Video_TS portion of the disc. If you are still having trouble writing a disc that is playable in the Blu-ray Disc player, check with the disc recording software publisher for more information about burning playable discs. The recommended method for labeling record-

able discs (CD-R, CD-RW, and DVD-R) is with a permanent marker. Do not use adhesive labels as they may separate from the disc, become stuck, and cause permanent damage to the DVD player. MULTIMEDIA 479 Compressed Audio Files (MP3, WMA and AAC) The Blu-ray Disc player is capable of playing MP3 (MPEG-1 Audio Layer 3), WMA (Windows Media Audio) files and AAC (Advanced Audio Coding) from a CD Data disc (usually a CD-R or CD-RW) or DVD Data disc (usually a DVD-R or DVD-RW). The Blu-ray Disc player always uses the file extension to determine the audio format, so MP3 files must always end with the extension

.mp3 or .MP3 and WMA files must always end with the extension .wma or .WMA and AAC files must always end with the exten-

sion and .aac or .AAC or m4a. To prevent incorrect playback, do not use these extensions for any other types of files. For MP3 files, ID3v1, ID3v2 tag data (such as artist name, track title, album, etc.) are supported. Any file that is copy protected (such as those downloaded from many online music stores) will not play. The Blu-ray player will auto-

matically skip the file and begin playing the next available file. 9 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 480 480 MULTIMEDIA Other compression formats such as MP3 Pro, Ogg Vorbis, and ATRAC3 will not play. The Blu-ray player will automatically skip the file and begin playing the next available file. If you are creating your own files, the recom-

mended fixed bit rate for MP3 files is between 32 and 320Kbps and the recom-

mended fixed bit rate for WMA files is between 16 and 192Kbps. Variable bit rates are also supported. For both formats, the recommended sample rate is either 44.1kHz or 48kHz. To change the current file, use the remote control Seek Forward or Seek Back buttons to return to the start of the current or previous file. AAC (MPEG-4 AAC, Low Complexity Profile) support. AAC HE v1 (AAC High Efficiency v1 aka. AAC/MPEG4v2 AAC+) support. HE-AAC v1, v2 support. Disc Errors If the Blu-ray Disc player is unable to read the disc, a "Disc Error" message is displayed on the rear screen and Radio displays. A dirty, damaged, or incompatible disc format are all potential causes for a "Disc Error" message. If a disc has a damaged track which results in audible or visible errors that persists for two seconds, the Blu-ray Disc player will attempt to continue playing the disc by skipping forward one to three seconds at a time. If the end of the disc is reached, the Blu-ray Disc player will return to the beginning of the disc and attempt to play the start of the first track. The Blu-ray Disc player may shut down during extremely hot conditions, such as when the vehicles interior temperature is above 140F

(60.0C). When this occurs, the player will display "High Temp" and will shut off the Rear Seat displays until a safe temperature is reached. This shutdown is necessary to protect the optics of the Blu-ray Disc player. Product Agreement Open Source Software The software built into this product, are composed of multiple software components, and there are the copyrights of our company or third parties in each software component. Also, in this product, the following open source soft-

ware has been installed. The licensed software for our company is based on GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE V2.0 ("GPL"). The licensed software for our company is based on GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE V2.1 ("LGPL"). The software which has the copyrights of a third party and is distributed as free software. Please refer the contract details which are disclosed in the following websites, for example, concerning these above software. http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/

gpl-2.0-standalone.html, http://www.gnu.org/

licenses/lgpl-2.1-standalone.html. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 481 You have the right of acquisition, modification, and distribution of the source code of the GPL/LGPL software. These are distributed in the hope that it will be useful by itself. However, including the absence of an implied warranty on the "suitability for a particular purpose" or "merchantability", the warranty of any kind will not be made. You may download Source Code from the indicating URL by the pressed button of Open Source Software on the Setup Menu. Also, please refrain from contact about the contents of the source code of open source. The source code of the software in which there are the copyrights of our company or third parties, is not subject to distribution. MULTIMEDIA 481 kernel FreeType 2 gcc sh4eb 2.6.16.29 2.2.1 3.4.5 glibc 2.3.5 libgcc_s-3. bash-3.0-3 busybox MAKE DEV 4.5 1 1.00 1.1.0 libtermcap 2.0.8 mtd-utils 20050619 initscripts 8.11.1-1 libstdc+

+3.4.5-10 coreutils dosfstools 6.9 2.10-3 directfb 1.0.0-rc1 kxml 1.21 v2lin 0.1

boot_loader sh-ipl +g 1.00 module-init-tools 3.1.0 libiconv 1.11 binutils-sh4eb 2.16.91.0.2

9 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 482 482 MULTIMEDIA Dolby Manufactured under license from Dolby Labora-

tories. Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. DTS For DTS patents, see http://dts.com/patents. Manufactured under license from DTS Licensing Limited. DTS, the Symbol, DTS and the Symbol together are registered trademarks, and DTS 2.0 Channel is a trademark of DTS, Inc. DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved. DVD

"The DVD logo is a trademark of DVD Format/

Logo Licensing Corporation." or " DVD logo is a trademark of DVD Format/Logo Licensing Corporation registered in the US, Japan and other countries."

BDA Blu-ray Disc, Blu-ray, BD-Live, BONUSVIEW, AVCREC and the logos are trademarks of the Blu-ray Disc Association. AVCHD

"AVCHD" and the "AVCHD" logo are trademarks of Panasonic Corporation and Sony Corporation. BD-J Java is a registered trademark of Oracle and/or its affiliates. MPEG THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE AVC PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL USE OF A CONSUMER TO (i) ENCODE VIDEO IN COMPLI-

ANCE WITH THE AVC STANDARD ("AVC VIDEO") AND/OR (ii) DECODE AVC VIDEO THAT WAS ENCODED BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL ACTIVITY AND/OR WAS OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED TO PROVIDE AVC VIDEO. NO LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL BE IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE. ADDITIONAL INFORMA-

TION MAY BE OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA, L.L.C. SEE WWW.MPEGLA.COM . DivX This DivX Certified device has passed rigorous testing to ensure it plays DivX video. To play purchased DivX movies, first register your device at http://www.divx.com/en/vod. Find your registration code in the DivX VOD section of your device setup menu. DivX, DivX Certified and associated logos are trademarks of DivX, LLC and are used under license. Cinavia

"Cinavia Notice This product uses Cinavia tech-

nology to limit the use of unauthorized copies of some commercially-produced film and videos and their soundtracks. When a prohibited use of an unauthorized copy is detected, a message will be displayed and playback or copying will be interrupted. More information about Cinavia technology is provided at the Cinavia Online Consumer Information Center at http://

www.cinavia.com/. To request additional infor-

mation about Cinavia by mail, send a postcard with your mailing address to: Cinavia Consumer Information Center, P.O. Box 86851, San Diego, CA, 92138, USA. This product incorporates proprietary technology under license from Verance Corporation and is protected by US Patent 7,369,677 and other US and worldwide patents issued and pending as well as copyright and trade secret protection for certain aspects of such technology. Cinavia is a trademark of Verance Corporation. Copyright 2004-2012 Verance Corporation. All rights reserved by Verance. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited. WARNING!

Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 483 General Information The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interfer-

ence, and 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Le prsent appareil est conforme aux CNR d`Innovation, Science and Economic Develop-

ment applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorise aux deux conditions suivantes:

1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouil-

lage, et 2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radiolectrique subi, mme si le brouillage est susceptible d'en comprom-

ettre le fonctionnement. La operacin de este equipo est sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones:

1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia perjudicial y 2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cual-

quier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operacin no deseada. NOTE:

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compli-

ance could void the users authority to operate the equipment. MULTIMEDIA 483 FCC/IC Regulatory Notices Modification Statement Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compli-

ance could void the user's authority to operate this equipment. Interference Statement This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interfer-

ence, and 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. 9 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 484 484 MULTIMEDIA Le prsent appareil est conforme aux CNR d`Innovation, Science and Economic Develop-

ment applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorise aux deux conditions suivantes:

1. 2. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouil-

lage, et l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radiolectrique subi, mme si le brouillage est susceptible d'en comprom-

ettre le fonctionnement. La operacin de este equipo est sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones:

1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia perjudicial y 2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cual-

quier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operacin no deseada. Wireless Notice This device complies with FCC/IC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment and meets the FCC radio frequency (RF) Exposure Guidelines and RSS-102 of the IC radio frequency (RF) Expo-

sure rules. This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. FCC Class B Digital Device Notice This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment gener-

ates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accor-

dance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interfer-

ence will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interfer-

ence to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equip-

ment and receiver. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/

TV technician for help. CAN ICES-3 (B) / NMB-3 (B) This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 485 RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your radio. This condi-

tion may be lessened or eliminated by relo-

cating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does not satisfactorily clear by the repositioning of the antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be turned down or off during mobile phone operation when not using Uconnect (if equipped). Regulatory And Safety Information USA/CANADA Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation The radiated output power of the internal wire-

less radio is far below the FCC and IC radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the wireless radio will be used in such a manner that the radio is 8 in (20 cm) or further from the human body. The internal wireless radio operates within guidelines found in radio frequency safety stan-

dards and recommendations, which reflect the consensus of the scientific community. The radio manufacturer believes the internal wireless radio is safe for use by consumers. The level of energy emitted is far less than the elec-

tromagnetic energy emitted by wireless devices such as mobile phones. However, the use of wireless radios may be restricted in some situa-

tions or environments, such as aboard airplanes. If you are unsure of restrictions, you are encouraged to ask for authorization before turning on the wireless radio. The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interfer-

ence, and 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. MULTIMEDIA 485 Le prsent appareil est conforme aux CNR d`Innovation, Science and Economic Develop-

ment applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorise aux deux conditions suivantes:

1. 2. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouil-

lage, et l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radiolectrique subi, mme si le brouillage est susceptible d'en comprom-

ettre le fonctionnement. La operacin de este equipo est sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones:

1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia perjudicial y 2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cual-

quier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operacin no deseada. NOTE:

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compli-

ance could void the users authority to operate the equipment. 9

 

 

This equipment has been tested and found to Introducing Uconnect UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with these helpful quick tips. It provides the key Voice Commands and tips you need to know to control your Uconnect system. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 486 486 MULTIMEDIA NOTE:

comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reason-

able protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guar-

antee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful inter-

ference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encour-

aged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

a. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. b. Consult an authorized dealer or an expe-

rienced radio technician for help. Uconnect 4C/4C NAV NOTE:

If you see the NAV icon on the bottom bar, or in the Apps menus, of your touchscreen, you have the Uconnect 4C NAV system. If not, you have a Uconnect 4C system. Uconnect 4 Get Started You can interrupt the help message or Basic Voice Commands system prompts by pushing the VR or Phone button and saying a Voice Command from the current category. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 487 All you need to control your Uconnect system with your voice are the buttons on your steering wheel. Helpful hints for using Voice Recognition:

Visit UconnectPhone.com to check mobile device and feature compatibility and to find phone pairing instructions. Reduce background noise. Wind and passenger conversations are examples of noise that may impact recognition. Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while facing straight ahead. The microphone is positioned on the rearview mirror and aimed at the driver. Each time you give a Voice Command, you must first push either the Voice Recognition

(VR) or Phone button, wait until after the beep, then say your Voice Command. MULTIMEDIA 487 The basic Voice Commands below can be given at any point while using your Uconnect system. Push the VR button

. After the beep, say:

Cancel to stop a current voice session Help to hear a list of suggested Voice Commands again Repeat to listen to the system prompts Notice the visual cues that inform you of your voice recognition systems status. Cues appear on the touchscreen. 9 Uconnect Voice Command Buttons 1 Push To Initiate Or To Answer A Phone Call, Send Or Receive A Text 2 For All Radios: Push To Begin Radio, Media, Or Climate Functions. For Uconnect 4C NAV Sys-

tem Only: Push To Begin Navigation Function 3 Push To End Call 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 488 488 MULTIMEDIA Radio Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM, or SiriusXM Satellite Radio stations you would like to hear. (Subscription or included Siri-

usXM Satellite Radio trial required.) Push the VR button Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM

. After the beep, say:

Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1 TIP:

At any time, if you are not sure of what to say or want to learn a Voice Command, push the VR button you with a list of commands. and say, Help. The system provides Media Uconnect offers connections via USB, Blue-

tooth and auxiliary ports (if equipped). Voice operation is only available for connected USB and AUX devices. After the beep, say one Push the VR button of the following commands and follow the prompts to switch your media source or choose an artist. Change source to Bluetooth Phone Change source to AUX Change source to USB Play artist Beethoven; Play album Greatest Hits; Play song Moonlight Sonata; Play genre Classical Making and answering hands-free phone calls is easy with Uconnect. When the Phonebook button is illuminated on your touchscreen, your system is ready. Check UconnectPhone.com for mobile phone compatibility and pairing instruc-

tions. Push the Phone button one of the following commands:

Call John Smith

. After the beep, say Dial 123-456-7890 and follow the system TIP:

Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to see all of the music on your USB device. Your Voice Command must match exactly how the artist, album, song, and genre information is displayed. prompts number) number) Redial (call previous outgoing phone Call back (call previous incoming phone TIP:

When providing a Voice Command, push the Phone button pronounce the name exactly as it appears in your phone book. When a contact has multiple phone numbers, you can say Call John Smith work. and say Call, then 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 489 Voice Text Reply Uconnect announces incoming text messages. Push the Phone button

(Must have compatible mobile phone paired to Uconnect system.) and say Listen. 1. Once an incoming text message is read to

. After the you, push the Phone button beep, say: Reply. 2. Listen to the Uconnect prompts. After the beep, repeat one of the pre-defined messages and follow the system prompts. PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY Yes. See you later. RESPONSES Stuck in traffic. No. Start without Ill be late. Okay. Where are I will be Call me. Are you there

<number>

minutes late. me. you?

yet?

PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES Ill call you I need See you in later. directions.

<number> of Im on my way. Im lost. Cant talk right now. minutes. Thanks. TIP:

Your mobile phone must have the full imple-

mentation of the Message Access Profile (MAP) to take advantage of this feature. For details about MAP, visit UconnectPhone.com. Apple iPhone iOS 6 or later supports reading incoming text messages only. TIP:

Voice Text Reply is not compatible with iPhone, but if your vehicle is equipped with Siri Eyes Free, you can use your voice to send a text message. MULTIMEDIA 489 Climate Adjust vehicle temperatures hands-free and keep everyone comfortable while you keep moving ahead. (If vehicle is equipped with climate control.) Push the VR button of the following commands:

Set driver temperature to 70 degrees

. After the beep, say one Set passenger temperature to 70 degrees TIP:

Voice Command for Climate may only be used to adjust the interior temperature of your vehicle. Voice Command will not work to adjust the heated seats or steering wheel if equipped. 9 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 490 490 MULTIMEDIA Navigation (4C NAV) The Uconnect navigation feature helps you save time and become more productive when you know exactly how to get to where you want to go. 1. To enter a destination, push the VR button

. After the beep, say: Find address 800 Chrysler Drive Auburn Hills, Michigan. 2. Then follow the system prompts. TIP:

To start a POI search, push the VR button After the beep, say: Find nearest coffee shop. Siri Eyes Free If Equipped Siri lets you use your voice to send text messages, select media, place phone calls and much more. Siri uses your natural language to understand what you mean and responds back to confirm your requests. The system is designed to keep your eyes on the road and your hands on the wheel by letting Siri help you perform useful tasks. To enable Siri, push and hold, then release the Uconnect Voice Recognition (VR) button on the steering wheel. After you hear a double beep you can ask Siri to play podcasts and music, get directions, read text messages and many other useful requests. Using Do Not Disturb With Do Not Disturb, you can disable notifica-

tions from incoming calls and texts, allowing you to keep your eyes on the road and hands on the wheel. For your convenience, there is a counter display to keep track of your missed calls and text messages while you were using Do Not Disturb. Do Not Disturb can automatically reply with a text message, a call or both, when declining an incoming call and send it to voicemail. Automatic reply messages can be:

I am driving right now, I will get back to you shortly. Create a custom auto reply message up to 160 characters. While in Do Not Disturb, Conference Call can be selected so you can still place a second call without being interrupted by incoming calls. NOTE:

Only the beginning of your custom message will be seen on the touchscreen. Reply with text message is not compatible with iPhones. Auto reply with text message is only available on phones that supporting Bluetooth MAP. Android Auto If Equipped NOTE:

Feature availability depends on your carrier and mobile phone manufacturer. Some Android Auto features may or may not be available in every region and/or language. Android Auto allows you to use your voice to interact with Androids best-in-class speech technology through your vehicles voice recognition system, and use your smartphones data plan to project your Android powered smartphone and a number of its apps onto your Uconnect touchscreen. Connect your Android 5.0 (Lollipop), or higher, to one of the 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 491 Apple CarPlay If Equipped Maps media USB ports, using the factory-provided USB cable, and press the new Android Auto icon that replaces your Phone icon on the main menu bar to begin Android Auto. Push and hold the VR button on the steering wheel, or press and hold the Microphone icon within Android Auto, to activate Androids VR, which recognizes natural voice commands, to use a list of your smartphones features:

Maps Music Phone Text Messages Additional Apps Refer to your Uconnect Owners Manual Supple-

ment for further information. NOTE:

Requires compatible smartphone running Android 5.0 (Lollipop) or higher and download app on Google Play. Android, Android Auto, and Google Play are trademarks of Google Inc. NOTE:

Feature availability depends on your carrier and mobile phone manufacturer. Some Apple CarPlay features may or may not be available in every region and/or language. Apple CarPlay allows you to use your voice to interact with Siri through your vehicles voice recognition system, and use your smartphones data plan to project your iPhone and a number of its apps onto your Uconnect touch-

screen. Connect your iPhone 5, or higher, to one of the media USB ports, using the factory-provided Lightning cable, and press the new Apple CarPlay icon that replaces your Phone icon on the main menu bar to begin Apple CarPlay. Press and hold the VR button on the steering wheel, or press and hold the Home button within Apple CarPlay, to acti-

vate Siri, which recognizes natural voice commands to use a list of your iPhones features:

Phone Music Messages MULTIMEDIA 491 Additional Apps Refer to your Uconnect Owners Manual Supple-

ment for further information. NOTE:

Requires compatible iPhone. See dealer for phone compatibility. Data plan rates apply. Vehicle user interface is a product of Apple. Apple CarPlay is a trademark of Apple Inc. iPhone is a trademark of Apple Inc., regis-

tered in the US and other countries. Apple terms of use and privacy statements apply. 9 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 492 492 MULTIMEDIA General Information The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interfer-

ence, and 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Le prsent appareil est conforme aux CNR d`Innovation, Science and Economic Develop-

ment applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorise aux deux conditions suivantes:

1. 2. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouil-

lage, et l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radiolectrique subi, mme si le brouillage est susceptible d'en comprom-

ettre le fonctionnement. La operacin de este equipo est sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones:

1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia perjudicial y Additional Information 2019 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar Owner Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC. Android is a trademark of Google Inc. SiriusXM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM Radio Inc. Uconnect System Support:

US residents visit www.DriveUconnect.com or call: 1-877-855-8400(24 hours a day 7 days a week) Canadian residents visit www.DriveUcon-

nect.ca or call: 1-800-465-2001(English) or 1-800-387-9983(French) SiriusXM Guardian services support:

US residents visit www.siriusxm.com/

2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cual-

guardian or call: 1-844-796-4827 quier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operacin no deseada. Canadian residents visit www.siriusxm.ca/

guardian or call: 1-877-324-9091 NOTE:

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compli-

ance could void the users authority to operate the equipment. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 493 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE Prepare For The Appointment If you are having warranty work done, be sure to have the right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty. Discuss addi-

tional charges with the service manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle's service history. This can often provide a clue to the current problem. Prepare A List Make a written list of your vehicle's problems or the specific work you want done. If you've had an accident or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the service advisor know. CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 493 Be Reasonable With Requests If you list a number of items and you must have your vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with the service advisor and list the items in order of priority. At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it is advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an appointment. IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE The manufacturer and its authorized dealers are vitally interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy with our products and services. Warranty service must be done by an autho-

rized dealer. We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality service. The manufacturer's authorized dealers have the facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely manner. This is why you should always talk to an autho-

rized dealer service manager first. Most matters can be resolved with this process. If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the general manager or owner of the authorized dealer. They want to know if you need assistance. If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the concern, you may contact the manufac-

turer's customer center. Any communication to the manufacturer's customer center should include the following information:

Owner's name and address Owner's telephone number (home, mobile, and office) Authorized dealer name Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) Vehicle delivery date and mileage 10 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 494 494 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE FCA US LLC Customer Center P.O. Box 218004 Auburn Hills, MI 483218004 Phone: (800) 247-9753 FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center P.O. Box 1621 Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6 Phone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French In Mexico Contact Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240 Sante Fe C.P. 05109 Mexico, D. F. In Mexico City: 800-505-1300 Outside Mexico City: +(52)55 50817568 Puerto Rico And US Virgin Islands FCA Caribbean LLC P.O. Box 191857 San Juan 00919-1857 Phone: (800) 247-9753 Fax: (787) 782-3345 Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) To assist customers who have hearing difficul-

ties, the manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter (TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the manufacturer by dialing 1-800-380-CHRY. Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require assistance can use the special needs relay service offered by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with a Bell Relay Service operator. Service Contract You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs after the manufacturer's New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only the manufacturer's service contracts. If you purchased a manufacturer's service contract, you will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you have any questions about the service contract, call the manufacturer's Service Contract National Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922

(Canadian residents, call (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French). The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract that is not the manufacturer's service contract. It is not responsible for any service contract other than the manufacturer's service contract. If you purchased a service contract that is not a manufacturer's service contract, and you require service after the manufacturer's New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the contract documents, and contact the person listed in those documents. We appreciate that you have made a major investment when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with the ownership experience. You will be pleased with their sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related concerns. 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 495 WARNING!

Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines only), some of its constituents, and certain vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other reproductive harm. WARRANTY INFORMATION See the Warranty Information for the terms and provisions of FCA US LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market. MOPAR PARTS Mopar fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are available from an authorized dealer. They are recommended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle operating at its best. REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C. If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addi-

tion to notifying FCA US LLC. If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, an authorized dealer or FCA US LLC. CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 495 To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY:

1-800-424-9153); or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:

Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov. In Canada If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you should contact the Customer Service Department immediately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety defect to the Canadian government should contact Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/. 10 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 496 496 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS To order the following manuals, you may use either the website or the phone numbers listed below. Service Manuals These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the information that students and professional technicians need in diagnosing/trouble-

shooting, problem solving, maintaining, servicing, and repairing FCA US LLC vehicles. A complete working knowledge of the vehicle, system, and/or components is written in straightforward language with illustrations, diagrams, and charts. Diagnostic Procedure Manuals Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix prob-

lems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and features. They show exactly how to find and correct problems the first time, using step-by-step troubleshooting and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools and equipment. Owner's Manuals These Owner's Manuals have been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with specific FCA US LLC vehicles. Included are starting, operating, emergency and maintenance procedures as well as specifications, capabilities and safety tips. Call toll free at:

1-800-890-4038 (US) 1-800-387-1143 (Canada) Or Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:

www.techauthority.com (US) 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 497 A About Your Brakes .................................383 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)

(Cruise Control) .....................................236 Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) ............357 Additives, Fuel ......................................385 Adjust Down ................................................45 Forward .............................................45 Rearward ...........................................45 Up ....................................................45 Air Bag ................................................184 Air Bag Operation ...............................185 Air Bag Warning Light ..................183, 186 Driver Knee Air Bag ............................190 Enhanced Accident Response .......194, 339 Event Data Recorder (EDR)...................339 Front Air Bag .....................................186 If Deployment Occurs ..........................193 Knee Impact Bolsters..........................190 Maintaining Your Air Bag System............195 Maintenance.....................................195 Redundant Air Bag Warning Light...........183 Side Air Bags.....................................190 Transporting Pets ...............................213 Air Bag Light .........................141, 183, 214 INDEX Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter).................................................. 348 Air Conditioner Maintenance .................... 349 Air Conditioner Refrigerant............... 349, 350 Air Conditioner System............................ 349 Air Conditioning Filter ....................... 93, 350 Air Conditioning, Operating Tips ..................92 Air Filter ..............................................348 Air Pressure Tires ............................................... 369 Alarm Arm The System .................................. 22 Disarm The System .............................. 22 Security Alarm................................... 143 Alterations/Modifications Vehicle ..............................................10 Android Auto ........................................ 490 Antifreeze (Engine Coolant).............. 357, 387 Disposal .......................................... 358 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)................... 152 Anti-Lock Warning Light........................... 144 Apple CarPlay .......................................491 Ashtray ............................................... 121 Assist, Hill Start.....................................157 Audio Jack ........................................... 461 Audio Settings ...................................... 439 497 Audio Systems (Radio)............................ 391 Automatic Dimming Mirror......................... 57 Automatic Headlights ............................... 62 Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) .......... 92 Automatic Transaxle .............................. 225 Automatic Transmission ......................... 226 Adding Fluid ............................. 361, 390 Fluid And Filter Change ....................... 361 Fluid Change .................................... 361 Fluid Level Check ...................... 360, 361 Fluid Type ................................ 360, 390 Special Additives ............................... 360 AUX Cord............................................. 461 Aux Mode ............................................ 442 Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet)...... 119 Axle Lubrication .................................... 390 B Back-Up Camera ................................... 278 Battery ....................................... 143, 346 Charging System Light ........................ 143 Jump Starting ................................... 331 Keyless Key Fob Replacement ................ 14 Battery Saver Feature .............................. 63 Belts, Seat........................................... 214 Blind Spot Monitoring............................. 159 11 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 498 498 Bluetooth Connect Or Disconnect Link Between the Uconnect Phone And Mobile Phone ................................459 Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone Or Audio Device After Pairing .............454 Bluetooth Mode.....................................443 Body Mechanism Lubrication....................351 B-Pillar Location ....................................366 Brake Assist System ...............................153 Brake Control System, Electronic...............153 Brake Fluid...........................................390 Brake System ...............................359, 383 Anti-Lock (ABS) ..................................383 Fluid Check...............................359, 390 Master Cylinder .................................359 Parking ............................................222 Warning Light ....................................141 Brake/Transmission Interlock ...................226 Brightness, Interior Lights ..........................64 Bulb Replacement .........................300, 304 Bulbs, Light .......................... 215, 300, 304 C Camera ...............................................278 Camera, Rear ...............................278, 279 Capacities, Fluid ....................................387 Caps, Filler Fuel........................................ 282, 333 Oil (Engine).......................................344 Radiator (Coolant Pressure)..................358 Car Washes.......................................... 380 Carbon Monoxide Warning............... 213, 386 Cargo Vehicle Loading ................................. 103 Cargo Area Cover................................... 103 Cargo Compartment Luggage Carrier ................................. 122 Cargo Load Floor ................................... 103 Cargo Tie-Downs ................................... 103 Cellular Phone ...................................... 485 Center High Mounted Stop Light ............... 305 Certification Label ................................. 283 Chains, Tire.......................................... 377 Change Oil Indicator............................... 130 Changing A Flat Tire ....................... 314, 361 Chart, Tire Sizing ................................... 362 Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light)...................................... 151 Checking Your Vehicle For Safety .............. 213 Checks, Safety ...................................... 213 Child Restraint ...................................... 196 Child Restraints Booster Seats ................................... 199 Center Seat LATCH............................. 205 Child Seat Installation................. 207, 209 How To Stow An unused ALR Seat Belt ... 206 Infant And Child Restraints .................. 198 Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children ..... 201 Older Children And Child Restraints ....... 199 Seating Positions............................... 200 Using The Top Tether Anchorage ........... 211 Cigar Lighter ........................................ 121 Clean Air Gasoline ................................. 384 Cleaning Wheels............................................ 376 Climate Control....................................... 68 Automatic .......................................... 80 Manual ............................................. 68 Rear ........................................... 77, 89 Coat Hook ........................................... 118 Cold Weather Operation.......................... 220 Compact Spare Tire ............................... 374 Computer, Trip/Travel ............................ 140 Contract, Service................................... 494 Cooling Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) ......... 358 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 499 Cooling System .....................................356 Adding Coolant (Antifreeze)...................357 Coolant Level ....................................358 Cooling Capacity ................................387 Disposal Of Used Coolant.....................358 Drain, Flush, And Refill ........................357 Inspection ................................356, 358 Points To Remember...........................359 Pressure Cap ....................................358 Radiator Cap.....................................358 Selection Of Coolant

(Antifreeze) ................... 357, 387, 388 Corrosion Protection ...............................380 Cruise Control (Speed Control) ..................236 Cruise Light .......................... 147, 148, 149 Customer Assistance ..............................493 Cybersecurity ........................................391 D Daytime Brightness, Interior Lights...............64 Daytime Running Lights ............................60 Dealer Service ......................................346 Defroster, Windshield .............................214 Delay (Intermittent) Wipers ........................65 Diagnostic System, Onboard.....................150 Dimmer Switch Headlight ...........................................60 Dipsticks Oil (Engine) .......................................345 Disable Vehicle Towing............................336 Disposal Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ..................358 Disturb........................................ 458, 490 Door Ajar ..................................... 142, 143 Door Ajar Light .............................. 142, 143 Drivers Seat Back Tilt .............................. 31 Driving Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow Standing Water ............... 294 DVD Player (Video Entertainment System)............................................... 462 E Electric Brake Control System................... 153 Anti-Lock Brake System .......................152 Traction Control System.......................158 Electric Parking Brake ............................ 222 Electric Remote Mirrors ............................ 58 Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) ....234 Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ............... 154 Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light..... 142 Emergency, In Case Of Hazard Warning Flasher ...................... 296 Jacking............................ 314, 316, 361 Jump Starting ................................... 331 Overheating...................................... 333 Towing ............................................336 Emission Control System Maintenance ....... 151 499 Engine................................................ 344 Air Cleaner ....................................... 348 Block Heater .................................... 221 Break-In Recommendations ................. 222 Checking Oil Level ............................. 345 Compartment ................................... 344 Compartment Identification ................. 344 Coolant (Antifreeze)............................ 388 Cooling............................................ 356 Exhaust Gas Caution .................. 213, 386 Fails To Start .................................... 220 Flooded, Starting ............................... 220 Fuel Requirements ............................ 384 Oil.................................. 347, 387, 388 Oil Filler Cap..................................... 344 Oil Filter .......................................... 348 Oil Selection ............................. 347, 387 Oil Synthetic ..................................... 347 Overheating ..................................... 333 Starting ........................................... 216 Engine Oil Viscosity................................ 347 Engine Oil Viscosity Chart ........................ 347 Enhanced Accident Response Feature....................................... 194, 339 Ethanol............................................... 385 Exhaust Gas Cautions .................... 213, 386 Exhaust System ............................ 213, 355 Exterior Lighting.............................. 60, 304 Exterior Lights .................60, 215, 300, 304 11 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 500 500 F Filters Air Cleaner........................................348 Air Conditioning ...........................93, 350 Engine Oil.................................348, 388 Engine Oil Disposal.............................348 Flashers Hazard Warning .................................296 Turn Signals................ 60, 148, 215, 304 Flash-To-Pass ...................................60, 61 Flat Tire Changing .................. 314, 361, 374 Flat Tire Stowage ................... 324, 361, 374 Flooded Engine Starting ..........................220 Fluid Capacities.....................................387 Fluid Leaks ..........................................215 Fluid Level Checks Brake ..............................................359 Fluid, Brake..........................................390 Fluids And Lubricants .............................388 Fog Lights ................................ 60, 62, 305 Fog Lights, Service .................................305 Fold In Floor (Stow n Go) Seating ................39 Fold-Flat Seats ........................................31 Forward Collision Warning........................164 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle ...........................335 Front Position Light ................................304 Fuel ................................................... 384 Additives.......................................... 385 Clean Air .......................................... 384 Ethanol............................................385 Filler Cap (Gas Cap)............................ 282 Gasoline .......................................... 384 Materials Added ................................385 Methanol .........................................385 Octane Rating ........................... 384, 388 Requirements ................................... 384 Specifications ................................... 388 Tank Capacity ................................... 387 Fuses ................................................. 306 G Garage Door Opener (HomeLink)............... 109 Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) .........................282 Gasoline, (Fuel).....................................384 Gasoline, Clean Air................................. 384 Gasoline, Reformulated .......................... 384 Gear Ranges ........................................ 227 Glass Cleaning...................................... 382 Gross Axle Weight Rating.........................285 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating .................... 284 GVWR ................................................. 283 H Hazard Driving Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow Standing Water ............... 294 Hazard Warning Flashers ........................ 296 Head Restraints...................................... 52 Headlights ............................................. 60 Bulb Replacement ............................. 303 Cleaning.......................................... 380 High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch........ 60 Lights On Reminder........................ 60, 62 Passing ....................................... 60, 61 Replacing ........................................ 303 Switch............................................... 60 Time Delay......................................... 60 Washers............................................ 62 Heated Mirrors ................................. 57, 58 Heater, Engine Block.............................. 221 Hill Start Assist ..................................... 157 Hitches Trailer Towing ................................... 286 HomeLink (Garage Door Opener) .............. 109 Hood Prop ............................................. 98 Hood Release......................................... 98 Hook, Coat .......................................... 118 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 501 I Ignition..................................................16 Switch ...............................................16 In Vehicle Help Vehicle User Guide ...............................11 Inside Rearview Mirror ......................57, 296 Instrument Cluster .................................127 Descriptions......................................148 Display ............................................128 Menu Items ......................................133 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning ................382 Interior And Instrument Lights.....................63 Interior Appearance Care .........................381 Interior Lights .........................................63 Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers)...............65 Inverter Power..............................................120 iPod/USB/MP3 Control ...........................441 J Jack Location........................................314 Jack Operation ..............................314, 361 Jump Starting .......................................331 K Key Fob .................................................12 Arm The System...................................22 Disarm The Alarm.................................22 Programming Additional Key Fobs ......15, 21 Key Fob Battery Service

(Remote Keyless Entry) ............................. 14 Key Fob Programming

(Remote Keyless Entry) ............................. 15 Keys..................................................... 12 Replacement ...................................... 21 L Lane Change And Turn Signals ................... 60 Lane Change Assist............................ 60, 63 LaneSense........................................... 275 Lap/Shoulder Belts................................173 Latches............................................... 215 Hood................................................. 98 Lead Free Gasoline ................................384 Leaks, Fluid .........................................215 Life Of Tires.......................................... 372 Liftgate ................................................. 99 Power ............................................. 100 Light Bulbs................................... 215, 304 Lighter Cigar............................................... 121 Lights ................................................. 215 Air Bag ............................ 141, 183, 214 Battery Saver ...................................... 63 Brake Assist Warning.......................... 156 Brake Warning ..................................141 Bulb Replacement ..................... 300, 304 Center Mounted Stop.......................... 305 Cruise ............................. 147, 148, 149 501 Daytime Running................................. 60 Dimmer Switch, Headlight ..................... 60 Engine Temperature Warning ............... 142 Exterior ................................... 215, 304 Fog .......................................... 62, 305 Headlights ........................... 60, 62, 303 High Beam/Low Beam Select ................. 60 Instrument Cluster ............................... 60 Intensity Control .................................. 64 Interior.............................................. 63 Lights On Reminder........................ 60, 62 Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) ..... 145 Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness).......... 64 Park ............................................... 148 Passing ....................................... 60, 61 Reading ............................................ 63 Seat Belt Reminder............................ 143 Security Alarm .................................. 143 Service............................................ 300 Side Marker ..................................... 304 SmartBeams ...................................... 61 Traction Control................................. 156 Turn Signals ................60, 148, 215, 304 Warning Instrument Cluster Descriptions ......................... 142, 148 Load Floor, Cargo .................................. 103 Load Shed Battery Saver Mode ................ 138 Load Shed Battery Saver On .................... 138 Load Shed Electrical Load Reduction ......... 138 Load Shed Intelligent Battery Sensor ......... 138 11 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 502 502 Loading Vehicle .............................103, 283 Tires ...............................................366 Low Tire Pressure System ........................167 Lubrication, Body...................................351 Lug Nuts..............................................383 Luggage Carrier.....................................122 M Maintenance Free Battery........................346 Maintenance Schedule ...........................340 Malfunction Indicator Light

(Check Engine) ..............................145, 151 Manual Park Release.....................................334 Service ............................................496 Map/Reading Lights .................................63 Marker Lights, Side ................................304 Media Hub ...........................................461 Memory Feature (Memory Seats).................31 Memory Seat ....................................31, 58 Memory Seats And Radio...........................31 Methanol .............................................385 Mini-Trip Computer.................................140 Mirrors ..................................................57 Automatic Dimming ..............................57 Electric Remote ...................................58 Exterior Folding....................................58 Heated ........................................57, 58 Outside..............................................57 Rearview.................................... 57, 296 Vanity................................................60 Modifications/Alterations Vehicle ..............................................10 Monitor, Tire Pressure System ..................167 Mopar Parts .........................................495 MP3 Control .........................................461 Multi-Function Control Lever ...................... 60 N New Vehicle Break-In Period .................... 222 O Occupant Restraints............................... 171 Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel).......... 384, 388 Oil Change Indicator............................... 130 Reset ..............................................130 Oil Filter, Change ................................... 348 Oil Filter, Selection................................. 348 Oil Pressure Light ..................................144 Oil, Engine ................................... 347, 388 Capacity .......................................... 387 Change Interval ................................. 347 Checking.......................................... 345 Disposal .......................................... 348 Filter ....................................... 348, 388 Filter Disposal ................................... 348 Identification Logo ............................. 347 Materials Added To ............................ 347 Pressure Warning Light ....................... 144 Recommendation ...................... 347, 387 Synthetic ......................................... 347 Viscosity .................................. 347, 387 Onboard Diagnostic System..................... 150 Operating Precautions............................ 150 Operator Manual Owner's Manual ............................ 9, 496 Outside Rearview Mirrors .......................... 57 Overheating, Engine............................... 333 Owners Manual (Operator Manual) ............... 9 P Paint Care ........................................... 380 Parking Brake ...................................... 222 ParkSense System, Rear................. 250, 256 Pets ................................................... 213 Placard, Tire And Loading Information........ 366 Power Brakes ............................................ 383 Inverter ........................................... 120 Mirrors .............................................. 58 Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet)........... 119 Seats.......................................... 45, 46 Steering .......................................... 231 Power Seats Down................................................ 45 Forward............................................. 45 Rearward........................................... 45 Up.................................................... 45 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 503 Power Sliding Door On / Off Switch ............................28, 100 Pregnant Women And Seat Belts ...............179 Preparation For Jacking...........................315 Pretensioners Seat Belts ........................................180 R Radial Ply Tires......................................371 Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap)..........358 Radio Presets ............................................435 Radio Operation ............................434, 485 Rear Air Conditioning ..........................77, 89 Rear Camera ........................................279 Rear Cross Path ....................................162 Rear ParkSense System ..................250, 256 Rear Seat Removal ..................................33 Rear View ..............................................57 Reclining Front Seats................................32 Recreational Towing ...............................293 Reformulated Gasoline ...........................384 Refrigerant...........................................350 Release, Hood ........................................98 Reminder, Lights On .................................60 Reminder, Seat Belt ...............................172 Remote Control Starting System ...................................18 Remote Keyless Entry Arm The Alarm .................................... 22 Disarm The Alarm ................................22 Programming Additional Key Fobs...... 15, 21 Remote Starting Exit Remote Start Mode.........................19 Uconnect Customer Programmable Features ........................................ 20 Uconnect Settings................................20 Remote Starting System............................ 18 Replacement Bulbs................................300 Replacement Keys................................... 21 Replacement Tires................................. 372 Reporting Safety Defects.........................495 Restraints, Child.................................... 196 Restraints, Head ..................................... 52 Roof Luggage Rack ................................122 Rotation, Tires ...................................... 377 S Safety Checks Inside Vehicle.................... 214 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle..................215 Safety Defects, Reporting ........................ 495 Safety Information, Tire........................... 361 Safety Tips........................................... 213 Safety, Exhaust Gas ............................... 213 Schedule, Maintenance .......................... 340 Seat Belt Reminder................................143 503 Seat Belts ................................... 172, 214 Adjustable Shoulder Belt ..................... 176 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage .... 176 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage.................................... 176 Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)......... 180 Child Restraints................................. 196 Energy Management Feature ............... 180 Extender.......................................... 179 Front Seat........................ 172, 173, 175 Inspection........................................ 214 Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation................ 175 Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting ............... 176 Lap/Shoulder Belts ............................ 173 Operating Instructions ........................ 175 Pregnant Women............................... 179 Pretensioners ................................... 180 Rear Seat ........................................ 173 Reminder ........................................ 172 Seat Belt Extender ............................. 179 Seat Belt Pretensioner ........................ 180 Untwisting Procedure ......................... 176 Seat Belts Maintenance.......................... 381 Seats ....................................... 31, 45, 50 Adjustment .......................31, 32, 33, 45 Bench ............................................... 33 Heated.............................................. 50 Power ......................................... 45, 46 11 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 504 504 Rear Folding .......................................31 Reclining............................................32 Seatback Release ..........................31, 33 Stow n Go (Fold in Floor) .......................39 Tilting ..........................................31, 33 Security Alarm.......................................143 Arm The System...................................22 Disarm The System...............................22 Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) ...............388 Sentry Key Key Programming.................................21 Sentry Key (Immobilizer)............................20 Sentry Key Replacement ...........................21 Service Assistance .................................493 Service Contract ....................................494 Service Manuals....................................496 Shifting Automatic Transmission.......................226 Shoulder Belts ......................................173 Side View Mirror Adjustment.......................57 Signals, Turn .................. 60, 148, 215, 304 Siri .....................................................490 Sirius Satellite Radio ..............................436 Favorites..........................................437 Replay .............................................437 SiriusXM Satellite Radio Browse in SXM ..................................438 Favorites..........................................437 Replay .............................................437 SmartBeams ..........................................61 Snow Chains (Tire Chains) .......................377 Snow Tires ........................................... 374 Spare Tire Changing............................... 314 Spare Tire Stowage................................324 Spare Tires .......................... 314, 374, 375 Spark Plugs.......................................... 388 Specifications Oil .................................................. 388 Speed Control Accel/Decel (ACC Only)........................ 240 Cancel............................................. 236 Resume........................................... 236 Speed Control (Cruise Control).......... 234, 236 Starting......................................... 18, 216 Button............................................... 16 Cold Weather .................................... 220 Engine Fails To Start........................... 220 Remote ............................................. 18 Starting And Operating............................ 216 Starting Procedures ............................... 216 Steering ..............................................231 Tilt Column......................................... 56 Wheel, Heated .................................... 56 Wheel, Tilt .......................................... 56 Steering Wheel Audio Controls..................461 Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls .................................... 461 Storage, Vehicle ...................................... 92 Store Radio Presets ............................... 435 Stow n Go (Fold In Floor) Seats ..................39 Stow n Vac.......................................... 103 Stuck, Freeing ...................................... 335 Sun Roof............................................... 96 Sunglasses Storage ............................... 121 Supplemental Restraint System Air Bag ... 184 Sway Control, Trailer .............................. 158 Synthetic Engine Oil ............................... 347 System, Remote Starting .......................... 18 T Telescoping Steering Column ..................... 56 Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC).......... 92 Tie Down Hooks, Cargo........................... 103 Tilt Steering Column ................................ 56 Time Delay Headlight........................................... 60 Tire And Loading Information Placard......... 366 Tire Markings ....................................... 361 Tire Safety Information ........................... 361 Tire Service Kit ..................................... 324 Tire Stowage ........................................ 324 Tires ...........................215, 369, 374, 378 Aging (Life Of Tires) ............................ 372 Air Pressure ..................................... 369 Chains ............................................ 377 Changing ................................. 314, 361 Compact Spare ................................. 374 General Information ................... 369, 374 High Speed ...................................... 370 Inflation Pressure .............................. 369 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 505 Jacking ............................ 314, 316, 361 Life Of Tires ......................................372 Load Capacity ...................................366 Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)............... 133, 146, 167 Quality Grading ..................................378 Radial..............................................371 Replacement ....................................372 Rotation...........................................377 Safety......................................361, 369 Sizes ...............................................362 Snow Tires........................................374 Spare Tires ....................... 314, 374, 375 Spinning ..........................................371 Trailer Towing....................................290 Tread Wear Indicators .........................372 Wheel Nut Torque ..............................383 To Open Hood .........................................98 Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight...................289 Towing ................................................284 Disabled Vehicle ................................336 Guide ..............................................286 Recreational .....................................293 Weight.............................................286 Towing Behind A Motorhome.................... 293 Traction ..............................................294 Traction Control .................................... 158 Trailer Sway Control (TSC)........................ 158 Trailer Towing .......................................284 Cooling System Tips ........................... 292 Hitches............................................286 Minimum Requirements ...................... 289 Tips ................................................292 Trailer And Tongue Weight ................... 289 Wiring ............................................. 291 Trailer Towing Guide............................... 286 Trailer Weight .......................................286 Transaxle Automatic ........................................ 225 Operation.........................................225 Transmission........................................ 226 Automatic ................................ 226, 360 Maintenance .................................... 360 Transporting Pets ..................................213 Tread Wear Indicators ............................ 372 Turn Signals ........................... 60, 148, 304 505 U Uconnect Advanced Phone Connectivity............... 459 Phone Call Features ........................... 456 Theater ........................................... 462 Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect Phone ............................ 459 Uconnect Settings................................ 20 Uconnect 4 With 7-Inch Display ................ 392 Uconnect 4C/4C Nav With 8.4-Inch Display ..... 410 Uconnect Phone ............452, 453, 454, 455 Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call Call Currently In Progress ................. 457 Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call No Call Currently In Progress............. 457 Bluetooth Communication Link ............. 460 Call By Saying A Phonebook Name......... 457 Call Continuation ............................... 459 Call Controls..................................... 457 Call Termination ................................ 458 Cancel Command .............................. 452 Connect Or Disconnect Link Between The Uconnect Phone And Mobile Phone................................ 459 11 20_RU_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 506 506 Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone Or Audio Device After Pairing ..................................454 Deleting A Phone Or Audio Device ..........455 Dial By Saying A Number......................456 Disconnecting A Phone Or Audio Device .........................................455 Far End Audio Performance ..................460 Help Command..................................452 Join Calls..........................................458 Making A Phone Or Audio Device A Favorite .....................................455 Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In Progress ...........................458 Managing Your Favorites......................456 Natural Speech..................................452 Operation .........................................451 Pair (Link) Uconnect Phone To A Mobile Phone ................................452 Pair A Bluetooth Streaming Audio Device .....454 Pair Additional Mobile Phones ...............453 Phonebook Download .........................455 Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold ............458 Power-Up .........................................460 Recent Calls......................................457 Redial..............................................458 To Remove A Favorite..........................456 Toggling Between Calls ........................458 Touch-Tone Number Entry ....................457 Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone.......................................... 459 Voice Command ................................459 Ways To Initiate A Phone Call ................456 Uconnect Settings Customer Programmable Features...........20 Uconnect Voice Command.......................486 Umbrella Holder .................................... 115 Uniform Tire Quality Grades ..................... 378 Universal Garage Door Opener (HomeLink)..109 Universal Transmitter ............................. 109 Unleaded Gasoline ................................384 Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt ................176 USB.................................................... 461 V Vacuum ..............................................103 Stow n Vac ...................................... 103 Vanity Mirrors ......................................... 60 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)............ 383 Vehicle Loading............................. 283, 366 Vehicle Modifications/Alterations ................ 10 Vehicle Storage.......................................92 Vehicle User Guide In Vehicle Help .................................... 11 Navigation.......................................... 11 Operating Instructions........................... 11 Searching User Guide ........................... 11 Viscosity, Engine Oil ............................... 347 Voice Recognition System (VR) ................. 486 W Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster Descriptions).............................. 144 Warnings And Cautions............................. 10 Warranty Information ............................. 495 Washers, Windshield ............................. 345 Washing Vehicle ................................... 380 Water Driving Through................................. 294 Wheel And Wheel Tire Care...................... 376 Wheel And Wheel Tire Trim...................... 376 Wind Buffeting........................................ 97 Window Fogging...................................... 93 Windshield Defroster ............................. 214 Windshield Washers ........................ 65, 345 Fluid............................................... 345 Windshield Wiper Blades ........................ 351 Wipers Blade Replacement ..................... 351 Wipers, Intermittent ................................. 65 Wrecker Towing .................................... 336 Whether its providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your vehicles heritage, knowing what steps to take following an accident or scheduling your next appointment, we know youll find the app an important extension of your Chrysler brand vehicle. Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go directly to the App Store or Google Play Store and enter the search keyword Chrysler (U.S. residents only). U. S. Canada DOWNLOAD A FREE ELECTRONIC COPY OF THE MOST UP-TO-DATE OWNERS MANUAL, UCONNECT AND WARRANTY BOOKLETS mopar.com/om owners.mopar.ca 2019 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Chrysler is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC or FCA Canada Inc., used under license. App Store is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google. 2 0 _ R U _ O M _ E N _ U S _ N S e c o n d E d i t i o n 2 0 2 0 P A C I F I C A A N D V O Y A G E R 2 0 2 0 O W N E R S M A N U A L Pacifica and Voyager

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Model: R1 EXT RW Product Label & Placement 13 March 2020 Revision 1 Harman International Industries, Inc. 30001 Cabot Drive Novi, MI 48377 U.S.A. 1 Table of Contents Revision History .............................................................................................................................................................. 3 Product Label ................................................................................................................................................................... 4 Product Label Placement ............................................................................................................................................ 5 2 Revision History Revision Date 0 1 24FEB2020 13MAR2020 Initial release. Added model name Description 3 Product Label 1 Product Label 2 4 Product Label Placement PRODUCT LABEL 1 PRODUCT LABEL 2 5

 

 

HARMAN 3000 I Cabot Drive Novi, Ml 48377 USA

\. + 1.248.785.2361 W + 1.248.994.2703 04-March-2020 HARMAN Subject: FCC Signature Authorization Dear Sirs/Madams, I, Jason Rennon of Harman International Novi, Ml 48337 USA, with Grantee signature of Mark Bowman to be an approved Industries, Incorporated, headquartered 30001 grantee Cabot Drive, with the FCC, authorize the Code 2AHPN, as the approved signature. Best Regards, Jason Rennon Sr. Manager, NA HW Validation

& Cert.

 

 

HARMAN 30001 Cabot Drive Novi, MI 48377 USA

+1.248.785.2361

+1.248.994.2703 To:

Federal Communications Commission 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia, MD 21046-1609 Bureau Veritas Consumer Products Services Inc. One Distribution Center Circle, #1 Littleton, MA 02702 12-March-2020 Confidentiality Request Re:

Gentlemen:

This letter is to comply with 47 CFR 0.457(d)(2) and 0.459 pertaining to confidential material. Harman International Industries, Incorporated, requests that the following documents regarding this submission for FCC IDs: 2AHPN-BE2845; 2AHPN-BE2846; 2AHPN-BE2847; 2AHPN-BE2848 and 2AHPN-BE2849 be kept confidential:

The material above contains technical data, which would customarily be guarded from competitors. 1. Block Diagram 2. Schematics 3. Circuit/Technical Description 4. Parts List/Bill of Materials 5. Operational Description Sincerely, Mark Bowman Regulatory Compliance Engineer 12-March-2020

 

 

HARMAN 30001 Cabot Drive Novi, MI 48377 USA

+1.248.785.2361

+1.248.994.2703 To:

Federal Communications Commission 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia, MD 21046-1609 Bureau Veritas Consumer Products Services Inc. One Distribution Center Circle, #1 Littleton, MA 02702 12-March-2020 Short Term Confidentiality Request Re:

Gentlemen:

Pursuant to Public Notice DA 04-1705, Harman International Industries, Incorporated, requests SHORT-

TERM CONFIDENTIALITY for the following information until 180 days after the grant date of equipment authorization in order to ensure sensitive business information remains confidential until marketing of the devices. FCC IDs: 2AHPN-BE2845; 2AHPN-BE2846; 2AHPN-BE2847; 2AHPN-

BE2848 and 2AHPN-BE2849 1. External Photos 2. Internal Photos 3. Test Setup Photos 4. Users Manual}

Sincerely, Mark Bowman Regulatory Compliance Engineer 12-March-2020

 

 

 

 

 

 

HARMAN 30001 Cabot Drive Novi, Ml

\. + 1.248.785.2361 48377 USA

+ 1.248.994.2703 HARMAN GCOMPANY Agent's Authorization Letter 4-March-2020 do hereby authorize, I, an officer of Harman, Services Inc., before the Federal authorizations One Distribution Center Circle, #1, Communications Commission under 4 7 CFR. This authorization until further notice, Littleton, with respect includes, Bureau Veritas Consumer to act on our behalf Products in dealings MA 01460, to all matters but is not limited relating to, the signing to equipment of Form 731. that no party (as defined in 47 CFR 1.2002) benefits, that include FCC benefits, to this application, pursuant including 5301 of the Anti-Drug is subject Abuse Act to section myself, to a I certify denial of 1988, 21 U.S.C., of federal 853A. Certified By:

94---Jason Rennon Sr. Manager, 4-March-2020 NA HW Validation &

Cert.